MiCOM P439

Distance Protection
and Control Unit
P439-304-407/408-615

Technical Manual
Volume 1/2
P439/EN M/Bd4
(AFSV.12.10190 D)
 ! Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the equipment.
Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment
and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used,
insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be employed.

The signals 'M a i n : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y ' and 'S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) ' (permanently assigned to the LEDs
labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE' and 'ALARM') can be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the
device. AREVA T&D strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the substation's
automation system, for alarm purposes.

Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification is made
without the express permission of AREVA T&D, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product
unsafe.

Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage,
installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.

For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.

The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide (SFTY/4LM/G11 or later version), with the
warnings in Chapters 5, 9, 10 and 11 and with the content of Chapter 13, before working on the equipment. If
the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.

Installation of the DHMI:

A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 must be connected to the DHMI protective
conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main relay case; these must be located within the same
substation.

To avoid the risk of electric shock the DHMI communication cable must not be in contact with hazardous live
parts.

The DHMI communication cable must not be routed or placed alongside high-voltage cables or connections.
Currents can be induced in the cable which may result in electromagnetic interference.

Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
† are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being connected;
† are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-
energize equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
† are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
† are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Note
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning and operation. However, the manual cannot
cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do
not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary
information.

Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of AREVA, including settlement of warranties,
result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.

3
 IEC 61850 Certificate Level A1
Page 1/2

No. 30710079-Consulting 07-0414

Issued to: For the product:

Areva T&D MiCOM P439
Lyoner Strasse 44-48 Distance Protection and Control Unit
D-60528 Frankfurt am Main Firmware version -613 -206
Germany

Issued by:

The product has not shown to be non-conforming to:

IEC 61850-6, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4 and 8-1

Communication networks and systems in substations

The conformance test has been performed according to IEC 61850-10 with product’s protocol, model and technical issue
implementation conformance statements: “P439 Distance Protection and Control Unit Version -613 –206 PICS, MICS and
Address Assignment List”, “PX30 Version -6xx –2xx Technical Issues (TISSUES)” and product’s extra information for
testing: “PX3X/EN PX Version 01C Protocol Implementation Extra Information for Testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850
Communication Interface with Control”.

The following IEC 61850 conformance blocks have been tested with a positive result (number of relevant and executed test
cases / total number of test cases as defined in the UCA International Users Group Device Test procedures v1.1):

1 Basic Exchange (16/23) 12a Direct Control (4/11)

2 Data Sets (2/5) 12c Enhanced Direct Control (5/11)
5 Unbuffered Reporting (10/13) 12d Enhanced SBO Control (10/17)
9ab Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (16/20) 13 Time Synchronization (3/4)
14 File Transfer (3/6)

This Certificate includes a summary of the test results as carried out at in with UniCAsim 61850 version 2.15.00 with test
suite 2.15.00 and UniCA 61850 analyzer 4.15. The test is based on the UCA International Users Group Device Test
Procedures version 1.1. This document has been issued for information purposes only, and the original paper copy of the
KEMA report: No. 30710079-Consulting 07-0413 will prevail.

The test have been carried out on one single specimen of the products as referred above and submitted to KEMA by
Areva. The manufacturer’s production process has not been assessed. This Certificate does not imply that KEMA has
certified or approved any product other than the specimen tested.

Arnhem, June 5, 2007

S.J.L.M. Janssen R. Schimmel

Managing Director KEMA Consulting Certification Manager

1 Level A - Independent Test lab with certified ISO 9000 or ISO 17025 Quality System

Copyright © KEMA Nederland B.V., Arnhem, the Netherlands. All rights reserved. Please note that any electronic version of this KEMA certificate is provided to
KEMA’s customer for convenience purposes only. It is prohibited to update or change it in any manner whatsoever, including but not limited to dividing it into parts.
In case of a conflict between the electronic version and the original version, the original paper version issued by KEMA will prevail.

KEMA Nederland B.V.

Utrechtseweg 310, 6812 AR Arnhem P.O.Box 9035, 6800 ET Arnhem The Netherlands
T +31 26 356 61 42 F +31 26 351 54 56 sales@kema.com www.kema.com
 Page 2/2

Applicable Test Procedures from the UCA International Users Group Device Test Procedures
version 1.1

Conformance Block Mandatory Conditional

1: Basic Exchange Ass1, Ass2, Ass3, SrvN1e, SrvN3
AssN2, AssN3, AssN4, AssN5
Srv1, Srv2, Srv3, Srv4, Srv5,
SrvN1abcd, SrvN4
2: Data Sets Dset1, DsetN1ae
5: Unbuffered Reporting Rp1, Rp2, Rp3, Rp4, Rp7 Rp5
RpN1, RpN2, RpN3, RpN4
9a: GOOSE publish Gop2, Gop3, Gop4, Gop7 Gop1, Gop6, GopN1
9b: GOOSE subscribe Gos1, Gos2, Gos3, GosN1, GosN2,
GosN3, GosN4, GosN5, GosN6
12a: Direct control CtlN3, CtlN8, DOns1, DOns3
12c: Enhanced Direct CtlN3, CtlN8, DOes2, DOes5 Ctl7
control
12d: Enhanced SBO Ctl3, CtlN1, CtlN2, CtlN3, CtlN4 Ctl7
control CtlN9, SBOes1, SBOes2, SBOes3
13: Time sync Tm1, Tm2, TmN1
14: File transfer Ft1, Ft2ab, FtN1ab
Routine Test Certificate P439

Stückprüfbescheinigung P439

AREVA Energietechnik GmbH has been awarded the DNV certificate by the internationally recognized, independent and
impartial association for the certification of quality assurance systems, DNV (DET NORSKE VERITAS CERTIFICATION
FRANCE), thereby certifying that AREVA has introduced and uses a state-of-the-art quality assurance system that
complies with all requirements stated in EN ISO 9001 that apply to its products and services.
AREVA Energietechnik GmbH ist ein DNV zertifiziertes Unternehmen.

Fertigung und Prüfung der Schutzeinrichtungen erfüllen die Anforderungen von EN ISO 9001.

Routine Test

Stückprüfung

All tests according to IEC 255-6 and EN 60255-6.

Alle Prüfungen nach IEC 255-6 und DIN EN 60255-6.

The following tests have been carried out as part of the routine test under reference conditions:

Die folgenden Überprüfungen waren Gegenstand der Stückprüfung bei Referenzbedingungen:

1 Conformity of the protection device with components list, location diagram and terminal connection diagram
Übereinstimmung der Schutzeinrichtung mit Bestückungs- und Anschlussplan

2 Insulation test
Isolationsprüfung

3 Power supply within the range 0.8 VA,nom ≤ VA,nom ≤ 1.1 VA,nom
Stromversorgung im Bereich 0,8 UH,nom ≤ UH,nom ≤ 1,1 UH,nom

4 Accuracy of the setting values

Prüfung der Genauigkeit der Einstellwerte

5 Operate and command times for all essential functions

Ansprech- und Kommandozeiten für alle wesentlichen Funktionen

6 Functional testing of all binary signal inputs and contacts

Funktionsprüfung aller binären Signaleingänge und Kontakte

7 100 % controlled thermal endurance test

100 % kontrollierter Wärmedauerlauf

6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7
8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615
Contents

1 Application and Scope 1-1

2 Technical Data 2-1

2.1 Conformity 2-1
2.2 General Data 2-1
2.3 Tests 2-3
2.3.1 Type Tests 2-3
2.3.2 Routine Tests 2-5
2.4 Environmental Conditions 2-5
2.5 Inputs and Outputs 2-5
2.6 Interfaces 2-7
2.7 Information Output 2-8
2.8 Settings 2-8
2.9 Deviations 2-9
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values 2-9
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages 2-10
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition 2-11
2.10 Recording Functions 2-12
2.11 Power supply 2-14
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications 2-15

3 Operation 3-1
3.1 Modular Structure 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Bay Panel (Function Group LOC) 3-4
and of the Operation Panels;
Selection of the Control Point
3.4 Serial Interfaces 3-11
3.4.1 PC interface (Function Group PC) 3-11
3.4.2 Communication interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) 3-13
3.4.3 Communication interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) 3-22
3.4.4 Communication interface 3 (Function Group COMM3) 3-25
3.4.5 Communication interface (Function groups IEC, 3-30
IEC 61850 GOOSE and GSSE)
3.4.5.1 Communication interface (Function Group IEC) 3-30
IEC 61850
3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented (Function Group GOOSE) 3-34
Substation Event
3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE) 3-37
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) 3-38
3.6 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group INP) 3-39
of the Binary Inputs
3.7 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) 3-41
3.7.1 Direct current input 3-42
3.7.2 Input to connect a resistance 3-45
thermometer
3.8 Configuration, Operating Mode, (Function Group OUTP) 3-46
and Blocking of the Output Relays
3.9 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) 3-49
3.9.1 BCD Measured Data Output 3-52
3.9.2 Analog Measured Data Output 3-57
3.9.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured 3-63
Data
3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group LED) 3-64
of the LED Indicators

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9

Contents
(continued)

3.11 Main Functions of the P439 (Function Group MAIN) 3-67

3.11.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for 3-67
Control
3.11.2 Bay Type Selection 3-71
3.11.3 Conditioning of the Measured 3-72
values
3.11.4 Operating Data Measurement 3-74
3.11.5 Configuring and Enabling the 3-89
Protection Functions
3.11.6 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic 3-91
Restraint)
3.11.7 Function Blocks 3-93
3.11.8 Multiple Blocking 3-94
3.11.9 Blocked / Faulty (OUT OF 3-95
SERVICE)
3.11.10 Coupling Between Control and 3-96
Protection for the CB Closed
Signal
3.11.11 Close Command 3-97
3.11.12 Multiple Signaling 3-99
3.11.13 Ground Fault Signaling 3-101
3.11.14 Starting Signals and Tripping 3-104
Logic
3.11.15 CB Trip Signal 3-111
3.11.16 Enable for Switch Commands 3-113
Issued by the Control Functions
3.11.17 Monitoring the Switchgear Motors 3-116
3.11.18 Communication Error 3-117
3.11.19 Time Tagging and Clock 3-118
Synchronization
3.11.20 Resetting Actions 3-120
3.11.21 Assigning Communications 3-123
Interfaces to Physical
Communications Channels
3.11.22 Test Mode 3-124
3.12 Parameter subset selection (Function Group PSS) 3-125
3.13 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) 3-127
3.14 Operating data recording (Function Group OP_RC) 3-130
3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) 3-131
3.16 Overload data acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) 3-132
3.17 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) 3-134
3.18 Ground fault data acquisition (Function Group GF_DA) 3-137
3.18.1 Measured Ground Fault Data as 3-138
determined by Steady-State
Power Evaluation
3.18.2 Measured Ground Fault Data as 3-140
determined by Steady-State
Current Evaluation
3.19 Ground fault recording (Function Group GF_RC) 3-142
3.20 Fault data acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) 3-145
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) 3-155
3.22 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST) 3-161
3.22.1 Fault detection 3-161
3.22.2 Selection of Measured values 3-179
3.22.3 Distance and Directional 3-181
Measurement
3.22.4 Impedance-time characteristics 3-198

10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

Contents
(continued)

3.23 Power swing blocking (Function group PSB) 3-218

3.24 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) 3-224
3.25 Backup overcurrent-time (Function Group BUOC) 3-234
protection (BUOC)
3.26 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF) 3-236
3.27 Protective Signaling (Function Group PSIG) 3-237
3.28 Auto-Reclosing Control (Function Group ARC) 3-260
3.28.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) 3-266
3.28.2 Time-Delayed Reclosure (TDR) 3-269
3.28.3 Rapid Reclosure (RRC) 3-271
3.28.4 Parallel Blocking 3-273
3.28.5 Zone Extension 3-274
3.28.6 General ARC Control Functions 3-276
3.28.7 ARC Counters 3-277
3.29 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC) 3-278
3.30 Definite-time overcurrent (Function Group DTOC) 3-297
protection
3.31 Inverse-Time Overcurrent (Function Group IDMT) 3-310
Protection
3.32 Ground Fault Direction (Function Group GFDSS) 3-325
Determination Using Steady-State
Values
3.32.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation 3-328
3.32.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation 3-333
3.32.3 Steady-state admittance 3-335
3.32.4 Counting the Ground Faults 3-341
Detected by Steady-State Power
and Admittance Evaluation
3.33 Ground Fault Tripping (Function Group GFTRP) 3-342
3.34 Ground fault protective signaling (Function Group GFSIG) 3-344
3.35 Transient Ground Fault Direction (Function Group TGFD) 3-346
Determination
3.36 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) 3-354
3.37 Time-Voltage Protection (Function Group V<>) 3-360
3.38 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) 3-371
3.39 Power Directional Protection (Function Group P<>) 3-378
3.40 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) 3-394
3.41 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM) 3-403
3.41.1 Functional Description 3-403
3.42 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) 3-413
3.43 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC) 3-420
3.44 Control and Monitoring of (Function Groups DEV01 3-427
Switchgear Units to DEV10)
3.44.1 Processing Position Signals from 3-428
Manually Operated Switchgear
Units
3.44.2 Functional Sequence for 3-430
Controllable Switchgear Units
3.45 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK) 3-445
3.46 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) 3-447
3.47 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) 3-448
3.48 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT) 3-450

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 11

Contents
(continued)

4 Design 4-1
4.1 Designs 4-2
4.2 Dimensional Drawings 4-4
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case 4-4
4.2.2 Flush-Mounted Case 4-5
4.2.3 Device views for Connection of Detachable HMI 4-7
4.3 Modules 4-8

5 Installation and Connection 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing 5-1
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type 5-2
5.3 Location Requirements 5-3
5.4 Installation 5-4
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding 5-11
5.6 Connection 5-12
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 5-12
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface. 5-22
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces 5-22
5.7 Assembly Diagrams and Terminal Connection Diagrams 5-26

6 Local Control Panel 6-1

6.1 Display and Keypad 6-2
6.2 Changing between Display Levels 6-8
6.3 Display Illumination 6-9
6.4 Control at Panel Level 6-9
6.4.1 Bay Panel 6-9
6.4.2 Signal Panel(s) 6-16
6.4.3 Measured Value Panels 6-19
6.4.4 Event Panel 6-20
6.5 Control at the Menu Tree Level 6-21
6.5.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree 6-21
6.5.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode 6-22
6.5.3 Change-Enabling Function 6-23
6.5.4 Changing Parameters 6-26
6.5.5 Setting a List Parameter 6-27
6.5.6 Memory Readout 6-29
6.5.7 Resetting 6-33
6.5.8 Password-Protected Control Actions 6-34
6.5.9 Changing the Password 6-35

7 Settings 7-1
7.1 Parameter 7-1
7.1.1 Device Identification 7-1
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters 7-5
7.1.3 Function Parameters 7-70
7.1.3.1 Global 7-70
7.1.3.2 General Functions 7-78
7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets 7-97
7.1.3.4 Control 7-125

12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

Contents
(continued)

8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

8.1 Healthy 8-1
8.1.1 Cyclic Values 8-1
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data 8-1
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals 8-8
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals 8-16
8.1.2 Control and Testing 8-48
8.1.3 Operating data recording 8-55
8.2 Events 8-56
8.2.1 Event counters 8-56
8.2.2 Measured event data 8-59
8.2.3 Event Recording 8-64

9 Commissioning 9-1
9.1 Safety Instructions 9-1
9.2 Commissioning Tests 9-3

10 Troubleshooting 10-1

11 Maintenance 11-1

12 Storage 12-1

13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1

14 Order Information 14-1

Appendix
A Glossary
B List of Signals
C List of Bay Types
D Overview of Changes

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 13

14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615
1 Application and Scope

1. Application and Scope

The P439 distance protection and control device is a one-box solution for protection and
control.

The protection functions available in the device consist of selective short-circuit

protection, ground fault protection, and overload protection in medium- and high-voltage
systems. The systems can be operated as resonant-grounded, grounded-neutral or
isolated-neutral systems. The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the
device enable the user to cover a wide range of applications in the protection of cable
and line sections. Moreover there are numerous backup protection and automatic
control functions available.

The control functions are designed for the control of up to six electrically-operated
switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the bay of a
medium-voltage substation (or a high-voltage station with basic topology). The number
of external auxiliary devices required is largely minimized by the integration of binary
signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage, and versatile relay output contacts, by
the direct connection option for current and voltage transformers, and by the
comprehensive interlocking capabilities. This simplifies handling of switchbay protection
and control technology from planning to commissioning.

During operation, the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device's parameters
and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing non-permissible switching
operations.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 1-1

1 Application and Scope
(continued)

The P439 distance protection and control device features the following general functions:

Protection functions P439

21 DIST Distance Protection

Overcurrent and Undervoltage Fault Detection Logic
Underimpedance Fault Detection Logic with Load Blinding
Polygonal (quadrilateral) or Circular Tripping Characteristics
Six Distance Stages, including one that can be used as a special stage
Eight Timer Stages, two of which function as backup timer stages
Directional Voltage Memory
68 PSB Power Swing Blocking and Power Swing Starting
30 / 74 MCMON Current, Voltage Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
NOT Backup Overcurrent Time Protection (BUOC), Phase and Ground Measuring
Systems
50 / 27 SOTF Switch on to Fault Protection
85-21 PSIG Protective Signaling
79 ARC Auto-reclosing control (three-pole)
High-Speed Reclosure (HSR), Time-Delayed Reclosure (TDR), Rapid
Reclosure (RRC)
25 ASC Automatic Synchronism Check ( )
GFDSS Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values
GFTRP Ground Fault Tripping
GFSIG Ground Fault Protection Signaling
TGFD Transient Ground Fault Direction Determination ( )
50/51 P,Q,N DTOC Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, 4 stages, phase, negative-sequence
and residual current measuring systems
51 P,Q,N IDMT Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, single stage, phase, negative-sequence
and residual current measuring systems
32 P<> Power Directional Protection
49 THERM Thermal Overload Protection
27/59 P,Q,N V<> Time-Voltage Protection, two stages each, phase, positive-sequence,
negative-sequence and neutral-displacement voltages
81 O/U f<> Frequency Protection
50BF / 62 CBF Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
CBM Circuit Breaker Monitoring
LIMIT Limit Value Monitoring
LOGIC Programmable Logic

= standard; ( ) = Ordering option

1-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

1 Application and Scope
(continued)

Control functions P439

DEV01 to
Control and Monitoring of up to Six Switchgear Units
DEV10
CMD_1 Single-Pole Commands
SIG_1 Single-Pole Signals
ILOCK Interlocking Logic
COUNT Binary Integrated Total

Communication Functions P439

COMM1, 2 Communication Interfaces
( )
COMM2
COMM3 InterMiCOM Protective Interface ( )
IRIGB IRIG-B Time Synchronization ( )
IEC, GOOSE,
RJ45 or Fiber-Optic (IEC 61850) Communication Interface ( )
GSSE

Measured Value Functions P439

MEASI 20 mA input, 2 x 20 mA outputs,
MEASO inputs for resistance thermometers
PT 100 analog input ( )
20 mA analog input, one settable input value ( )
Measured value output, two settable output values ( )

= standard; ( ) = Ordering option

For further functions see Appendix A1

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 1-3

1 Application and Scope
(continued)

Functional diagram

Control/Monitoring of
Self Recording
3, optional up to 6 or 10 Communication COMM1 COMM2 IRIGB Overload rec.
Monitoring and
resp. switchgear units Data
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem ... Acquisition Ground flt. rec.
via RS485 or Fibre Optics
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus,
DEV ILOCK LIMIT
DNP3, Courier Metering Fault rec.

V ref

21 50/27 VTS/CTS 51 P,N 50/51 P,Q,N 51/67 P,Q,N 67N 49 32 25 79

TGFD
DIST SOTF MCMON BUOC DTOC IDMT GFSC THERM P<> ASC ARC

I N,par

85-21 68 85-67N 27/59 P,Q,N 81 O/U GFTRP

GFDSS GFSIG LOGIC
PSIG PSB GSCSG V<> f<>

scheme signalling

InterMiCOM COUNT SIG_1 CMD_1 MEASI MEASO

conventional serial always available Distance Protection and

optional or specific Control P439

1-1 Functional diagram

1-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

1 Application and Scope
(continued)

General Functions
The functions listed in the table above are complete function groups, which may be
individually configured or cancelled (except for ILOCK), depending on the application
(e.g. included in or excluded from the protection device’s configuration).

A function is selected by a mouse click in the support software:

Unused or cancelled function groups are hidden to the user, thus simplifying the menu.
(An exception is the function MAIN, which is always visible.) Communication functions
and measured value functions may also be configured or excluded.

This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of
the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple
and clear parameter settings and adaptations to each protection scheme (and optional
control purposes) can be made.

In this way the protection and control functions (except for ILOCK) can be included in or
excluded from the configuration; they are arranged on the branch "General Functions" of
the menu tree.

Control functions
The control functions are designed for the control of up to six electrically-operated
switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the bay of a
medium-voltage substation (or a high-voltage station with basic topology). The P439
has over 290 predefined bay types stored for selection and it is also possible to load
user-defined bay templates. The number of external auxiliary devices required is largely
minimized by the integration of binary signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage,
and versatile relay output contacts, by the direct connection option for current and
voltage transformers, and by the comprehensive interlocking capabilities. This simplifies
handling of switch bay protection and control technology from planning to
commissioning.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 1-5

1 Application and Scope
(continued)

Global functions
In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P439 distance
protection and control device offers the following global functions:

Parameter subset selection

System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing and
operation
Operating data recording (time-tagged event logging)
Overload data acquisition
Overload recording (time-tagged event logging)
Ground fault data acquisition
Ground fault recording (time-tagged event logging)
Fault data acquisition
Time-tagged fault event logging as well as fault value recording of the three phase
currents, the residual current, the three phase-to-ground voltages and the neutral-
point displacement voltage

Design
The P439 distance protection and control device is modular in design. The plug-in
modules are housed in a robust aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one
analog module and one digital module.

The nominal current and voltage values of the measuring inputs on the P439 can be set.

The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. The auxiliary
voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range. The nominal
voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24 V DC version is also
available.

All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.

The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for PT 100
resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.

The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero

suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via 20
adjustable interpolation points.

Two selectable measured values (cyclically updated measured operating data and
stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via
the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable
interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side
open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower
nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available, a
selectable measured value can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.

1-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

1 Application and Scope
(continued)

Interfaces
Control and display:

Local control panel with LC-display (16 lines of 21 characters each with a resolution
of 128 x 128 pixels)
17 LED indicators, 12 with user-definable functional assignment
PC interface
Communication interfaces

Information interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).

Using the first of the two communication interfaces (COMM1), the numerical protection
device can be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system.
The first communication interface is optionally available with a switcheable protocol (per
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or Courier) or as an IEC 61850
interface.

The second communication interface (COMM2, communication protocol per

IEC 60870-5-103 only) is designed for remote control.

External clock synchronization can be accomplished by using the optional IRIG-B input.

A direct link to other MiCOM protection devices can be set up by applying the optional
InterMiCOM interface (COMM3).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 1-7

1-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615
2 Technical Data

2 Technical Data

2.1 Conformity

Notice
Applicable to P439, version 304 -407/408 -615.

Declaration of conformity
(As per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.)
The product designated ‘P439 Distance Protection and Control Unit’ has been designed
and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 60255-6 and
EN 60010-1 and with the ‘EMC Directive’ and the ‘Low Voltage Directive’ issued by the
Council of the European Community.

2.2 General Data

General device data

Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for
19" cabinets and for control panels.

Installation Position
Vertical ± 30°

Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case
(IP 10 for ring-terminal connection)

Weight
40TE case: max. 7 kg
84TE case: max. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections
See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5)

Terminals

PC interface (X6):
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.

Communication interfaces - COMM1, COMM2, COMM3:

Optical fibers (X7, X8 and X31, X32):
F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 60874-2 and
DIN 47258 for plastic fibers
or
optical fiber connection BFOC-(ST®) 2.5 connector
per IEC 60874-10-1 for plastic fibers
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or
Wire leads (X9, X10, X33): M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross sections
up to 1.5 mm2
or (only for InterMiCOM):
RS 232 (X34): EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-1

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Current Measuring Inputs:

Pin-terminal connection:
M5 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection for conductor
cross-sections ≤ 4 mm2
Ring-terminal connection:
M4 threaded terminal ends

Other Inputs and Outputs:

Pin-terminal connection:
M3 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection for conductor
cross-sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
Ring-terminal connection:
M4 threaded terminal ends

Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 664-1.
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.

2-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.3 Tests

2.3.1 Type Tests

Type tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6.
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.

Immunity to Burst Disturbances

Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III:
1 MHz burst disturbance
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s
Source impedance: 200 W

Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per EN 60255-22-2§ or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3:
Contact discharge,
single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s
Test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ, 150 pF / 330 Ω

Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, severity level 3:
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 %

Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Per IEC 60255-22-4, Class B:
Power supply: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Inputs and outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 1 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns
Burst duration: 15 ms
Burst period: 300 ms
Source impedance: 50 W

Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255-22-7, Class A:
Phase-to-phase:
RMS value 150 V,
Coupling resistance 100 Ω
Coupling capacitor 0,1 µF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground:
RMS value 300 V,
Coupling resistance 220 Ω
Coupling capacitor 0.47 µF, for 10 s.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-3

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test

Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4:
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 µs
Fault current: 8 / 20 µs
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV,
Impulse: > 5 / min,
Source impedance: 12 / 42 Ω

Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Per EN 61000-4-6§ or IEC 61000-4-6, severity level 3:
Test voltage: 10 V

Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Per EN 61000-4-8§ or IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4:
Frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m

Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 255-11, 12 %
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 255-5
2 kV AC, 60 s.
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.

Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 255-5.
Front time: 1.2 µs
Time to half-value: 50 µs
Peak value: 5 kV
Source impedance: 500 W

2-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Mechanical robustness
1(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g

Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
test severity class 1 , 5 g for 11 ms,
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport),
test severity class 1 , 15 g for 11 ms

Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.

Mechanical robustness
2(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g

Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
test severity class 2, 10 g for 11 ms;
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport),
test severity class 1, 15 g for 11 ms
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during transport),
test severity class 1, 10 g for 16 ms

Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 7.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.

(**)
Mechanical robustness 2:
Applicable to the following case variants:
□ Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
□ Surface-Mounted Case

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-5

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.3.2 Routine Tests

All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6

and DIN 57435 Part 303.

Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5.
2.2 kV AC, 1 s.
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.

Additional Thermal Test

100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.

2.4 Environmental Conditions

Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F)
Storage and transit: -25°C to +70°C [+23 °F to +131 °F]

Ambient Humidity Range

≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C (104°F), condensation not permissible.

Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.

2.5 Inputs and Outputs

Measuring inputs
Current
Rated current: 1 and 5 A (settable).
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.13 VA at Inom
Load rating:
continuous: 4 Inom
for 10 s: 30 Inom
for 1 s: 100 Inom
Nominal surge current: 250 Inom

Voltage
Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (settable)
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC

Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (settable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz

2-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Binary signal inputs

Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option
18 V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V ... 19 V
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal input voltage
(i.e. definitively 'low' for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively 'high' for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage)

"Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC

"Special variant 90 V": Nominal supply voltage 127 V DC
"Special variant 146 V": Nominal supply voltage 220 V DC
"Special variant 155 V": Nominal supply voltage 250 V DC

Power consumption per input

Standard variant:
VA = 19 ... 110 V DC: 0.5 W ± 30 %,
VA > 110 V DC: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.

Special variant:
Vin > Switching threshold: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.

Note
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.

The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC.

Binary Count Input

Maximum frequency of 20 Hz with a
pulse / pause ratio of 1:1
Direct current input
Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA
Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V
Input load: 100 Ω
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (settable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (settable)

Resistance thermometer
Resistance thermometer: only PT 100 permitted,
Mapping curve as per IEC 751.§
Value range: -40,0 ... +215.0 °C
3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor.
Open and short-circuited input permitted
Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215 °C and Θ < -40 °C

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-7

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Output relays
Binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO):
for switchgear control
Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 8A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cosϕ = 0.4

All other modules:

Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 5A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cosϕ = 0.4

BCD Measured Data

Output
Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399

Analog Measured Data

Output
Value range: 0 to 20 mA
Permissible load: 0 ... 500 Ω
Maximum output voltage: 15 V

IRIG-B interface
Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp
Input impedance: 33 kΩ at 1 kHz
Electrical isolation: 2 kV

2-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.6 Interfaces

Communication interfaces
COMM1, COMM2,
COMM3
The communication module can be provided with up to three communication channels,
depending on the module variant. Channel 1 and 3 may either be equipped to connect
wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect wire leads.

For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 870-5-103,

IEC 60870-5-101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set.
Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 baud (settable).

Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on
IEC 60870-5-103.
Transmission rate: 300 or 57600 baud (settable).

Communication interface 3 permits end-end channel-aided digital communication

schemes to be configured for real time protective signaling between two protection
devices (Point-to-point connection, asynchronous, full duplex; called InterMiCOM
protection signaling interface).
Transmission rate: 600 or 19200 baud (settable).

Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m

Plastic Fiber Connection

Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m

Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm
Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm
Optical input: max. -10 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 400 m

Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm
Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm
Optical input: max. -10 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 1,400 m

1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-9

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Local control panel

Input or output:
With 12 keys and an LC-display consisting of 16 lines and 21 columns (128 x 128 pixels)

State and fault signals:

17 LED indicators (12 permanently assigned, 5 freely configurable)

PC interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (settable)

IEC Communication
interface
Wire Leads
IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
Transmission rate: 10 or 100 Mbit/s
RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Maximum distance: 100 m

for optical fibers (100 Mbit/s)

IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
ST connector or SC connector
Optical wavelength: typically 1300 nm
Glass fiber G50/125:
Optical output: min. -23.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -31 dBm
Optical input: max. -14 dBm
Glass fiber G62.5/125:
Optical output: min. -20 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -31 dBm
Optical input: max. -14 dBm
IRIG-B interface
B122 format
Amplitude-modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD-coded variation data (daily)

2.7 Information Output

Counters, measured data, and indications: see Chapter 8.

2-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.8 Settings

Typical characteristic data

Main function
Minimum output pulse duration for a trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (settable)
Output pulse duration for a close command: 0.1 to 10 s (settable)

Distance protection
Minimum starting time: 12 ms
Starting reset time: 30 ms ± 10 ms
Directional sensitivity
up to 2 s after fault detection: ∞
up to 2 s after fault detection and for switching on to fault: 200 mV ± 20 mV
Shortest tripping time: approx. 20 ms
Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95

Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection

Operate time including output relay (measured value from 0 to 2-fold operate value):
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured value drops from 2-fold operate value to 0): ≤ 40 ms, approx.
30 ms
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95

Time-Voltage Protection
Operate time including output relay (measured value from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured value from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured value from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured
value from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value): ≤ 45 ms, approx. 30 ms
Resetting ratio for V<>: 1 to 10 % (settable)

Power Directional Protection

Operate time including output relay (measured value from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured value from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
≤ 60 ms, approx. 50 ms
Reset time (measured value from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured
value from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value): ≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Resetting ratio for
P>, Q>: 0.05 to 0.95 (settable)
P<, Q<: 1.05 to 20 (settable)

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-11

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.9 Deviations

2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values

Definitions
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom

Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.

Distance protection
Starting V<, VNG>, VNG>>
Deviation: ± 3 %

Starting I>, I>>, IN>

with setting range 0.1 to 0.25 Inom: ± 5 %
with setting range > 0.25 Inom: ± 3 %

Starting Z< at ϕk = 0°, 30°, 60°, 90°

Deviation: ± 5 %

Impedance Measurement Z<

Deviation at ϕk = 0°, 90°: ± 3 %
Deviation at ϕk = 30°, 60°: ± 5 %

Direction Determination
Deviation: ± 3°

Measuring-Circuit
Monitoring
Operate values Ineg, Vneg
Deviation: ± 3 %

Time-Overcurrent
Protection
Operate values I>, IN>
Deviation: ± 5 %

Over-/Undervoltage
Protection
Operate Values
V<>, Vpos<>: ± 1% (in the range: 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
VNG>, Vneg>: ± 1% (in the range: > 0.3 Vnom)

Over-/Underfrequency
Protection
Operate Values
Deviation: ± 30 mHz (for fnom = 50 Hz)
Deviation: ± 40 mHz (for fnom = 60 Hz)

Power Directional
Protection
Operate Values P<>, Q<>
Deviation: ± 5%

2-12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Direct Current Input

Deviation: ± 1%

Thermal Overload
Protection
Operate value
Deviations: ± 7.5%

Ground Fault Direction

Determination Using
Steady-State Values
(GFDSS)
Operate values VNG>, IN,act>, IN,reac>, IN>
Deviation: ± 3%

Sector angle:
Deviation: 1°

PT100 Resistance
Thermometer
Deviation: ± 2° or ± 1 %

20 mA Analog Measured
Data Output
Deviation: ± 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load: ± 1 %

2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages

Definitions
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.

Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.

Definite-time stages
Deviation: ± 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms

Inverse-time stages
Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5 % + 10 to 25 ms
for "extremely inverse" IEC characteristics and for thermal overload characteristics:
± 7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-13

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition

Definitions
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.

Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.

Operating Data
Measurement
Measuring Input Currents
Deviation: ± 1 %

Measuring Input Voltages

Deviation: ± 0.5 %

Internally Formed Resultant Current and Negative-Sequence System Current

Deviation: ± 2 %

Internally Formed Neutral-point Displacement Voltage and Voltages of Positive- and

Negative-Sequence Systems
Deviation: ± 2 %

Active and Reactive Power / Active and Reactive Energy

Deviation: ± 2 % of the measured value for cos ϕ = ±0.7
± 5 % of the measured value for cos ϕ = ±0.3

Load angle
Deviation: ± 1°

Frequency
Deviation: ± 10 mHz

Fault Data Acquisition

Fault values for current and voltage
Deviation: ± 3 %

Short-Circuit Impedance
Deviation: ± 5 %

Fault Location
Deviation: ± 5 %

Internal clock
With free running internal clock:
Deviation: < 1 min/month

With external synchronization

by protocol with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min: Deviation: ±10 ms
by IRIG-B signal: Deviation: ± 1 ms

2-14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.10 Recording Functions

Resolution of the Recorded Data

Fault values
Time resolution: 20 sampled values per period

Phase currents system

Dynamic range: 100 Inom / 25 Inom (settable)
Amplitude resolution: 6.1 mA r.m.s. / 1.5 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 1 A
30.5 mA r.m.s. / 7.6 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 5 A

Residual current
Dynamic range: 16 Inom / 2 Inom
Amplitude resolution: 1.0 mA r.m.s. for Inom = 1 A
4.9 mA r.m.s. for Inom = 5 A

Phase-to-Ground Voltages,
Neutral-Point
Displacement Voltage and
Reference Voltage
Dynamic range: 150 V AC
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mVrms

Organization of the Recording Memories:

Operating data memory

Scope for signals: All operation-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different
logic state signals
Depth: The 100 most recent signals

Monitoring signal memory

Scope for signals: All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of
1024 different logic state signals
Depth: Up to 30 signals

Overload memory
Number: The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals: All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of
1024 different logic state signals
Depth: 200 entries per overload event

Ground fault memory

Number: The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope for signals: All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of
1024 different logic state signals
Depth: 200 entries per ground fault event

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-15

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Fault memory
Number: The 8 most recent fault events

Scope for signals: Signals:

All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different
logic state signals

Depth for fault values:

Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages

Depth for signals Signals:

200 entries per fault event

Depth for fault values:

max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz)
or 13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)

2-16 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.11 Power supply

Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom:

24 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option)

Operating range for direct voltage:

0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom

Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration

For case: 40TE 84TE

relays de-energized approx.: 11 W 11 W

relays energized approx.: 25 W 44 W

Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms

Permitted supply interruption: ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-17

2 Technical Data
(continued)

2.12 Current Transformer Specifications

The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for
the offset maximum primary current:

(
Vsat = (R nom + R i ) ⋅ n ⋅ Inom ≥ R op + R i ⋅ k ⋅ I1,
'
max)
with:
Vsat: saturation voltage (IEC knee point)
I'1,max: non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side
Inom: rated secondary current
n: rated overcurrent factor
k: over-dimensioning factor
Rnom: rated burden
Rop actual connected operating burden
Ri internal burden

The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum
required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:

( )'
Vsat ≥ R op + R i ⋅ k ⋅ I1,max

As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for

the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as
follows:

(R op + R i ) '
I1,max (Pop + Pi ) '
I1,max
n≥ ⋅k ⋅ = ⋅k ⋅
(R nom + R i ) Inom (Pnom + Pi ) Inom

where

2
Pnom = R nom ⋅ Inom
2
Pop = R op ⋅ Inom
2
Pi = R i ⋅ Inom

Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of
saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum
value:

k max ≈ 1 + ωT1

with:
ω: system angular frequency
T1: system time constant

2-18 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

2 Technical Data
(continued)

However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the over-dimensioning

factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function is guaranteed
under the given conditions.

The over-dimensioning factor 'k' necessary for the distance protection may be read from
figure 2-1 Required over-dimensioning factor for distance protection with fnom =
50 Hz. The dotted line depicts the theoretical characteristic k(T1) = 1 + ωT1.

Current transformers should observe the error limit values for class 5P. CTs class TPY
per IEC 44-6 Part 6 ("Current Transformers with Anti-remanence Cores") should
preferably be used in case a HSR is applied.

2-1 Required over-dimensioning factor for distance protection with fnom = 50 Hz

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-19

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 2-20
3 Operation

3 Operation

3.1 Modular Structure

The P439, a numerical device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. The device
types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules.
Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P439.

3-1 Basic hardware structure

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-1

3 Operation
(continued)

The external analog and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are converted to the
internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X. Commands and
signals internally generated by the device are connected to the external plant via
contacts through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to
the power supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required
internally.

Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to
the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for
the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and analog/digital
converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to
the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the
processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The
processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary signals,
generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X
via the digital bus module. The processor module also handles overall device
communication. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the
processor module to provide serial communication with substation control systems.

The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated
PC interface are housed on control module L.

3-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.2 Operator-Machine Communication

The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user
and the device:

Integrated local control panel (LOC)

PC interface
Communication interface

All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged
within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the
device family. The main branches are:

‘Parameters’ branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the
device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces
to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the
process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that
the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails.

‘Operation’ branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for
resetting counters, memories and displays.

‘Events’ branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is
therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault
data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when
required.

Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the user’s choice. The settings and signals of the P439 are documented in Chapters
7 and 8.

The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of Measured
Value 'Panels’ on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically displayed for
specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal operation to
operation under overload conditions, operation during a ground fault, and finally to
operation following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P439 provides the measured
data relevant for the prevailing conditions.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-3

3 Operation
(continued)

3.3 Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Operation Panels;

Selection of the Control Point (Function Group LOC)

The layout of a bay with its switchgear units is displayed on the Bay Panel. In addition
the P439 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured values relevant at
a given time.

During normal power system operation; the Bay Panel or – if activated – the Operation
Panel is displayed. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event occurs, the display
switches to the appropriate Event Panel – provided that measured values have been
selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload or ground fault events, the
display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the
event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault
memories are reset.

If the change enabling command has been issued

(L O C : P a r a m . c h a n g e e n a b l . ) , it will be cancelled after the time, defined by the
setting L O C : A u t o m . r e t u r n t i m e , has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called
up.

Bay Panel
The P439 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type
be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the
P439 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P439.
The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at M A I N : C u s t o m i z e d
bay type.

The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a single
line (phase) diagram. The activation of the Bay Panel display is described in the
Chapter entitled "Local Control Panel". The user can switch between two character sets
to represent the switchgear units on the Bay Panel display. The character sets are also
described in Chapter "Local Control Panel". Each external device represented in the
Bay Panel is identified by an external device designation as selected by the user. The
user can also select the designations for busbars and busbar sections. The display of
external device designations can be disabled. The display of the control point (local or
remote control) and interlocking can also be disabled.

The switchgear unit to be controlled needs to be selected first. The selection is valid for
the set time L O C : R e t u r n t i m e s e l e c t .

The measured values that will be displayed on the Bay Panel can first be selected
separately for the numerical and the bar chart display by an "m out of n" parameter.
Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected for display as
numerical measured values. However, not all measured values that can be displayed in
numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart form. In such cases, a dummy or
placeholder must be included in the selection list for the bar chart display at the same
point at which a measured value that cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in
the selection list for numerical measured values.

For the bar chart display, the orientation of the bar and the scaling can be selected (the
latter separately for the current and voltage data). Display of the scaling can be
disabled.

3-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-2 Schaltfeldtafel

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-5

3 Operation
(continued)

Selection of the control

point
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching between
local and remote control is achieved using either the L/R key on the local control panel or
an external key switch. The position of this switch is interrogated via an appropriately
configured input (configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . L / R k e y s w .) If the input is
configured 'to L/R key switch' then the L/R key on the local control panel is without
function. This setting at L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y determines whether the
switching (using either the L/R key or the key switch) is between local and remote control
(L↔R) or between local+remote and local control (R&L↔L).

If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only local
control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.

3-3 Auswahl der Steuerstelle.

3-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed when it is selected and when at least one measured
value has been configured. The user can select which of the measured operating values
will be displayed on the Operation Panel by means of an ‘m out of n’ parameter. If more
measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then
the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at
L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel
is pressed.

LOC: Fct.
Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]

Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2

Measured value 3 LOC: AAutom. LOC: Autom.

return time return time
Measured value n [ 003 014 ]

LOC: Hold-time LOC: Hold-time

Selected meas. values for Panels for panels
[ 031 075 ]

FT_RC: Record.
in progress S1 1 ≥1 C
[ 035 000 ]
R1
OL_RC: Record.
in progress ≥1
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
GF_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 005 ]

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020

50Z01CXA_EN

3-4 Operation Panel

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-7

3 Operation
(continued)

Fault panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.

The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when
the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.

LOC: Fct. Fault

Panel
[ 053 003 ]

Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n

Selected meas.values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
Fault Panel
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020

50Z01EJA_EN

3-5 Fault panel

3-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Ground Fault Panel

The Ground Fault Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when
there is a fault, provided that at least one measured value has been configured.
The Ground Fault Panel remains on display until the ground fault ends, unless a fault
occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.

The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Ground Fault
Panel by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for
display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set
of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when
the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.

LOC: Fct. Grd.

Fault Panel
[ 053 004 ]

Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n

Selected
measured values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Ground Fault Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

50Z0139 B_EN

3-6 Ground Fault Panel

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-9

3 Operation
(continued)

Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured.
The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs.
In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.

The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel
by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when
the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.

LOC: Fct.
Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]

Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n

Select. meas. values

LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Overload Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

50Z0140 A_EN

3-7 Overload Panel

Configuration of the
READ key
As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from
the same menu jump list at L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y . They are triggered in
sequence by repeated pressing of the key.

Configuration of the
CLEAR key ('C')
Similar to the setting at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x up to 10 reset functions may
be selected from a list at L O C : As s i g n m e n t r e s e t k e y. These are carried out by
pressing the C CLEAR key.

3-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.4 Serial Interfaces

The P439 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is

optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels – depending on
the design version. Communication between the P439 and the control station’s
computer is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is possible
through all the P439's interfaces.

If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for
two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of communication interface 1
(COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section
"Main Functions"). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication
channel 2, then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be
active for communication channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to
transmit data to and from the P439 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as
the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".

If tests are run on the P439, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the
PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see section
"Main Functions").

3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)

Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for
data transfer between the P439 and the PC to function, several settings must be made in
the P439.

There is a support software available as an accessory for P439 control (see Chapter 13).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-11

3 Operation
(continued)

3-8 PC interface settings

3-12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)

There are several different interface protocols available at the communication interface
1. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P439:

IEC 60870-5-103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI
Recommendation, "Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility
level 2", February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission
protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks," first edition
1995-11
ILS-C, internal protocol of AREVA Energietechnik GmbH
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER

In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P439.

Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition,

a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-13

3 Operation
(continued)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

COMM1: Command
block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
0
1
0: No COMM1: Command
>-1 blocking
1: Yes [ 003 174 ]
COMM1: Command
block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
COMM1: Basic
IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ] COMM1: Com-
municat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
0
1 c
0: No c
1: Yes c
c
COMM1: Addit.
-101 enable c
[ 003 216 ]
c
0 Selected protocol COMM1: Selected
protocol
1 304 415
0: No
1: Yes

COMM1: Addit.
ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes

COMM1: MODBUS
enable
[ 003 220 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes

COMM1: DNP3
enable
[ 003 231 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes

COMM1: COURIER
enable
[ 103 040 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes

2 220 64Z51FEA

3-9 Communication interface 1, selection of the interface protocol

3-14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

COMM1: -103 prot. COMM1: Select.

variant spontan.sig.
[ 003 178 ] [ 003 179 ]

COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Transm.enab.

state cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]

COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Cycl. data

ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]

COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Delta I

monitoring
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Delta P
polling
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]

COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta f

comm. address
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta
monitor on meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Delta t
manufacturer
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]

COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta t

address ASDU (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]

COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Contin.

sig. enable general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Selected
protocol
304 415

COMM1: IEC
870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]

COMM1: General
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: yes

COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ]

MAIN: Test mode COMM1: Communi-

Communications interface cation error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422

COMM1: Sig./
meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]

0
1
0: No COMM1: Sig./
1: Yes meas.val.block.
[ 037 075 ]

COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]

12Z62FFA_EN

3-10 Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-15

3 Operation
(continued)

COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Delta t

state
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Delta t
(energy)
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Contin.
general scan
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Comm.
monitoring address length
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 201 ]
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Octet 2
polling comm. addr.
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 200 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Cause
comm. address transm. length
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 192 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Address
monitor on length ASDU
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 193 ]
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Octet 2
manufacturer addr. ASDU
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 194 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Addr.length
address ASDU inf.obj.
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 196 ]
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Oct.3 addr.
sig. enable inf.obj.
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 197 ]
COMM1: Transm. COMM1: Inf.No.<-
enab.cycl.dat >funct.type
[ 003 074 ] [ 003 195 ]
COMM1: Cycl. data COMM1: Time tag
ILS tel. length
[ 003 175 ] [ 003 198 ]
COMM1: Delta V COMM1: ASDU1 /
ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 050 ] [ 003 190 ]
COMM1: Delta I COMM1: ASDU2
conversion
[ 003 051 ] [ 003 191 ]
COMM1: Delta P COMM1: Initializ.
signal
COMM1: Selected [ 003 054 ] [ 003 199 ]
protocol COMM1: Delta f COMM1: Balanced
304 415
operation
COMM1: IEC [ 003 052 ] [ 003 226 ]
870-5-101
[ 003 218 ] COMM1: Delta COMM1: Direction
meas.v.ILS tel bit
[ 003 150 ] [ 003 227 ]
COMM1: Select. COMM1: Time-out
spontan.sig. interval
COMM1: General [ 003 179 ] [ 003 228 ]
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes C

C
COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ]
C
MAIN: Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1: Sig./ C
meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]

0 COMM1: Communic-
Communication interface ation error
304 422
1
0: No COMM1: Sig./
meas.val.block.
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]

COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]

MAIN: Prot. ext.

disabled
[ 038 046 ] 49Z64FGA_EN

3-11 Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol

3-16 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Transm.

state enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Cycl. data
ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta V

[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]

COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Delta I
monitoring
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Delta P
polling
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta f
comm. address
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta
monitor on meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Delta t
manufacturer
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta t
address ASDU (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Contin.
sig. enable general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Select.
spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]

COMM1: Selected C
protocol
304 415

COMM1: IEC 870-5,

ILS C
[ 003 221 ]

C
COMM1: General
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes C

COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ] COMM1: Communic-
Communication interface ation error
304 422
MAIN: Test mode
[ 037 071 ]

COMM1: Sig./
meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]

1
COMM1: Sig./
0: No meas.val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
1: Yes
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]

MAIN: Prot. ext.

disabled
[ 038 046 ]

49Z64FHA_EN

3-12 Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-17

3 Operation
(continued)

3-13 Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol

3-18 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-14 Communication interface 1, settings for DNP 3.0

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-19

3 Operation
(continued)

3-15 Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol

3-20 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Checking spontaneous
signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control
station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters.

COMM1: Sel.
spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n

Selected signals

COMM1: Test
spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1: Spontan.
sig.start
0 [ --- --- ]

1
0: don't execute
1: execute

COMM1: Test
spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
COMM1: Spontan.
sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
1

0: don't execute
1: execute

49Z64FKA_EN

3-16 Checking spontaneous signals

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-21

3 Operation
(continued)

3.4.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)

Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol.

In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P439.

3-22 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-17 Settings for communication interface 2

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-23

3 Operation
(continued)

Checking spontaneous
signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters.

COMM2: Sel.
spontan.sig.test
[ 103 180 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n

Selected signals

COMM2: Test
spont.sig.start
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2: Spontan.
sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]

1
0: don’t execute
1: execute

COMM2: Test
spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
COMM2: Spontan.
Sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]

0: don’t execute
1: execute

49Z64FLA_EN

3-18 Checking spontaneous signals

3-24 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.4.4 Communication Interface 3 (Function Group COMM3)

Application
Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link between
two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary protection signals may be transmitted.
Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information interfaces to
connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access, communication
interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that will transmit real time
signals (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface). Its main application is to transmit
signals from protective signaling (function group PSIG). In addition, any other internal or
external binary signals may also be transmitted.

Physical medium
COMM3 is provided as an asynchronous, full-duplex communication interface.
To transmit data the following physical media are available:

Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:

Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)

Use of external transmission equipment:

FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC-1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max. 10 km)
Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD-32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)

Digital network:
Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment

Activating and Enabling

In order to use InterMiCOM, communication interface COMM3 has to be configured
using the parameter C O M M 3 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C O M M 3 . This setting
parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted.
After activation of COMM3, all addresses associated with this function group (setting
parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
COMM3: General enable USER.

Telegram configuration
The communication baud rate is settable (C O M M 3 : B a u d r a t e ) to adapt to the
transmission channel's requirements. Sending and receiving addresses
(C O M M 3 : S o u r c e a d d r e s s and C O M M 3 : R e c e i v i n g a d d r e s s can be set
to different values, thus avoiding that the device communicates with itself.

The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission of

eight binary signals in each direction. For the send signals
(C O M M 3 : F c t . a s s i g n m . s e n d x , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection
table of the binary outputs (OUTP) can be chosen. For the receive signals
(C O M M 3 : F c t . a s s i g n m . r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection
table of the binary inputs (INP) can be chosen.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-25

3 Operation
(continued)

For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set

( C O M M 3 : O p e r . m o d e r e c e i v e x , with x = 1 t o 8 ) , thus defining the required
checks for accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected
telegram structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding
along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual balance of
"Speed", "Security" and "Dependability" for each signal:

Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to 'Blocking' or 'Direct intertrip'

Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to 'Permissive' or 'Direct intertrip'

EN 60834-1 classifies 3 categories of command based teleprotection schemes

according to their specific requirements (see figure 3-19). By selection of a binary signal
and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these requirements can be fulfilled as
follows:

Direct transfer trip or intertripping:

Preference: Security
Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Direct intertrip'

Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'

Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 1 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'

3-26 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Speed
fast

Blocking
Permissive

slow
low

high high
Direct
Security Intertrip Dependability
47Z1030A_EN

3-19 Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.

Communication monitoring
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m . f a u l t is used for monitoring the
transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct received
telegram). The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission
times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes such as the blocking
scheme. After the timer has elapsed, signals C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n s f a u l t
and S F M O N : C o m m u n i c . f a u l t C O M M 3 are issued and the received signals
are automatically set to their user-defined default values
(C O M M 3 : D e f a u l t v a l u e r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8). As the main application for this
protective signaling the fault signal may be mapped to the corresponding input signal in
function group PSIG with the C O M M 3 : S i g . a s g . c o m m . f a u l t setting.

Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k f a i l . is used to determine a persistent

failure of the data transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals
C O M M 3 : C o m m . l i n k f a i l u r e and S F M O N : C o m m . l i n k f a i l . C O M M 3 are
issued.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-27

3 Operation
(continued)

Message
received

Character frame &

Source address check

Blocking signals
accepted

Telegram receive check

Permissive signals
accepted

Telegram CRC check

Direct Trip signals

accepted

(Re-)Trigger

COMM3: Time-out
comm.fault
[120 033]

COMM3:
1 Communications
fault
[120 043]

COMM3: Time-out
link fail
[120 035]

COMM3: Comm. link

1 failure
[120 044]

47Z1031 B_EN

3-20 Message processing and communication monitoring

3-28 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Supervision of
communication
link quality
After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of
incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received messages.
The result is provided as an updating measured value C O M M 3 : N o . t e l . e r r o r s
p . u . and the overall maximum ratio can be read from
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored.
If the set threshold C O M M 3 : L i m i t t e l e g r . e r r o r s is exceeded the
corresponding signals C O M M 3 : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r .
and S F M O N : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . will be issued. All the corrupted telegrams
are counted (C O M M 3 : N o . t e l e g r a m e r r o r s ) . This counter as well as the stored
maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via
C O M M 3 : Rset.No.tlg.err.USER (as well as via the binary signal C O M M 3 : Reset
No.tlg.err.EXT).

Commissioning tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the device as physical
state signals (C O M M 3 : S t a t e s e n d x and C O M M 3 : S t a t e r e c e i v e x , with
x = 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for the commissioning of the
protection interface.

For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.
After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k s e n d ) the test can be triggered via
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k t e s t . This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time
set at C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . For this test only, the source address is set
to ' 0 '; this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result can
be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured operating data
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e s u l t and C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e c e i v e . As soon
as the hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated and InterMiCOM reverts to
the normal sending mode (e.g. sending the actual values of the configured send signals,
using the set source address).

Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface, the
loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. The transmission
channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by setting individual
binary signals
(C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l f o r t e s t ) to user-defined test values
(C O M M 3 : L o g . s t a t e f o r t e s t ). After triggering the test by
C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l , t e s t , the preset binary signal is sent with the preset value
for the set hold time C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . The 7 remaining binary
signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with their actual
values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the receiving device,
e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time has expired, the test mode
is automatically reset and the actual values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-29

3 Operation
(continued)

3.4.5 Communication Interface IEC61850

(Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)

The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and
the Ethernet module.
Note:
Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!).
3.4.5.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

As a further option the P439 now includes an interface protocol according to the Ethernet
based communication standard IEC 61850.
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard.
The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability
of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company
or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level,
for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a
data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically
created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices
and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate
engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device,
based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and
processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control
device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations
and signal images.
The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used
with the P439, is available:
IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language)
with a description of the data, properties and services, available from the device, that
are to be imported into the system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter
addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with
the device data model as per IEC 61850.

3-30 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface
where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection of which of the two
interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the
parameter I E C : E t h e r n e t m e d i a . For the optical interface on the Ethernet
communications module the user may either select the ordering option ST connector or
SC connector with 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s
and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote
access with the MiCOM S1 support software (function group COMM2).
Notes: The P439 can be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an
alternative to function group COMM1.

Activating and Enabling

The IEC function group can be activated by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n
g r o u p I E C . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
IEC: General enable USER.

The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE are not
automatically activated in the device. Activation occurs either when the command
I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is
switched online at
MAIN: Device on-line.
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is
common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices.
A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'.
In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic
information.
In its function as server the P439 can supply up to 16 clients with information.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-31

3 Operation
(continued)

Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined as
standard for Ethernet. Here the P439 functions as a SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization is
effected via a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the
network, and in the second operating mode the P439 requests the device specific time
signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is used only when messages are no
longer received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN
function then, by selecting "COMM1", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically
active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units
Control of switchgear units (external devices) by the P439 can be carried out from all
clients that have previously logged-on to the device. Only one control command is
executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the
execution of such a command are rejected. To control external devices the following
operating modes can be set at
IEC: DEV control model:
Control service mode
Direct enh. security (Direct control with enhanced security)
SBO enh. security (SBO [Select before operate] with enhanced security)
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by
the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the
switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are
rejected. If, after a selection no control command is issued by the client, the P439 resets
this selection after 2 minutes have elapsed.
The switchgear units’ contact positions signaled to the clients are made with the Report
Control Blocks of the switchgear units.
Fault Transmission
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".

3-32 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Transmission of "Goose
Messages"
The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas
normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose
Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority.
Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the
respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850
"Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between
two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, reverse interlocking, transfer
tripping or decentralized substation interlocking. In the future the "Goose Message" will
therefore replace a wired or serial protective interface.
According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", GSSE and
IEC-GOOSE. GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by
'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However IEC-GOOSE enables transmission
of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values
or even analog measured values. But this will require more extensive configuration with
the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the opposite side. With
IEC-GOOSE the P439 at this time supports sending and receiving of binary information
or two-pole external device states.
Communication with the
MiCOM S1 support
software via the Ethernet
Interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on the
device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an
Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated MiCOM S1
support software (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished
over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication
and "Goose Messages".
Available are all the familiar functions offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such
as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described
in chapters 7 and 8.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-33

3 Operation
(continued)

3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P439 provides function group GOOSE (IEC-GOOSE) as
defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE features high-speed and secure
transmission for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands,
blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
"Goose Messages" are transmitted only by switches but not by routers. "Goose
Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.
Activating and Enabling
Function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter
G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is visible only if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all
data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals
etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
GOOSE: General enable USER.

The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command
I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is
switched online with M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition function group IEC must
be configured and enabled.
Sending GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals and up to 10 two-pole states from the
maximum of 10 possible external devices associated with the P439 can be sent.
Selection of binary state signals is made by setting
G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The up to 10 two-pole states of the
external devices are a fixed part of GOOSE for which there is no necessity to set
parameters. The assignment of data object indexes to logic state signals is made in the
range from 1 to 32 according to the assignment to GOOSE outputs. The two-pole state
signals from external devices 1 to 10 receive a permanent assignment of data object
indexes in ascending order from 33 to 42.
GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state
signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending
time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after
2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at
2-second intervals.
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the
Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered
through setting parameters. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration
Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up
of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string
"System/LLNO$GooseST".

3-34 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

GOOSE DataSet: LLN0$GooseST

Identification : Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

VLAN Identifier: 0

VLAN Priority: 4

Application ID : 12288

Goose ID : "This IED "

DataSet Ref. : "This IED System/LLNO"

DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100

Data range: ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.

ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out2/stVal GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig.

… …

ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out32/stVal GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.

ServernameCONTROL/CSWI1/Pos/stVal DEV01: Control state

ServernameCONTROL/CSWI2/Pos/stVal DEV02: Control state

…
…

ServernameCONTROL/CSWI10/Pos/stVal DEV10: Control state

49Z6101B _EN

3-21 Basic structure of sent GOOSE

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-35

3 Operation
(continued)

Receiving GOOSE
With GOOSE, up to 16 logic binary state signals and the two-pole contact position
signals from up to 16 external devices can be received. Configuration of the logic state
signals received (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 16) is made on the
basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). Contact position
signals received from external devices are listed in the selection table for interlocking
equations of the ILOCK function group, which are available to design a decentralized
substation interlock.
For each state or contact position signal to be received from an external device the
"Goose Message" must be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the
Goose ID, the Application ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the
data object index and the data attribute index through parameters, the required
information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The device will not evaluate the
identification features VLAN identifier and ‘Dataset Configuration Revision’ that are also
included in the GOOSE received.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective
default values G O O S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t o r G O O S E : E x t . D e v . n d e f a u l t
(n = 1 to 16).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.

3-36 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P439 provides, as an additional functionality, the GSSE
function group (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features
high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as reverse
interlocking, trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals.
Activating and Enabling
Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter G S S E : F u n c t i o n
g r o u p G S S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points associated with
this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
GSSE: General enable USER.

The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e
c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched on-line at
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and
enabled.
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state
signals is made by setting
G S S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). Each selected state signal is to be
assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (G S S E : O u t p u t n b i t p a i r (n = 1 to 32)), which will
transmit this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will
be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs
at the given cycle time set with the parameter G S S E : M i n . c y c l e . The cycles for
the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set
with the parameter G S S E : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to
the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . c y c l e ) , then
GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which
was set in function group IEC.
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the
logic binary state signals received (G S S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 32)
is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the required
information, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I E D n a m e ) .
Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair
(G S S E : b i t p a i r ) .
Each GSSE includes time information on the validity duration of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the validity
duration has elapsed without this GSSE being received again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective
default value ( G S S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 32)).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-37

3 Operation
(continued)

3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)

If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of
the P439 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface.
It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the
current year). Using this information and the year set at the P439, the P439 calculates
the current date (DD.MM.YY).

Disabling or enabling the

IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.

Synchronization readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P439 checks the received
signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P439. If the P439 does not
receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.

3-22 IRIG-B interface

3-38 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.6 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)

The P439 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The functions that will be activated in the P439 by triggering these binary signal inputs
are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. In order to ensure that
during normal operation the P439 will recognize an input signal, it must persist for at
least 20 ms. With the occurrence of a general starting this time period may have to be
increased to 40 ms under unfavorable conditions.

Configuring the binary

inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated
from several control points having different signal voltages.

In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.

It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands

should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O module as these have
an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
Operating mode of the
binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active 'high' mode) or the absence (active 'low' mode) of a
voltage should be interpreted as the logic ' 1 ' signal. The display of the state of a binary
signal input – 'low' or 'high' – is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the
signal input.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-39

3 Operation
(continued)

3-23 Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs

3-40 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.7 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)

The P439 has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed
to the P439 through one of the inputs. The other input is designed to connect a
resistance thermometer.

The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is
conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating
value. In addition, it is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").

The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and

monitored by the limit value monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").

Disabling or enabling the

measured data input
function
The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

3-24 Disabling or enabling the measured data input function

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-41

3 Operation
(continued)

3.7.1 Direct current input

External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is

directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the temperature, for
example. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that
the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for certain applications it may
be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range
that have a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair M E A S I : I D C x and
M E A S I : I D C , l i n x , the user specifies which input current (IDC) will correspond to the
current that is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting
points, called "interpolation points", are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDC,lin
diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two
interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (see figure 3-25). Up to
20 interpolation points are available to implement a complex characteristic.

When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a monotonically
increasing curve is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If an invalid setting is entered, the
signal S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g I D C will be generated.

IDC,lin / IDC,nom
1.2

1.1

1
IDC,lin 20
0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1
IDC,lin 1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 IDC / IDC,nom
IDC 1 IDC 20
D5Z52KDA
19Z5266 A_EN

3-25 Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin

3-42 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

IDClin / IDC,nom

0,8
Interpolation points

IDClin20 0,7

0,6

IDClin4 0,5

0,4

IDClin3 0,3

IDClin2 0,2

IDClin1 0,1

0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2

IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20 IDC / IDC,no

Enable IDC p.u.

D5Z52KEA

3-26 Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom shown as a broken line)

Zero suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current I DC p.u. and the
current IDClin will be displayed as having a value of ‘ 0 ’.
Open-circuit and overload
monitoring
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold M E A S I : I D C < o p e n c i r c u i t , the signal
M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p . is issued.

The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the fixed threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal
M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t is issued.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-43

3 Operation
(continued)

3-27 Analog direct current input

3-44 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and
are available for further processing by protection functions.

MEASI: Scaled
val. IDC,lin1
[ 037 192 ]
MEASI: Scaled
val.IDC,lin20
[ 037 193 ]

MEASI: Curr. MEASI: Scaled

IDC,lin p.u. value IDC,lin
[ 004 136 ] [ 004 180 ]

Q9Z5029 B_EN

3-28 Scaling of the linearized measured value

3.7.2 Input to connect a resistance thermometer

This analog input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The

mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in standard
IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method,
then no further calibration is required.

Open-circuit monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal M E A S I : O p e n
c i r c . P T 1 0 0 is issued.

c
MEASI: Enabled
[ 035 008 ]

MEASI: PT100
faulty
PT 100 Analog Input [ 040 190 ]

SFMON: PT100 open

circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u.
[ 004 221 ]

MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]

49Z64H3A_EN

3-29 Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-45

3 Operation
(continued)

3.8 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays

(Function Group OUTP)

The P439 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configured by the user.

Configuration of the output

relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.

Operating mode of the

output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the
output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed
arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled
either manually using setting parameters, or by an appropriately configured binary signal
input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.

Blocking the output relays

The P439 offers the option of blocking all output relays via setting parameters or by way
of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise blocked
if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs or if self-monitoring
detects a hardware fault. Any output relay configured for M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y
will not be included in the blocking signals.

3-46 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

OUTP: Outp.rel.
block USER
[ 021 014 ]

0
OUTP: Outp.
1 ≥1 relays blocked
[ 021 015 ]
0: No
OUTP: Block 1: Yes
outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN: Prot.
ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950

OUTP: Oper. mode

K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]

1 ≥1
2
3
4 -K xxx
≥1
5
6
≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
≥1
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
OUTP: State K xxx
5: NE updating & ≥1 [ zzz zzz ]
6: NE manual reset &
&
& ≥1

OUTP: Fct. & S1 1

assignm. K xxx
[ yyy xxx ]
R1

Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n

≥1 & ≥1
Selected signals

&
FT_RC: Record.
in progress OUTP: Latching
[ 035 000 ] 1 reset
& [ 040 088 ]
FT_RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]

OUTP: Reset
latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]

0
1 1
100 ms
0: don’t execute
1: execute
OUTP: Reset
latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
50Z0141 A_EN

3-30 Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-47

3 Operation
(continued)

Testing the output relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via a setting
parameter. Therefore the device must be switched to 'off-line'. Triggering persists for
the duration of the set hold time.

3-31 Testing the output relays

3-48 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.9 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)

Measured values made available by the P439 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. Output as
direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD
output is always possible, whether the device is equipped with analog module Y or not.

Disabling or enabling the

measured data output
function
The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters.

3-32 Disabling or enabling the measured data output function

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-49

3 Operation
(continued)

Enabling measured data

output
The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that
the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function
M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input,
then the measured data output is always enabled.

3-33 Enabling measured data output

3-50 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Resetting the measured

data output function
BCD or analog output of measured values is terminated for the duration of the hold time
if one of the following conditions is met:

The measured data output is reset either using a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
LED indicators reset

MEASO: Reset
output USER
[ 037 116 ]

0
1

0: don't execute
1: execute

MEASO: Reset MEASO: Output

reset
output EXT [ 037 117 ]
[ 036 087 ]

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ] MEASO: Reset
meas.val.outp.
1: execute 304 601
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
49Z64H6A_EN

3-34 Resetting the measured data output function

Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device's inherent setting
range.

Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measured values, in particular fault location in percent.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-51

3 Operation
(continued)

3.9.1 BCD Measured Data Output

The user can select a measured value for output in BCD form by assigning output relays.

The selected measured value is available in BCD form for the duration of the set hold
time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measured value.

Output of measured event

values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.

Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.

3-52 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Scaling of BCD output

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measured value range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the associated
BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.

MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD

MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value

The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If this
should occur or if the measured value is outside the acceptable measuring range, then
the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.

Measured values Range

Measured values of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
Associated scaled measured 0 ... 1
values

Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measured value (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Support Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)

Measured values to be Range

output
Measured values to be Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
output
Scaled measured values to Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
be output
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1

Designation of the set "Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
values in the data model

Measured values BCD display values

Measured values in the BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
range "Measured values to (Valid BCD value)
be output"
Measured values: BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measured values Mx: BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measured values Mx: BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-53

3 Operation
(continued)

Example for scaling of

BCD output
The value range for the fault measured value is set from –320.00% to +320.00%.
The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%.

Measured values Range

Fault measured value: -320.00% ... +320.00%
FT_DA: Fault
locat. percent
Associated scaled measured 0 ... 1
values

Measured values to be Range

output
Measured values to be 0% ... 200%
output
Scaled measured values to 0.5 ... 0.813
be output where:
0.500 = 320/640
0.813 = 520/640

Measured values BCD display values

Measured values in the 0 ... 200
range "Measured values to
be output"

In this example the following device settings are selected:

/Parameter/Config. parameters/
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Function group MEASO With
031 074 MEASO: General enable USER Yes
053 002 MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD FT_DA: Fault locat. percent
010 010 MEASO: Hold time output BCD 1.00 s
037 140 MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD 0.500
037 141 MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD 0.813
037 142 MEASO: BCD-Out min. value 0
037 143 MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 200

3-54 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location.
The BCD value and the signal M E A S O : V a l i d B C D v a l u e = 'Yes' are only issued
in the value range 0% to 200%.

[004.027] FT_DA: [037.050] MEASO: [004.027] FT_DA:

Fault locat. percent = Not measured Valid BCD value = Yes Fault locat. percent = Not measured

200

BCD value

0
-320% 0% 200% 320% [004.027] FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
47Z1040A_EN

3-35 Example of BCD output of fault location

Note:
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable value
only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault location is
more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and sensible
range on the line by setting F T _ D A : O u t p . f l t . l o c a t . P S x = 'Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze'.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-55

3 Operation
(continued)

3-36 BCD Measured Data Output

3-56 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.9.2 Analog Measured Data Output

Analogue output of measured data is two-channel.

The user can select two of the measured values available in the P439 for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be
defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring
instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.

The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold
time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t A - x . If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measured value.

Output of measured event

values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.

Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.

Configuration of output
relays assigned to the
output channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays
assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x O u t p u t ,
since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal
connection diagrams).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-57

3 Operation
(continued)

Scaling the analog display

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measured value range in
scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value for
the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog output
characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure 3-37.

Measured value range to

be output
The measured value range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max),
with:
Mx,min: minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee point value for the measured value range to be output
Mx,max: maximum value to be output

This measured value range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters:

MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x

MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-x
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measured value (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)

Measured values Range

Measured values of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
Associated scaled measured 0 ... 1
values

Measured values to be Range

output
Measured values with knee- Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
point to be output
Scaled measured values Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
with a scaled knee-point to
be output with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1

Designation of the set "Scaled min. val. Ax" … "Scaled knee val. Ax"
values in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. Ax"

3-58 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Associated display range

The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:

MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x

MEASO: AnOut knee point A-x
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x

Measured values Analog display values

"AnOut min. val. A-x" ...
Measured values in the
... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
range "Measured values to ...
be output" ... "AnOut max. val." (Value A-
x valid)
Measured values: "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measured values Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measured values Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-59

3 Operation
(continued)

Example for scaling of

analog display ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measured value to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom
with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA.

Measured values Range

Measured values of the variable Mx 0 V ... 150 V
Associated scaled measured 0 ... 1
values

Measured values to be output Range

Measured values with knee-point 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
to be output
Associated scaled measured 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67
values
with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67

Measured values Analog display values

Measured values in the range 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
"Measured values to be output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom

In this example the following device settings are selected:

/Parameter/Config. parameters/
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Function group With
MEASO
031 074 MEASO: General enable Yes
USER
053 000 MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MAIN:
Voltage A-B PU
010 114 MEASO: Hold time output A-1 1.00 s
037 104 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with
0.02 Vnom)
037 105 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 0.067 (corresponds with
0.10 Vnom)
037 106 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 0.667 (corresponds with
1.00 Vnom)
037 107 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 4 mA
037 108 MEASO: AnOut knee point A- 16 mA
1
037 109 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 18 mA

3-60 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

By setting M E A S O : A n O u t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output current

that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured
value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O : A n O u t m a x . v a l . A - x defines
the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By
defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with
different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a
monotonically increasing or decreasing curve is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not
allowed). If the setting was not properly entered, the signal S F M O N : I n v a l i d
s c a l i n g A - x will be issued.

Note:

A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the device, with the setting M A I N : D e v i c e o n -
l i n e is again switched on-line.

Ia / mA
20
Max.
output value18
Knee point
16
output value
14

12

10

6
Min.
output value 4
2

0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0,013 0,067 0,667 1,0Mx,scal

D5Z52KFA
19Z5265A_EN

3-37 Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is
directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-61

3 Operation
(continued)

3-38 Analog Measured Data Output

3-62 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.9.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured Data

Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be written
to the following parameters of the P439 via the communications interface.

MEASO: Output Value 1

MEASO: Output Value 2
MEASO: Output Value 3

These "external" measured values are output by the P439 either in BCD data form or as
load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output function or
the channels of the analogue measured data output function are configured accordingly.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-63

3 Operation
(continued)

3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)

The P439 has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Four of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED indicators are
freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either red or green or
amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may not be configured
independently).

Configuring the LED

indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color indications.
The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or colors),
if required.

LED indicator Label Configuration

H 1 (green) “HEALTHY” Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device
(supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) “EDIT MODE” Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only when the
device is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by pressing
the “Up“ and “Down“ keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and
Keypad')

H 2 (amber) “OUT OF SERVICE” Permanently configured with function M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y .

H 3 (amber) “ALARM” Permanently configured with function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) .

H 4 (red) “TRIP COMMAND” With the P439 this LED indicator is customarily configured with function
M A I N : G e n . t r i p s i g n a l - but the configuration may be modified.
H 4 (green) ---- Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely configurable.

H 5 to H 16 ---- For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may be
configured freely and independently.

The following figures illustrate the layout of LED indicators situated on the local control
panel with case 40T/84T devices.

H4 TRIP
H3
H2
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
C
G G

H1 HEALTHY G
H17 EDIT MODE
H5
H6 G G
G

H7
H8
H9 G
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16 O I L/R

49Z6200A_DE

Layout of the LED indicators

3-64 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be selected
separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will operate either in
energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode, whether it will be flashing and
whether it will be in latching mode. Latching is disabled either manually using setting
parameters or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see "Main Functions of
the P439"), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.

Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 23=8 possible combinations of the
following components:

• flashing / continuous,
• energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE),
• updating / latching with manual reset,

in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes

• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous) and
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing /
continuous),

so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-65

3 Operation
(continued)

LED: Operating
mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-Hxx
12 (red)
1: ES updating ! G !
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) ≥1
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
2: ES manual reset
8: ES manual reset bl
3: ES reset (fault) LED: State H xx
& red
9: ES reset (fault) bl [ zzz zzz ]
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl &
11: NE updating bl &
12: NE manual reset bl
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]

Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n LED: State H xx
Signal n & green
[ zzz zzz ]
&
&
Selected signals
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx green
[ yyy yyy ]

Signal 1
Signal 2 -Hxx
Signal 3 m out of n (green)
Signal n

Selected signals &

&
FT_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ] &
FT_RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
12Z6200 A_EN

3-39 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

3-66 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11 Main Functions of the P439 (Function Group MAIN)

3.11.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control

In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the real time acquisition (time tagging),
debouncing and chatter suppression functions are included as standard. Each of these
signals can be assigned to one of eight groups and for each of these groups the
debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. Matching these two parameters
makes it possible to suppress not only signal pulse edges like those caused by a
bouncing contact but also signals originating from transmitters near the trigger point.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-67

3 Operation
(continued)

SIG_1: Gr.asg.
debounc.S001
[ 226 003 ]

2
3

5
6

7
8
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
4: Group 4
5: Group 5
6: Group 6
7: Group 7
8: Group 8
SIG_1: Gr.asg.
debounc.S001
[ 226 004 ]

DEV01: Gr.
assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ]

1
2
3

5
6

7 MAIN: Debounce
time gr. 1
[ 221 200 ]
8
1: Group 1 MAIN: Chatt.mon.
time gr.1
[ 221 201 ]
2: Group 2
3: Group 3 MAIN: Change of
state gr.1
4: Group 4 [ 221 202 ]
5: Group 5
6: Group 6 SIG_1: Debounced
7: Group 7 Debouncing and signal S001
310 044

8: Group 8 Chatter suppresssion DEV01: Debounced

DEV01: Closed Group 1 close signal
signal EXT 310 045
[ 210 031 ] DEV01: Debounced
DEV01: Open trip signal
signal EXT 310 046
[ 210 030 ]

49Z6406A_EN

3-40 Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1

3-68 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Debouncing
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set
debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer
stage.

If the signal remains stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram containing
the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the time tag may be
generated after debouncing by setting parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value
'After debounce time'.

After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it is the
same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is generated.

Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce time has
elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of M A I N : T i m e t a g to the
value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort') they are not necessarily saved in chronological order in
the operating data memory. If above parameter has been set to the value
'1stEdge,OpMem sorted' then all entries are always saved in chronological order in the
operating data memory.

3-41 Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge
(e.g. parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort' or '1stEdge,OpMem sorted'.)
Example: Set debouncing time: 50 ms
s: start
e: end

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-69

3 Operation
(continued)

Chatter suppression

Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set
monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated for the
admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can be set. After
the first "inadmissible" signal change, no further telegrams are generated and the timer
stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing, it is re-triggered by each new
signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed, each signal change triggers a
telegram.

3-42 Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression

Example: Set debouncing time: 20 ms
Set chatter monitoring time: 200 ms
Number of admissible signal changes: 4
s: start
e: end

3-70 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.2 Selecting a bay type

The P439 is designed to control up to six switchgear units. The bay type defines the
topology of a bay with its switchgear units.

The P439 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. If the required bay type is not
included in the standard selection, the user can contact the manufacturer of the P439 to
request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P439. The number
of this additional bay type will then be displayed at M A I N : C u s t o m i z e d b a y t y p e .

Once the user has selected a bay type, the P439 can automatically configure the binary
inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units.
The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the
List of Bay Types in the Appendix.

3-43 Bay type selection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-71

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.3 Conditioning of the Measured values

The secondary phase currents and voltages of the system transformers are fed into the
P439 and are – electrically isolated – converted to standardized electronics levels. Air-
gap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency (DC
decays and offsets) signal components. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus
available for further processing.

Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P439 to nominal
quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of
the system transformers.

The connection arrangement of the measuring circuits must also be set on the P439.
Figure 3-44 shows the standard connection. The phase of the digitized currents is
rotated by 180° by this setting.

3-72 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

A
B
C

MAIN: Vref,nom
V.T. sec.
[ 031 052 ]
1U
Vref
2U

MAIN: Conn. MAIN: Inom

meas. circ. IP device
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
IA
IA
X X. Y
IB
X X. Y IB

IC X X. Y IC
1: Standard
IN (Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)

MAIN: Conn. MAIN: IN,nom

meas. circ. IN device
[ 010 019 ] [ 010 026 ]

IN
X X. Y
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)

MAIN: VNG,nom
V.T. sec.
[ 010 028 ]
N(e)
E(n) VN-G

MAIN: Vnom
V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
U

e VA-G
V
VB-G
W
VC-G
N

Line
49Z6400A_EN

3-44 Connecting the measuring circuits of the P439

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-73

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.4 Operating Data Measurement

The P439 has an operating data measurement function for the display of the measured
currents and voltages as well as quantities derived from these measured values. Set
minimum thresholds must be exceeded in order for measured values to be displayed, in
order to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these minimum thresholds are not
exceeded, 'not measured' is displayed in place of a value. The following measured
values are displayed:

Phase currents for all three phases (as primary quantities)

Maximum phase current (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Minimum phase current (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Delayed and stored maximum phase current (as primary quantities and as per-unit
quantities)
Positive- and negative-sequence current, based on the set phase sequence
Residual current measured by the P439 at the T 4 transformer and calculated
residual current (as primary quantities)
Phase-to-ground voltage (as a primary quantity)
Sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit
quantity)
Phase-to-phase voltages (as primary quantities and as per-unit quantities)
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage (as a primary quantityand as a per-unit quantity)
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage, as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Maximum phase-to-ground voltage (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Minimum phase-to-ground voltage (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Positive- and negative-sequence voltage, based on the set phase sequence
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P439 at the T 90 transformer (as
a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Reference voltage measured by the P439 at the T 15 transformer (as a primary
quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Active, reactive and apparent power (as primary quantities and as per-unit quantities)
Active power factor
Load angle ϕ in all three phases (as a quantity and as a per-unit quantity referred to
100°)
Angle between measured residual current and measured neutral-point displacement
voltage (as a quantity and as a per-unit quantity referred to 100°)
Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
Angle between the sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages and the measured
residual current (as a quantity and as a per-unit quantity referred to 100°)
Frequency (as a quantity and as a per-unit quantity referred to fnom)
Active and reactive energy

The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if the self-
monitoring function detects a hardware fault.

3-74 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Measured current values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P439 and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in
the P439.

According to the following formulae the P439 will determine the negative-sequence
current and the positive-sequence current, based on the set phase sequence (alternative
terminology: rotary field):

Phase sequence A-B-C Phase sequence A-C-B

(alternative terminology: (alternative terminology:
clockwise rotating field) anti-clockwise rotating field)

1
(
I neg = ⋅ I A + a 2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
) 1
(
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ I C
3
)
1
(
I pos = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ I C
3
) 1
(
I pos = ⋅ I A + a 2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-75

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Hardware MAIN: Meas. value

fault C rel. IP
306 018 [ 011 030 ]

IA C1
IB C2
IC C3
C4
C5
C6
C7

C8

1 MAIN: Current A
p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
MAIN: Current B
2 p.u.
[ 006 041 ]

MAIN: Current C
3 p.u.
[ 007 041 ]

+ MAIN: Current
+ 4 (IP) p.u.
+ [ 005 011 ]
MAIN: Current
COMP 5 IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]

MAIN: Current
6 IP,min p.u.
[ 005 056 ]
Imax

Imin MAIN: Current

7 Ineg p.u.
[ 009 015 ]

MAIN: Current
8 Ipos p.u.
[ 009 016 ]

MAIN: Phase MAIN: Inom C.T.

sequence prim.
[ 010 049 ] [ 010 001 ]

MAIN: Current A
Ineg prim.
[ 005 040 ]

MAIN: Current B
Ipos prim.
[ 006 040 ]

MAIN: Current C
prim.
[ 007 040 ]

MAIN: Current
MAIN: Settl. t. (IP) prim.
IP,max,del [ 005 010 ]
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Curr. IP,max
prim.
[ 005 050 ]

MAIN: Curr. IP,min

MAIN: Reset prim.
[ 005 055 ]
IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN: IP,max
0 prim.,delay
[ 005 036 ]
1
MAIN: IP,max
prim.,stored
[ 005 034 ]
MAIN: General 0: don't execute R
reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: IP,max
1: execute p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT MAIN: IP,max
[ 005 255 ] p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN: Rst
IP,max,stor. EXT
[ 005 211 ]

47Z1320 A_EN

3-45 Measured operating data – phase current, negative-sequence current, and positive-sequence current

3-76 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-46 Measured operating data - residual current

Delayed maximum phase

current display
The P439 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase current display is an
exponential function of the maximum phase current I (see upper curve in Figure 3-47).
The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have reached
95 % of maximum phase current IP,max is set at M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l .

Stored maximum phase

current display
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the
value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the
delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the
actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase
current (see middle curve in Figure 3-47). The stored maximum phase current to the
actual value of the delayed maximum phase current is set at
M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d (see lower curve in Figure 3-47).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-77

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]

MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]

MAIN: Settl. t. MAIN: Settl. t.

IP,max,del IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]

MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]

MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]

MAIN: Settl. t. MAIN: Settl. t.

IP,max,del IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]

MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]

MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]

MAIN: Settl. t. MAIN: Settl. t.

IP,max,del IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]

MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]

MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st. EXT
[ 005 211 ] 50Z0115A_EN

3-47 Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display

3-78 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Measured voltage values

The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P439 and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer needs to be set in the
P439.

According to the following formulae the P439 will determine the negative-sequence
voltage and positive-sequence voltage, based on the set phase sequence (alternative
terminology: rotary field):

Phase sequence A-B-C

(alternative terminology: clockwise rotating field)

1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A −G + a 2 ⋅ V B−G + a ⋅ VC−G
3
)
1
(
V pos = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B−G + a 2 ⋅ V C−G
3
)
Phase sequence A-C-B
(alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating field)

1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B−G + a 2 ⋅ V C−G
3
)
1
(
V pos = ⋅ V A −G + a 2 ⋅ VB−G + a ⋅ V C−G
3
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-79

3 Operation
(continued)

VA-G COMP
VB-G

VC-G

VP-G,max VPG,max

VP-G,min VPG,min

(VPG)/3 MAIN: (VPG)/3

VA-B

VB-C

VC-A

MAIN: Phase
sequence COMP
[ 010 049 ]

1
2 VPP,max
VPP,max
1...2 VPP,min VPP,min

1: A-B-C
2: A-C-B
Uneg Vneg

Vpos Vpos

47Z0106 C_EN

3-48 Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages as well as the negative-sequence and positive-
sequence voltages

3-80 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-49 Measured operating data - phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-81

3 Operation
(continued)

3-50 Measured operating data - neutral-point displacement voltage

3-51 Measured operating data – reference voltage

3-82 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Measured values for

power, active power factor,
and angle
Calculation of these derived operating quantities is subject to the following conditions:

Values for active and reactive power will always be calculated and displayed as these
quantities are required for the subsequent energy measurement. Greater deviations
in measurements may occur with low phase currents or a critical power factor value
(see Chapter "Technical Data").
The active power factor will be calculated only if the apparent power value exceeds
5% of the nominal apparent power Snom.
Load angles will be displayed only if the respective phase current exceeds 0.1 Inom
(0.025 Inom with the 'Dynamic range' set to Sensitive) and if the phase-to-ground
voltage exceeds 1.5 V.
The angle between the measured values for the residual current and the neutral-point
displacement voltage will only be displayed if the residual current exceeds 0.02 IN,nom
and the neutral-point displacement voltage exceeds 1.5 V.
The setting at M A I N : M e a s . d i r e c t i o n P , Q may be changed from 'Standard' to
'Opposite' if the user wishes to have the following measured operating data displayed
with the opposite sign (see figure 3-52):

MAIN: Active power P p.u

MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u.
MAIN: Active power P prim.
MAIN: Reac. power Q prim.
This setting parameter does not influence the remaining measured operating values. It
must be noted that by inverting the sign will only affect the display of measured operating
data, all protection functions will still apply internally non-inverted measured values.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-83

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Active
power factor
[ 004 054 ]
MAIN: Inom C.T. MAIN: Meas.
prim. direction P,Q
[ 010 001 ] [ 006 096 ]
MAIN: Active
MAIN: Vnom V.T. power P p.u.
prim. X X . Y [ 004 051 ]
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN: Reac. power
> 0.05 Snom X X . Y Q p.u.
[ 004 053 ]
+ X X . Y MAIN: Active
+ power P prim.
+ X X . Y [ 004 050 ]
1: Standard MAIN: Reac. power
(Y = 1) Q prim.
[ 004 052 ]
MAIN: Dynamic 2: Opposite
range I (Y = -1)
[ 031 082 ]

IA > 0.1 Inom

IB > 0.1 Inom

IC > 0.1 Inom

VA-G > 1.5 V

VB-G > 1.5 V MAIN: Angle VPG/

& C IN p.u.
[ 005 072 ]

VC-G > 1.5 V

MAIN: Angle VPG
vs. IN
[ 005 009 ]
IN > 0.02 INnom
MAIN: Load angle
& C phi A p.u
VN-G > 1.5 V [ 005 073 ]

MAIN: Load angle

phi A
[ 004 055 ]

MAIN: Load angle

& C phi B p.u
[ 005 074 ]

MAIN: Load angle

phi B
[ 004 056 ]

C MAIN: Load angle

& phi C p.u
[ 005 075 ]

MAIN: Load angle

phi C
[ 004 057 ]

C MAIN: Angle phi N

& p.u.
[ 005 076 ]

MAIN: Angle phi N

[ 004 072 ]

MAIN: Hardware
fault C
306 018

MAIN: Appar.
power S p.u.
[ 005 026 ]

MAIN: Appar.
power S prim.
[ 005 025 ]

49Z6404 A_EN

3-52 Measured operating data - power, active power factor, and angle. Not displayed in the diagram: With the 'Dynamic range' set to Sensitive
the condition for phase currents changes from 'exceeding 0.1 Inom' to 'exceeding 0.025 Inom'.

3-84 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Phase relation IN
The P439 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and measured
residual current are coherent. If the phase displacement between the two currents is
≤ 45°, then the indication ‘Equal phase’ is displayed.

3-53 Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current

Frequency
The P439 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to exceed
a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for the frequency to be determined.

>0.65*Vnom

MAIN: Hardware
fault C
306 018

MAIN: Frequency f
VA-G + C p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
VB-G -

f MAIN: Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]

49Z6405 A_EN

3-54 Frequency measurement

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-85

3 Operation
(continued)

Active and reactive energy

output and input
The P439 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on the
primary active or reactive power.

There are two procedures available to determine active and reactive energy (at
M A I N : O p . m o d e e n e r g y c n t . ). If procedure 1 is selected, active and reactive
energy are determined every 2 s (approximately). If procedure 2 is selected, active and
reactive energy are determined every 100 ms (approximately). In this way higher
accuracy is achieved. Whenever the maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVArh
is exceeded, a counter is incremented and the determination of the energy output is
restarted. The value that exceeded the range is transferred to the new cycle.

3-86 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

The total energy is calculated as follows:

Total energy = number of overflows ∗ 655.35 + current count

MAIN: Op. mode

energy cnt.
[ 010 138 ]

MAIN: Active power

P prim.
[ 004 050 ] MAIN: Act.energy
∫P(t) dt outp.prim
[ 005 061 ]
R

-∫P(t) dt MAIN: Act.energy

inp. prim
R [ 005 062 ]
MAIN: Reac. power
Q prim.
[ 004 052 ] MAIN: React.en.
∫Q(t) dt
MAIN: Reset outp. prim
meas.v.en.USER [ 005 063 ]
R
[ 003 032 ]

0 -∫Q(t) dt MAIN: React. en.

inp. prim
[ 005 064 ]
1 ≥1 R

0: don't execute
MAIN:
1: execute Overflow No.overfl.act.en.
out
Transfer [ 009 090 ]
MAIN: Rst
meas.v.ener. EXT
[ 005 212 ]
MAIN:
Overflow No.overfl.act.en.
inp
Transfer [ 009 091 ]

Overflow MAIN: No.ov/

fl.reac.en.out
[ 009 092 ]
Transfer

MAIN: No.ov/
Overflow fl.reac.en.inp
[ 009 093 ]
Transfer

49Z6401A_EN

3-55 Determining the active and reactive energy output and input

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-87

3 Operation
(continued)

Selection of the procedure

to determine energy output

Procedure Characteristics Applications

1 Determination of the active and reactive energy Constant load and slow load variations (no
every 2 s (approximately) significant load variations within 1 second).
Reduced system loading Phase angles below 70° (cos ϕ > 0.3 ).

2 Determination of the active and reactive energy Fast load variations

every 100 ms (approximately).
Phase angles below 70° (cos ϕ > 0.3 ).
Increased system loading

The 1° maximum phase-angle error of the P439 leads to greater errors in measurement
when the phase angle increases, as shown (for the range 0° ≤ ϕ < 90°) in the following
diagram.
Fehler

5%

2%

45° 70° Phasenwinkel ϕ

S8Z0401B

3-56 Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the P439

Error of measurement: approx. ± 2 % of the measured value for |cos ϕ| ≥ 0.7

approx. ± 5 % of the measured value for |cos ϕ| ≥ 0.3
where the whole measuring range is -180° ≤ ϕ ≤ 180°.

3-88 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

For phase angles ϕ with |cosϕ| < 0.3, or when the error of measurement resulting from
the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external counters should be used to
determine the energy output.

3.11.5 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions

The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by

configuring the available function range. By including the desired device functions in the
configuration and cancelling all the others, the user creates an individually configured
device adapted to the specific application. Parameters, signals and measured values of
cancelled device functions are not displayed on the local control panel. Functions of
general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions
(MAIN) cannot be cancelled.

Cancelling a device
function
The following conditions must be met before a device function can be cancelled or
removed:

The device function must be disabled.

None of the functions of the device function to be cancelled are assigned to a binary
input.
None of the signals of the device function are assigned to a binary output or to an
LED indicator.

No functions of the device function being cancelled are selected in a list setting.

If the above conditions are met, proceed through the 'Configuration' branch of the menu
tree to access the setting relevant to the device function to be cancelled. If, for example,
the "LIMIT" function group is to be cancelled, access the L I M I T : F u n c t i o n g r o u p
L I M I T parameter and set its value to 'Without'. To re-include the "LIMIT" function in
the device configuration, access the same parameter and set its value to 'With'.

The device function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined
by the function group designation (example: "LIMIT"). In the following sections of this
manual, it is presumed that the device function being described is included in the
configuration.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-89

3 Operation
(continued)

Enabling or disabling a
device function
Besides cancelling device functions from the configuration, it is also possible to disable
the device via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. The device may be disabled
or enabled through binary signal inputs only if the functions
M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T and M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T are
both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the
condition is interpreted as 'Protection externally enabled'. If the triggering signals of the
binary signal inputs are implausible – such as when they both have a logic value of ‘ 1 ’ –
then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.

Note: If the protection function is disabled via a binary signal input that is
configured for M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T , then no M A I N :
B l o c k e d / f a u l t y signal is issued.

3-57 Enabling or disabling a protection function

3-90 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.6 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)

The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur when
transformers or machines are switched on or connected. It will then block the following
functions:

Overcurrent and underimpedance fault detection logic of distance protection.

Backup overcurrent-time protection (backup DTOC)
Definite-time overcurrent protection
Inverse-time overcurrent protection

The inrush stabilization function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the
second harmonic current components to the fundamental. If this ratio exceeds the set
threshold, then the inrush stabilization function operates. Another settable current
trigger blocks inrush stabilization if the current exceeds this trigger. The setting of the
operating mode determines whether inrush stabilization will operate phase-selectively or
across all phases.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-91

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Op. rush

restr. PSx
[ * ]

0
1
2

0: Without
&
1: Not phase-
selective
2: Phase-
selective
MAIN: Inrush
stabil. trigg
306 014

MAIN: I>lift rush

& C restr PSx
MAIN: Protection [ * ]
active MAIN: Rush restr.
306 001 A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
&
IA
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
&
IB
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
&
IC

0.1 Inom

MAIN: Rush
I(2fn)/I(fn) PSx
[ * ]

fnom
I(2*fn)/I(fn)
2*fnom

fnom

2*fnom I(2*fn)/I(fn)

fnom

2*fnom I(2*fn)/I(fn)

Parameter MAIN: Op. rush MAIN: I>lift rush MAIN: Rush

restr. PSx restr PSx I(2fn)/I(fn) PSx
set 1 017 097 017 095 017 098
set 2 001 088 001 085 001 091
set 3 001 089 001 086 001 092
set 4 001 090 001 087 001 093

12Z6206 A_EN

3-58 Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)

3-92 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.7 Function Blocks

If function blocks are included in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations can
be prevented – independently of the switching status at the time – by an external signal,
"CB drive not ready" for example, or by a trip command from an external protection
device.

Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output

signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the function blocks 1
and 2 by setting a '1 out of n' parameter. The input signal from the function blocks starts
a timer stage. Once this has elapsed, the M A I N : F c t . b l o c k . X a c t i v e signal is
issued.

3-59 Function Blocks

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-93

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.8 Multiple Blocking

Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined by selecting 'm out of n' parameters.
The selected functions may then be blocked by way of an appropriately configured
binary signal input.

3-60 Multiple Blocking

3-94 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.9 Blocked / Faulty (OUT OF SERVICE)

If the protection functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by continuous

illumination of the amber H 2 LED indicator on the local control panel and by a signal
from an output relay configured for M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y . In addition functions
can be selected that will issue the M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y signal by setting a ‘m
out of n’ parameter. (The signal M AIN : Bl o c k e d /fa u l ty is coupled to the activation
of the LED labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE'.)

3-61 'Blocked/faulty' signal

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-95

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.10 Coupling Between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal

Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that represents
the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the “Closed” position
signal is made by the setting M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B c l o s e d . As a result, the CB
status signal needs to be assigned to one binary signal input only if this coupling is
implemented.

3-62 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal

3-96 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.11 Close Command

The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by a
setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input on the P439.
The close command issued using parameters or through a binary signal input is
executed only if there is no trip command 1 present and that no trip has been issued by
a protection device operating in parallel. Moreover, with the setting of
M A I N : R C i n h i b . b y C B c l o s e to “Yes”, the close command is not executed if
there is a "CB closed" position signal present. The duration of the close command is
settable.

Close command counter

The close commands are counted. The close command counter can be reset either
individually or together with the trip command counters.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-97

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Gen. trip

signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Parallel
trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]

MAIN: RC inhib.by
CB close
[ 015 042 ]

0
1
0: No
1: Yes

MAIN: En.man.clos. MAIN: Rel.t. enab.

cmd.USER man.cmd
[ 003 105 ] [ 003 088 ]

0
1 t MAIN: Man. cl.
1 cmd.enabl.
[ 039 113 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Man. close
cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]

0
1

0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Man. close
command
500ms [ 037 068 ]

MAIN: Man.cl.cmd. MAIN: Man. close

enabl.EXT cmd. EXT
[ 041 023 ] [ 041 022 ]
MAIN: Man. close
cmd. EXT
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN: Close
C cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009 ]
1
ARC: Close t
command
303 021

MAIN: Reset c. cl/

tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]

0 MAIN: No. close

+ commands
[ 009 055 ]
1
MAIN: General 0: don't execute R
reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Rst.c.cl./
tripc. EXT
[ 005 210 ]
49Z64CKA_EN

3-63 Close command

3-98 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.12 Multiple Signaling

Multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR
operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is
defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding
multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated. The stored
signal is reset by the following actions:

General reset
Latching reset
LED indicators reset
A command received through the communication interface.

If the multiple signal is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal will follow the
updated signal.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-99

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Inp.asg.
mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal n
MAIN: Mult.
Selected signal sig. 1 active
[ 221 017 ]
MAIN: Mult.
sig. 1 stored
MAIN: Inp.asg. S1 1 [ 221 054 ]
mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ] R1

Selected signal MAIN: Mult.

sig. 2 active
[ 221 053 ]

COMM1: Reset
mult. sig. 1 MAIN: Mult.
[ --- --- ] sig. 2 stored
S1 1 [ 221 055 ]
COMM1: Reset
mult. sig. 2 R1
[ --- --- ]

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP: Latching
reset
[ 040 088 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020

49Z64FMA_EN

3-64 Multiple signaling

3-100 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.13 Ground Fault Signaling

If a ground fault has been detected by either the GFDSS function (ground fault direction
determination by steady-state values) or the TGFD function (transient ground fault
direction determination), the P439 analyzes the phase-to-ground voltages and identifies
the phase on which the ground fault has occurred.

The P439 will first determine the lowest phase-to-ground voltage. Then it will check
whether the other two phase-to-ground voltages exceed a threshold of 0.2 Vnom.
In addition, the two higher phase-to-ground voltages must exceed the lowest phase-to-
ground voltage by a factor of 1.5. If these conditions are met, a ground fault signal is
issued for the phase with the lowest phase-to-ground voltage.

During a ground fault in Petersen coil-compensated power systems, the faulted phase
determination process is stopped as soon as the faulted phase is determined. Then
there will be no further measuring done until the end of the ground fault. Thus erroneous
signaling at the end of the ground fault is avoided, as the voltages of the healthy phases
may transiently fulfill the faulty phase criteria.

B C B C B C

N N N

(G)
(G) (G)

A A A

a) under -compensation b) tuned circuit c) over-compensation

( A-B-C-A) ( A-C-B-A)
49Z6409 A_EN

3-65 Transient condition of ground potential from faulted phase A back to the neutral point in Petersen coil-grounded systems (Petersen coil
and ground-capacitance of the system form a 50 Hz resonant circuit)

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-101

3 Operation
(continued)

3-66 Phase-selective ground fault signaling

3-102 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Ground fault signals generated either by ground fault direction determination using
steady-state values (GFDSS) or transient ground fault direction determination (TGFD)
are grouped together to form multiple signals.

3-67 Multiple ground fault signals

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-103

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.14 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic

Starting signals
The starting signals of the distance protection and backup overcurrent time protection
functions are linked to form common starting signals. The number of general starting
signals (GS) is counted.

MAIN: General + MAIN: No. general

reset USER start.
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 000 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIST: General MAIN: General
starting starting
[ 036 240 ] [ 036 000 ]
BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]

DIST: Starting A
303 529
MAIN: Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
BUOC: IA>
triggered
304 750

DIST: Starting B MAIN: Starting B

303 530
[ 036 002 ]
BUOC: IB>
triggered
304 751

DIST: Starting C MAIN: Starting C

303 531
[ 036 003 ]
BUOC: IC>
triggered
304 752

DIST: Starting N MAIN: Starting N

303 535
[ 036 004 ]

BUOC: SN
304 757

49Z6402A_EN

3-68 Starting signals

3-104 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Trip command
The P439 provides two trip commands. The functions required to trip can be selected by
setting a 'm out of n' parameter independently for each of the two trip commands. The
minimum trip command time is settable. The trip signals are present only as long as the
conditions for the signal are met.

DIST: Trip signal MAIN: Trip

zone 1 signal
[ 035 072 ] 306 025

PSIG: Trip
enable
305 157

PSIG: Not ready

[ 037 028 ]

DIST: Trip signal

Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]

PSIG: Trip 1
305 155

PSIG: Trip 2
305 156

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG: Trip V<
305 158
BUOC: Trip
signal
[ 036 014 ]

ARC: Test HSR

A-B-C int.
303 022
ARC: External
trip
303 023
ARC: 3p final
trip
[ 036 043 ]

MAIN: 3-pole
trip
306 013

BUOC: Operating
mode
[ 014 000 ]
2: With ARC, 3p HSR

3: With ARC, 1/3p.

HSR

49Z6403A_EN

3-69

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-105

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Trip cmd.

blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Gen. Trip
MAIN: Trip signal 1
signal [ 036 005 ]
306 025

MAIN: Trip signal MAIN: Gen. trip

zone 2-6 command 1
[ 035 073 ]
[ 036 071 ]

MAIN: Min.dur.
trip cmd. 1
[ 021 003 ]
MAIN: Fct.assig.
trip cmd.1
[ 021 001 ]
MAIN: Man. Trip
signal
[ 034 017 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal n
MAIN: Trip
signal 1
306 017

MAIN: Fct.assig.
trip cmd.2
[ 021 002 ]

m out of n

MAIN: Gen. trip

command
[ 035 071 ]

MAIN: Gen. Trip

Selected signals signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
command 2
[ 036 022 ]
MAIN: Min.dur.
MAIN: General trip cmd. 2 MAIN: Gen. Trip
starting [ 021 004 ] signal
[ 036 000 ] [ 036 251 ]

49Z6408 A_EN

3-70 Forming the trip commands

Note: Parameter [035 073] indicates the trip signals from all zones as zone 2 trip signals. As of the next device version the display text
will be changed to D I S T : T r i p s i g . z o n e 2 - 8 .

3-106 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Direct transfer trip

Direct transfer tripping independently of the protective signaling scheme logic (function
group PSIG) is possible by using the following input signal:

MAIN: Transfer trip. EXT

This feature makes it possible to use direct transfer tripping and any classical scheme
logic (such as permissive or blocking schemes) concurrently.

Direct transfer trip

As of version -611 there are special send signals for the direct transfer trip of the switch
at the remote end:

MAIN: Send transfer trip

These send signals were designed for applications with a bi-directional transfer tripping
so as to avoid that, for instance, a transfer trip signal is sent only because such a
transfer trip signal was received from the remote station.

With a 3-pole trip, the signal M A I N : s e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p is sent as soon as the

signal M A I N : G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d 1 has been issued, except when this trip
command was issued when the signal M A I N : t r a n s f e r t r i p . E X T was received
(see figure 3-71).

Signal assignment Kxx

: Signal assignment Kxx:
MAIN: Send transfer MAIN: Send transfer
trip trip
[001 207] [001 207]

Signal assignment Kxx: Signal assignment Kxx:

VN
MAIN: Transfer trip. MAIN: Transfer trip. &
EXT VN EXT
[120 046] [120 046]

MAIN: Gen. trip

command 1 S 11
[036 071]
R 1

P439 P439

49Z6407A_EN

3-71 3-pole transfer trip

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-107

3 Operation
(continued)

Manual trip command

A three-pole manual trip command may be issued via a setting parameter or from an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The manual trip is only executed, however,
if it is included in the selection of the possible functions that will bring about tripping.

3-72 Manual trip command

3-108 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Blocking of the trip

commands
The trip commands can be blocked via a setting parameter or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for all trip commands. The
trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands are both blocked, it is
indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control
panel and by a signal from an output relay configured to 'Blocked/faulty'.

3-73 Blocking of the trip commands

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-109

3 Operation
(continued)

Counter of trip commands

The trip commands are counted. The counters can be reset either individually or as a
group.

DIST: Trip signal MAIN: No. final

[ 036 009 ] + trip cmds.
[ 004 005 ]
R
BUOC: Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
ARC: Cycle
running
[ 037 000 ]
MAIN: Final trip
S1 1 1 100 ms [ 038 103 ]
R1
MAIN: Close command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN: Trip signal 1
303 021

MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked

[ 021 013 ]

MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 MAIN: No.

+ gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 036 071 ] [ 004 006 ]
R
MAIN: Gen. trip command 2 MAIN: No.
[ 036 022 ] + gen.trip cmds. 2
[ 009 050 ]
R
MAIN: Reset c. cl/
tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]

0
1
MAIN: General 0: don't execute
reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Rst.c.cl./
tripc. EXT
[ 005 210 ]
49Z64CJA_EN

3-74 Trip command counters

3-110 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.15 CB Trip Signal

The M A I N : C B t r i p i n t e r n a l signal is issued if the following conditions are met

simultaneously:

The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of '1' or the
selected trip command from the P439 is present.
At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of '1' is present.

The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, For this
task, one input needs to be configured for “CB trip enable ext.“ and another input for “CB
trip ext.“.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-111

3 Operation
(continued)

3-75 CB Trip Signal

3-112 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.16 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions

Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the
P439, the P439 first checks whether the switch command may be executed. A switch
command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the
interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic
for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each
control direction (Open/Close). Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock
equations to operate with or without station interlock. The check of bay or station
interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units
within a bay. If the station interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each
switching unit and each control direction (see “Control and Monitoring of Switchgear
Units”).

If “Local” has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks may be
cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-113

3 Operation
(continued)

3-76 General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or cancelling the interlocks

3-114 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-77 Rejection of the switching commands

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-115

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.17 Monitoring the Switchgear Motors

For bays with direct motor drive control of load disconnecting switches, isolating links or
grounding switches, a monitoring function is provided to protect motors from
overheating.

The number of switching operations within a set monitoring period is counted. If the
number of switching operations within the monitoring period exceeds the set limit, the
signal M A I N : M o n . m o t . d r i v e s t r . is issued. For the duration of the set cooling
time, no control commands to motor-driven switchgear units will be executed. Once the
set cooling time has elapsed, the control commands are enabled again.

DEV01: Start MAIN: No. motor

runn.time mon. + drive op.
307 008
[ 221 025 ]
R
MAIN: Perm.No.mot.
drive op
MAIN: General [ 221 027 ]
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute COMP
MAIN: General n
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
MAIN: Mon. mot.
n>No. permiss. oper. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]

n = 1

MAIN: Mon.time
mot.drives
[ 221 026 ]

MAIN: Cool.time
mot.drives t
[ 221 028 ]

19Z6417A_EN

3-78 Monitoring the switchgear unit motor drives

3-116 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.18 Communication Error

If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted, a

'Communication error' signal will be issued. This signal will also be issued if
communication module A is not fitted.

3-79 Communication Error

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-117

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.19 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization

The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct time-tagging, the date and time
need to be set in the P439.

The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately

configured binary signal input. The P439 evaluates the rising edge. This will set the
clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.

3-80 Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input

3-118 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Synchronization source
The P439 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full
time)
o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time)
o IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
o Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see figure 3-80 and previous
paragraph

With older device versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock synchronization
was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated triggering. No conflicts have to
be taken into account as long as synchronization sources (communication master,
IRIG-B and minute pulse source) operate at the same time of day. Should the
synchronization sources operate with a different time basis unwanted step changes in
the internal clock may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day synchronization
is often used so as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface even if and while
the SCADA communication is out of service.

With the current device versions a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in the above.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as
time synchronization telegrams (or minute signal pulses) are received within a time-out
period set at M A I N : T i m e s y n c . t i m e - o u t . The backup source is required if after
the set time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect
time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become
defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.

Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is
blocked.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-119

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.20 Resetting Actions

Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following types of resetting actions are possible:

Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only
the displays on the local control panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories
such as the fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local control
panel LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the local control panel.
By selecting the required function at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y further memories
may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting
parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-
by-step description in Chapter 6 "Local Control", section 'Reset'.)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 3 0 1 .)
Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant
memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset x.
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign
parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 3 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to
parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .)
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point
M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset
without any special configuration options.

General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

(M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.)
All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration
options.

Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then
they all have equal priority.

In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.

3-120 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access
especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them
to a function key.

Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is

assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is
simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)
Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two
menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . M e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to
include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g.
O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition
(L O C : F c t . M e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.
The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a
resetting action through L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y .

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]

0
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute

MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]

0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
≥1 MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]

12Z6115 A_EN

3-81 General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-121

3 Operation
(continued)

LOC: Reset key OP_RC: Reset record.

active ≥1 EXT
310 024 & [ 005 213 ]

LOC: Fct. reset

key
[ 005 251 ]

m out of n

OP_RC: Reset record.

EXT [005 213]

MAIN: Group
reset 1 USER
[ * ]

1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Group
reset 1 EXT
[ * ]

MAIN: Fct.assign.
reset 1
[ * ]

m out of n

x MAIN: Group MAIN: Group MAIN: Fct.

reset 1 USER reset 1 EXT assign. reset 1
OP_RC: Reset record. 1 005 253 005 209 005 248
EXT [005 213] 2 005 254 005 252 005 249

12Z61RMB_EN

3-82 "CLEAR" key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the
reset signal OP_RC: Reset record. EXT); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:
- [004 140] TGFD: Reset signal EXT
- [005 210] MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
- [005 211] MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT
- [005 212] MAIN: Rst meas.v.ener. EXT
- [005 240] MT_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 241] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 242] GF_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 243] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 244] ARC: Reset counters EXT
- [005 245] GFDSS: Reset counters EXT
- [005 246] TGFD: Reset counters EXT
- [005 247] CBM: Reset meas.val. EXT
- [005 255] MAIN: General reset EXT
- [006 054] COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT
- [006 074] ASC: Reset counters EXT
- [006 075] f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT
- [006 076] MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT
- [036 087] MEASI: Reset output EXT
- [038 061] THERM: Reset replica EXT
- [040 015] OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
- [040 138] MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
- [217 004] COUNT: Reset EXT

3-122 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.21 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications

Channels

There are two communication channels available. These physical communications

channels may be assigned to communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.

If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2, then the

settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to
communications channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit
data to and from the P439 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC
interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".

3-83 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-123

3 Operation
(continued)

3.11.22 Test Mode

If tests are run on the P439, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.

3-84 Setting the test mode

3-124 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.12 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)

With the P439, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user may
switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection
function.

Selecting the parameter

subset
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or binary
signal input) may be selected via the function setting P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R or
via the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l v i a u s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the
parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting
P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals.
The parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning
the logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e .

Selecting the parameter

subset via binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P439
first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter
subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the
function setting will be active. The P439 also checks whether the signals present at the
binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset selection. This is only true
when only one binary signal input is set to a logic level of ' 1 '. If more than one signal
input is set to a logic level of ' 1 ', then the parameter subset previously selected remains
active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is
the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic level of ' 0 '), then the stored hold time is
started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset
remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of ' 1 ', the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no
signal input with a logic level of ' 1 ', the parameter subset selected via the function
parameter becomes active.

If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of ' 1 ' is present at any of the
binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter
subset selected via the function parameter will become active once the stored time has
elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored hold timer
stage is running.

Parameter subset selection may also occur during a general starting condition. In this
case, however, the settings for distance measurement and impedance-time
characteristics remain unchanged. They are not updated until the general starting
condition ends. When subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum
inherent delay of approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.

Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-125

3 Operation
(continued)

3-85 Activating the parameter subsets

3-126 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.13 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)

Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P439 ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to malfunctions.

Tests during start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P439. If the P439 detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred.
No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P439 can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.

Cyclic tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory – the monitoring signal memory – along
with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording).

The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.

Signals
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
S F M O N : W a r n i n g . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is
detected.

3-86 Monitoring signals

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-127

3 Operation
(continued)

Device response
The response of the P439 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:

Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the
detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart – such as a fault in the hardware –, then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure.
A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm
restart sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial
interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked
but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary
because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is
corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state.
This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart.
In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that
the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the
cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring
signal memory.

3-128 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring signal memory

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to
eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about
device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 “Troubleshooting”.) Whether or not this
measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been
stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already
stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the
device will be blocked after the second warm restart.

In order to better monitor this behavior the parameter at

S F M O N : M o n . s i g . r e t e n t i o n is applied. This parameter may either be set to
‘blocked’ or to a time duration period (in hours).

The default for this timer stage is ‘blocked’ e.g. blocking of the protection device with two
identical faults occurs independent of the time evolved since the first fault monitoring
signal was issued.

The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device
if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because
the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the
monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. To defuse
this problem it is suggested to set the function parameter to a specific time duration
period so that blocking will only occur if the same fault occurs again within this time
period. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a warm restart.

Monitoring signal memory

time tag
The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-129

3 Operation
(continued)

3.14 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)

For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events,

a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The "operationally relevant" signals,
each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in
chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as
function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end
of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as
overloads, ground faults or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory
can be cleared/reset.

Counter for signals

relevant to system
operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.

OP_RC: Operat.
data record.
[ 003 024 ]

Operating memory
MAIN: Oper.-relev.
signal
306 024

MAIN: General
reset USER + OP_RC: No. oper.
[ 003 002 ] data sig.
[ 100 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 001 ]

0
1

0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMB_EN

3-87 Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation

3-130 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)

The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of 30 entries. If
more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the
SFMON: O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals
prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal
memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the
monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an 'm
out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring').

If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry causes the LED to
flash (on/off/on....).

The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries
in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the corresponding
test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The contents of the
monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual
entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local
control panel.

Monitoring signal counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
monitoring signal counter (MT_RC: N o . m o n i t . s i g n a l s ).

MT_RC: Mon. signal

record.
[ 003 001 ]

MAIN: Time tag

306 021

SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950

Select monit.
signal

MT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 SFMON: Overflow
≥1 MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC: No. monit.
1 ≥1 signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A_EN

3-88 Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-131

3 Operation
(continued)

3.16 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)

Overload duration
In the event of an overload, the P439 determines the overload duration. The overload
duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n
p r o g r e s s signal.

OL_RC: Record. OL_DA: Overload

in progress + duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A_EN

3-89 Overload duration

3-132 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Acquiring measured
overload data from the
thermal overload protection
Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protection’s measured
operating data. They are stored at the end of an overload event.

OL_RC: Record.
in progress C
[ 035 003 ]

THERM: Status OL_DA: Status

THERM replica THERM replica
[ 004 016 ] [ 004 147 ]
R

THERM: I OL_DA: Load

305 202
current THER
[ 004 058 ]
R

THERM: Object OL_DA: Object

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 137 ] [ 004 035 ]
R

THERM: Coolant OL_DA: Coolant

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 149 ] [ 004 036 ]
R

THERM: Pre-trip OL_DA: Pre-trip

time left t.leftTHERM
[ 004 139 ] [ 004 148 ]
R

THERM: Temp. OL_DA: Offset

offset replica THERM replica
[ 004 109 ] [ 004 154 ]
R

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A_EN

3-90 Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-133

3 Operation
(continued)

3.17 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)

Start of overload recording

An overload exists – and consequently overload recording begins – if at least the signal
T H E R M : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > is issued.

Counting overload events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.

OL_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Starting
k*Iref> +
[ 041 108 ]
R OL_RC: No. overload
MAIN: General [ 004 101 ]
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute

49Z64DXA_EN

3-91 Counting overload events

3-134 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Time tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are likewise
time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event
when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control
panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to
the onset of the overload) can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC
or communication interfaces.

Overload logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then
O L _ R C : O v e r l . m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal.

In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.

The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-135

3 Operation
(continued)

OL_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 003 ]

Signal 1 1 ≥1 + CT200 OL_RC: Overl. mem.

overflow
Signal 2 R [ 035 007 ]
1
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC: Overload
recording n
[ * ]

OL_RC: Overload
n
Measured value 1 recording n

Measured value 2 1 033 020

2 033 021
Measured value 3
Measured value n 3 033 022

MAIN: Time tag 4 033 023

306 021
5 033 024
& 6 033 025
FT_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 026
R 8 033 027
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]

1 ≥1
MAIN: General
reset USER 0: don't execute
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]

12Z6117 A_EN

3-92 Overload memory

3-136 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.18 Ground Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group GF_DA)

In the event of a ground fault, the P439 acquires the following measured ground fault
data:

Duration of ground fault recording

When ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) is
enabled
„ Ground fault duration as determined by steady state power evaluation or steady
state current evaluation
„ Neutral-point displacement voltage VNG as determined by steady state power
evaluation
„ Residual current IN
„ Active component of the residual current as determined by steady state power
evaluation
„ Reactive component of the residual current as determined by steady state power
evaluation
„ Filtered residual current as determined by steady state current evaluation.

Resetting measured
ground fault data
After pressing the reset key ‘C’ on the local control panel, the measured ground fault
data value is displayed as 'Not measured'. However, the values are not erased and can
continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.

Duration of ground fault

recording
The duration of ground fault recording is defined as the time between the start and end
of the G F _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.

GF_RC: Record. GF_DA: GF

in progress + recording time
[ 035 005 ] [ 009 100 ]
R

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 005 242 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
49Z64DWA_EN

3-93 Duration of ground fault recording

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-137

3 Operation
(continued)

3.18.1 Measured Ground Fault Data as determined by Steady-State Power

Evaluation

Ground fault duration

The ground fault duration is defined as the time between operation and dropout of the
G F D S S : V N G > trigger. However, a time is only output after the end of the ground
fault if the G F D S S : V N G > trigger has operated for at least the duration of set timer
stage G F D S S : t V N G > . Once G F D S S : t V N G > has elapsed the display of the
ground fault duration for the last ground fault is cleared automatically.

S1 1 & C
R1

GFDSS: VNG> GF_DA: GF

triggered + duration pow.meas
& [ 009 024 ]
304 151
GFDSS: GF (pow.) R
ready
[ 038 026 ] R

GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

50Z0144A_EN

3-94 Measurement and storage of the ground fault duration from steady state power evaluation

3-138 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Residual current
The residual current flowing when timer stage G F D S S : t V N G > elapses is stored in
memory. Also stored is the active and reactive component of the residual current
determined at the time when the directional decision is output. All measured values are
output as per-unit quantities referred to the device’s nominal current Inom.

Neutral-point displacement
voltage
The neutral-point displacement voltage present when timer stage G F D S S : t V N G >
elapses is stored in memory.

GFDSS: Grd. C
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]

GF_DA: Current
IN IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R

GFDSS: Direct.
forward/LS C
[ 009 035 ]
GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS: Current GF_DA: Curr.
IN,act p.u. IN,act p.u.
[ 004 045 ] [ 009 022 ]
& R

GFDSS: Curr. GF_DA: Curr.

IN,reac p.u. IN,reac p.u.
[ 004 046 ] [ 009 023 ]
R

GF_DA: Voltage
GFDSS: VNG VNG p.u.
304 150 [ 009 020 ]
R

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

50Z0145A_EN

3-95 Residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage as determined by steady state power evaluation

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-139

3 Operation
(continued)

3.18.2 Measured Ground Fault Data as determined by Steady-State Current

Evaluation

Ground fault duration

The ground fault duration is defined as the time between operation and dropout of the
G F D S S : I N > trigger. However, a time is only output after the end of the ground fault
if the G F D S S : I N > trigger has operated for at least the duration of the set operate
delay (G F D S S : O p e r a t e d e l a y IN). Once the operate delay has elapsed, the
display of the ground fault duration of the last ground fault is automatically cleared.

S1 1 & C
R1

GFDSS: IN> GF_DA: GF durat.

triggered + curr.meas.
304 158 [ 009 026 ]
R
R

GFDSS: Op. delay

IN elapsed
304 157
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

50Z0148A_EN

3-96 Measurement and storing the ground fault duration as determined by steady state current evaluation

3-140 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Residual current
The unfiltered and filtered residual currents that are present when the operate delay
elapses (G F D S S : O p e r a t e d e l a y IN) are stored.

GFDSS: Op. delay

IN elapsed C
304 157

GF_DA: Current IN
IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R

GF_DA: Curr. IN
GFDSS: 2IN filt. p.u.
filtered [ 009 025 ]
304 159
R

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: ausführen
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

50Z0151A_EN

3-97 Ground fault as determined by steady state current evaluation

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-141

3 Operation
(continued)

3.19 Ground Fault Recording (Function Group GF_RC)

A ground fault exists and therefore ground fault recording begins if at least one of the
following conditions is met:

A ground fault has been detected by ground fault direction determination using
steady-state values (GFDSS).
A ground fault has been detected by transient ground fault direction determination
(TGFD).

Counting ground fault

events
Ground fault events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.

MAIN: Ground fault GF_RC: Record. in

[ 041 087 ] ≥1 progress
[ 035 005 ]
MAIN: Gnd. fault
forw./LS
[ 041 088 ]
MAIN: Gnd. fault
backw./BS
[ 041 089 ]

MAIN: General
reset USER + GF_RC: No. ground
[ 003 002 ] faults
1: execute [ 004 100 ]
≥1 R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
50Z01B8A_EN

3-98 Counting ground fault events

3-142 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Time tagging
The date of each ground fault event is stored. A ground fault’s individual start or end
signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to ground fault events
when such a ground fault begins can be read out from the ground fault memory on the
local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time
information (relative to the onset of the ground fault) that is assigned to the signals can
be retrieved from the ground fault memory or through the PC or communication
interfaces.

Ground fault logging

Protection signals issued during a ground fault event are logged in chronological order
with reference to the specific event. A total of eight ground faults, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile (NV) ground fault
memories. After eight ground fault events have been logged, the oldest ground fault log
will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than
199 start or end signals have occurred during a single ground fault, then
F T _ R C : G F m e m o r y o v e r f l o w is stored as the last signal.

In addition to the signals, the measured ground fault data will also be entered in the
ground fault memory.

The ground fault logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-143

3 Operation
(continued)

GF_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 005 ]

Signal 1 ≥1 + CT200 GF_RC: GF memory

1 overflow
Signal 2 R [ 035 006 ]
1
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 GF_RC: Ground
flt.record. n
[ * ]

GF_RC: Ground
n flt.record. n
Measured value 1
1 033 010
Measured value 2
Measured value 3 2 033 011

Measured value n 3 033 012

MAIN: Time tag 4 033 013

306 021
5 033 014
& 6 033 015
FT_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 016
R 8 033 017
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]

0
1 ≥1
0: don't execute
MAIN: General 1: execute
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]

12Z6141 A_EN

3-99 Ground fault memory

3-144 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)

When there is a primary system fault, the P439 collects the following measured fault
data:

Running time
Fault duration (short-circuit current)
Fault current
Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage)
Fault impedance (short-circuit impedance)
Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of line reactance and in Ω
Fault angle
Fault distance
Ground fault current
Ground fault angle
Fault location in km or percentage of the protected line
Load data at end of fault

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-145

3 Operation
(continued)

Running time and fault

duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
F T _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.

MAIN: General FT_DA: Running

starting + time
[ 036 000 ] [ 004 021 ]
R

FT_RC: Record. FT_DA: Fault

in progress + duration
[ 035 000 ] [ 008 010 ]
R

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

49Z64DMA_EN

3-100 Running time and fault duration

3-146 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Fault data acquisition time

The setting at F T _ D A : S t a r t d a t a a c q u . P S x determines the point during a
fault at which acquisition of fault data takes place. The following settings are possible:

End of fault
Acquisition at the end of the fault.
Trigger/Trip/End
Acquisition at the following points:
„ When an appropriately configured binary signal input is triggered during a general
starting state.
„ When a general trip signal is issued.
„ At the end of the fault.

The setting at F T _ D A : O u t p . f l t . l o c a t . P S x determines the conditions under

which calculation and output of the fault location occur. The following settings are
possible:

'Always'
Calculation and output of the fault location always occurs if the other measured fault
data are also being determined.
'Only after trip t1'
Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the P439 decides in favor of a trip
in impedance zone 1 with standard reach (non-extended zone).
'Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze'
Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the P439 decides in favor of a trip
in impedance zone 1 with standard and extended reach.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-147

3 Operation
(continued)

3-101 Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output

3-148 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Acquisition of fault data

(short circuit data)
The fault data (short-circuit data) are determined using the measured values Imeas and
Vmeas selected by the distance protection function if the fault is detected by distance
protection. One phase current is selected as the fault current in accordance with the
selected measuring loop. In the case of multi-phase starting, this is the current of the
leading phase in the cycle. When measuring voltage Vmeas < 0.2 V the set angle α is
used for fault reactance calculation. Then the set angle α is also displayed as the fault
loop angle. The primary fault reactance is calculated from the per-unit fault reactance
using the nominal data for the set primary current and voltage transformers.

The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been selected
for measurement by the distance protection function. The geometric sum of the three
phase currents is displayed as the ground fault current. The ground fault angle is the
phase displacement between the ground fault current and the selected measuring
voltage.

If the fault is detected by the backup overcurrent-time protection function, then only the
fault current can be determined. The maximum phase current is displayed.

Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and Vnom.
If the measured or calculated values are outside the acceptable measuring range, the
‘Overflow’ indication will be displayed.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-149

3 Operation
(continued)

FT_DA: Output
meas. values C 1,2
305 075

MAIN: Inom C.T.

prim.
[ 010 001 ]

MAIN: Vnom V.T.

prim.
[ 010 002 ]

DIST: Select.
meas.loop PG C 2
303 543

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ] FT_DA: Fault
1,3,4
1 current P p.u.
BUOC: Starting [ 004 025 ]
[ 036 013 ] 2
R

FT_DA: Flt.volt.
1 1 PG/PP p.u.
[ 004 026 ]
R
IA 2
IB Imax FT_DA: Fault loop
IC 1 angle P
[ 004 024 ]
3 R

FT_DA: Fault
4 1 impedance, sec
[ 004 023 ]
R
DIST: Select. 2 ... 3
meas.loop A-G 1
303 537 1 FT_DA: Fault
1
reactance,sec.
DIST: Select. 4 [ 004 028 ]
meas.loop B-G 2 R
303 538

DIST: Select. FT_DA: Fault

meas.loop C-G 3 1 react., prim.
303 539 [ 004 029 ]
R
DIST: Select.
meas.loop A-B 1
303 540
FT_DA: Fault loop
2 angle N
DIST: Select. [ 004 048 ]
meas.loop B-C 2 R
303 541

DIST: Select. FT_DA: Fault

meas.loop C-A 3 2 curr. N p.u.
303 542 [ 004 049 ]
R
1
2
3
FT_DA: Meas. loop
1 ... 3 selected
[ 004 079 ]

< 0.2 V

DIST: Vmeas 1
303 546
2

1
DIST: α
2
MAIN: General
reset USER 1 ... 2
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

49Z6420A_EN

3-102 Acquisition of fault data (short circuit data)

3-150 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Acquisition of fault location

In order to determine the fault location as a percentage of the line length and in km, the
value of the line reactance, which corresponds to 100% of the monitored line section, as
well as the corresponding line length in km, must be set.

FT_DA: Line
length PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA: Line
reactance PSx
[ * ]

FT_DA: Outp. C
fault location
305 051

FT_DA: Fault
FT_DA: Fault location
reactance,sec. [ 004 022 ]
[ 004 028 ] R

MAIN: General FT_DA: Fault

reset USER locat. percent
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 027 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

Parameter FT_DA: Line FT_DA: Line

length PSx reactance PSx
set 1 010 005 010 012
set 2 010 006 010 013
set 3 010 007 010 014
set 4 010 008 010 015
49Z64DQA_EN

3-103 Acquisition of fault location

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-151

3 Operation
(continued)

Acquisition of load data

In addition to fault data and fault location, the following load data are determined when
the general starting signal of distance protection drops out:

Load impedance
Load angle
Residual current

The same measuring loop used to determine fault impedance is used to determine load
impedance and load angle. The load current and the voltage must exceed the
thresholds 0.1 Inom and 0.1 Vnom , respectively, in order for the load data to be
determined. If the thresholds are not reached or if the general starting signal of distance
protection was shorter than 60 ms, the message ‘Not measured’ will be displayed.

3-152 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: General 1
starting
[ 036 240 ]

60 ms 0

S1 1
R1

S C 1
DIST: Select. &
meas.loop A-G R
303 537

& S C 2
DIST: Select.
meas.loop B-G R
303 538

S C 3
DIST: Select. &
meas.loop C-G
303 539 R

DIST: Select. & S C 4

meas.loop A-B
303 540 R

& S C 5
DIST: Select.
meas.loop
303 541
B-C R

DIST: Select. & S C 6

meas.loop C-A ≥ 0.1 Inom
303 542 R

DIST: IA-kG
303 601 &
1

DIST: IB-kG
303 602 2

DIST: IC-kG
≥ 0.1 Vnom
303 603 3

4
VA-G C

VB-G
5
FT_DA: Load
VC-G imped.post-flt.
6 [ 004 037 ]
R

1 ... 6 FT_DA: Load angle

IA post-flt.
[ 004 038 ]
IB R

FT_DA:
Resid.curr. post-
IC flt
[ 004 039 ]
R

IN

MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]

MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020

49A6421A_EN

3-104 Acquisition of load data

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-153

3 Operation
(continued)

Fault data reset

After pressing the reset key ‘C’ on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as "Not measured". However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.

3-154 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)

Start of fault recording

A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is present:

MAIN: General starting

MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2
FT_RC: Trigger

In addition, the user can set a logical "OR" combination of logic signals ('m out of n'
parameter) which appearance will trigger fault recording.

Fault counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-155

3 Operation
(continued)

FT_RC: Fct.
assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n

Selected signals

FT_RC: Trigger FT_RC: Trigger

EXT ≥1
[ 036 089 ] [ 037 076 ]

FT_RC: Trigger
USER FT_RC: Record.
[ 003 041 ]
trig active
[ 002 002 ]
0
1 0 1 min FT_RC: Record.
≥1 in progress
0: don't execute [ 035 000 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN: Gen. Trip
signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Gen. Trip
signal 2
[ 036 023 ]

MAIN: General FT_RC: No. of

+ faults
reset USER [ 004 020 ]
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ] FT_RC: No. system
+ disturb.
FT_RC: Reset [ 004 010 ]
record. USER R
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC: System
& ≥1 disturb. runn
ARC: Cycle running [ 035 004 ]
[ 037 000 ] & S1 1
R1

49Z6426 A_EN

3-105 Start of fault recording and fault counter

3-156 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a fault
when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the local control panel or
through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the
onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory
or through the PC or communication interfaces.

Fault recordings
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault times,
are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total of eight
faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-
volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault recording
will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199
start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then
F T _ R C : F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and
date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal F T _ R C : F a u l t y t i m e t a g is
generated.

In addition to the fault signals, the measured RMS fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.

The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-157

3 Operation
(continued)

FT_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC: Fault mem.
Signal 1 1 + CT200 overflow
[ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1
FT_RC: Fault
recording n
1 [ * ]

FT_RC: Pre-fault
time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC: Post-
fault time
[ 003 079 ]

n FT_RC: Fault
recording n
Fault memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001

3 033 002

Measured value 1 4 033 003

Measured value 2 5 033 004

Measured value 3 6 033 005

Measured value n 7 033 006

MAIN: Time tag 8 033 007
306 021

MAIN: General &

reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]

FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]

1 1: execute
0: don’t execute
1: execute
12Z6161 B_EN

3-106 Fault memory

3-158 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Fault value recording

The following analog signals are recorded:

Phase currents
Phase-to-ground voltages
Residual current measured by the P439 at the T 4 transformer
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P439 at the T 90 transformer

The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of
16.4 s (at 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (at 60 Hz) is available for recording. This period can be
divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be
set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set
maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording
time is reached.

The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording
time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a
sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.

If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are
overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the
last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.

The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
communication interfaces.

When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-159

3 Operation
(continued)

FT_RC: Record.
in progress C
[ 035 000 ]

FT_RC: Max.
recording time
[ 003 075 ]

FT_RC: Pre-fault
time
[ 003 078 ]

FT_RC: Post-
fault time
[ 003 079 ]

IA Analog channel 1
R

IB Analog channel 2
R

IC Analog channel 3
R

VA-G Analog channel 4

R

VB-G Analog channel 5

R

VC-G
Analog channel 6
R

IN Analog channel 7
R

VN-G Analog channel 8

R

FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]

49Z6427 A_EN

3-107 Fault value recording

3-160 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.22 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST)

Disabling or enabling
distance protection
Distance protection can be disabled or enabled via parameter settings (see
figure 3-108).

3.22.1 Fault detection logic

The fault detection logic in distance protection serves to detect short-circuits phase-
selectively. Fault detection logic is divided into the following areas:

Overcurrent detection
Ground fault detection
Undervoltage detection
Underimpedance detection

The fault detection decisions of the individual areas are linked by the fault detection
logic.

Short-circuit currents that are greater than the maximum operating load currents can be
detected by the overcurrent detection logic. Undervoltage detection logic is provided for
short circuits that cannot be identified by overcurrent detection. In order to control
difficult conditions for fault detection, the P439 is also equipped with a highly angle-
dependent ‘true’ underimpedance detection logic function. Ground fault detection logic
distinguishes between grounded and ungrounded faults.

The fault detection logic starts the timer stages of the trigger levels and – as a function of
the phase-selective fault detection decision – selects the measuring loops in which the
fault impedances are determined. The fault detection logic is blocked if one of the
following conditions is met:

The protection function is disabled using setting parameters or appropriately

configured binary signal inputs.
Monitoring (VT supervision) detects a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.

If distance protection is blocked, the user may switch to backup overcurrent-time

protection provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-161

3 Operation
(continued)

3-108 Fault detection blocking

3-162 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Overcurrent detection
Overcurrent fault detection monitors the phase currents for values in excess of the
threshold values I>> and I>>>. The I>> threshold can be set. I>>> is equal to 2 I>>.
The thresholds are identical for all three phases.

The output signals of the I>> trigger assume a logic value of ’ 1 ’ if the threshold is
exceeded in two consecutive half-waves. In the case of the I>>> trigger only one
half-wave must exceed the threshold for the output signals to assume a logic value of ‘1’.
Triggering of inrush stabilization prevents operation of the I>> trigger.

If I>> is exceeded in one phase, then it is sufficient for overcurrent detection if I>>> is
exceeded in the other phases. In this case the fault detection time is shortened since
there is no longer any need to wait for the second half-wave.

Evaluation of the trigger decisions is a function of the type of neutral-point treatment set
in the P439. If ‘isolated neutral/resonant grounding’ or ‘short-duration grounding’ is set,
then I>> overcurrent detection occurs in the phase(s) in which the I>> threshold is
exceeded. With the setting ‘low-impedance grounding’ the following condition must also
be satisfied:

2
I≥ ⋅I
3 max

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-163

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding

2: Isol./
res.w.start.PG

3: Isol./res.w/o
st. PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.

MAIN: Rush restr.

A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
DIST: I>>
DIST: Starting C PSx
blocked
303 500
[ * ]

IA
IB
IC

DIST: I>>
triggered
303 597

I>>> = 2*I>>

DIST: I>>>
triggered
303 501

COMP
(2/3)*Imax

Imax

DIST: IA>>
triggered
303 511

DIST: IB>>
triggered
303 512

DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513
* Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt. DIST: I>>
treat. PSx PSx
set 1 010 048 010 054
set 2 001 076 010 074
set 3 001 077 010 094
set 4 001 078 011 014

47Z1155 B_EN

3-109 Overcurrent detection

3-164 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Ground fault detection

To detect grounded faults, the ground fault detection function monitors the average
magnitude of the residual current calculated from the phase currents and the neutral-
displacement voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages for values exceeding
set thresholds. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current measurement, one
parameter each is available for setting the fault detection value for ground fault
monitoring.

5% of the current maximum phase current is added to the set threshold IN>, which
means that the operate value of the ground current function increases with an increasing
phase current level as a form of stabilization.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-165

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Dynamic
range 1
[ 031 082 ]
2: Sensitive
range
1: Highest range

IA COMP
DIST: IN> sens.
IB C range PSx
[ * ]
IC

Imax C DIST:
range
IN> high
PSx
[ * ]
DIST: Start.
IN> triggered
303 502

|Ix|
0.05*|Imax| |Ix|+IN>
DIST: tIN>
PSx
[ * ]

DIST: Starting C
blocked DIST: tIN>
303 500 elapsed
303 503

DIST: tIN>
running
[ 036 105 ]

MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx 0 50ms
[ * ]
4: Short-durat.
ground.

DIST: VNG>
C PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
VNG>> 303
exceeded
596

VA-G DIST: Start.

VNG> triggered
VB-G 303 504

VC-G

DIST: VNG>> DIST: tVNG>>

C PSx PSx
[ * ] [ * ]

DIST: tVNG>>
MAIN: Neutr.pt. elapsed
303 506
treat. PSx
[ * ]
DIST: VNG>>
1: Low-imped. triggered
grounding [ 036 015 ]

DIST: tVNG>>
elapsed
[ 036 016 ]

* Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt.

treat. PSx
DIST: IN> high
range PSx
DIST: IN> sens.
range PSx
DIST: tIN>
PSx
DIST: VNG>
PSx
DIST: VNG>>
PSx
DIST: tVNG>>
PSx
set 1 010 048 010 055 010 123 010 057 010 056 010 062 010 061
set 2 001 076 010 075 010 124 010 077 010 076 010 082 010 081
set 3 001 077 010 095 010 125 010 097 010 096 011 002 011 001
set 4 001 078 011 015 010 126 011 017 011 016 011 022 011 021

47Z1156B_EN

3-110 Monitoring the residual current and the neutral-displacement voltage

3-166 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

The ground fault detection mode is a function of the neutral-point treatment set in the
P439.

M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t m e n t Low-impedance grounding
Ground fault detection D IST : Sta r ti n g G occurs with this setting when the
threshold of the IN> or VNG> trigger is exceeded. Furthermore, triggering of stage
VNG>> and the lapse of timer stage tVNG>> is signaled (see Figure 3-110).
M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t m e n t Isolated neutral/resonant grounding
If the setting isolated neutral/resonant grounding is selected, instantaneous ground
fault detection D IST : Sta r ti n g G operates in the event of multiple phase-to-
ground fault detection when the thresholds of the IN> and VNG> triggers are exceeded.
Even in the case of a single-phase fault, that is, in the event that only one base point
is detected, ground fault detection will operate, but not until tIN> has elapsed.
M A I N : N e u t r . p t . t r e a t . = Short-duration grounding
Operation here corresponds to operation with the setting isolated neutral/resonant
grounding except that in the case of a sustained ground fault the timer stage tIN>
remains activated due to the operating trigger VNG>> and therefore no longer has any
effect in the event of subsequent short-duration grounding.

MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[ * ]
2: Isol./
res.w.start.PG

3: Isol./res.w/o
st. PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.

1: Low-imped. DIST: Starting G

grounding 303 507

DIST: Start.
IN> triggered
303 502
DIST: Start.
DIST: Start. switch. to PG
VNG> triggered [ 040 052 ]
303 504

DIST: tIN>
elapsed
303 503

DIST: IA>>
triggered
303 511

DIST: IB>>
triggered
303 512

DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513

DIST: VPP<
triggered
303 509
* Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
DIST: Start. set 1 010 048
ZPP< triggered
303 510 set 2 001 076
set 3 001 077
set 4 001 078
47Z1150B_EN

3-111 Evaluation of trigger signals

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-167

3 Operation
(continued)

Enabling undervoltage
and underimpedance
fault detection
The undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection functions are enabled by I>(Imin)
in the corresponding measuring systems. For the two possible dynamic ranges of
current measurement, one parameter each is available for setting the fault detection
value for I>(Imin). In order to control contention problems when current and voltage
appear at the same time (branch voltage transformers), measuring system enabling is
delayed by 15 ms.

For sensitive detection of double ground faults with isolated neutral/resonant grounding,
the P439 checks to determine whether the base point current I>(Imin) is exceeded in one
phase only and whether the measured value falls below the set threshold for
underimpedance fault detection in two phases. Enabling proceeds in the phases where
the voltage is below the set threshold.

3-168 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: Starting
blocked
303 500

MAIN: Dynamic C DIST: I> (Ibl)

range I sens. r.PSx
[ 031 082 ] [ * ]
2: Highest range DIST: I> (Ibl)
C high r. PSx
1: Sensitive [ * ]
range
IA DIST: IA>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 598
IB
DIST: IB>(Ibl)
IC trigg.
303 599

DIST: IC>(Ibl)
trigg.303 600
DIST: V<
PSx Meas.value > Set value
[ * ] C DIST: Enable
15ms 0 V<, Z<, A
303 514
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G DIST: Enable
15ms 0 V<, Z<, B
303 515

DIST: Enable
15ms 0 V<, Z<, C
303 516

C
Meas.value < Set value

VA-G* 3
VB-G* 3
MAIN: Neutr.pt. VC-G* 3
treat. PSx
[ * ]
2: Isol./
res.w.start.PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.

* Parameter DIST: V<

PSx
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
DIST: I> (Ibl)
sens. r.PSx
DIST: I> (Ibl)
high r. PSx
set 1 010 069 010 048 010 119 010 068
set 2 010 089 001 076 010 120 010 088
set 3 011 009 001 077 010 121 011 008
set 4 011 029 001 078 010 122 011 028
49Z6430B_EN

3-112 Enabling undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-169

3 Operation
(continued)

Undervoltage detection
Undervoltage fault detection monitors the phase-to-ground voltages or the phase-to-
phase voltages to determine whether they fall below the set threshold V<.

Operation of undervoltage fault detection can be determined by selecting the operating

mode. The following operating modes are possible:

Undervoltage fault detection is disabled.

The undervoltage fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of the phase-
to-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by ground fault detection.
Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground
loops.

3-113 Undervoltage detection

3-170 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Underimpedance fault
detection
Underimpedance fault detection determines the impedances of the phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase loops.

The underimpedance fault detection mode can be determined by selecting the operating
mode. The following operating modes are possible:

Underimpedance fault detection is disabled.

The underimpedance fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of the
phase-to-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by ground fault
detection.
Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground
loops.

All underimpedance fault detection measuring loops are blocked when the trigger I>>>
operates (see ‘Overcurrent Fault Detection’). When overcurrent or undervoltage fault
detection operates, the corresponding measuring loops are blocked phase-selectively.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-171

3 Operation
(continued)

3-114 Enabling underimpedance fault detection

3-172 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

If measurement is enabled, the loop impedance is determined and compared to

ascertain that it is within the set impedance range. The loop impedance of the phase-to-
ground loops is determined, depending on the setting, by using the ground current
corrected by the set ground factor kG or by using twice the phase current. The following
values must be set in order to determine the underimpedance fault detection
characteristic:

Reactance in forward direction Xfw

Load angle β
Ratio Zbw/Zfw
(Impedance in backward (reverse) direction: Zbw
Impedance in forward direction: Zfw)
Phase-to-ground impedance in forward direction Zfw,PG
Phase-to-phase impedance in forward direction Zfw,PP
Phase-to-ground resistance in forward direction Rfw,PG
Phase-to-phase resistance in forward direction Rfw,PP

If, on the basis of the settings, the reach in the backward (reverse) direction is greater
than 3 Znom, then the range is limited to 3 Znom (Znom = Vnom / Inom).

3-115 Fault detection characteristic of the underimpedance fault detection function

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-173

3 Operation
(continued)

3-116 Formation of currents corrected by the ground factor

3-174 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-117 Underimpedance detection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-175

3 Operation
(continued)

Fault detection logic

The fault detection logic links the phase-selective output signals from

Overcurrent detection (I>>)

Ground fault detection
Undervoltage detection (V<)
Underimpedance detection (Z<)

to form common phase-selective starting decisions (SA, SB, and SC) and SN1.
The phase-selective starting decisions are combined to form ‘general starting’ – and thus
produce the M AIN : G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g signal. Ground fault detection alone does not
bring about general starting.

If fault detection operates via overcurrent fault detection, single-phase fault detection
may operate without ground fault detection. In order for the measuring loops for
distance and directional measurement to be properly selected even in this case, either
SN1 or starting in another phase must be triggered as well. It is possible to specify
whether, in the case of single-phase starting, SN1 will always be triggered or whether –
depending on the magnitude of the phase currents – SN1 or starting in one phase will be
transfer-triggered.

M A I N : T r a n s f e r f o r 1 p ‘Ground’
With single-phase overcurrent fault detection, SN1 is started and transferred after the
timer stage tIN> has elapsed (see ‘Ground Fault Detection’ for setting).

If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without ground to

multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault detection, starting will
occur instantaneously.
MAIN: Transfer for 1p
‘P or G = f(Imed,Imax)’
For single-pole overcurrent fault detection, the decision as to whether starting in one
phase or SN1 starting will be transferred depends on the Imed / Imax ratio.
The magnitude of the medium phase current must be more than 2/3 the magnitude of
the maximum current for the phase to be transfer-triggered. If the current with the
medium-sized magnitude is smaller, SN1 will be triggered after timer stage tIN> has
elapsed.
If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without ground to
multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault detection, starting will
occur instantaneously.

3-176 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: VA< DIST: Starting A

303 529
triggered
303 517

DIST: ZA< start.

triggered
303 526

DIST: IA>>
triggered
303 511

DIST: VB<
triggered DIST: Starting B
303 518 303 530

DIST: ZB< start.

triggered
303 527

DIST: IB>>
triggered
303 512

DIST: VC<
triggered DIST: Starting
303 531
C
303 519

DIST: ZC< start.

triggered
303 528
DIST: General
starting
DIST: IC>> [ 036 240 ]
triggered
303 513
DIST: 1-pole
starting
303 533

DIST: Multipole
starting
DIST: Starting G 303 534
303 507

DIST: Starting
303 535
N
DIST: tIN>
PSx
[ * ]
DIST: Zero-
sequ. starting
[ 036 021 ]
MAIN: Transfer
for 1p PSx
[ * ]
1: Ground

2: P or G
=f(Imed,Imax)

IA
COMP |Imedium|/|Imax|<2/3
IB
IC

Imax |Imedium|/|Imax|>2/3

Imedium
COMP

COMP

COMP

BUOC: IN>
triggered
304 753

* Parameter DIST: tIN>

PSx
MAIN: Transfer
for 1p PSx
set 1 010 057 010 040
set 2 010 077 001 079
set 3 010 097 001 080
set 4 011 017 001 081
49Z6431A_EN

3-118 Fault detection and starting Logic

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-177

3 Operation
(continued)

If a general starting condition is present, then the decisions of the following systems are
signaled:

Overcurrent fault detection

Undervoltage fault detection
Underimpedance fault detection

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ] DIST: Starting
I>> A
[ 040 064 ]
DIST: IA>>
triggered DIST: Starting
303 511
I>> B
[ 040 065 ]
DIST: IB>>
triggered DIST: Starting
303 512 I>> C
[ 040 097 ]
DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513

DIST: Starting
U< A
[ 040 067 ]
DIST: VA<
triggered DIST: Starting
303 517 U< B
[ 040 075 ]
DIST: VB<
triggered DIST: Starting
303 518 U< C
[ 040 096 ]
DIST: VC<
triggered
303 519

DIST: Starting
Z< A
[ 040 070 ]
DIST: ZA< start.
triggered DIST: Starting
303 526
Z< B
[ 040 071 ]
DIST: ZB< start.
triggered
303 527
DIST: Starting
Z< C
[ 040 072 ]
DIST: ZC< start.
triggered
303 528 DIST: Starting
Z<
[ 036 241 ]

49Z6432 A_EN

3-119 Fault detection signals of distance protection

3-178 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.22.2 Selection of Measured values

The P439 selects a measuring loop based on the phase-selective starting decision and
the phase preference selected. The fault impedance (short-circuit impedance) and the
fault direction are determined from the voltage and current values collected from these
measuring loops.

For three-phase starting signals with or without ground the minimum voltage value and
the associated phase-to-phase current are selected from the phase-to-phase voltages
as measured values. In case of a two-phase to ground fault detection the set phase
preference is decisive for the selection of the measured values.

Only the fundamental of the selected measured voltage is evaluated. If stabilization for
capacitive voltage transformers (CVT stabilization) has been enabled, the device checks
to determine whether the second harmonic exceeds the 0.01 Vnom threshold. If so, a
special filter designed specifically for CVTs is activated.

Phase to
Phase to A before C before
Phase ground C before A before B before A before C before B before
phase B before B before
preference loop loop A, acyclic C, acyclic A, acyclic B, acyclic B, acyclic C, acyclic
C, cyclic A, cyclic
Vmin

Fault Selected measured values Imeas, Vmeas

detection

A, B, C, G IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin)
1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin

A, B, C IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin)
1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin

A, B, G IA-B IL- IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IB-kG IB-kG IA-kG IB-kG IB-kG
1VA-B kG(Vmin) 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VA-G 1VB-G 1VB-G
VPGmin

A, C, G IC-A IL- IC-kG IC-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IC-kG IC-kG
1VC-A kG(Vmin) 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VC-G 1VC-G
VPGmin

B, C, G IB-C IL- IC-kG IB-kG IC-kG IC-kG IB-kG IB-kG IC-kG IB-kG
1VB-C kG(Vmin) 1VC-G 1VB-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VC-G 1VB-G
VPGmin

A, B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B
1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B

A, C IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A
1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A

B, C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C
1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C

A, G IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG
1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G

B, G IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG
1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G

C, G IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG
1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-179

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Phase prio. Parameter MAIN: Phase prio.

2pG PSx 2pG PSx
[ * ]
set 1 010 041
set 2 001 082
set 3 001 083
set 4 001 084

49Z6439 A_EN

3-120 Selection of the measured values

3-180 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.22.3 Distance and Directional Measurement

The P439 determines the fault impedance and the fault direction on the basis of the
selected measured values. A voltage memory is available so that measurement will
function correctly, even with very low fault voltages.

Voltage memory
Voltage VA-B is the reference voltage for the voltage memory. If the voltage exceeds the
fixed value of 0.65 Vnom and there is no starting of the distance protection function, then
the voltage memory will be synchronized. Synchronization requires approximately
300 ms. Then a check is carried out to determine whether the frequency satisfies the
following condition:

0.99 ⋅ fnom < f < 1.01 ⋅ fnom .

If the condition is satisfied, the voltage memory is enabled. The frequency condition is
checked cyclically. As soon as the frequency condition is no longer met, the enable is
canceled.

If the magnitude of the reference voltage drops below 0.65 Vnom or if a starting of the
distance protection function occurs, synchronization of the voltage memory will be
terminated. The voltage memory is then free-running and remains enabled for 2 s.

DIST: I>>
triggered
303 597

DIST: General >0.65*Vnom

starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST: corr
303 547
corr

f/fnom = f

+
0.95fnom<f<1.05fnom
R

1 DIST: Voltage
S1 1 memory enabled
303 549
300ms
R1
1 DIST: tVmemory
2s running
[ 040 034 ]

C C C

VA-G DIST: VA-B

(stored)
303 548
VB-G

49Z6433 A_EN

3-121 Storing the reference voltage in memory

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-181

3 Operation
(continued)

Angle determination
When general starting of distance protection occurs, the angles ϕF and ϕS are
determined. Angle ϕF is the fault angle that is determined using the selected measuring
voltage Vmeas and the selected measuring current Imeas. Angle ϕS is determined on the
basis of the voltage stored in memory and the selected measuring current Imeas. Since
the frequency of the stored voltage can differ from the nominal frequency, a phase
correction must be made. This correction is determined by the frequency deviation and
the time that has elapsed since synchronization was terminated. Furthermore, an angle
correction based on the selected measuring loop and the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e
setting is required. The resulting angle ϕX is used for further processing.

DIST: Voltage
mem. enabled
303 549

DIST: VMeas DIST: F

303 546 303 550
F

DIST: IMeas
303 545

S
DIST: VA-B
(stored)
303 548

DIST: corr
303 547

MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A-B-C
X*1
2: A-C-B C
X*(-1)

DIST: Select. C X= 0°
meas.loop
303 540
A-B

DIST: Select. C X= -120°

meas.loop B-C
303 541

DIST: Select. C X= +120°

meas.loop C-A
303 542

DIST: Select. C X= +150°

meas.loop A-G
303 537

DIST: Select. C X= +30°

meas.loop B-G
303 538

DIST: Select. C X= -90°

meas.loop
303 539
C-G

X DIST: X
303 551

47Z0165C_EN

3-122 Angle determination

3-182 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

For distance and directional measurement, the following angles are used, depending on
the magnitude of the selected measuring voltage and the fault duration:

Fault angle ϕF
Angle ϕX
Set angle α

Selecting the angle for

direction determination
If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas is above the threshold set at
D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x when the fault occurs, then the direction is
determined using the fault angle ϕF. If the measuring voltage is below the threshold set
at D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x angle ϕX is used for directional
measurement. If the voltage memory is not enabled, angle ϕX cannot be determined. In
this case the P439 checks whether the measuring voltage Vmeas is within the range
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x If such is the case then
the direction is determined with fault angle ϕF. Direction determination using ϕX or ϕF is
not possible if the voltage memory is not enabled or if the measuring voltage is less than
0.002 Vnom. In these cases, set angle α is used for directional measurement. This
means that a decision is made for the forward direction.
Angle for Direction Determination with:
V memory 0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx Vmeas < 0.002 Vn
om

Enabled ϕX ϕX
Not enabled ϕF α

A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle selected for direction
determination is in the range -45° < ϕ < +135°. In the case of angles outside this range,
a decision is made for the backward (reverse) direction.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-183

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: Voltage
memory enabled
303 549

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST: Forw. w/o
< 0.002 Vnom measurem.
[ 038 044 ]

DIST: Direct.
using Vmeas
[ 038 045 ]
DIST: Vmeas
303 546

DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx
[ * ]

DIST: Direct.
using memory
[ 038 047 ]

1
2
3

DIST: 1
303 552

DIST: F 2
303 550

DIST: X 3 DIST: Fault

303 551 C -45° < N < 135°
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]

DIST: Fault
* Parameter DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx 1 ... 3 C 135° < N < 315° backward / BS
N [ 036 019 ]
set 1 010 109
set 2 010 116
set 3 010 117
set 4 011 118

49Z6435 A_EN

3-123 Direction determination

3-184 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Selecting the angle for

impedance calculation
The angle that is used to calculate fault impedance is selected according to the following
criteria:

If the measuring voltage Vmeas is greater than the set threshold

(D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x ) when the fault occurs, then fault angle ϕF is
used to calculate fault impedance.
If the fault voltages are lower than the set threshold (D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y
P S x ) and the voltage memory is enabled, a check is made to determine whether
angles ϕF and ϕX are in the forward direction (-45° < ϕ < +135°).
„ If both angles are in the same direction, either forward or backward, then fault
angle ϕF is selected for distance measurement.
„ If angle ϕF is in the forward direction and angle ϕX is in the backward direction,
then an angle of 180° + α is specified for the calculation.
„ If angle ϕX is in the forward direction and angle ϕF is in the backward direction,
then set angle α is used for distance measurement.

If voltage memory is not enabled, the P439 checks whether

„ the measuring voltage Vmeas is within the range
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x . If such is the case
then the impedance is calculated with fault angle ϕF.
„ the selected measuring voltage Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom. In this case, the impedance
is calculated using set angle α.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-185

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: Voltage
memory enabled
303 549

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
< 0.002 Vnom

DIST: Vmeas
303 546

DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx
[ * ]

DIST: F -45° < F < 135°

303 550

DIST: X -45° < X < 135°

303 551
1
2
3
4
2
1 1
DIST: 180°+ 2 3
303 552

3
1
4
2
1 ... 4 3

1 ... 3 DIST: Z
303 553

* Parameter DIST: Oper.val.

Vmemory PSx
set 1 010 109
set 2 010 116
set 3 010 117
set 4 011 118
49Z6436 A_EN

3-124 Selecting the angle for impedance calculation

3-186 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Distance measurement
One of the following types of characteristics may be selected for distance measurement
by way of the setting at D I S T : C h a r a c t e r i s t i c :

Circle characteristic
Polygon (quadrilateral) characteristic

3-125 Selecting the characteristic

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-187

3 Operation
(continued)

Circle characteristic
The fault impedance value ZF is determined using the selected measuring quantities
Vmeas and Imeas. If the setting ‘Arc compensation: yes’ has been chosen, then a
correction to the measured fault impedance is calculated for angles ϕZ in the range of
−45 ° < ϕ Z < α or 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) as follows:

ZF
Z F ,corr =
1 + sin δ

The following relation applies in the range −45 ° < ϕ Z < α : δ = α − ϕ Z

The following relation applies in the range 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) : δ = α − ϕ Z + 180 °

3-126 Impedance measurement with the circle characteristic

3-188 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in Figure 3-127 is obtained. If the
characteristic were to be measured with sine variables for the setting
‘Arc compensation: yes’, the dot-dash line would be obtained.

3-127 P439 impedance and direction characteristic for the ‘Circle’ setting
n = 1 to 6
α = 60°
Dot-dash line: with arc compensation
Dashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in Zone 1 only)

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-189

3 Operation
(continued)

The calculated impedance |Zmeas| is compared with the set impedance in the six
impedance zones. If the measured impedance is smaller than or equal to the set
impedance, then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).

3-128 Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement

3-190 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for high-speed
reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set separately for phase-to-
ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for impedance zone 1. The impedances
modified by the zone extension factor kze are calculated as follows:

Z1,kze = k ze ⋅ Z1

The increase in reach by the zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the
following:

Protective signaling (P S I G : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or – irrespective of
the readiness of protective signaling – during the reclose command.
Switch on to fault protection (S O T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
An external signal (D I S T : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).

The impedance characteristic is extended by the zone extension factor kze TDR if a time-
delay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-191

3 Operation
(continued)

3-129 Setting impedance Zone 1 and distance measurement

3-192 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Polygon (quadrilateral)
characteristic
The fault impedance value ZF is determined using the selected measuring quantities
Vmeas and I meas. By multiplying this value by the cosine or sine of the angle selected for
distance measurement ϕZ, we then calculate the fault resistance RF or fault reactance
XF.

3-130 Impedance measurement with the polygon characteristic

The calculated quantities RF and XF are compared with the reference quantities Rref and
Xref of the four impedance zones. The reference quantities are determined using the
settings for determining the impedance zone(s). If both quantities lie within the set
impedance zone(s), then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s)..

The impedance zones are determined by the following settings:

Reactance X
Resistance R, separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops
Angle α
Angle σ

Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in
Figure 3-131.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-193

3 Operation
(continued)

3-131 P439 impedance and directional characteristics for the ‘Polygon’ setting
Example for: Xn = 6.5 Ω
Rn = 2.0 Ω
αn = 70°
σn = -20°
n = 1 to 6
Dashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in Zone 1 only)

3-194 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

The resistances for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops can be set separately for
each zone. The different impedances are therefore compared with different impedance
characteristics.

3-132 Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-195

3 Operation
(continued)

In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for high-speed
reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set separately for phase-to-
ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for impedance zone 1.

As a result of these settings, impedance zone 1 is extended accordingly in the R and X

directions. The R and X values modified by the zone extension factor kze are calculated
according to the following formulas:

R1,kze = kze ⋅ R1

X1,kze = k ze ⋅ X1

The increase in reach by the zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the
following:

Protective signaling (P S I G : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or – irrespective of
the readiness of protective signaling – during the reclose command.
Switch on to fault protection (S O T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
An external signal (D I S T : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).

The impedance characteristic is extended by the zone extension factor kze TDR if a time-
delay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.

3-196 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-133 Setting impedance Zone 1 and distance measurement

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-197

3 Operation
(continued)

3.22.4 Impedance-time characteristics

A maximum of six impedance zones and eight timer stages are available for impedance
time grading. All impedance zones can be operated in a forward direction, backward
(reverse) direction, or non-directionally. Distance-independent timer stage t7 can also
operate forward-directionally, backward-directionally, or non-directionally. Timer stage t8
operates independently of distance and direction. All timer stages are started by the
general starting of distance protection.

Timer stage logic for

extended zone 1
The measuring range of zone 1 can be extended by the set zone extension factors. The
timer stage logic for the two devices is described below.

If neither protective signaling nor auto-reclosing control (ARC) is active or if zone

extension proceeds while the ARC close command is present, then tripping in the
extended zone takes place once the set time (D I S T : t 1 , z e ) has elapsed. If
protective signaling is ready, there is a trip in the extended zone after the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed.

If protective signaling is not ready but ARC is active, then in extended zone 1 a trip is
issued once the ARC tripping time has elapsed, whereas with standard reach (non-
extended zone) it is issued after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or
after the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting is dominant.)

DIST: t1
PSx
[ * ]

MAIN: Meas.r.extd. DIST: t1,ze

ext./RC C PSx
306 002
[ * ]

DIST: General t1 0 DIST: t1 elapsed

starting [ 036 026 ]
[ 036 240 ]

t1,ze 0

DIST: Zone
extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]

DIST: Zone
extension TDR DIST: Timer st.1
[ 038 022 ] elapsed
303 614

DIST: t1,ze
ARC: Trip time elapsed
elapsed [ 035 079 ]
303 003

PSIG: Trip time

elapsed
305 150

* Parameter DIST: t1
PSx
DIST: t1,ze
PSx
set 1 012 028 026 025
set 2 012 078 027 025
set 3 013 028 028 025
set 4 013 078 029 025

49Z6437 A_EN

3-134 Timer stage logic for impedance zone 1

3-198 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: t2
PSx
[ * ]

DIST: General t 0 DIST: t2 elapsed

starting [ 036 027 ]
[ 036 240 ]

DIST: t3
PSx
DIST: Op. mode [ * ]
zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DIST: t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
1
2
DIST: t4
3 C PSx
[ * ]
4

5 t 0 DIST: t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
6
1: Normal
2: 1p:Z1/t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4 DIST: t5
PSx
[ * ]
3: Section cable - line
4: Section line - cable
t 0 DIST: t5 elapsed
5: Comp.bundle cond.eff [ 036 030 ]

6: 1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4
DIST: t6
PSx
[ * ]

t 0 DIST: t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]

DIST: t7
PSx
[ * ]

t 0 DIST: t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]

DIST: t8
PSx
[ * ]

t 0 DIST: t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]

Parameter DIST: Op. mode DIST: t2 DIST: t3 DIST: t4

zone 4 PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 012 000 012 029 012 030 012 031
set 2 012 050 012 079 012 080 012 081
set 3 013 000 013 029 013 030 013 031
set 4 013 050 013 079 013 080 013 081
Parameter DIST: t5 DIST: t6 DIST: t7 DIST: t8
PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 012 032 012 033 012 140 012 144
set 2 012 082 012 083 012 141 012 145
set 3 013 032 013 033 012 142 012 146
set 4 013 082 013 083 012 143 012 147 49Z6438 A_EN

3-135 Time settings for timer stages 2 to 8

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-199

3 Operation
(continued)

3-136 Setting of the measuring direction

3-200 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Zone 4 operating modes

Zone 4 can be used as a special zone by means of the D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4
P S x setting. This makes it possible to implement special characteristics for
applications in cable/line systems or for compensating bundle conductor effects. The
following operating modes can be set for zone 4:

Normal
1p:Z1/t1(3p), 3p:Z1/t4
Section cable - line
Section line - cable
Compensation for bundle conductor effects
1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-201

3 Operation
(continued)

Mode: 'Normal'
A trip signal is issued in zones 1 to 6 when the following criteria are satisfied
simultaneously:

A distance decision exists for the zone.

The timer stage of this impedance zone has elapsed.
The measured direction matches the directional setting of this impedance zone.

If several timer stages and directions are set to the same values, a distance trip occurs
in the zone having the highest number.

A trip signal is issued in zone 7 if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:

Timer stage t7 has elapsed.

The measured direction matches the direction of measurement setting for N7.

After timer stage t8 has elapsed, a trip signal for zone 8 is issued.

With the P439 distance trips from zones 1 to 7 that are used to form the trip command
may become blocked by the power swing blocking function.

3-202 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: Trip
Zone 1
303 584

DIST: Trip
Zone 1,ze
303 595

DIST: Trip
Zone 2
303 585

DIST: Trip
Zone 3303 586

DIST: Trip
Zone 4303 587

DIST: Trip
Zone 5303 588

DIST: Trip
Zone 6
303 621

DIST: Trip
Zone 7
303 622

DIST: Trip
Zone 8
303 626

49Z6461 B_EN

3-137 Trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: 'Normal'

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-203

3 Operation
(continued)

3-138 Examples of feasible impedance-time characteristics

3-204 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Mode:
'1p:Z1/t1(3p), 3p:Z1/t4'
With this setting, timer stage t4 is assigned to impedance zone 1. All other settings for
impedance zone 4 are irrelevant in this operating mode and thus inactive.

For single-pole starting, a zone 1 trip signal will be issued once timer stage t1 has
elapsed; for multi-pole starting, it is issued once t4 has elapsed.

If t2 or t3 = t4 and N2 or N3 = N1 have been set, then timer stage t4 is set to ∞.

3-139 Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-205

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: Trip
Zone 1
303 584

DIST: Trip
Zone 1,ze
303 595

DIST: Trip
Zone 2
303 585

DIST: Trip
Zone 3
303 586

DIST: Trip
Zone 5
303 588

DIST: Trip
Zone 6
303 621

DIST: Trip
Zone 7
303 622

DIST: Trip
Zone 8
303 626

49Z6462B_EN

3-140 Trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: '1p:Z1/t1(3p), 3p:Z1/t4'

3-206 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Mode:
'Section cable - line'
This setting is selected for a mixed cable-line section provided that auto-reclosing will
occur only when there is a fault in the line area. For this mode, the cable must form the
front part of the transmission section and the line the rear part.

Timer stage t1 and direction setting N1 are assigned to impedance zones 1 and 4.
Timer stage t4 setting and direction setting N4 are inactive.

A zone 1 or zone 4 trip signal is issued if the following conditions are satisfied:

A distance decision exists for zone 1 or zone 4.

The measured direction matches direction setting N1.
Timer stage t1 has elapsed.

In order for the P439 to be able to determine the section in which the fault is located,
impedance zone 1 must be set to the total length of the power transmission section (e.g.
cable plus line) and impedance zone 4 to the cable length. If a distance trip for zones 1
and 4 occurs after t1 has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function will be blocked because
the fault lies in the cable section.

3-141 Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-207

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: ARC
blocking
303 589

DIST: Trip
Zone 1
303 584

DIST: Trip
Zone 1,ze
303 595

DIST: Trip
Zone 2
303 585

DIST: Trip
Zone 3
303 586

DIST: Trip
Zone 4
303 587

DIST: Trip
Zone 5
303 588

DIST: Trip
Zone 6
303 621

DIST: Trip
Zone 7
303 622

DIST: Trip
Zone 8
303 626

49Z6463 B_EN

3-142 Trip signals, operating mode zone 4: 'Section cable – line'

3-208 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Mode:
'Section line - cable'
This setting is selected for a mixed line-cable section provided that auto-reclosing will
only occur when there is a fault in the line area. For this mode, the line must form the
front part of the transmission section and the cable the rear part.

Timer stage t1 and direction setting N1 are assigned to impedance zones 1 and 4.
Timer stage t4 setting and direction setting N4 are inactive.

The 'Distance trip Zone 1' or 'Distance trip Zone 4' decision is reached if the following
conditions are satisfied:

A distance decision exists for zone 1 or zone 4.

The measured direction matches direction setting N1.
Timer stage t1 has elapsed.

In order for the P439 to determine the section in which the fault is located, impedance
zone 1 must be set to the total length of the transmission section and impedance zone 4
for the length of the line. If a distance trip occurs only in after t1 has elapsed, the auto-
reclosing function will be blocked because the fault lies in the cable section.

3-143 Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-209

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: ARC
blocking
303 589

DIST: Trip
Zone 1
303 584

DIST: Trip
Zone 1,ze
303 595

DIST: Trip
Zone 2
303 585

DIST: Trip
Zone 3
303 586

DIST: Trip
Zone 4
303 587

DIST: Trip
Zone 5
303 588

DIST: Trip
Zone 6
303 621

DIST: Trip
Zone 7303 622

DIST: Trip
Zone 8
303 626

49Z6464 B_EN

3-144 Trip signals, operating mode zone 4: 'Section line – cable'

3-210 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Mode: 'Compensation for

bundle conductor effects'
In the event of a short circuit, the distance between the conductors of a bundle is
reduced and the line impedance is increased. This is known as the bundle conductor
effect. Since the effect occurs approximately 70 ms after the onset of the fault, it is not a
factor in impedance zone 1 (where t1 = 0 s). Compensation therefore takes place during
impedance measurement in zone 2 – with assistance from impedance zone 4.

Timer stage t2 and direction setting N2 are assigned to impedance zones 2 and 4.
Timer stage t4 setting and direction setting N4 are inactive.

The settings for impedance zone 2 need to be made without regard to the bundle
conductor effect.The setting values for impedance zone 4, on the other hand, need to
take the bundle conductor effect into account.

The P439 checks 30 ms after distance protection has started to determine whether the
following conditions are satisfied:

A distance decision exists for zone 2.

The measured direction matches direction setting N2.

This information is then stored. The zone 4 trip signal is issued if the following
conditions are satisfied:

A distance decision exists for zone 4.

The measured direction matches direction setting N2.
The buffer has been initiated 30 ms after distance protection has started.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-211

3 Operation
(continued)

3-145 Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic

3-212 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: Trip
Zone 1
303 584

DIST: Trip
Zone 1,ze
303 595

DIST: Trip
Zone 2
303 585

DIST: Trip
Zone 3
303 586

DIST: Trip
Zone 4
303 587

DIST: Trip
Zone 5
303 588

DIST: Trip
Zone 6
303 621

DIST: Trip
Zone 7
303 622

DIST: Trip
Zone 8
303 626

49Z6465 B_EN

3-146 Trip signals, operating mode zone 4: 'Compensation for bundle conductor effects'

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-213

3 Operation
(continued)

Mode:
'1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4'
With this setting, timer stage t4 is assigned to impedance zone 1. All other settings for
impedance zone 4 are irrelevant in this operating mode and thus inactive.

For single-pole starting, a distance trip signal is issued in zone 1 once timer stage t1 has
elapsed; for multi-pole starting, it is issued once t4 has elapsed.

If t2 or t3 = t4 and N2 or N3 = N1 have been set, then timer stage t4 is set to ∞.

3-147 Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic

3-214 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DIST: Trip
Zone 1
303 584

DIST: Trip
Zone 1,ze
303 595

DIST: Trip
Zone 2
303 585

DIST: Trip
Zone 3303 586

DIST: Trip
Zone 5
303 588

DIST: Trip
Zone 6
303 621

DIST: Trip
Zone 7
303 622

DIST: Trip
Zone 8
303 626

49Z6466 B_EN

3-148 Trip signals, operating mode zone 4: '1p:Z1/t1; 2/3p:Z1/t4'

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-215

3 Operation
(continued)

PSB: Block. DIST: Trip signal

selected zone [ 036 009 ]
304 862

DIST: Blocking Z1
EXT
[ 036 034 ]
DIST: Blocking
Z1,ze EXT
[ 036 036 ]
DIST: Blocking Z2
EXT
[ 036 037 ]
DIST: Blocking Z3
EXT
[ 036 039 ]
DIST: Blocking Z4 DIST: Trip signal
EXT zone 2-6
[ 035 073 ]
[ 036 041 ]
DIST: Blocking
Z5 EXT
[ 036 044 ]
DIST: Blocking Z6
EXT
[ 036 061 ]
DIST: Blocking Z7
EXT
[ 036 067 ]
DIST: Blocking Z8
EXT
[ 036 068 ]

DIST: Trip signal

zone 1
DIST: Trip [ 035 072 ]
zone 1 DIST: Trip signal
303 584
Z1,ze
DIST: Trip [ 035 074 ]
Z1,ze
303 595

DIST: Trip signal

zone 2
DIST: Trip [ 041 084 ]
zone 2
303 585 DIST: Trip signal
zone 3
DIST: Trip [ 040 056 ]
zone 3
303 586
DIST: Trip signal
zone 4
DIST: Trip [ 040 057 ]
zone 4
303 587
DIST: Trip signal
zone 5
DIST: Trip [ 040 058 ]
zone 5
303 588
DIST: Trip signal
zone 6
DIST: Trip [ 040 059 ]
zone 6
303 621
DIST: Trip signal
zone 7
DIST: Trip [ 037 129 ]
zone 7303 622
DIST: Trip signal
zone 8
DIST: Trip [ 037 130 ]
zone 8
303 626

49Z6460B_EN

3-149 Distance protection trip signals

Note: Parameter [035 073] signals the trip signals from all zones as of zone 2.
As of the next device version the display text is changed to D I S T : T r i p s i g . z o n e 2 - 8 .

3-216 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

For special applications, the P439 issues the signal D I S T : I m p e d a n c e i n z o n e 6

if the following conditions are met simultaneously:

A distance decision exists for zone 6.

The measured direction matches the direction setting for zone 6.

3-150 D I S T : I m p e d a n c e i n z o n e 6 signal

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-217

3 Operation
(continued)

3.23 Power Swing Blocking (Function group PSB)

With the power swing blocking (PSB) function enabled, a distance trip in selected
distance zones will be prevented, should a power swing occur in the network. In addition
a power swing starting function has been implemented.

Disabling or enabling
power swing blocking
Power swing blocking can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

When the monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuit is triggered the PSB function will
be blocked.

3-151 Disabling or enabling power swing blocking

Measurement
The P439 continuously measures the positive-sequence impedance. Because of this
measurement in the positive-sequence system, the protection function is still available
during a single-pole HSR.

Blocking of selected zones of the distance protection or a power swing starting occurs
only when the measured positive-sequence impedance lies within the settable power
swing polygon.

3-218 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-152 Measurement

3-153 Trajectory of the positive-sequence impedance during a power swing

1 stable power swing
2 instable power swing
Setting parameters: R, X, α

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-219

3 Operation
(continued)

Power swing blocking

Every 40 ms the P439 determines the apparent power change as referred to the actual
apparent power.

S 2 − S1
S2

S1: apparent power at t1

S2: apparent power at t1 + 40 ms

If the apparent impedance lies within the swing polygon and the deviation is greater than
the set value, a blocking signal of the selected distance zones will be issued after an
associated time delay has elapsed.

In order to avoid problems arising from mutual interference the PSB function is blocked
when a starting signal is issued by zone Z1 or the overreach zone Z1,ze.

The maximum duration of this blocking has a time limit. This time limit can be set. The
PSB function is unblocked without time delay if the following current elements detect a
short circuit during a power swing:
† Phase current element for measurement of symmetrical 3-pole faults:
IP > P S B : I P >
† Negative-sequence current element for sensitive measurement of 2-pole faults:
Ineg > (0.1 Inom + PSB: Ineg> * IP,max)
† Residual current element for sensitive measurement of ground faults:
IN > (0.1 Inom + PSB: IN> * IP,max)
The distance zones to be blocked are set at P S B : F c t . a s s i g n . b l o c k . These
zones may be selected: Zx (x=1...8) and Z1,ze

3-220 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Power swing blocking,

operating mode ∆Z

The setting P S B : O p e r a t i n g m o d e defines that a power swing detection can be

based on impedance variation (Delta Z) as an alternative to apparent power change
(Delta S).

In operating mode ∆Z, the rate of change of the resistance component of positive-
sequence impedance, when entering the power swing polygon, is measured and
interpreted. The function decides on power swing only if the rate of change is smaller
than the set threshold ∆Rx/∆T and subsequently blocks all selected zones.

The threshold ∆Rx has a fixed value:

∆Rx = 5 Ω for Inom = 1A
∆Rx = 1 Ω for Inom = 5A.

Timer stage ∆T can be set at (P S B : D e l t a T).

A power swing decision once made is stored until one of the following conditions is met:
† The positive-sequence impedance locus exits the power swing polygon.
† The set maximum blocking time has elapsed.
† One of the PSB current stages has started.
The available time delay of the blocking effect may be used to holdup distance protection
blocking for a short time. This may become necessary with series-compensated lines on
which, in some cases, a relatively slow swing subsidence of the measured short circuit
impedance is observed.

With the operating mode ∆Z general blocking of the power swing after the trip decision
by the overreach zone is no longer necessary. Only blocking by the trip decision from
zone 1 is available.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-221

3 Operation
(continued)

3-154 Power swing blocking

3-222 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Out-of-Step Tripping
A power swing starting may become necessary when a power swing with low damping
has to be terminated by deliberately splitting system sections. For such a procedure the
device has two independent methods available:

1st criterion – for an early system split at high swing frequencies.

The apparent power change ∆Spos exceeds the threshold set to a high value at
P S B : O p e r a t e v a l u e , t r i p for the duration set at P S B : O p e r a t e d e l a y , t r i p
and the positive-sequence impedance lies within the power swing polygon.
This criterion may be applied with high swing frequencies (and therefore large
changes in the apparent power). The system split will then occur very early so as to
avoid system loads from high currents during the first power swing cycle.
Every 40 ms the P439 determines the apparent power change as referred to the
actual apparent power.

S pos, 2 − S pos,1
∆Spos =
S pos, 2

Spos,1: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1

Spos,2: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 + 40 ms

2nd criterion – for a safe system split at an instable power swing.

The positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing polygon on the opposite
side (see impedance trajectory 2 in figure 3-153).
The sign for the positive-sequence impedance’s real component is stored when the
measured positive-sequence impedance locus enters the power swing polygon
This stored sign is compared with the sign when exiting the power swing polygon.
Should the signs differ, a trip signal is issued immediately after exiting the power
swing polygon.
When this criterion is applied an instable power swing will be determined, regardless
of swing frequencies.

3-155 Out-of-Step Tripping

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-223

3 Operation
(continued)

3.24 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON)

The P439 monitors the phase currents and voltages for balance during healthy system
operation. If either unbalance or the lack of measuring voltage is detected, action is
taken to prevent the unit from malfunctioning.

DIST: General 10s 0 MCMON: Zero-sequ.

starting starting
[ 036 240 ] [ 041 080 ]
SFMON: Zero-sequ.
DIST: Starting G starting
303 507 [ 098 015 ]
MCMON: Enabled
[ 040 094 ] 300ms 0 SFMON: M.c.b.
trip V
[ 098 000 ]

MAIN: M.c.b. trip MCMON: Meas.

V EXT circ. V faulty
[ 004 061 ] [ 038 023 ]
MCMON: Undervoltage SFMON: Meas.
[ 038 038 ] circ. V faulty
[ 098 017 ]
MCMON: Vneg>
triggered
[ 041 079 ]
MCMON: FF, V
triggered MCMON: M.circ.
[ 035 081 ] V,Vref flty.
[ 040 078 ]
MCMON: FF, Vref SFMON: M.circ.
triggered V,Vref flty.
[ 038 100 ]
[ 098 023 ]
MAIN: M.c.b. trip
Vref EXT 300ms 0
[ 036 086 ] SFMON: M.c.b.
trip Vref
[ 098 011 ]

MCMON: Meas.
circ.V,I faulty.
MCMON: Meas. [ 037 020 ]
circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ] SFMON: Meas.
circ.V,I faulty.
[ 098 016 ]

MCMON: Peripheral
fault
PSIG: Telecom. [ 038 024 ]
faulty
[ 036 060 ] SFMON: Peripheral
fault
GFSIG: Telecom. [ 098 018 ]
faulty
[ 038 017 ]

49Z6440 A_EN

3-156 Monitoring signals

Measuring-circuit monitoring can be disabled by the appropriate setting. In the event of

a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.

Monitoring the starting

conditions
If ground starting SG is present for more than 10 s without phase starting, the following
monitoring signal is issued: MCM O N : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g (see Figure 3-156).

3-224 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the current-

measuring circuits
The current-measuring circuit monitoring function is enabled when the current exceeds
. ⋅ I nom in at least one phase. Once monitoring is enabled, the absolute
the value 0125
value of the negative-sequence component of the current system is determined in
accordance with the definition of the symmetrical components. This is based on the
setting at M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e (alternative terminology: Rotary field).

Phase sequence A-B-C Phase sequence A-C-B

(alternative terminology: (alternative terminology:
Clockwise rotating field): Anticlockwise rotating field):

I neg =
1
3
(
IA + a 2 ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC ) I neg =
1
(
I + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ IC
3 A
)
0
a = e j 120
0
a 2 = e j 240

This value is divided by the maximum phase current ⏐Imax⏐ and compared with the set
threshold operate value. If the set operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is
issued once the operate delay +300 ms have elapsed.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-225

3 Operation
(continued)

MCMON: Enabled
USER
[ 014 001 ]

1 MCMON: Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
0: No
1: Yes

MCMON: Current
monitoring
[ 014 006 ]

1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]

MAIN: Prot. ext. >0.125*Inom

disabled C
[ 038 046 ]

IA
IB
IC C
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]

|Ineg|

MCMON: Operate
delay
[ 017 011 ]
MCMON: Ineg> + 300 ms
[ 014 002 ] SFMON: Meas.
COMP circ. I faulty
[ 098 005 ]

t 0 MCMON: Meas.
|Ineg|/|Imax| circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ]
Imax

47Z0122 C_EN

3-157 Monitoring the current-measuring circuits

3-226 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the voltage-

measuring circuits
The voltages used by distance protection as measured values are monitored for
plausibility by the voltage-measuring-circuit monitoring function.

Monitoring of voltage-measuring circuits is based on the following criteria:

Phase-to-phase voltages are monitored for voltages that fall below the default
threshold of 0.4 ⋅Vnom . This monitoring function is enabled when the current exceeds
0.05 ⋅ I nom in one phase.
The negative-sequence component of phase-to-ground voltages is monitored in
accordance with the definition of symmetrical components. Monitoring is enabled
when a phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the default threshold of 0.7 ⋅Vnom / 3 .
In addition to this criterion, either a minimum current with the default threshold setting
of I > 0.05 ⋅ I nom or the closed position of the circuit breaker can be used as enabling
criteria. If there is an enable, the absolute value of the negative-sequence
component of the voltage system is determined in accordance with the definition of
symmetrical components. This is based on the setting at M A I N : P h a s e
s e q u e n c e (alternative terminology: Rotary field).
Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: Clockwise rotating field):
1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A− G + a ⋅V B − G + a ⋅V C − G
3
2
)
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: Anticlockwise rotating field):
1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A− G + a ⋅V B − G + a ⋅V C − G
3
2
)
0
a = e j 120
0
a 2 = e j 240

This value is compared with the default threshold operate value 0.2 ⋅Vnom / 3 . If the
threshold operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is issued after the operate
delay has elapsed.

If one of the monitoring functions described above operates, then distance protection is
blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent time protection – provided the
appropriate setting has been selected.

In addition, the monitoring signal M C M O N : M e a s . vo l t a g e O K is issued if all

phase-to-phase voltages exceed the default threshold of 0.65 ⋅Vnom and negative-
sequence monitoring has not operated.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-227

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]

MCMON: Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext. >0.7*Vnom/ 3
disabled C
[ 038 046 ]

VA-G

VB-G >0.2*Vnom/ 3
C
VC-G

|Vneg|

MCMON: Operate
delay
[ 017 011 ] SFMON: Vneg>
triggered
[ 098 014 ]
t 0
MCMON: Vneg>
triggered
[ 041 079 ]
DIST: General t 0
starting S1 1 SFMON: Undervoltage
[ 036 240 ] [ 098 009 ]
R1

MCMON: Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]

MCMON: Op. mode MCMON: Phase

volt. mon. sequ. V faulty
[ 014 007 ] [ 038 049 ]
SFMON: Phase
sequ. V faulty
[ 098 001 ]

1: Vneg
2: Vneg with curr. enab
3: Vneg w.CB cont.enab.

MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]

>0.05*Inom
C

IA
IB

IC

<0.4*Vnom
C

>0.65*Vnom
C
0 5s MCMON: Meas.
voltage o.k.
[ 038 048 ]

49Z6441 A_EN

3-158 Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuit

3-228 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Fuse failure monitoring of

phase-to-ground voltages
In addition to monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits, as described above, the P439
also provides for fuse failure monitoring. This function is used in particular when there is
no voltage transformer m.c.b. auxiliary contact. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it
can be disabled by setting parameters.

The fuse failure monitoring function must distinguish between a short circuit in the three-
phase current system and a lack of measuring voltage due to a short circuit or open
circuit (broken wire) in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.

A short circuit exists in the three-phase current system being monitored, if one of the
following conditions is satisfied:

Distance protection has started.

Major current variations occur in at least one phase current and in the positive-
sequence current system.

The P439 uses different criteria to detect single- or two-phase faults or three-phase
faults in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.

A single- or two-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage

transformer if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
„ The base point release for the distance protection has operated in none or all of
the three phases.
„ A current rise ∆I/∆t > 10% occurs in not exactly one phase.
„ The negative-sequence current does not exceed the set threshold.
„ The negative-sequence voltage has exceeded the set threshold Vneg, FF.

A three-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer if the
following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
„ The base point release for the distance protection has operated in at least one
phase.
„ The positive-sequence voltage has fallen below the set threshold Vpos, FF.
„ The positive-sequence current may only vary less than -10% or +5% within 50 ms
after the positive-sequence voltage has fallen below the set threshold Vpos<, FF.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-229

3 Operation
(continued)

If the above conditions are satisfied, a memory is set; it is reset when the positive-
sequence voltage exceeds the fixed threshold of 0.5 Vnom and the negative-sequence
voltage falls below the set threshold Vneg<, FF.

If the memory is set and the base point release for the distance protection has operated
in at least one phase, or if the negative-sequence voltage set threshold is exceeded, the
P439 determines that the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer is faulty. In this
case distance protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent time
protection – provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.

3-230 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

MCMON: FF, V
enabled USER
[ 014 009 ]

1
0: No
1: Yes

DIST: IA>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 598

DIST: IB>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 599

DIST: IC>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 600

DIST: General 0 30 ms
starting
[ 036 240 ]

IA I/ t > 5%
IB I/ t > 5%
IC I/ t > 5%

MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]

Ipos Ipos/ t > 5%

-10%< Ipos/ t<5%

MCMON: Ineg>, FF
[ 031 057 ]
MCMON: Set FF, V
304 650

|Ineg|

MCMON: Vneg>, FF
[ 031 056 ]

VA-G
|Vneg| MCMON: Vneg>, FF
VB-G trigg.
304 651

VC-G

MCMON: Vpos<, FF
[ 031 053 ]

|Vpos| 1 50 ms

49Z64FFA_EN

3-159 Fuse failure monitoring, Part 1 of 2

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-231

3 Operation
(continued)

MCMON: Operate
delay FF, V
[ 031 058 ]

t 0 MCMON: FF, V
MCMON: Set FF, V S1 1 triggered
304 650 [ 035 081 ]
R1 SFMON: FF, V
triggered
[ 098 021 ]

MAIN: Phase |Vpos| > 0.5 Vnom

sequence
[ 010 049 ]

VA-G
VB-G |Vpos|

VC-G

MCMON: Vneg<, FF
[ 031 054 ]

|Vneg|

DIST: IA>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 598

DIST: IB>(Ibl)
trigg.303 599
DIST: IC>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 600

MCMON: Vneg>, FF
trigg.
304 651

49Z64FEA_EN

3-160 Fuse failure monitoring, Part 2 of 2

3-232 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

"Fuse Failure" monitoring

of the reference voltage
The P439 includes "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage function, which is
required by the 'Automatic Synchronism Check' (ASC). Fuse Failure monitoring of the
reference voltage is only possible if the ASC function has been configured. This is
specifically applied when no auxiliary contact is available on the voltage transformer
m.c.b. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters.

Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in the three-
phase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing because of a short
circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage.

A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage is
present when the following conditions are met:

The circuit breaker is closed.

The difference in voltages on the line side and the busbar must exceed 0.1 Vnom.

3-161 "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-233

3 Operation
(continued)

3.25 Backup overcurrent-time protection (Function Group BUOC)

If there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection is blocked, since

accurate impedance measurement is not possible. Backup overcurrent-time protection
(BUOC) is then automatically activated – if set accordingly.
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) is enabled if there is a fault in the voltage-
measuring circuit. It monitors the phase currents for overcurrents exceeding the set
values I>. If a phase current exceeds the set value, timer stage tI> is started. After the
set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. If inrush stabilization is triggered,
BUOC protection is blocked.

If the ‘Low impedance-grounding’ setting has been selected for the neutral point
treatment, ground current IN is also monitored by the settable trigger IN>, in addition to
the phase currents. If the ground current exceeds the set value, timer stage tIN> is
started. After the set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. Inrush stabilization
blocks the ground starting of BUOC protection.

The setting for the operating mode controls whether the BUOC protection function will
trigger an auto-reclosure (ARC). If auto-reclosure is desired, timer stages tI> and tIN>
will be blocked when the ARC function is ready. With phase starting, the trip signal will
then be issued instantaneously; with ground starting, it will be issued after an 80 s delay.
Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the ARC hold time is elapsing.

3-234 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

MCMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
BUOC: General
enable USER
[ 014 011 ] SFMON: BUOC not
active
[ 098 002 ]
0
BUOC: Enabled
1 [ 040 093 ]

0: no
1: yes

BUOC: Operating
mode
[ 014 000 ] SFMON: BUOC
active w/o ARC
[ 098 003 ]
1
SFMON: BUOC
2 active with ARC
[ 098 004 ]
3
BUOC: Active
1: Without ARC [ 037 021 ]
2: With ARC, 3p HSR
3: With ARC, 1/3p. HSR

AWE: Ready
[ 004 068 ]
BUOC: tI>
GRUND: Rush C PSx
restr. A trig. [ * ]
[ 041 027 ]
GRUND: Rush
restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
GRUND: Rush BUOC: Trip
restr. C trig. signal
[ 041 029 ] [ 036 014 ]

BUOC: I>
MAIN: Protection C PSx
active [ * ] BUOC: IA>
306 001 triggered
304 750
IA
BUOC: IB>
IB triggered
304 751

IC BUOC: IC>
triggered
304 752

BUOC: tIN>
C PSx
ARC: Dead time [ * ]
running
[ 037 002 ]

GRUND: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx BUOC: IN>
[ * ] C PSx C
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding

BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]

BUOC: SN
304 757

BUOC: IN>
triggered
304 753

* Parameter GRUND: Neutr.pt.

treat. PSx
BUOC: I>
PSx
BUOC: tI>
PSx
BUOC: IN>
PSx
BUOC: tIN>
PSx
set 1 010 048 010 058 010 059 010 064 010 065
set 2 001 076 010 078 010 079 010 084 010 085
set 3 001 077 010 098 010 099 011 004 011 005
set 4 001 078 011 018 011 019 011 024 011 025 49Z6434 A_EN

3-162 Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC)

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-235

3 Operation
(continued)

3.26 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF)

When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an existing

fault. This is especially critical if a maintenance ground clamp were inadvertently left
connected at the remote end of the line, since the distance protection function would not
clear the fault until zone 2 delay t2 had elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest
possible clearance is desired.

To ensure rapid clearing with manual closing, the manual close signal must be applied
not only to the circuit breaker but also to the P439. The signal M A I N : M a n u a l
c l o s e E X T must be configured separately to a binary signal input (and triggered
during the closing action) even if the close command is issued via the P439. The
manual close signal is converted to an internal pulse, of settable duration. The pulse
time can be set. The user may specify whether the following shall occur during
operation of this timer stage:

The occurrence of a general start shall cause a trip (S O T F : T r i p s i g n a l )

(see section 'Starting Signals and Tripping Logic' for a definition of general starting).
A zone extension of impedance zone 1 shall occur (SO T F : Z 1 e xt e n d e d ) .

Switch on to fault protection can be blocked by external auto-reclosing control (ARC),

provided that a binary signal input has been configured accordingly. An internal blocking
signal is generated together with the trigger signal for the timer stage. This internal
blocking signal will prevent that ARC is activated during an existing fault when a manual
close signal is issued.

3-163 Switch on to Fault Protection

3-236 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.27 Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG)

The reach of the first impedance zone of the distance protection function is normally set
for values less than 100%. Protective signaling is used to extend protection to 100% of
the line section. This is achieved by logical linking of the signals that are transmitted by
the remote station’s protection device.

Disabling or enabling
protective signaling
The function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or binary signal inputs.

The function is enabled independently of parameter subsets via

P S I G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via P S I G : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, protective
signaling can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have
equal status. If only the P S I G : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal
input, then protective signaling is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is
disabled by a negative edge. If only the PSIG: D i s a b l e E X T function is assigned to
a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.

Readiness of protective
signaling
In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, the following requirements must be
satisfied:

It must be enabled.
There must be no external block.
There must be no transmission fault.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-237

3 Operation
(continued)

PSIG: Ext./user
enabled
[ 037 023 ]

45Z5032 C_EN

3-164 Enabling, disabling and readiness of protective signaling

3-238 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

If protective signaling is ready, distance protection tripping takes place in zone 1.

With normal reach: after distance protection stage t1 has elapsed.

With extended reach: after the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed.

PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT

8: Direction
comparison

MAIN: Meas.r.extd.
ext./RC
306 002

PSIG: Tripping PSIG: Timer

time PSx stage elapsed
[ * ] 305 164

PSIG: Trip
t 0 time elapsed
PSIG: Ready 305 150
[ 037 027 ]

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]

* Parameter PSIG: Tripping PSIG: Operating

time PSx mode PSx
set 1 015 011 015 000
set 2 024 003 024 000
set 3 024 063 024 060
set 4 025 023 025 020

49Z6442 A_EN

3-165 Protective signaling tripping time

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-239

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the
transmission section
A transmission fault leads to a blocking of the protective signaling function (see
Figure 3-166). If protective signaling is being carried out via a signal transmission or
communication device, the device's fault signal can be connected. With protective
signaling over pilot wires or with the operating mode set to 'reverse interlocking' the
internal monitoring function will detect a fault in the transmission channel.

PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
[ * ]
6: DC loop PSIG: Telecom.
operat. mode faulty
[ 036 060 ]

PSIG: Release t.
send PSx SFMON: Telecom.
[ * ] faulty, SV
[ 098 006 ]

PSIG: Receive EXT Set value+600ms 0

[ 036 048 ]

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]

PSIG: Telecom
faulty int.
305 151

PSIG: Telecom.
faulty EXT
[ 004 064 ]
Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release t.
mode PSx send PSx
set 1 015 000 015 002
set 2 024 000 024 001
set 3 024 060 024 061
set 4 025 020 025 021
49Z6443A_EN

3-166 Transmission fault

3-240 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Frequency monitoring
Failure of frequency transmission may be signaled to the P439 via an appropriately
configured binary signal input (P S I G : F r e q . m o n . t r i g . E X T ) If frequency
monitoring is enabled, the P439 – once an operate delay of approximately 20 ms has
elapsed – will generate a receive signal for a duration of 150 ms.

3-167 Frequency monitoring

Transient blocking
In the event of a direction change, protective signaling will be blocked for the time set at
PSIG: tBlock PSx.

PSIG: tBlock PSIG: tBlock

PSx PSx
DIST: Fault [ * ] [ * ]
forward / LS S1 1
[ 036 018 ]
R1
PSIG: Transient
DIST: Fault blocking
backward / BS S1 1 305 154
[ 036 019 ]
R1

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
* Parameter PSIG: tBlock
PSx
set 1 015 024
set 2 024 010
set 3 024 070
set 4 025 030
49Z6444 A_EN

3-168 Transient blocking

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-241

3 Operation
(continued)

Protective signaling
operating modes
Protective signaling can be operated in eight different modes. The following operating
modes require a signal transmission device:

Direct underreaching transfer trip

PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer trip)
Zone Extension
Release scheme
Blocking scheme
Direction comparison

For operation in the modes referred to as ‘DC loop operating mode’ and ‘reverse
interlocking’, pilot wires are required for signal transmission.

3-169 Setting the protective signaling operating modes

3-242 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Without
If only the weak infeed logic or the echo function will be used and no other functions of
protective signaling, then this can be implemented by setting the operating mode for
‘Without’.

Direct underreaching
transfer trip
When a distance protection trip has occurred in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote
station’s protection device. Upon receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote
station’s circuit breaker is tripped. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive
signal will be ignored.

3-170 PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the 'direct underreaching transfer trip' operating mode

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-243

3 Operation
(continued)

PUTT (permissive
underreaching transfer trip)
When a distance protection trip zone 1 has occurred, a signal is sent to the remote
station’s protection device. On receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote
station’s circuit breaker is subject to permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)
once the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating,
then the receive signal will be ignored.

3-171 send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the 'PUTT 'operating mode

3-244 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Zone Extension
When a distance protection trip has occurred in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote
station’s protection device. Upon receipt of the transmitted signal, the measuring range
of zone 1 in the remote station is increased by the zone extension factor kze HSR.

The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting
at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x in the remote station.

'Direction-dependent'
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs if distance
protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'. If transient blocking is
operating, then the receive signal will be ignored.
'Distance-dependent'
If the fault is located within the extended zone, then the protection device of the
remote station also decides in favor of a trip in zone 1 after the protective signaling
tripping time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal
will be ignored.

3-172 Reaches with zone extension

(dashed line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)

If D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x was set to'1p:Z1/t1(3p); 3p:Z1/t4' or '1p:Z1/t1;

3p:Z1/t4', the receive signal is stored until the general starting condition of distance
protection drops out. In order to be stored, the receive signal must persist for at least
40 ms. This function is important for backup protection.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-245

3 Operation
(continued)

PSIG: Release
t. send PSx
[ * ]

PSIG: Ready 0 t PSIG: Send

(signal)
[ 037 027 ] [ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Send
PSIG: Operating (transm.relay)
mode PSx [ 037 024 ]
[ * ]
3: Zone extension

DIST: Trip signal

zone 1 PSIG: Z1 extended
[ 035 072 ] [ 035 075 ]

PSIG: Receive EXT

[ 036 048 ]
40ms 0
S1 1
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg. R1
305 152

PSIG: Transient
blocking
305 154

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]

DIST: Op. mode

zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
2: 1p:Z1/t1(3p)
3p:Z1/t4

6: 1p:Z1/t1,
3p:Z1/t4 PSIG: Receive
(signal)
MAIN: General [ 037 029 ]
starting
[ 036 000 ]

PSIG: Oper. mode

trip PSx
[ * ]

1: Direct.-dependent PSIG: Trip enable

305 157

2: Dist.-dependent
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
DIST: Trip signal
zone 1,Ü
[ 035 074 ] PSIG: Trip 1
305 155
PSIG: Timer
stage 305
elapsed
164

DIST: Fault
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]

Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release t. PSIG: Oper. mode DIST: Op. mode
mode PSx send PSx trip PSx zone 4 PSx
set 1 015 000 015 002 015 107 012 000
set 2 024 000 024 001 015 108 012 050
set 3 024 060 024 061 015 113 013 000
set 4 025 020 025 021 015 114 013 050
49Z6445A_EN

3-173 PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the 'Zone extension' operating mode

3-246 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Release scheme
Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at
PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx.

'Direction-dependent'
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
'Distance-dependent'
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices is extended
by the zone extension factor kze HSR. The distance protection trip in extended
zone 1 is blocked in both protection devices.

3-174 Zone reaches with the release scheme

(dashed line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)

The setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x defines when the P439 sends a

signal to the remote station.

'Direction-dependent'
If the distance protection function detects a fault in the forward direction, the P439
sends a signal to the remote station.
'Distance-dependent'
If the distance protection function detects a fault within extended zone 1, the P439
sends a signal to the remote station.

The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting
at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x in the remote station.

'Direction-dependent'
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs if distance
protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'. If transient blocking is
operating, then the receive signal will be ignored.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-247

3 Operation
(continued)

'Distance-dependent'
The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled, if there is a receive signal.
If the fault is located within extended zone 1, then the protection device of the remote
station also decides in favor of a trip in zone 1 after the protective signaling tripping
time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal will be
ignored.

3-175 PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the 'Release scheme' operating mode

3-248 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Blocking scheme
Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at
PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx.

'Direction-dependent'
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
'Distance-dependent'
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices is extended
by the zone extension factor kze HSR. The distance protection trip in extended
zone 1 is enabled in both protection devices.

3-176 Zone reaches with the blocking scheme

(dashed line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)

The setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x defines when the P439 sends a

signal to the remote station.

'Direction-dependent'
If distance protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse) direction or – for a
directional change – for the transient blocking time (setting at
P S I G : t B l o c k P S x ), a signal is sent to the remote station.
'Distance-dependent'
If the distance protection function detects a fault within zone 6 and if the measured
direction matches the direction set for zone 6, then the P439 sends a signal to the
remote station. A signal is also sent to the remote station during transient blocking.

The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting
at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x in the remote station.

'Direction-dependent'
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs if no receive
signal is present and distance protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'. If
transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal will be ignored.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-249

3 Operation
(continued)

'Distance-dependent'
The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled if there is no receive
signal. If the fault is located within extended zone 1, then the protection device of the
remote station also decides in favor of a trip in zone 1 after the protective signaling
tripping time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal
will be ignored.

3-177 PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals by protective signaling in the 'Blocking scheme' operating mode

3-250 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DC loop operating mode

To set up a communications link, it is necessary to connect either the break contact or
the make contact of the transmitting relay, depending on the selected transmitting relay
mode ('Transm.relay make co' or 'Transm.relay break c'), to the
P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T input of the remote station by means of pilot wires.

3-178 Protective signaling over pilot wires

In the idle state a receive signal is present at both protection devices (DC loop closed)
and the measuring range of zone 1 is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR.
The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled in both protection devices.

If distance protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse) direction, a signal is sent
to the remote station (DC loop open). The overcurrent fault detection logic of the
distance protection function immediately opens the DC loop without waiting for the
transfer trip timer stage to elapse or for a direction decision to be issued. The DC loop is
immediately closed again – without taking into account the reset time of the send signal
– if distance protection detects the fault to be in forward direction.

A distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is issued only after the protective signaling
tripping time has elapsed, provided that no receive signal is present (open loop).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-251

3 Operation
(continued)

3-179 PSIG send, zone extension and trip enable signals by protective signaling in the ‘DC loop operating mode’

The pilot wires are monitored for interruptions. If, during a fault-free operation, e.g. with
no distance protection general starting condition present, no signal is received from the
DC loop for a period longer than the set transmitted signal reset time plus 600 ms, then
the P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y signal is issued (see figure 3-166) and protective
signaling is blocked.

3-252 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Reverse interlocking
In radial networks with single-side infeed, it is possible under certain conditions for
busbar protection to be configured by sampling the starting of feeder protection devices.
By means of appropriate interconnection, a send signal is then formed when a feeder
protection device starts. When the P439 receives this signal, the distance protection trip
in extended zone 1 is blocked. The blocking signal has a reset time delay set at
PSIG: tBlock.

3-180 Reverse interlocking

The pilot wires are monitored. If a receive signal is present for more than 10 s without
any general starting of distance protection, then blocking of the distance protection trip in
extended zone 1 is canceled. No new block can occur until the receive signal has
dropped out.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-253

3 Operation
(continued)

PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]

PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
[ * ]
7: Reverse
interlocking
PSIG: Trip enable
PSIG: tBlock 305 157
PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: t1
revers.interlock
PSIG: Receive 0 t [ 036 020 ]
EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG: Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152

PSIG: Telecom
faulty int.
10s 0 305 151
S1 1
R1
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]

PSIG: Receive
(signal)
[ 037 029 ]

MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]

Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: tBlock

mode PSx PSx
set 1 015 000 015 024
set 2 024 000 024 010
set 3 024 060 024 070
set 4 025 020 025 030
49Z6446 B_EN

3-181 Trip enable and trip signal in the 'Reverse interlocking' operating mode

3-254 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Direction comparison
A signal is sent to the remote station if distance protection detects a fault in the forward
direction.

Once the tripping time has elapsed, protective signaling issues a trip decision if a receive
signal is present and distance protection detects a fault in the forward direction. In the
event of a direction change, the receive signal is ignored for the set time period
PSIG : tBl o c k (‘transient blocking’) so as to avoid unwanted tripping in the protection
of double circuit lines.

3-182 PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the 'Direction comparison' operating mode

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-255

3 Operation
(continued)

Weak infeed logic

The P439 features a "weak infeed logic" function. Weak infeed logic can either be
triggered by a binary signal input configured to P S I G : W e a k i n f . t r i g g . E X T or
by the binary signal input configured to P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T .

The weak infeed logic checks the phase-to-ground voltages to determine whether they
fall below the set threshold P S I G : V < w e a k i n f e e d P S x . If the voltage in one
phase falls below the set threshold, then a timer stage is started. Once it has elapsed –
provided that the appropriate setting has been selected – a protective signaling trip is
issued.

3-183 Weak infeed logic

3-256 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Blocking the weak infeed

logic
Application of the weak infeed logic has been enhanced by the following measures:

Blocking of the weak infeed logic with a dead line. The identification criterion for a
dead line is that all 3 phase-to-ground voltages and all 3 phase-to-phase voltages
have fallen below 0.35 Vnom (/√3). For this VTs must be connected on the line side.
Blocking will occur only after a 5 s reset time so that the weak infeed logic is
available, without limitations, for close-up 3-pole faults.
Blocking of the weak infeed logic (during and) after a local distance starting, where
blocking is sustained until a receive signal present is terminated.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-257

3 Operation
(continued)

Echo function
If operation with the echo function is desired, then the user may specify whether the
receive signal alone is to be employed in activating the echo pulse or whether the
receive signal and the triggering signal of the weak infeed logic are to be used. The
conditions for activation of the echo pulse must persist for a period in excess of the set
operate delay, and distance protection starting must be absent for the echo pulse to be
activated. The echo pulse is then transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse
duration. Thereafter, the transmission of the receive signal is blocked for the set pulse
duration + 1 s. This prevents a permanent signal from being transmitted. The echo
function may be disabled.

PSIG: Echo on
receive PSx
[ * ]

1
2
0: Without
1: On receive
2: On receive & V<

PSIG: Op. delay PSIG: Pulse

echo PSx dur. echo PSx
[ * ] [ * ]

PSIG: V<
triggered
305 162 t 0 PSIG: Send
(signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Receive EXT
[ 036 048 ]
0 t+1s PSIG: Send
(transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]

Parameter PSIG: Echo on PSIG: Op. delay PSIG: Pulse dur.

receive PSx echo PSx echo PSx
set 1 015 003 015 022 015 023
set 2 024 002 024 008 024 009
set 3 024 062 024 068 024 069
set 4 025 022 025 028 025 029
49Z6447A_EN

3-184 Echo function

3-258 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Testing the communication

channel
The communication link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is issued
through a binary signal input or by means of a setting parameter. It is extended by the
reset time-delay of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if the
communication link is OK.

3-185 Testing the communication channel

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-259

3 Operation
(continued)

3.28 Auto-Reclosure Control (Function Group ARC)

After certain faults, the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) brings about automatic
reclosing of the line section that was interrupted by a protection device.

ARC operating modes

The integral ARC function in the P439 offers the possibility of multiple reclosures. When
the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first begin with a
high-speed reclosure (HSR). If the fault is not cleared after reclosure by a HSR, then
another attempt can be made to clear the fault with a time-delayed reclosure (TDR).
Multiple reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if the ARC operating mode is set
accordingly.

3-186 Setting the operating mode of the ARC function

Enabling and disabling the

ARC function
The function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through binary
signal inputs.

The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter subsets)

via A R C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via A R C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the
Auto-reclose control function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary
signal inputs have equal status. If only the A R C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned
to a binary signal input, then ARC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the parameter A R C : D i s a b l e E X T has
been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.

3-260 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

ARC: Ext./user
enabled
[ 037 013 ]

45Z5039 B_EN

3-187 Disabling and enabling auto-reclosing control

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-261

3 Operation
(continued)

ARC ready
ARC is ready when the following conditions are satisfied:

Protection is activated (on).

ARC is not blocked.
No ARC cycle is running.
The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening and
closing mechanism ready).
The circuit breaker is in closed position. (Position scanning is optional.)

3-188 ARC readiness

3-262 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

ARC blocked
The ARC will be blocked if one of the following conditions applies:

Distance protection detects a fault in the cable section of the transmission section.
A manual close is carried out.
A switch to backup overcurrent time protection (BUOC) is made, but no ARC is to be
carried out.
A manual open command is issued.
A trip signal is issued by circuit breaker failure protection.
A trip signal is issued by ground fault protective signaling,
A trip signal is issued by ground fault tripping,
The binary signal input configured to A R C : B l o c k i n g E X T is triggered.

After all blocking conditions have dropped out, the relevant blocking time is started, and
when this time has elapsed, the block is canceled.

3-189 ARC blocking

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-263

3 Operation
(continued)

ARC Tripping Times

If protective signaling is not ready, the HSR or TDR tripping times of the ARC function
are initiated by the general starting condition. These tripping times replace the distance
protection timer stage t1,ze and the BUOC timer stages.

3-190 ARC Tripping Times

3-264 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Starting the ARC cycle

When the ARC is ready, an ARC cycle is started by one of the following functions:

The general starting state formed internally or the general starting signal of a parallel
protection device, provided that a binary signal input has been configured
accordingly.
A distance protection trip (possible without general starting, such as through the
protective signaling direct transfer trip underreaching mode).
A backup overcurrent-time protection trip (BUOC trip), provided that the ARC is to be
activated by the BUOC function.
The trip signal of an external protection device, provided that the parameters of this
device have been set accordingly (A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x ).
A test HSR.

The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-265

3 Operation
(continued)

3.28.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR)

When the ARC cycle starts, operative time 1 is started. The starting conditions for the
ARC cycle must drop out while the operative time is elapsing. This means that the
circuit breaker must have opened so that the dead time is started. If the operative time is
set at ≤ 25 ms, then ARC will not be ready in the event of starting; in the event of a trip,
the reclaim time is started.

The three-pole dead time (A R C : D e a d t i m e 3 p P S x ) is started if the starting

conditions for an ARC cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. The close
command is issued once the dead time has elapsed.

Should the circuit breaker fail to clear the fault within the operative time, the reclaim time
will be started and a three-pole trip will occur (final trip). If the operative time has
elapsed without a trip decision, then the ARC is ready again immediately after the
general starting condition has dropped out.

3-266 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-191 Signal sequence for high-speed reclosure (HSR)

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-267

3 Operation
(continued)

Test HSR
A test HSR can be carried out using setting parameters or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input.

3-192 Test HSR

3-268 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.28.2 Time-Delayed Reclosure (TDR)

A TDR may occur after a HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR or if the
operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. This is only possible if the setting at
A R C : N o . o f p e r m i t . T D R P S x (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero.

The TDR is started if either a new general starting condition or the trip of an external
protection device (if configured accordingly) occurs while the reclaim time is elapsing.
Operative time 1 is started. If the starting conditions for the TDR drop out while
operative time 1 is elapsing, then the TDR dead time is started. The close command is
issued once the dead time has elapsed.

If the fault is still present even after another reclosing, the TDR can be started again.
This process can be repeated as often as allowed by the number of permitted TDRs. If
the fault is still present after that, then a final trip occurs.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-269

3 Operation
(continued)

3-193 Signal sequence with time-delayed reclosure (TDR)

3-270 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.28.3 Rapid Reclosure (RRC)

Rapid reclosure (RRC) operates along with HSR or TDR. If the P439 carries out
appropriate measurements and concludes that the line is carrying voltage and that the
line voltages are healthy, then reclosing is carried out by RRC before reclosing by HSR
or TDR.

If the setting at M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t . is Low-impedance grounding, then

both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is either
Isolated neutral/resonant-grounding or Short-duration grounding, then only the
phase-to-phase voltages are checked.

ARC: Enable RRC

PSx
[ * ]

0
1
0: no
ARC: V> RRC
1: yes C PSx
[ * ]
ARC: V> for RRC
triggered
303 014
VA-G* 3
VA-G
VB-G VB-G* 3
VC-G
VC-G* 3

MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding

* Parameter- ARC: Enable RRC ARC: V> RRC MAIN: Neutr.pt.

PSx PSx treat. PSx
set 1 015 085 015 087 010 048
set 2 024 044 024 046 001 076
set 3 025 004 025 006 001 077
set 4 025 064 025 066 001 078
49Z64AHA_EN

3-194 Voltage monitoring for RRC

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-271

3 Operation
(continued)

If the starting conditions for rapid reclosing drop out during operative time 1, the RRC
timer stage tRRC is started. After the timer stage has elapsed, the P439checks to
determine whether the voltages measured by distance protection were greater than or
equal to the set threshold value (A R C : V > R R C P S x ) during the last 100 ms. If
such is the case a close command is issued.

If it is determined after timer stage tRRC has elapsed that the voltages were not greater or
equal to the set threshold (A R C : V > R R C P S x ), then the ARC cycle is continued by
the HSR or TDR.

3-195 Signal sequence for rapid reclosure (RRC)

3-272 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.28.4 Parallel Blocking

If a second protection device is operating in parallel with the P439, then the 'trip' from
this protection device can be integrated into the ARC functional sequence – provided
that the binary signal inputs have been configured appropriately. The effect exercised by
the "Trip" of the external protection device operating in parallel depends on the setting at
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x (see Figure 3-197 for setting).

A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x 'Without function'
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional
sequence.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x 'Parallel blocking without initiation'
The "Trip" of the external parallel protection device does not intervene in the TDR,
HSR or RRC functional sequence.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x 'Parallel blocking with initiation'
The "Trip" of the external protection device starts a TDR, HSR or RRC. The
sequence is the same as with initiation by the P439.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-273

3 Operation
(continued)

3.28.5 Zone Extension

Zone extension (ZE) of impedance zone 1 of the distance protection function is only
initiated by the ARC if protective signaling is not ready.

HSR and TDR activate different zone extension factors.

Zone extension by kze HSR

Zone extension by the zone extension factor kze HSR is affected by the following
settings:

Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . H S R P S x 'Yes'

The measuring range is extended when the ARC is ready and while operative time 1
is elapsing.
Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . d u r . R C P S x
„ 'Following HSR'
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing if the
close command is issued by a HSR.
„ Always
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing..
How the close command is triggered is not important.

If the two parameters are set for No or Without, respectively, then there is no zone
extension.

Zone extension by kze TDR

The measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended by the zone extension factor
kze HSR after a close command is issued by the TDR function, as long as another TDR
is permitted and the setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . T D R P S x is 'Yes'. Zone
extension is canceled during the course of the TDR dead time. If the setting is 'No',
there is no zone extension.

3-274 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-196 Zone extension by ARC

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-275

3 Operation
(continued)

3.28.6 General ARC Control Functions

While the reclose command time is elapsing, the close command will be terminated by
either a trip or - as another option – the 'Circuit breaker close' signal (setting at
M A I N : R C i n h i b . b y C B c l ), see Fig. 3-197).

3-197 ARC sequence control

3-276 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.28.7 ARC Counters

The following ARC signals are counted:

Number of high-speed reclosures.

Number of time-delayed reclosures.

The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.

ARC: No. of
ARC: HSR A-B-C + HSR A-B-C
303 005
[ 004 004 ]
R
ARC: TDR ARC: Number
303 006
+ TDR
[ 004 008 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: exectute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ARC: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]

ARC: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 005 ]

0
1

0: don’t execute
1: execute

49Z64ACA_EN

3-198 ARC Counters

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-277

3 Operation

3.29 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)

The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the device to verify that before
a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between system sections that
are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the system sections is de-
energized. In order to check for synchronism, two voltages – generally the voltages on
the line and busbar sides – are compared for differences in frequency, angle, and
voltage. Connecting the reference voltage transformer will determine which of the
system sections will provide the reference voltage (e.g. the line side or the busbar side).
The measurement loop must be set in the P439 according to the reference voltage
connection (setting A S C : M e a s u r e m e n t l o o p P S x ) so that the correct
measurement loop voltage is selected for the comparison. In the connection example
shown in the section entitled 'Conditioning of the Measured values', the busbar voltage
VA-B is the reference voltage.

3-199 Selecting the measurement loop

3-278 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Disabling and enabling the

ASC function
Disabling or enabling may be carried out using a setting parameter or through binary
signal inputs.

The function is enabled generally (independently of the parameter subsets) at

A S C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via A S C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, ASC can
be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through appropriately configured
binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status.
If only the A S C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal input, then the
ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative
edge. If only the A S C : D i s a b l e E X T function has been assigned to a binary signal
input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.

If the ASC function is disabled an unchecked activation signal will always be issued.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-279

3 Operation
(continued)

45Z5041 B_EN

3-200 Enabling/disabling the automatic synchronism check function

3-280 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

ASC readiness and

blocking
The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no blocking.
Blocking can be brought about if a voltage transformer m.c.b. was tripped, or by an
appropriately configured binary signal input, or by back-up overcurrent protection
(BUOC) protection provided that the latter is not set to activate the ARC function.
The user can specify whether closing or reclosing will always be enabled or not
(reclosure with or without a check) when the ASC function is blocked.

The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and time-delayed
reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a check.
The single-pole high speed reclosure is always without a check

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-281

3 Operation
(continued)

3-201 ASC readiness and blocking

3-282 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Close request
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC from the integrated local control panel or via
an appropriately configured binary signal input (A S C : C l o s e r e q u e s t E X T ). Close
requests via a setting parameter or a binary signal input are only accepted if no ARC
cycle is running.

ARC: Cycle running ASC: Manual

close request
[ 037 000 ] 305 000

ASC: Gen.
close request
ASC: Close 306 012
request USER
[ 018 004 ]

0
1 500ms 1

0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC: Close
request
[ 034 018 ]

ASC: Close 50ms 0

request EXT 1
[ 037 062 ] 500ms

ASC: Enabl.close 50ms 0

requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]

INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]

Ux1
Ux2
Ux3
Ux4
Uxx

Address 037 063

ASC: Test close

requ. USER
[ 018 005 ]
ASC: Test
305 004

1 100ms 1 1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute

ASC: Test close ASC: Test close

requ. EXT request
[ 037 064 ] [ 034 019 ]

49Z6448A_EN

3-202 Close request

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-283

3 Operation
(continued)

The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable signal is
issued before the ASC operative time has elapsed, the close command is issued.
Otherwise an A S C : C l o s e r e j e c t i o n signal is generated for 100 ms.

3-203 Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection

3-284 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

ASC operating modes

The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode setting.
The following operating mode settings are possible:

Voltage-checked
Synchronism-checked
Voltage/synchronism-checked

Continuous synchronism
check
Synchronism checks, e.g. monitoring of voltage and/or synchronism requirements, are
now carried out continuously during the duration of the set ASC operative time.
The following signals are updated according to their current states:
ASC: Close enable
ASC: Close enable,volt.ch
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch
ASC: Close rejection
The maximum operative time setting was extended to 6000 s (100 minutes).
Extended settings for the
close enable conditions
The close enable conditions can now be set separately for auto-reclose control and
manual close command. This makes it possible to select different operating modes as
well as different tolerance ranges.
Close enable conditions for
Auto-reclose control Manual close command
ASC: AR op. mode PSx ASC: MC op. mode PSx
ASC: AR with tCB PSx ASC: MC with tCB PSx
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk. PSx ASC: MC op.mode v-chk. PSx
ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx
ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx
ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx
ASC: AR delta f max PSx ASC: MC delta f max PSx
ASC: AR delta phi max PSx ASC: MC delta phi max PSx
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PSx ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx

The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request is
issued by the integrated ARC (for a RRC, HSR or TDR) or by a close request from an
external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function
ASC: AR close request EXT.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-285

3 Operation
(continued)

Considering the
CB close time
In slightly asynchronous power systems the new settings A S C : A R w i t h t C B P S x
= 'Yes' and A S C : M C w i t h t C B P S x = 'Yes' now make it possible to consider the
circuit breaker closing time when issuing of a close command (as of version P439-611).
The condition for "slightly asynchronous power systems" is given if the difference in
frequencies lies within the range of 10 mHz < ∆f < ∆fmax. If this condition and the voltage
condition (∆V < ∆Vmax) are met then the next point in time is continuously calculated at
which the phasors for Vref and the corresponding voltage of the three-phase system are
in phase (e.g. difference in voltage phase angles approaches 0°). The close command,
allowing for the set CB close time M A I N : t C B , c l o s e , is then issued sooner.

yes yes
Close with tCB 'f < 10 mHz

no no

synchronous mode, close if: asynchronous mode, synchronous mode, close if:
'V < 'Vmax close if: 'V < 'Vmax
'f < 'fmax 'V < 'Vmax 'M < 'Mmax
'M < 'Mmax 'f < 'fmax for tmin,synchr
for tmin,synchr Raise close command so that within operative time
within operative time closing takes place at 'M = 0
(taking CB close time and
internal delays into account)
within operative time

47Z1085B_EN

3-204 Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check

3-286 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Voltage-checked
The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltage-checked
close enable without affecting the former. This allows closing if at least one side is
voltage-free/de-energized. To detect whether voltage is present or not on either side,
the three phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage Vref are monitored to
determine whether they exceed or fall below the set threshold values:

ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx

ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx

Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all three phase-to-
ground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to meet the condition
for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding to the set operating mode
for the voltage-checked synchronism check are met for the duration of the set minimum
time (A S C : t m i n v o l t . c h e c k ) then the close enable signal is issued.

ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx

The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately for each
parameter subset:

Vref but not V

V but not Vref
Not V and not Vref
Not V or not Vref
Vref & Z1 but not V

The last operating mode includes a further requirement, which specifies that the close
request is issued during an ARC cycle and the cause of the fault for the previous
protective trip lies inside the reach of impedance zone 1.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-287

3 Operation
(continued)

ASC: AR op. mode

PSx
[ * ]
ASC: AR V>
volt.check PSx

ASC: AR V<
volt.check PSx

ASC: AR tmin
v-check PSx
SKA: AR Op.mode
v-chk.PSx

ASC: AR op. mode

PSx
018 025
018 026
018 027
018 028

ASC: AR Op.mode ASC: AR V> SKA: AR V< ASC: AR tmin

v-chk.PSx volt.check PSx volt.check PSx v-check PSx

47Z1080A_EN

3-205 Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control

3-288 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

ASC: MC op. mode

PSx
[ * ]
ASC: MC V>
volt.check PSx

ASC: MC V<
volt.check PSx

ASC: MC tmin
v-check PSx
ASC: MC op.mode
v-chk.PSx

ASC: MC op. mode

PSx
000 056
000 057
000 058
000 059

ASC: MC op.mode ASC: MC V> ASC: MC V< ASC: MC tmin

v-chk.PSx volt.check PSx volt.check PSx v-check PSx
000 060 000 064 000 068 000 072
000 061 000 065 000 069 000 073
000 062 000 066 000 070 000 074
000 063 000 067 000 071 000 075

47Z1081A_EN

3-206 Voltage-checked close enable for manual close control

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-289

3 Operation
(continued)

Synchronism-checked
Before a close enable signal is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for synchronism.
Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met simultaneously:

The three phase voltages and the reference voltage must exceed the set threshold
value:
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx

When with a three-phase voltage the setting of M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t . is

'Low-imped. grounding' both the phase-to-ground and the phase-to-phase voltages
are checked. If the setting is 'Isol./res.w.start. (or w/o st.)PG' only the phase-to-phase
voltages are checked.
The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference voltage must
not exceed the set threshold value:
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx

The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value:
ASC: AR delta f max PSx ASC: MC delta f max PSx

The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value:

ASC: AR delta phi max PSx ASC: MC delta phi max PSx

In these comparisons the set offset angle A S C : P h i o f f s e t is taken into account.

If these conditions are met for the set time A S C : t m i n s y n c . c h e c k , then a close
enable signal is issued. The ASC operating time for the determination of differences in
voltage, angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.

The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are stored
as measured synchronism data at the time the close enable signal is issued. In the
event of another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the new data.

3-290 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

ASC: Active * Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt. ASC: AR op. mode ASC: Phi offset ASC: AR V>
305 003 treat. PSx PSx PSx sync.check PSx
ASC: AR op. mode set 1 010 048 018 025 018 034 018 011
PSx set 2 001 076 018 026 077 042 077 035
[ * ] set 3 001 077 018 027 078 042 078 035
set 4 001 078 018 028 079 042 079 035
1
* Parameter ASC: AR delta ASC: AR delta ASC: AR delta ASC: AR tmin
2 Vmax PSx f max PSx phi max PSx sync.chk PSx
3 set 1 018 012 018 014 018 013 018 015
set 2 077 036 077 038 077 037 077 039
1: Voltage- set 3 078 036 078 038 078 037 078 039
checked set 4 079 036 079 038 079 037 079 039
2: Sync.-checked
MAIN: Neutr.pt. 3: Volt./sync.-
treat. PSx checked
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
ASC: AR V>
sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G VA-G
VB-G VB-G
VC-G VC-G

ASC: Select
meas.loop PG
305 008

ASC: AR tmin
Vref Vref sync.chk PSx
[ * ]

ASC: Close
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]

ASC: Test
305 004

ASC: Volt. magn.

ASC: AR delta diff.
Vmax PSx [ 004 091 ]
[ * ]

ASC: Volt. sel. Vmax ASC: Frequ.

meas.loop difference
[ 004 088 ] [ 004 090 ]

ASC: AR delta ASC: Angle

f max PSx difference
[ * ] [ 004 089 ]

ASC: AR delta
ASC: Phi offset phi max PSx
PSx [ * ]
[ * ]

corr

47Z1112A_EN

3-207 Synchronism-checked close enable for autoreclose control

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-291

3 Operation
(continued)

ASC: Active * Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt. ASC: MC op. mode ASC: Phi offset ASC: MC V>
305 003 treat. PSx PS PSx sync.check PSx
ASC: MC op. mode set 1 010 048 000 056 018 034 000 052
PSx set 2 001 076 000 057 077 042 000 053
[ * ] set 3 001 077 000 058 078 042 000 054
set 4 001 078 000 059 079 042 000 055
1
* Parameter ASC: MC delta ASC: MC delta ASC: MC delta ASC: MC tmin
2 Vmax PSx f max PSx phi max PSx sync.chk PSx
3 set 1 000 080 000 084 000 089 000 098
set 2 000 081 000 086 000 091 000 099
1: Voltage- set 3 000 082 000 087 000 092 000 100
checked set 4 000 083 000 088 000 093 000 101
2: Sync.-checked
MAIN: Neutr.pt. 3: Volt./sync.-
treat. PSx checked
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
ASC: MC V>
sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G VA-G
VB-G VB-G
VC-G VC-G

ASC: Select
meas.loop PG
305 008

ASC: MC tmin
Vref Vref sync.chk PSx
[ * ]

ASC: Close
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]

ASC: Test
305 004

ASC: Volt. magn.

ASC: MC delta diff.
Vmax PSx [ 004 091 ]
[ * ]

ASC: Volt. sel. Vmax ASC: Frequ.

meas.loop difference
[ 004 088 ] [ 004 090 ]

ASC: MC delta ASC: Angle

f max PSx difference
[ * ] [ 004 089 ]

ASC: MC delta
ASC: Phi offset phi max PSx
PSx [ * ]
[ * ]

corr

47Z1113A_EN

3-208 Synchronism-checked close enable for manual close control

3-292 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Voltage/synchronism-
checked
If this setting has been selected, then the close enable signal is issued if the conditions
for voltage- or synchronism-checked closing are met.

3-209 ASC sequence control

Testing the ASC function

For test purposes a close request can be issued via setting parameters or an
appropriately configured binary signal input (see Figure 3-202). The sequence is similar
to the close request from the integrated local control panel but there is no close
command and it is not counted.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-293

3 Operation
(continued)

Integrating the ASC

function into the control
and monitoring of
switchgear units
ASC triggering by a close request from the control functions is also possible.
This requires that the circuit breaker is assigned to an external device and that the ASC
system integration is set to "Autom. synchr. control". If the control function issues a
close request then the close command for the circuit breaker requires the
A S C : C l o s e e n a b l e (see 'Issue of switching commands' in section 'Control and
Monitoring of Switchgear Units').

ASC: Enabled
[ 018 024 ]

ASC: CB assignment
PSx
[ * ]

No assignment
DEV01
DEV02
DEV03
DEVxx ASC: AC active
for DEV01
305 040
Select. DEV01

ASC: Close
enable DEV01 AC
305 041
ASC: Close enable
[ 037 083 ]

ASC: System
integrat. PSx
[ * ]

1
2
1: Autom.synchron.check
2: Autom.synchr.control

Parameter ASC: CB assign- ASC: System

ment PSx integrat. PSx
set 1 037 131 037 135
set 2 037 132 037 136
set 3 037 133 037 137
set 4 037 134 037 138
19Z51BGC_EN

3-210 Integrating the ASC function into the control and monitoring of switchgear units

3-294 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Measured values obtained

by ASC
The following measured values are transmitted during a set cycle time:

Voltage from the reference voltage channel

Voltage from the selected measuring loop
Difference in phase voltage magnitudes
Difference in phase angles
Difference in frequencies

ASC: Transm.
cycle,meas.v.
[ 101 212 ]
ASC: Enabled
[ 018 024 ] C

ASC: Voltage Vref

[ 004 087 ]

ASC: Volt. sel.

meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]

ASC: Volt. magn.

diff.
[ 004 091 ]

ASC: Angle
difference
[ 004 089 ]

ASC: Frequ.
difference
[ 004 090 ]

49Z64BEA_EN

3-211 Measured values obtained by ASC

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-295

3 Operation
(continued)

ASC counters
The following ASC signals are counted:

Number of reclosures after a close request via setting parameters or an appropriately

configured binary signal input
Number of close requests
Number of close rejections

The counters can either be reset individually (at the address at which they are displayed)
or as a group.

ASC: Manual ASC: No. RC aft.

close request >S 1 1 & + man.clos
305 000 [ 004 009 ]
>R 1 R
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009 ]
ASC: Gen. close ASC: No. close
request + requests
306 012 [ 009 033 ]
R
ASC: Close ASC: No. close
rejection + rejections
[ 037 086 ] [ 009 034 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ASC: Reset
counters EXT
[ 006 074 ]

ASC: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 089 ]

1
0: don’t execute
1: execute
47Z1377A_EN

3-212 ASC counters

3-296 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.30 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC)

A four-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC) can be activated

concurrently with the distance protection. Three separate measuring systems are
available for this purpose for:

Maximum phase current

Negative-sequence current
Residual current

When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the first stage of DTOC protection is
blocked.

Enabling or disabling
DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.

3-213 Disabling or enabling DTOC protection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-297

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the maximum

phase current
The three phase currents are monitored to determine whether they exceed the set
thresholds. After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. The elapsing
of the operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DTOC: Blocking
tI> EXT
[ 041 060 ]
MAIN: Inrush &
stabil. trigg
306 014

MAIN: Protection
active & DTOC: tI>
306 001 c PSx
DTOC: I> [ * ]
DTOC: Enabled c PSx
[ * ]
[ 040 120 ]
t 0 DTOC: tI> elapsed
IA >
-1

IB [ 040 010 ]

IC DTOC: Starting I>

[ 035 020 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI>> EXT DTOC: tI>>
[ 041 061 ] c PSx
DTOC: I>> [ * ]
c PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DTOC: tI>>
>1
- elapsed
[ 040 011 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI>>>EXT DTOC: tI>>>
[ 041 062 ] c PSx
DTOC: I>>> [ * ]
c PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DTOC: tI>>>
>1
- elapsed
[ 040 012 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>>
[ 035 022 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI>>>> EXT DTOC: tI>>>>
[ 041 100 ] c PSx
DTOC: I>>>> [ * ]
c PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DTOC: tI>>>>
>1
- elapsed
[ 035 032 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>>>
[ 035 023 ]

* Parameter DTOC: I> DTOC: I>> DTOC: I>>> DTOC: I>>>>

PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 072 007 072 008 072 009 072 010
set 2 073 007 073 008 073 009 073 010
set 3 074 007 074 008 074 009 074 010
set 4 075 007 075 008 075 009 075 010

* Parameter DTOC: tI> DTOC: tI>> DTOC: tI>>> DTOC: tI>>>>

PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 072 019 072 020 072 021 072 022
set 2 073 019 073 020 073 021 073 022
set 3 074 019 074 020 074 021 074 022
set 4 075 019 075 020 075 021 075 022

47Z11ALA_EN
D5Z52ALA_EN

3-214 Monitoring the phase currents

3-298 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the negative-

sequence system
From the three phase currents, the P439 calculates the negative-sequence current
based on one of the following equations, depending on the setting at M A I N : P h a s e
s e q u e n c e (alternative terminology: Rotary field):

Phase sequence A-B-C Phase sequence A-C-B

(previous terminology: (previous terminology:
Clockwise rotating field): Anticlockwise rotating field):

I neg =
1
(
I + a 2 ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3 A
) I neg =
1
(
I + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ IC
3 A
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°

The negative-sequence current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set

thresholds. After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. The operate
delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-299

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]

D5Z52AMB_EN

3-215 Monitoring the negative-sequence current

3-300 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Depending on the setting, the P439 monitors the residual current, derived from the three
phase currents or measured at the current transformer T4.

3-216 Selecting the measured value

The residual current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set thresholds.
After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. The operate delays may
be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-301

3 Operation
(continued)

3-217 Monitoring the residual current

3-302 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Direction-dependent trip of
the residual current stages
The P439 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutral-
displacement voltage for the direction determination. The direction determination is
enabled when a current stage is started and the neutral-displacement voltage exceeds
the set threshold DTOC: V N G > P S x . The measured angle is displayed. The position
of the straight line separating forward and backward (reverse) directions is determined
with the setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G . A forward or backward (reverse)-directional
decision results if the following angle conditions are met:

Forward direction:
(90°+ϕ G ) ≥ ϕ > (270°+ϕ G )
Backward (reverse) direction: (90°+ϕ G ) ≤ ϕ < (270°+ϕ G )
where:

ϕ: Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point

displacement voltage

ϕE: Setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G

V C-G
Forward
direction

+
90o
phiG

phi(IG)
V G-N = -V N-G V A-G

IG

Backward (reverse)
direction
V B-G

47Z1090A_EN

3-218 Directional characteristic of the definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC). Angle phiG corresponds to the setting D T O C : A n g l e
p h i G (004 092).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-303

3 Operation
(continued)

3-219 Direction measurement of the definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC)

After the operate delay has elapsed, a trip signal of the respective residual current stage
is issued if the set direction matches the measured direction.

3-304 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-220 Trip signals of the DTOC residual current stages

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-305

3 Operation
(continued)

Hold-time logic for

intermittent ground faults
A hold-time logic for the treatment of intermittent ground faults is available in the P439.

As the IN> starting in the residual current stage commences, the hold time is reset.
At the same time, the starting time is accumulated when IN> starting commences.
As the IN> starting ends, the timer stage D T O C : P u l s . p r o l . I N > , i n t P S x is
started and the charging of the accumulation buffer is thereby lengthened by the set
value of the timer stage.
The accumulation result is compared to the settable limit value at
DTOC: tIN>, interm. PSx.
When the limit value is reached and the general starting signal is present, then a trip
signal is issued, D T O C : T r i p s i g . T I N > , i n t m . , which can be configured to the
trip commands 1 and 2.
„ MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
(Address 021 001)
„ MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
(Address 021 002)
If the limit value is reached while the timer stage
D T O C : P u l s . p r o l . I N > , i n t P S x is running, then a trip will occur when the next
general starting phase commences.
Each time the trigger stage IN> is reset, the set hold-time
D T O C : H o l d - t . t I N > , i n t m P S x is restarted. When the hold time has elapsed
or after the hold-time logic has issued a trip
(D T O C : T r i p s i g . t I N > , i n t m .), accumulation is stopped and the accumulation
buffer is cleared.

3-306 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DTOC: Puls.prol.
IN>,intPSx
[ * ]

DTOC: tIN,interm.
PSx
[ * ]

DTOC: Hold-t.
tIN>,intmPSx
[ * ]

DTOC: Trip sig.

tIN>,intm.
DTOC: Starting [ 039 073 ]
IN>
[ 035 028 ] Hold-time logic
DTOC: t2 N
305 454

DTOC: Pulse
prolong. runn.
305 462
DTOC: H.-time
tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
MAIN: General DTOC: tIN>,interm.
starting elapsed
[ 036 000 ] [ 040 099 ]

Parameter DTOC: Puls.prol. DTOC: tIN,interm. DTOC: Hold-t.

IN>,intPSx PSx tIN>,intmPSx
set 1 017 055 017 056 017 057
set 2 073 042 073 038 073 039
set 3 074 042 074 038 074 039
set 4 075 042 075 038 075 039

49Z6449 A_EN

3-221 Hold-time logic for definite-time characteristics

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-307

3 Operation
(continued)

DTOC: Starting
IN>
[ 035 028 ]

DTOC: Pulse
prolong. runn.
305 462

DTOC: H.-time
tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]

DTOC: t2 N
305 454

DTOC: Trip sig.

tIN>,intm.
[ 039 073 ]

Settings

DTOC: Puls.prol. DTOC: tIN,interm. DTOC: Hold-t.

IN>,intPSx PSx tIN>,intmPSx
Setting = 80ms Setting = 15ms Setting = 300ms

49Z6450 A_EN

3-222 Signal flow for values below the accumulation limit value

3-308 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DTOC: Starting
IN>
[ 035 028 ]

DTOC: Pulse
prolong. Runn.

DTOC: H.-time
tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]

DTOC: t2 N

DTOC: Trip sig.

tIN>, intm.
[ 039 073 ]

Startings not illustrated have

occured here

49Z6451 A_EN

3-223 Signal flow for values at the accumulation limit value

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-309

3 Operation
(continued)

3.31 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)

The single-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection function operates with three

separate measuring systems:

Maximum phase current

Negative-sequence current
Residual current.

When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the IDMT function is blocked.

Disabling or enabling IDMT

protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.

3-224 Disabling or enabling IDMT protection

3-310 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Time-dependent
characteristics
All three measuring systems operate independently of one another and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table
below). The IDMT protection function can be operated in a directional or a non-
directional mode. The user may use either the directional decision from the distance
measuring system or the directional decision formed from negative-sequence current
and voltage. The measured value is the maximum phase current, the negative-
sequence current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system.

The P439 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values
according to this equation. This is based on the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e setting
(alternative terminology: Rotary field).

Phase sequence A-B-C Phase sequence A-C-B

(alternative terminology: (alternative terminology:
Clockwise rotating field): Anticlockwise rotating field):

I neg =
1
(
I + a 2 ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3 A
) I neg =
1
3
(
IA + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ IC )
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°

Depending on the setting, the residual current to be monitored is either derived by the
P439 from the three phase currents or measured at current transformer T 4.

The protection function is triggered if 1.5 x the reference current is exceeded and the set
directional condition is satisfied. A trip signal is issued as a function of the characteristic
curve, although this trip signal can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary
signal input. The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in
figures 3-226 to 3-229.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-311

3 Operation
(continued)

IA COMP
IB
IC

Imax

MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]

Ineg

IDMT: Evaluation IN
PSx
[ * ]

1
y: P 1
2 y: neg 2
IN
1 ... 2 y: G 3

1 ... 3 IDMT: IMeas

Parameter IDMT: Evaluation 304 389
IN PSx
set 1 073 222
set 2 073 239
set 3 073 245
set 4 073 255
45Z5047B_EN

3-225 Forming the measured values

3-312 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Reset Characteristic
Characteristic
k = 0.01 to 10.00 a b c R
0 Definite Time t=k
Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k⋅ b
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟ −1
⎝ I ref ⎠
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 ⎛ ⎞ R
⎜ ⎟ tr = k ⋅ 2
⎜ a ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜ b
+ c⎟ ⎜ ⎟ −1
⎜⎛ I ⎞ ⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜⎜ ⎟ −1 ⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎠

5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85

6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI ⎛ ⎞ R
⎜ ⎟ tr = k ⋅ 2
⎜ a ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜ b
+ c⎟ ⎜ ⎟ −1
⎜⎛ I ⎞ ⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜⎜ ⎟ −1 ⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎠

8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00

9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t = k⋅
0,236
0.339 −
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠

12 RXIDG-Type Inverse ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 135
. ⋅ ln ⎟⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-313

3 Operation
(continued)

IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse

1000 1000

100 100

k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1 k=1

k=0.1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1

k=0.01
0.01 0.01 k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K1A D5Z50K2A

Characteristic No. 1 Characteristic No. 2

IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long-Time Inverse

1000 1000

100 100
k=10

10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.01

k=0.1
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
k=0.01
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K3A D5Z50K4A

Characteristic No. 3 Characteristic No. 4

3-226 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3

3-314 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

IEEE C37.112, Moderately IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse

Inverse
1000 1000

100 100

10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1

0,1 k=0,1 0.1

k=0.1

0,01 0.01 k=0.01

k=0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K5B D5Z50K6B

Characteristic No. 5 Characteristic No. 6

IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse

1000

100

10
t/s
k=10
1

k=1
0.1

k=0.1
0.01 k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref
D5Z50K7B

Characteristic No. 7

3-227 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-315

3 Operation
(continued)

ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short-Time Inverse

1000 1000

100 100

10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.01 0.01 k=0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K8B D5Z50K9B

Characteristic No. 8 Characteristic No. 9

ANSI, Long-Time Inverse

1000

100

k=10
10
t/s k=1
1

k=0.1
0.1

k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref
D5Z50KAB

Characteristic No. 10

3-228 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI

3-316 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse

1000 1000

100 100

k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s
k=1
1 1

k=0.1
k=0.1
0.1 0.1

k=0.01
k=0.01
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50KBA D5Z50KCA

Characteristic No. 11 Characteristic No. 12

3-229 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-317

3 Operation
(continued)

Minimum operate value for

the current in the residual
current measuring system
As of version P439 -611, a minimum operate value (threshold) may be defined for the
current in the residual current measuring system. The set factor
I D M T : F a c t o r K I , N P S x is multiplied by the reference quantity Iref,N in order to
form the minimum operate value for the residual current measuring system. The timer
stage is triggered only when the residual current exceeds this threshold.

Minimum trip time for the

residual current measuring
system
As of version P439 -611, a minimum trip time I D M T : M i n . t r i p t i m e N P S x may
be defined for the current in the residual current measuring system. This timer stage is
started as soon as the minimum operate value is exceeded. After the timer has elapsed,
the trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of the current.

K I,N * Iref ,N

t/s 10

t/s

IDMT: Min. trip time N

1
1 10 I/Iref 100

IN/Iref,N
47Z1003 B_EN

3-230 Influence of the minimum operate value and the minimum trip time on the IDMT characteristics

3-318 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-231 Trip signal for IDMT: Evaluation IN PSx with setting 'Calculated' (see Figure 3-225)
The parameter I D M T : I r e f , N ( m e a s . ) P S x (001 169 / 001 170 / 001 171 / 001 172) is used instead of I D M T : I r e f , N ( c a l c . )
P S x if setting is 'Measured' instead of 'Calculated'.
The 'Measured' parameter allows lower setting values.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-319

3 Operation
(continued)

Resetting the trip signal

With ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic, the trip
signal resets as soon as the internal memory value has been reduced to 97% of the
tripping value. (With version -601 the trip signal was present until the internal memory
value was reduced to 0% of the tripping value.)

Current IFault ILoad IFault ILoad

Iref
(rms value)

Internally 100 %
97 %
cumulated
relative trip
time 0%

tTrip= f(IFault/Iref) tReset = f(ILoad/Iref)

Trip signal
t

47Z1002A_EN

3-232 Reset behavior of the IDMT trip signal when the ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic is selected

3-320 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Directional measurement
The IDMT protection function determines the fault direction from the negative-sequence
voltage and current. The negative-sequence voltage and current are calculated by the
P439 based on the following formulae, depending on the phase sequence setting:

Phase sequence A-B-C:

1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A− G + a ⋅V B − G + a ⋅V C − G
3
2
)
I neg =
1
3
(
IA + a 2 ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC )
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A− G + a ⋅V B − G + a ⋅V C − G
3
2
)
I neg =
1
3
(
IA + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ IC )
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°

The voltage used for directional measurement is corrected for the voltage drop at the
fault impedance. The set impedance of the phase-to-ground loops of zone 1 of the
polygon characteristic is used for correction. For directional measurement to be
enabled, the corrected negative-sequence voltage needs to exceed a minimum
threshold of 0.05 Vnom/√3, and the negative-sequence current needs to exceed a
threshold of 0.03 Inom + 0.02 Imax. The device’s decision is 'Forward direction' if the angle
lies in the range of −105° ≤ ϕ ≤ 0° .

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-321

3 Operation
(continued)

VBG

Backward direction

-Vneg,corr (VAG)
-1050

Ineg

Forward direction
VCG

47Z1001A_EN

3-233 Directional characteristic

(includes example values for fault in A-N with voltage VAN completely short-circuited)

3-322 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]

D5Z50ATC_EN

3-234 Directional measurement

Directional setting
Each IDMT measuring system may be operated in directional or non-directional mode.
In directional mode, the directional decision that is used is either the one reached by
distance protection or the one formed by the IDMT function from the negative-sequence
current and voltage – depending on the setting. If the measuring voltage is faulty, the
measuring systems operate in non-directional mode or they are blocked - depending on
the setting.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-323

3 Operation
(continued)

3-235 Directional setting and directional decision

3-324 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.32 Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values

(Function Group GFDSS)

Ground fault direction is determined by evaluating the neutral-point displacement voltage

and the residual current using the steady-state power evaluation mode. Also possible as
an alternative is a steady-state current evaluation only. In this case only the filtered
residual current is used as a criterion for a ground fault. Ground fault direction
determination is then not possible.

Enable/disable the ground

fault direction
determination using
steady-state values
The ground fault direction determination using steady-state values can be disabled or
enabled using setting parameters. Switching the mode from steady-state power
evaluation to steady-state current evaluation is made by setting parameters or an
appropriately configured binary signal input.

Ground fault direction

determination using
steady-state values is
ready
A ready signal is issued for the evaluation mode selected if the protection and the
ground fault direction determination using steady-state values are enabled.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-325

3 Operation
(continued)

GFDSS: Enable
PSx
[ * ]

0: no
1: yes

GFDSS: General
enable USER
[ 016 060 ]
GFDSS: Enabled
& [ 042 096 ]
0

0: no
1: yes
&

MAIN: Protection
active
306 001

GFDSS: Operating
mode
[ 016 090 ]

2
3
1: Steady-state power
2: Steady-state current
3: Steady-state admitt.

GFDSS: GF (pow.)
& ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.) GFDSS: GF (pow.)
eval. EXT not ready
[ 038 020 ] [ 038 027 ]

GFDSS: GF (curr.)
& ready
[ 038 028 ]

GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]

GFDSS: GF (curr.)
evaluat.
[ 039 071 ]

GFDSS: Admit-
& tance ready
[ 038 167 ]

Parameter GFDSS: Enable GFDSS: Admit-

PSx tance not ready
[ 038 168 ]
set 1 001 050
set 2 001 051
set 3 001 052
set 4 001 053
12Z6243 A_EN

3-236 Enabling/disabling ground fault direction determination using steady-state values

3-326 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Conditioning and selecting

the measured values
For the conditioning of measured values the P439 is fitted with integrated transformers.
As an alternative it is possible to use the neutral-point displacement voltage calculated
by the P439 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the displacement voltage
measured at the T 90 transformer for steady-state power evaluation. The current
transformer has been especially designed for this application so that it will perform with a
very small phase-angle error.

EWATT: Eval-
uation VNG PSx
[ * ]

VN-G 2
1
VA-G
VB-G 1 ... 2 GFDSS: VN-G
304 150
VC-G
1: Calculated
2: Measured

Parameter EWATT: Eval-

uation VNG PSx
set 1 016 083
set 2 001 011
set 3 001 012
set 4 001 013
12Z6241 A_EN

3-237 Selecting the measured voltage value

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-327

3 Operation
(continued)

3.32.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation

Ground fault direction determination using steady-state values requires the neutral-point
displacement voltage and the residual current values to be able to determine a ground
fault direction. The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these values
by using a Fourier analysis. Three periods are used for evaluation if the time stage
G F D S S : t V N G > has been set to a time delay equal to or greater than 60 ms. This
will result in the suppression of typical ripple-control frequencies in addition to all integer-
frequency harmonics. If the time stage was set to a time delay less than 60 ms only one
period will be used for filtering.

The measurement is enabled when the time delay set at G F D S S : t V N G > and which
was triggered by VNG> has elapsed. Dependent on the operating mode selected (e.g.
'cos phi circuit' or 'sin phi circuit') the sign of the active power (G F D S S : O p . m . G F
p o w . / a d m P S x 'cos phi circuit') or of the reactive power (G F D S S : O p . m . G F
p o w . / a d m P S x 'sin phi circuit') is used to determine the direction. Connection of the
measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at G F D S S : M e a s .
d i r e c t i o n P S x . When the 'Standard' connection has been made a ground fault on
the line side will issue the decision 'LS' and a ground fault on the busbar side will issue
the decision 'BS'.

3-328 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

GFDSS: GF (pow.) GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: tVNG>

ready C PSx PSx
[ 038 026 ] [ * ] [ * ]

DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ] t 0
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]

GFDSS: VNG>
triggered
304 151

GFDSS: f/fnom
C (P.meas.)
[ *
PSx
]

GFDSS: VNG GFDSS: VNG

304 150 filtered
304 152

GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.

pow./adm PSx direction PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
IN
1 1

2 2

1: cos phi circuit 1: Standard

2: sin phi circuit 2: Opposite

1: cos phi circuit

2: sin phi circuit

C C

GFDSS: Direction
LS
Q 304 153

GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154

GFDSS: P
304 155

GFDSS: Q
304 156

Parameter GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: tVNG> GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.
PSx (P.meas.) PSx PSx pow./adm PSx direction PSx
set 1 016 062 016 091 016 061 016 063 016 070
set 2 000 233 001 044 000 230 000 236 001 002
set 3 000 234 001 045 000 231 000 237 001 003
set 4 000 235 001 046 000 232 000 238 001 004
49Z64BKA_EN

3-238 Direction determination with the operating mode 'Steady-state power'

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-329

3 Operation
(continued)

cos phi circuit

The directional decision is not enabled until the active component of the residual current
exceeds the set threshold and the phase displacement between residual current and
neutral-point displacement voltage is smaller than the set sector angle. The sector angle
makes it possible to extend the "dead zone" to take into account the expected phase-
angle errors of the measured values. These settings make it possible to achieve the
characteristic shown in Figure 3-239.

Output of the direction decisions is operate- and reset-delayed.

3-239 Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using steady-state values, operating mode 'cos phi circuit'

3-330 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

sin phi circuit

The direction decision is enabled if the reactive component of the residual current has
exceeded the set threshold operate value. This setting makes it possible to achieve the
characteristic shown in Figure 3-240.

Output of the direction decisions is operate- and reset-delayed.

3-240 Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using steady-state values, operating mode 'sin phi circuit'

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-331

3 Operation
(continued)

GFDSS: GF (pow.)
ready
[ 038 026 ]

GFDSS: Op.m.GF
pow./adm PSx GFDSS: IN,act>/
[ * ] C reac> LS PSx
1, 3, 4 [ * ]
1: cos phi circuit

2, 3, 4
2: sin phi circuit

GFDSS: P
304 155

IN,act 1, 3
GFDSS: VNG GFDSS: IN,act>/
filtered C reac> BS PSx
304 152 [ * ]
GFDSS: Q
304 156

IN,reac 2, 4

GFDSS: Curr.
4 IN,reac p.u.
[ 004 046 ]
3
GFDSS: Current
1 ... 2 IN,act p.u.
[ 004 045 ]

GFDSS: Direction
LS
304 153

GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154

GFDSS: Starting
forward/LS
[ 009 040 ]

GFDSS: Trip
signal forw./LS
[ 009 031 ]

GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay LS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]

GFDSS: Sector
C angle LS PSx GFDSS: Direct.
[ * ] forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]

< sector angle LS

GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

delay BS PSx delay BS PSx GFDSS: Release
[ * ] delay BS PSx
[ * ]
GFDSS: Sector
C angle BS PSx
[ * ] GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
< sector angle BS

GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]

GFDSS: Starting
backward/BS
[ 009 041 ]

Parameter GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Sector GFDSS: Sector GFDSS: IN,act>/ GFDSS: IN,act>/
pow./adm PSx angle LS PSx angle BS PSx reac> LS PSx reac> BS PSx
set 1 016 063 016 065 016 068 016 064 016 067
set 2 000 236 000 242 000 248 000 239 000 251
set 3 000 237 000 243 000 249 000 240 000 252
set 4 000 238 000 244 000 250 000 241 000 253

Parameter GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay BS PSx delay LS PSx delay BS PSx
set 1 016 066 016 069 016 072 016 073
set 2 000 245 001 044 001 005 001 008
set 3 000 246 001 045 001 006 001 009
set 4 000 247 001 046 001 007 001 010
49Z64BNA_EN

3-241 Output of the direction decisions with the operating mode 'Steady-state power'

3-332 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.32.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation

The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from the residual current value by
using a Fourier analysis. Three periods are used for evaluation. If the residual current
value exceeds the set threshold a ground fault signal is issued after the settable operate
delay has elapsed.

GFDSS: Admittance
ready
[ 038 167 ]
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: GF GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: IN> GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release
(curr.) ready C (I.meas.) PSx PSx delay IN PSx delay IN PSx
[ 038 028 ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ]
GFDSS: Ground
DIST: General fault (curr.)
starting [ 009 038 ]
[ 036 240 ]
t 0 0 t
IN

GFDSS: Op.
delay IN
elapsed
304 157

GFDSS: IN>
triggered
304 158

GFDSS: IN
filtered
304 159

GFDSS: Curr. IN
filt. p.u.
[ 004 047 ]

Parameter GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: IN> GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

(I.meas.) PSx PSx delay IN PSx delay IN PSx
set 1 016 092 016 093 016 094 016 095
set 2 001 047 001 017 001 020 001 023
set 3 001 048 001 018 001 021 001 024
set 4 001 049 001 019 001 022 001 025
49Z64BQA_EN

3-242 Evaluating residual current

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-333

3 Operation
(continued)

Counting ground faults

The number of ground faults and directional decisions are counted. The counters can be
reset either individually or as a group.

GFDSS: Op. delay +

IN elapsed GFDSS: No. GF
304 157 (curr. meas)
R [ 009 003 ]
GFDSS: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 004 ]

1
0: don't execute
MAIN: General 1: execute
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GFDSS: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 245 ]
12Z61BRB_EN

3-243 Counting ground faults

3-334 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.32.3 Steady-state admittance

To determine a ground fault direction the steady-state admittance evaluation requires the
neutral-point displacement voltage and the residual current values. The frequency
provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these values by using a Fourier analysis.

The measurement is enabled when the time delay set at G F D S S : t V N G > and which
was triggered by VNG> has elapsed. Dependent on the operating mode selected (e.g.
'cos phi circuit' or 'sin phi circuit') the sign of the active power (G F D S S : O p . m . G F
p o w . / a d m P S x 'cos phi circuit') or of the reactive power (G F D S S : O p . m . G F
p o w . / a d m P S x 'sin phi circuit') is used to determine the direction. Connection of the
measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at G F D S S : M e a s .
d i r e c t i o n P S x . When the connection 'Standard' has been made a ground fault on
the line side will issue the decision 'LS' and a ground fault on the busbar side will issue
the decision 'BS'. Phase-angle errors of the system transformers can be compensated
with the setting at G F D S S : C o r r e c t i o n a n g l e P S x .

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-335

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: General GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: tVNG>

starting C PSx PSx
306 539
[ * ] [ * ]

GFDSS: Admittance
ready
[ 038 167 ] t 80 ms
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]

GFDSS: VNG>
triggered
304 151

GFDSS: f/fnom
C (P meas.) PSx
[ * ]

GFDSS: VN-G GFDSS: VNG

304 150 filtered
304 152

GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.

pow./adm PSx direction PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
IN
1 1

2 2
1: cos phi circuit 1: Standard
2: sin phi circuit 2: Opposite

GFDSS: Correction
C angle PSx
[ * ]

C C

GFDSS: Direction
LS
Q 304 153

GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154

GFDSS: P
304 155
GFDSS: Q
304 156

Parameter GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: tVNG> GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Correction GFDSS: Meas.
PSx (P meas.) PSx PSx pow./adm PSx angle PSx direction PSx
set 1 016 062 016 091 016 061 016 063 016 110 016 070
set 2 000 233 001 044 000 230 000 236 001 026 001 002
set 3 000 234 001 045 000 231 000 237 001 027 001 003
set 4 000 235 001 046 000 232 000 238 001 028 001 004
12Z6245 B_EN

3-244 Direction determination with the operating mode 'Steady-state admittance'

3-336 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

cos phi circuit

Direction determination is enabled when the conductance value (conductance G(N)) on
the ground return exceeds the set threshold. This setting makes it possible to achieve
the characteristic shown in Figure 3-245.

Output of the direction decisions is operate- and reset-delayed.

The trip signal in forward direction issued by the ground fault direction determination
using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function
(ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.

3-245 Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using steady-state admittance, operating mode 'cos phi circuit'

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-337

3 Operation
(continued)

sin phi circuit

Direction determination is enabled when the conductance value (susceptance B(N)) on
the ground return exceeds the set threshold. This setting makes it possible to achieve
the characteristic shown in Figure 3-246.

Output of the direction decisions is operate- and reset-delayed.

The trip signal in forward direction issued by the ground fault direction determination
using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function
(ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.

3-246 Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using Steady-state admittance, operating mode 'sin phi circuit'

3-338 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

GFDSS: Admittance
ready
[ 038 167 ]

C GFDSS: G(N)> /
GFDSS: Direction LS B(N)> LS PSx
304 153 [ * ]

GFDSS: Direction BS GFDSS: Starting

304 154 forward/LS
[ 009 040 ]
GFDSS:Op.m.GF
pow./adm PSx
[ * ]
1, 3, 4, 5 GFDSS: G(N)> /
1: cos phi circuit C B(N)> BS PSx
[ * ]
2, 3, 4, 5
2: sin phi circuit

GFDSS: Starting
GFDSS: P backward/BS
304 155 [ 009 041 ]
G(E) 1, 3
GFDSS: VNG filtered
304 152

GFDSS: Q
304 156

B(E) 2, 4

5
Y(E)
GFDSS: Admitt.
Y(N) p.u.
[ 004 191 ]
5 GFDSS: Conduct.
G(N) p.u.
4 [ 004 192 ]
GFDSS: Suscept.
3 B(N) p.u.
[ 004 193 ]
1 ... 2
GFDSS: Trip
signal forw./LS
[ 009 031 ]

GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay LS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]

t 0 0 t GFDSS: Direct.
forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]

GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

delay BS PSx delay BS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]

t 0 0 t GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]

GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]

Parameter GFDSS:Op.m.GF GFDSS: G(N)> / GFDSS: G(N)> /

pow./adm PSx B(N)> LS PSx B(N)> BS PSx
set 1 016 063 016 111 016 112
set 2 000 236 001 029 001 032
set 3 000 237 001 030 001 033
set 4 000 238 001 031 001 034

Parameter GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay BS PSx delay LS PSx delay BS PSx
set 1 016 066 016 069 016 072 016 073
set 2 000 245 001 044 001 005 001 008
set 3 000 246 001 045 001 006 001 009
set 4 000 247 001 046 001 007 001 010
49Z6455 A_EN

3-247 Output of the direction decisions with the operating mode operating mode 'Steady-state admittance'

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-339

3 Operation
(continued)

Non-directional ground
fault determination
The admittance value from the ground return is used for evaluation. If the admittance
value exceeds the set threshold a ground fault signal is issued after the settable operate
delay has elapsed.

The trip signal from the non-directional ground fault determination is blocked by the auto-
reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.

GFDSS: Oper.delay
Y(N)> elapsed
304 175

GFDSS: Admittance GFDSS: Y(N)> GFDSS: Oper. GFDSS: Rel.

ready C PSx delay Y(N)> PSx delay Y(N)> PSx
[ 038 167 ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: General
starting
306 539

t 0 0 t GFDSS: Trip
IN Y(N)>
[ 009 075 ]

GFDSS: GF
(curr.) ready
[ 038 028 ]
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
ready
[ 038 026 ] GFDSS: Trip
signal Y(N)>
[ 009 072 ]

GFDSS: Starting
Y(N)>
[ 009 074 ]

Parameter GFDSS: Y(N)> GFDSS: Oper. GFDSS: Rel.

PSx delay Y(N)> PSx delay Y(N)> PSx
set 1 016 113 016 114 016 115
set 2 001 035 001 038 001 041
set 3 001 036 001 039 001 042
set 4 001 037 001 040 001 043
49Z6456 A_EN

3-248 Evaluating admittance

3-340 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.32.4 Counting the Ground Faults Detected by Steady-State Power and

Admittance Evaluation

The number of ground faults and directional decisions are counted. The counters may
be reset individually or together with other counters (see section 'Resetting Actions').

GFDSS: Oper.delay GFDSS: No. GF

Y(N)> elapsed + admitt. Y(N)
304 175
[ 009 060 ]
R
GFDSS: Grd. fault GFDSS: No. GF
pow./adm. + power/admitt.
[ 009 037 ] [ 009 002 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct. GFDSS: No. GF
forward/LS + forward/LS
[ 009 035 ] [ 009 000 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct. GFDSS: No. GF
backward/BS + backward/BS
[ 009 036 ] [ 009 001 ]
R

GFDSS: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 004 ]

1 ≥1
MAIN: General 0: don’t execute
reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GFDSS: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 245 ]
12Z6191 B_EN

3-249 Counting ground faults

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-341

3 Operation
(continued)

3.33 Ground Fault Tripping (Function Group GFTRP)

The ground fault tripping function is used to immediately switch off a line after it is
connected if it is unbiased and contains a ground fault. If the line is biased, then no trip
occurs.

In order to determine whether the line is biased, the P439 monitors the phase-to-phase
voltage VA-B on the line side for values exceeding the fixed threshold of 0.7 Vnom. The
neutral-point displacement voltage VN-G on the busbar and the line sides is used as the
criterion for a ground fault. The neutral-displacement voltage on the line side is
monitored by the P439. The threshold can be set (see 'Distance Protection' and 'Ground
Fault Detection'). On the busbar side, monitoring must be handled by an external
device. The signal from this external device is passed on to the P439 through an
appropriately configured binary signal input (G F T R P : V N G > t r i g g e r e d E X T ).

A trip occurs if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously within 100 ms after
voltage recovery:

Ground faults are detected on the line and busbar sides.

One of the following additional conditions is satisfied:
„ The ARC dead time is running.
„ The circuit breaker close signal, which is picked up through an appropriately
configured binary signal input, is present.
„ The timer stage started by a 'manual close' to the circuit breaker is running (see
'Switch on to Fault Protection').
„ A close command is issued by the ARC function.

Ground fault tripping will be blocked if there is a fault in the voltage measuring circuits.

3-342 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-250 Ground fault tripping

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-343

3 Operation
(continued)

3.34 Ground Fault Protection Signaling (Function Group GFSIG)

Ground fault protection signaling (GFSIG) operates only in conjunction with ground fault
direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS). The GFSIG function is used
for selective clearance of ground faults. The directional decisions issued by the GFDSS
function are transmitted to the device at the remote station.

They can be transmitted by way of a signal transmission device or over pilot wires. If
pilot wires are used for ground fault protection signaling, they are continuously checked
by an internal monitoring function. The communication link involving pilot wires is
formed by linking either the make contact or the break contact of the transmitting relay,
depending on the transmitting relay mode selected (' Transm.relay make co' or '
Transm.relay break c'), to the G F S I G : R e c e i v e E X T input of the remote station.

The pilot wire loop is closed during normal operation of the power system. If both
devices detect a ground fault in the forward direction (LS), the pilot wire loop remains
closed. A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.

The pilot wire DC loop will be opened if the GFDSS function detects a ground fault in
backward (reverse) direction (BS). If the device at the remote station detects a ground
fault in forward direction (LS), the protection device does not trip as the pilot wire DC
loop is already open. The send signal is reset after a settable time delay has elapsed.

Monitoring the pilot wires

The pilot wires are monitored for interruptions. A G F S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y signal
will be issued during fault-free operation (i.e., when no ground fault is detected) if no
signal is received from the remote station for a period longer than the set send signal
reset time-delay plus the set reset time-delay for the ground fault signal in the BS
direction plus 2 s.

If a single-pole ground fault occurs while the pilot wire DC loop is disrupted then a trip
will occur, regardless of the received signal.

Testing the
communications link
The communications link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is issued
through a binary signal input or by means of a setting parameter. The remote station
receives this signal if the transmission link is in order.

3-344 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-251 Ground fault protective signaling

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-345

3 Operation
(continued)

3.35 Transient Ground Fault Detection (Function Group TGFD)

Ground fault direction is determined by evaluating the neutral-point displacement voltage

and the residual current using the transient ground fault measurement method.

Enabling/disabling the
transient ground fault
detection function.
The transient ground fault detection function (TGFD) can be disabled or enabled using
setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter set.

Readiness of the transient

ground fault detection
function
A ready signal is issued if the following conditions are met:

Protection is enabled.
The transient ground fault detection function is enabled.
The nominal frequency is set to 50 Hz.
There is no external blocking.
Transient ground fault detection has issued no directional decisions.
Self-monitoring has detected no faults with transient ground fault detection.

3-346 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Protection
active
306 001

TGFD: Enable
PSx
[ * ]

1
0: No
1: Yes

TGFD: General
enable USER
[ 016 040 ]

0 TGFD: Enabled
[ 037 100 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Nominal
frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
50: 50 Hz SFMON: Fcts.not
perm.f.60Hz
60: 60 Hz [ 093 098 ]

TGFD: Ready
[ 037 080 ]

TGFD: Blocking
EXT
[ 004 034 ]
TGFD: Direct.
determined
[ 004 030 ]
SFMON: TGFD mon.
triggered
[ 093 094 ]
TGFD: Not ready
[ 037 081 ]

SFMON: Module N TGFD: Hardware

DPR faulty fault
[ 093 090 ] 304 207

SFMON: Module N
RAM faulty
[ 093 091 ]
SFMON: Time-out
module N
[ 093 092 ]
SFMON: Invalid SW
vers. N
[ 093 093 ]
SFMON: Module N
DAC faulty Parameter TGFD: Enable
[ 093 095 ] PSx
SFMON: Module N set 1 001 054
+15V faulty
[ 093 096 ] set 2 001 055
SFMON: Module N set 3 001 056
-15V faulty set 4 001 057
[ 093 097 ]

49Z6480 A_EN

3-252 Enabling, disabling and readiness of the transient ground fault detection function

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-347

3 Operation
(continued)

Conditioning and selecting

the measured values
To condition measured values VNG and IN the P439 is fitted with integrated
transformers. As an alternative it is possible to use the neutral-point displacement
voltage derived by the P439 from the three phase-to-ground voltages.
Connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at
T G F D : M e a s u r e m . d i r e c t i o n . A pole reversal of the residual current measuring
circuit through the global setting at M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N will in no way
influence direction determination by the transient ground fault detection function.

3-253 Selecting the neutral-point displacement voltage

3-348 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Determining the ground

fault direction
A ground fault's direction can only be determined if the TGFD function is ready.

Higher frequency components are filtered out of the measured values for residual current
and neutral-point displacement voltage. Settable triggers monitor the magnitudes of the
residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage harmonics as well as the neutral-
point displacement voltage fundamental. To determine the ground fault direction the
P439 will evaluate trigger decisions by the harmonics monitoring function, separately for
the positive and negative half-waves.

The sign of the neutral-point displacement voltage's harmonic component is determined

immediately after the current harmonic has exceeded the positive or negative threshold
value. Trigger decisions for current and voltage are compared to determine the ground
fault direction where, as a rule, evaluation depends on the connection of the measuring
circuits. The connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at
T G F D : M e a s u r e m . d i r e c t i o n . With the standard connection a ground fault on
the line side will cause the decision 'LS' and a ground fault on the busbar side will cause
the decision 'BS'. The directional decision is enabled after the operate delay has
elapsed, which follows monitoring of the neutral-point displacement voltage's
fundamental.

Furthermore the operation of a current trigger will start a timer stage that, after it has
elapsed, will enable the TGFD function to detect further transient ground faults.
The time period after which a new transient ground fault may be detected is given by the
setting of the operate delay +40 ms.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-349

3 Operation
(continued)

3-254 Direction determination

3-350 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Directional decisions are output for the duration of the set buffer time. If buffer time is set
to 0 s, directional decisions are output until the neutral-point displacement voltage's
fundamental component no longer exceeds the trigger threshold set at
TGFD: VNG>.

3-255 Output of directional decisions

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-351

3 Operation
(continued)

Resetting a directional
decision
While the buffer time is elapsing the directional decisions can be reset from the
integrated local control panel, a setting parameter or through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. Should the buffer time be set to ∞ ("infinity") the directional decision
must be reset so that a new transient ground fault can be detected.

TGFD: Reset
signals USER
[ 003 009 ]

0
1 ≥1 100 ms TGFD: Signals
reset
0: don't execute [ 004 141 ]
1: execute
TGFD: Reset
signals EXT
[ 004 140 ]

MAIN: General TGFD: Reset

reset USER ≥1 signal
[ 003 002 ] 304 206
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
12Z61EWA_EN

3-256 Resetting directional decisions

Monitoring the measured

values
If, during operation in the absence of any ground fault (ie. when the neutral-point
displacement voltage's fundamental component does not exceed the set trigger
threshold), the current or the higher frequency component of the neutral-point
displacement voltage exceeds the set threshold value, then the TGFD function is
blocked after 65 s.

65 s 0 SFMON: TGFD mon.

TGFD: IN,p> 30 ms
triggered & triggered
304 201 [ 093 094 ]
TGFD: VNG>
triggered
304 203

TGFD: VNG>
(f0) triggered &
304 202
TGFD: Ready
[ 037 080 ]

MT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
1: execute
MT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 005 240 ]

49Z64EXA_EN

3-257 Monitoring the measured values

3-352 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Counting the transient

ground faults
The number of transient ground faults and directional decisions are counted.
The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.

TGFD: Ground
fault + TGFD: No. GF
[ 004 033 ] [ 004 015 ]
R

TGFD: Direct. + TGFD: No. GF

forward/LS forward/LS
[ 004 031 ] [ 004 013 ]
R

GFDSS: Backward / + TGFD: No. GF

BS backward/BS
[ 004 032 ] [ 004 014 ]
R
TGFD: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 022 ]

0
1 ≥1
MAIN: General 0: don't execute
reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
TGFD: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 246 ]
12Z61EYA_EN

3-258 Counting the transient ground faults

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-353

3 Operation
(continued)

3.36 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)

Using this function, thermal overload protection can be implemented.

Disabling or enabling
thermal overload protection
Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.

3-259 Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection

3-354 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Tripping characteristics
The maximum phase current is used to track a first-order thermal replica as specified in
IEC 255-8. The following parameters will govern the tripping parameters:

The set thermal time constant (τ) of the protected object

THERM: Tim.const. 1(>Ibl)PSx
The set tripping level T H E R M : Θ trip P S x .
The accumulated thermal load Θ P.
The updated measured coolant temperature Θc for the protected object.
The maximum permissible coolant temperature Θc,max .
The maximum permissible object temperature Θmax

2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟ − ΘP
⎝ I ref ⎠
t = τ ⋅ ln
⎛ Θ c − Θ c ,max ⎞
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟ − Θ trip ⋅ ⎜ 1 − ⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎝ Θ max − Θ c ,max ⎠

Figure 3-260 shows the tripping characteristic for Θ P = 0 % and with a measured coolant
temperature identical to the setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

By setting the operating mode, the user selects an ‘absolute’ or ‘relative’ replica. If the
setting is for Absolute replica, the P439 will operate with a fixed trip threshold Θtrip of
100 %.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-355

3 Operation
(continued)

θtrip / %
10000

200

1000
110
τ/min
50

100
200

110

10 1000
50

t/min 200

1
110

50 30

0.1

0.01 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0.00
I/Iref

D5Z50BE

3-260 Tripping characteristic for Thermal Overload Protection (tripping characteristics apply to Θ P = 0 % and with a measured coolant
temperature identical to the setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature)

To permit coolant temperature acquisition the analog module Y must be fitted. If this
module is not available in the P439 then the setting T H E R M : C o o l a n t t e m p . P S x
is included in the calculation of the tripping time.

The setting T H E R M : B l . f . C T A f a u l t P S x defines whether the Thermal

Overload Protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant
temperature acquisition.

3-356 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-261 Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition

Warning signal
A warning signal can be set in accordance with the set operate value
T H E R M : Θ w a r n i n g P S x . Additionally, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-trip time)
can be set. When the time left until tripping falls below this setting, a warning signal will
be issued.

If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the
set time constant T H E R M : T i m . c o n s t . 2 , < I b l P S x . The thermal replica may be
reset either via a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Resetting is possible even when thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal
overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-357

3 Operation
(continued)

3-262 Thermal overload protection

3-358 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-263 Resetting the thermal replica

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-359

3 Operation
(continued)

3.37 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>)

The time-voltage protection function evaluates the fundamental wave of the phase
voltages and of the neutral-point displacement voltage as well as the positive-sequence
voltage and negative-sequence voltage obtained from the fundamental waves of the
three phase-to-ground voltages.

Disabling or enabling
V<> protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.

V<> protection readiness

V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltage-
measuring circuit by the measuring-circuit monitoring function.

3-264 Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection

3-360 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the phase

voltages
The P439 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. Depending on the set operating mode of V<> protection, either the phase-to-
ground voltages (‘star’ operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (‘delta’ operating
mode) are monitored. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands, then it is

recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always
be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and it would therefore not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.

Minimum current
monitoring
Furthermore there is an enabling threshold available with the V<> element which is
based on minimum current monitoring for undervoltage stage V<. The following two
settings may be used to activate the operating mode for minimum current monitoring and
to set the enabling threshold:

V<>: I enable V< PSx

V<>: Op. mode V< mon. PSx

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-361

3 Operation
(continued)

3-265 Selection of measured values

3-362 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-266 Overvoltage monitoring

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-363

3 Operation
(continued)

3-267 Undervoltage monitoring

3-364 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the positive-

and negative-sequence
voltages
The P439 determines the positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages from the
fundamental components of the phase-to-ground voltages according to the formulas
given below. This is based on the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e setting (alternative
terminology: Rotary field).

Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: Clockwise rotating field):

Positive-sequence voltage:
1
(
V pos = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B−G + a 2 ⋅ V C−G
3
)
Negative-sequence voltage:
1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A −G + a 2 ⋅ V B−G + a ⋅ V C−G
3
)
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: Anticlockwise rotating field):

Positive-sequence voltage:
1
(
V pos = ⋅ V A −G + a 2 ⋅ V B−G + a ⋅ V C−G
3
)
Negative-sequence voltage:
1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B−G + a 2 ⋅ V C−G
3
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-365

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]

D5Z50AYB_EN

3-268 Determining positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages

(Note: Previous terminology of M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e was M A I N : R o t a r y f i e l d )

The positive-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls

below set thresholds, and the negative-sequence voltage is monitored to determine
whether it exceeds set thresholds. If the voltage exceeds or falls below the set
thresholds, then a signal is issued once the set operate delays have elapsed. The timer
stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands, then it is

recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always
be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and it would therefore not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.

3-366 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-269 Monitoring the positive-sequence voltage

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-367

3 Operation
(continued)

3-270 Monitoring the negative-sequence voltage

3-368 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the neutral-

point displacement voltage
Depending on the setting, the V<> function monitors either the neutral-point
displacement voltage calculated by the P439 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or
the neutral-point displacement voltage formed externally via the fourth voltage
measuring input, for example the neutral-point displacement voltage from the open delta
winding of the voltage transformers (see section 'Conditioning of Measured values').
The neutral-point displacement voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

3-271 Selecting the measured value

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-369

3 Operation
(continued)

3-272 Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage

3-370 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.38 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)

The P439 monitors the voltage to determine whether its frequency exceeds or falls
below set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between
the zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency protection
function has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be
explained below using the first stage as an example.

Disabling or enabling
over-/underfrequency
protection
The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.

3-273 Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-371

3 Operation
(continued)

Selecting the measuring

voltage
By selecting a measuring voltage setting, the user defines the voltage that is used by the
over-/underfrequency protection function for measurement purposes. This can be either
a phase-to-ground voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage.

3-274 Selecting the measuring voltage

3-372 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Undervoltage blocking and

evaluation time
Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient magnitude.
Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage
falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.

In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or

interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions must be
satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be
issued.

3-275 Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-373

3 Operation
(continued)

Operating modes of over-/

underfrequency protection
For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can choose
between the following operating modes:

Frequency monitoring
Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (∆f/∆t)

Frequency monitoring
Depending on the setting, the P439 monitors the frequency to determine whether it
exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set
nominal frequency is set, the P439 checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds
the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set,
the P439 checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold.
If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.

Frequency monitoring
combined with differential
frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is
also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to
being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for
overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for
underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate
conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.

3-374 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Frequency monitoring
combined with mean
frequency gradient
monitoring (∆f/∆t)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and
may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean
value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems.

In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring must be

set for 'underfrequency monitoring'.

Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of
frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value ∆f within the set
time ∆t, then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip
signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring
function, then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency
monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately
configured binary signal input.

3-276 Operation of frequency monitoring combined with ∆f/∆t monitoring

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-375

3 Operation
(continued)

3-277 First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function

3-376 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

fmin/fmax measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition and for
the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition, the two
following measured event values are available:

f<>: Max. frequ. for f>

f<>: Min. frequ. for f<

Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new overfrequency
or underfrequency situation. A manual reset and a reset with a binary signal are also
possible:

f<>: Reset meas.val. USER

f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-377

3 Operation
(continued)

3.39 Power Directional Protection (Function Group P<>)

The power directional protection function determines the active and reactive power from
the fundamental currents and voltages. The sign of the active or the reactive power,
respectively, is evaluated for direction determination

Enabling or disabling
P<> protection
The power directional protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.

3-278 Enabling or disabling power directional protection

Power determination
The P439 determines the active and reactive power from the three phase currents and
the phase-to-ground voltages. If the measuring-circuit monitoring function detects
malfunctioning in the voltage measuring circuit, power determination will be blocked.

Power monitoring
The P439 checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or fall
below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

If the power monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands when values
have fallen below set thresholds, then it is recommended that transient signals be used.
Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was
disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.

3-378 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Sensitivity-dependent
parameters
The signal sequence for the M A I N : D y n a m i c r a n g e I parameter set to ‘Highest
range’ is displayed in the logic diagrams below. If, however, the setting is 'Sensitive
range', then other parameters will become active that will permit lower operating values
such as:
P < > : P > s e n s . r a n g e P S x instead of
P<>: P> high range PSx

3-279 Power determination

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-379

3 Operation
(continued)

Active power monitoring

when set thresholds are
exceeded
The P439 monitors the calculated active power value with two-stage functions to detect
when it exceeds set thresholds. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current, one
parameter each is available for setting the threshold. The resetting ratio of the threshold
stages can be set.

If the active power exceeds the set thresholds, starting occurs. The starting signal is
followed by the set operate and reset time-delays.

45Z5053 B_EN

3-280 Active power monitoring

3-380 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Active power direction

when set thresholds are
exceeded
The P439 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward- (reverse-) directional decision
results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a
backward- (reverse-) directional or a non-directional decision.

3-281 Direction-dependent trip signal of active power protection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-381

3 Operation
(continued)

Reactive power monitoring

when set thresholds are
exceeded
The P439 monitors the calculated reactive power value with two-stage functions to
detect when it exceeds set thresholds. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current,
one parameter each is available for setting the operate threshold. The resetting ratio of
the threshold stages can be set.

If the reactive power exceeds the set thresholds, starting occurs. The starting signal is
followed by the set operate and reset time-delays.

45Z5055 B_EN

3-282 Reactive power monitoring

3-382 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Reactive power direction

when set thresholds are
exceeded
The P439 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward- (reverse-) directional decision
results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a
backward- (reverse-) directional or a non-directional decision.

3-283 Direction-dependent trip signal of reactive power protection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-383

3 Operation
(continued)

Active power monitoring

when values fall below set
thresholds
The P439 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. When
the active power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting signal is
followed by the set operate and resetting delays.

3-384 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

P<>: Blocking tP<

EXT
[ 035 050 ]

P<>: P< high

range PSx P<>: Operate delay
[ * ] P< PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng. P<>: Release
ratio P< PSx delay P< PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]

P<>: P P<>: Signal P<

402 631 delayed
[ 035 055 ]

Setting blocked
P<>: Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]

& P<>: Fault P<

[ 035 057 ]
P<>: Blocking tP<<
EXT &
[ 035 051 ]

P<>: P<< high

range PSx P<>: Operate delay
[ * ] P<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<>: Release
P<< PSx delay P<<PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]

P<>: Signal P<<

delayed
[ 035 061 ]

Setting blocked
P<>: Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]

P<>: Fault P<<

& [ 035 063 ]

&

P<>: tTransient P<>: tTransient

pulse PSx pulse PSx
[ * ] [ * ]

P<>: tP< elapsed

trans.
[ 035 056 ]

P<>: tP<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]

P<>: tP</tP<<
elaps.trans
[ 035 178 ]

Parameter P<>: P< high P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release
range PSx ratio P< PSx delay P< PSx delay P< PSx
set 1 017 013 017 034 017 060 017 226
set 2 017 014 017 035 017 061 017 227
set 3 017 016 017 036 017 062 017 228
set 4 017 020 017 037 017 063 017 229

P<>: P<< high P<>: Diseng.ratio P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient
Parameter range PSx P<< PSx delay P<<PSx delay P<<PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 068 017 238 017 242 017 246 018 246
set 2 017 021 017 239 017 243 017 247 018 247
set 3 017 025 017 240 017 244 017 248 018 248
set 4 017 026 017 241 017 245 017 249 018 249
40Z5272 B_EN

3-284 Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-385

3 Operation
(continued)

Active power direction

when values fall below
set thresholds
The P439 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward- (reverse-) directional decision
results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a
backward- (reverse-) directional or a non-directional decision.

3-386 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

P<>: Starting
P<
[ 035 054 ]
Apparent > 0.010 Snom
power S

P<>: Direction
P< PSx
[ * ]

1
2

1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional

3: Non-directional P<>: Trip

& signal P<
P<>: Signal & [ 035 058 ]
P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
&

&

P<>: tP< elapsed & P<>: Trip

trans. & signal P< trans
[ 035 056 ] [ 035 059 ]

P<>: P+ &
402 633
P<>: P-
402 634
&

P<>: Starting
P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>: Direction
P<< PSx
[ * ]

1
2

1: Forward directional

2: Backward directional
P<>: Trip
3: Non-directional signal P<<
& & [ 035 064 ]
P<>: Signal P<<
delayed
[ 035 061 ]
&

&

& P<>: Trip sig.

P<>: tP<< elapsed & P<< trans.
trans. [ 035 065 ]
[ 035 062 ]
&

Parameter P<>: Direction P<>: Direction

P< PSx P<< PSx &
set 1 017 230 017 250
set 2 017 231 017 251
set 3 017 232 017 252
set 4 017 233 017 253
40Z5273 C_EN

3-285 Direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set thresholds

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-387

3 Operation
(continued)

1
P<>: Starting
P<
035 054

P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
*

P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
* 2

P<>: Signal
P< delayed
035 055

P<>: tP<
elapsed trans.
035 056 3
P<>: Fault
P<
035 057

P<>: Operate
1 delay P< PSx *

P<>: Release
2 delay P< PSx *

P<>: tTransient
3 pulse PSx *

Parameter P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient

delay P< PSx delay P< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 060 017 226 018 246
set 2 017 061 017 227 018 247
set 3 017 062 017 228 018 248
set 4 017 063 017 229 018 249

19Z5278A_EN

3-286 Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring function

3-388 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Reactive power monitoring

when values fall below set
thresholds
The P439 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. If the
reactive power falls below the set thresholds, starting occurs. The starting signal is
followed by the set operate and reset time-delays.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-389

3 Operation
(continued)

P<>: Blocking tQ<

EXT
[ 035 052 ]

P<>: Q< high range

PSx P<>: Operate delay
[ * ] Q< PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng. P<>: Release
ratio Q< PSx delay Q< PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]

P<>: Signal Q<

P<>: Q delayed
402 632
[ 035 067 ]

Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>: Fault
& Q<
P<>: Blocking [ 035 069 ]
tQ<< EXT &
[ 035 053 ]

P<>: Q<< high

range PSx P<>: Operate delay
[ * ] Q<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<>: Release
Q<< PSx delay Q<<PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]

P<>: Signal Q<<

delayed
[ 035 011 ]

Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>: Fault
& Q<<
[ 035 049 ]
&

P<>: tTransient P<>: tTransient

pulse PSx pulse PSx
[ * ] [ * ]

P<>: tQ< elapsed

trans.
[ 035 068 ]

P<>: tQ<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]

P<>: tQ</tQ<<
elaps.trans
[ 035 179 ]

Parameter P<>:Q<
P<>: Q< high P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release
PSx
range PSx ratio Q< PSx delay Q< PSx delay Q< PSx
set 1 017 069
018 035 018 044 018 052 018 056
set 2 017
018 038
036 018 045 018 053 018 057
set 3 018 039
017 037 018 046 018 054 018 058
set 4 018 045
017 038 018 047 018 055 018 059

Parameter P<>:
P<>:Q<<
Q<< high P<>: Diseng.ratio P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient
PSx
range PSx Q<< PSx delay Q<<PSx delay Q<<PSx pulse PSx
set 1 018 079
017 085 018 095 018 213 018 236 018 246
set 2 017
018 046
086 018 096 018 214 018 237 018 247
set 3 018 049
017 087 018 097 018 215 018 238 018 248
set 4 018 051
017 088 018 098 018 216 018 239 018 249

40Z5276 B_EN

3-287 Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds

3-390 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Reactive power direction

when values fall below
set thresholds
The P439 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward- (reverse-) directional decision
results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a
backward- (reverse-) directional or a non-directional decision.

P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
Apparent > 0.010 Snom
power S

P<>: Direction
Q< PSx
[ * ]

1
2

3
1: Forward directional

2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional P<>: Trip
signal Q<
& [ 035 155 ]
P<>: Signal &
Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
&

&

P<>: tQ< elapsed & P<>: Trip sig.

trans. & Q< trans.
[ 035 068 ] [ 035 156 ]
P<>: Q+ &
402 635

P<>: Q-
402 636
&

P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>: Direction
Q<< PSx
[ * ]

1
2

1: Forward directional

2: Backward directional
P<>: Trip
3: Non-directional signal Q<<
& [ 035 176 ]
P<>: Signal Q<< &
delayed
[ 035 011 ]

&

&

P<>: tQ<< & P<>: Trip sig.

Q<< trans.
elapsed trans. & [ 035 177 ]
[ 035 016 ]

&

Parameter P<>: Direction P<>: Direction

Q< PSx Q<< PSx &
set 1 018 081 018 242
set 2 018 082 018 243
set 3 018 083 018 244
set 4 018 084 018 245
40Z5277 C_EN

3-288 Direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set thresholds

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-391

3 Operation
(continued)

1
P<>: Starting
Q<
035 066

P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
*

P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
* 2

P<>: Signal
Q< delayed
035 067

P<>: tQ<
elapsed trans.
035 068 3
P<>: Fault
Q<
035 069

P<>: Operate
1 delay Q< PSx *

P<>: Release
2 delay Q< PSx *

P<>: tTransient
3 pulse PSx *

Parameter P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient

delay Q< PSx delay Q< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 018 052 018 056 018 246
set 2 018 053 018 057 018 247
set 3 018 054 018 058 018 248
set 4 018 055 018 059 018 249

19Z5279A_EN

3-289 Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring function

3-392 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Starting signal with

direction

The active or reactive power direction is signaled when one of the starting signals has
been issued.

Apparent power S > 0.010 Snom

P<>: Direction P
& forw.
[ 035 181 ]
P<>: Starting P>
[ 035 086 ]

P<>: Starting P>>

[ 035 089 ]

P<>: Starting P<

[ 035 054 ]

P<>: Starting P<<

[ 035 060 ]

P<>: P+ P<>: Direction P

402 633 & backw.
[ 035 191 ]

P<>: P-
402 634

19Z5274B_EN

3-290 Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring function

P<>: Q+
402 635
P<>: Direction Q
P<>: Q- forw.
402 636
& [ 035 193 ]

P<>: Starting Q>

[ 035 092 ]

P<>: Starting Q>>

[ 035 095 ]

P<>: Starting Q<

[ 035 066 ]

P<>: Starting Q<< P<>: Direction Q

[ 035 010 ] & backw.
[ 035 194 ]

Apparent power S > 0.010 Snom

19Z 5275B_EN

3-291 Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring function

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-393

3 Operation
(continued)

3.40 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)

The P439 features the CB failure protection function. After a trip command has been
issued the CBF function checks that the circuit breaker has actually been opened.

Enabling/disabling circuit
breaker failure protection
The function is enabled at C B F : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . If this parameter has
been activated the CBF function may be enabled or disabled using setting parameters or
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary
signal inputs have equal status. If C B F : E n a b l e E X T is the only function assigned
to a binary signal input, then circuit breaker protection will be enabled by a positive edge
of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If C B F : D i s a b l e E X T is the
only function assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no
effect.

CBF: General
enable USER
[ 022 080 ]

0
CBF: Enabled
1 & [ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes

INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]

U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx

Address 038 041 & ≥1

Address 038 042
&
CBF: Ext./user
& & ≥1 S 11 enabled
[ 038 040 ]
& ≥1 R1
CBF: Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]

CBF: Enable USER

[ 003 016 ]

0
1

0: don't execute
1: execute

CBF: Disable EXT &

[ 038 042 ]

CBF: Disable USER

[ 003 015 ]

0
1

0: don't execute
1: execute

47Z1138 B_EN

3-292 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection

3-394 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Readiness of circuit
breaker protection
Circuit breaker failure protection will be unavailable under the following conditions:

The CBF function is not activated.

Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
All CBF timer stages have been set to 'blocked'.

CBF: Enabled CBF: Not ready

[ 040 055 ] ≥1
[ 040 025 ]

&
CBF: Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
≥1
CBF: t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
Blocked &

CBF: t2
[ 022 166 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/
starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/fault
beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/CB
sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
Blocked
19Z6130 B_EN

3-293 Signal CBF: Not ready

Detecting a CB tripping
A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB triggering.

Protection functions that have tripping criteria not directly dependent on current flow may
additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-395

3 Operation
(continued)

Current flow monitoring

This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and pole-
selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values with the
threshold value set at C B F : I > .

As long as the current flow criteria are met the monitoring function will continuously issue
the phase selective signals C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w A , C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w B ,
C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w C and the multiple signal C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w P h x .

CBF: I>
[ 022 160 ]
CBF: Current flow
A
IA [ 038 230 ]
IB CBF: Current flow
B
[ 038 231 ]
IC CBF: Current flow
C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF: Current flow
≥1 Phx
[ 038 233 ]

47Z1139B_EN

3-294 Current flow monitoring

Note: C B F : I > represents an undercurrent criterion. As of version -616 it is labeled C B F : I < .

3-396 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Evaluation of CB status
signals
Trip signals included in the C B F : G e n . t r i p c o m m a n d 1 signal, which use CB
status signals in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected at
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux.

Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available. The
P439 is can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate them:

The open signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T

The closed signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked if the configuration of the respective
binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. As a result, the P439 will issue
the C B F : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e signal. The evaluation of current criteria is not
affected by this blocking.

If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this
configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P439.

As an alternative the status signals from the external device may be used by the P439.
The required assignment for this is achieved with the M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B o p e n
and M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B c l o s e d parameters. Status signals from external
devices are processed similarly to the M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T and
M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T CB status signals.

INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]

U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx

Address 031 028 &

Address 036 051 CBF: CB pos.
& implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT & ≥1
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
&

19Z6131 C_EN

3-295 Plausibility check of CB status signals

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-397

3 Operation
(continued)

Startup criteria
Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is
recognized as closed during a startup criterion. The following criteria are evaluated as a
startup criterion:

Internal startup criterion:

Generating the signal M A I N : G e n . t r i p s i g n a l 1 is considered a start criterion.
In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter
C B F : S t a r t f o r m a n u a l t r i p , that a manual trip signal will be used as a start
criterion.
Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated when no current flow is registered and the corresponding trip signal,
included in C B F : G e n . t r i p c o m m a n d 1 , has been selected from the
protection function in parameter C B F : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x for the evaluation
of the CB auxiliary contacts.
External startup criterion:
Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (C B F : S t a r t 3 p E X T ) may
be used as a startup criterion.
To be on the safe side an additional two pole trigger may be implemented by applying
the C B F : S t a r t e n a b l e E X T signal.
Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated when no current flow is registered.
Timer stages and output
logic
Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.

The C B F : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still

present when the time delay set at timer stage C B F : t1 3p, has elapsed.
The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The C B F : T r i p s i g n a l t 2 signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still
present when the time delay set at timer stage C B F : t2, has elapsed. The output
command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection
system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met. Should a loss of
gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF-6 circuit breakers
then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a
reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB fault the elapsing of timer
stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to a binary signal input appropriately configured
at C B F : C B f a u l t y E X T .

3-398 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

CBF: Fct.assignm.
CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal 3

Selected signals

CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]

CBF: I> &

[ 022 160 ] ≥1
&
IA
≥1 & S 1 1
IB 1
R
IC

MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT ≥1
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]

≥1 & ≥1 CBF: Startup 3p

[ 038 211 ]
CBF: Start with
man. trip ≥1 &
[ 022 154 ]

0
1
& ≥1
0: No
MAIN: Trip cmd. 1: Yes
blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip & &
signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal
[ 034 017 ]
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]

U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx & ≥1

Address 038 209 &

CBF: Start
enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF: Start 3p
EXT
[ 038 205 ]

19Z6132 B_EN

3-296 Startup of circuit breaker failure protection

Note: C B F : I > represents an undercurrent criterion. As of version -616 it is labeled C B F : I < .

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-399

3 Operation
(continued)

CBF: Not ready CBF: t1 3p

[ 040 025 ] c
[ 022 165 ]

CBF: Startup 3p CBF: Trip

[ 038 211 ] t 0 signal t1
[ 038 215 ]

CBF: t2 CBF: CB failure

c [ 036 017 ]
[ 022 166 ]

CBF: Trip
t 0 signal t2
[ 038 219 ]

&
CBF: CB faulty
EXT
[ 038 234 ]

19Z6433 A_EN

3-297 Timer stages of circuit breaker failure protection

Trip commands
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection function have no timer stages
available the user can set minimum time delays for trip commands.

By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB failure
protection function, will operate in latching mode. The corresponding trip command, set
to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an
appropriately configured binary signal input.

CBF: Min.dur.
trip cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
MAIN: Trip cmd. CBF: Trip command
blocked t 0 t1
[ 021 013 ] & ≥1 [ 038 220 ]
CBF: Trip signal t1 ≥1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF: Latching
trip cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]

0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
CBF: Min.dur.
0: No trip cmd.t2
1: Yes [ 022 168 ]
CBF: Trip command
& t 0 ≥1 t2
[ 038 224 ]
CBF: Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
≥1
CBF: Latching
trip cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]

0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Latch. trip c.
reset
[ 040 139 ]
19Z6134 B_EN

3-298 CBF trip commands

3-400 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Starting trigger
The signal C B F : S t a r t i n g will be issued when the signal
C B F : S t a r t i n g t r i g . E X T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal
input and a general starting condition is present. The signal C B F : T r i p s i g n a l will
be issued after timer stage C B F : D e l a y / s t a r t i n g t r i g . has elapsed.

CBF: Delay/
starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
MAIN: General
starting & t 0 CBF: Trip signal
[ 036 000 ] [ 040 026 ]

CBF: Starting CBF: Starting

trig. EXT [ 038 021 ]
[ 038 016 ]

47Z1135B_EN

3-299 Starting trigger

Fault behind CB protection

A fault behind a CB is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker already open and
a CT; the fault is fed from the remote end.

Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion if the
circuit breaker does not indicate that it is closed after the time delay set at
C B F : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed.

When such a fault is detected behind the CB the C B F : F a u l t b e h . C B signal is

issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM
protective interface. This may also prevent unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker
failure function.

CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ] CBF: Delay/
fault beh. CB
CBF: I> [ 022 171 ]
[ 022 160 ]
t 0 CBF: Fault behind CB
& [ 038 225 ]
IA ≥1
IB
IC

MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT
[ 031 028 ] ≥1
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
19Z6136 B_EN

3-300 Fault behind CB protection

Note: C B F : I > represents an undercurrent criterion. As of version -616 it is labeled C B F : I < .

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-401

3 Operation
(continued)

CB synchronization
supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts
are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of
CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the
time delay C B F : D e l a y / C B s y n c h . s u p e r v can be used. When this time delay
has elapsed, the signal C B F : T r i p S i g C B s y n c h . s u p e r is issued. Poles that
are recognized as being 'open' will still be signaled.

CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT ≥1
[ 031 028 ] CBF: Delay/CB
MAIN: CB closed sync.superv
sig. EXT [ 022 172 ]
[ 036 051 ] CBF: TripSig
CBF: I> & t 0 CBsync.super
[ 022 160 ] [ 038 226 ]

IA ≥1
IB
IC

<3

CBF: CBsync.superv
& A open
[ 038 227 ]

CBF: CBsync.superv
& B open
[ 038 228 ]

CBF: CBsync.superv
& C open
[ 038 229 ]

19Z6137B_EN

3-301 CB synchronization supervision

Note: C B F : I > represents an undercurrent criterion. As of version -616 it is labeled C B F : I < .

3-402 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.41 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM)

3.41.1 Functional Description

As of version –610 the P439 features a circuit breaker monitoring function. This function
supports state-controlled maintenance of circuit breakers.

Enabling/disabling circuit
breaker monitoring
Circuit breaker monitoring may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CBM: Enabled
USER
[ 022 010 ]

0
1 CBM: Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
0: No
1: Yes

48Z5404B_EN

3-302 Enabling/disabling circuit breaker monitoring

Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined using a variety of methods:

Monitoring the mechanical switching operations

Accumulating ruptured current values
Accumulating the squared ruptured current values
Calculating the current-time integral of ruptured and accumulated current values
Calculating the remaining switching operations with reference to the CB wear
characteristic.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-403

3 Operation
(continued)

CB wear characteristic
Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying the
maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the ruptured current.

Figure 3-303 displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with a nominal current
of 2000 A and a maximum ruptured current of 63 kA. The mean ruptured current is
48 kA.

100000

10000
Number of permissible CB operations

1000

100

10
0,1 1 10 100
Disconnection current in kA 19Z6123A_EN

3-303 Circuit breaker wear characteristic

3-404 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

The knee points in figure 3-303 are necessary to set the wear characteristic for the circuit
breaker:

The circuit breaker's nominal current (C B M : I n o m , C B ) and the permitted number

of CB operations at nominal current (C B M : P e r m . C B o p . I n o m , C B )
The circuit breaker's mean ruptured current (C B M : M e d . C u r r . I t r i p , C B ) and
the permitted number of CB operations at mean ruptured current
(C B M : P e r m . C B o p . I m e d , C B )
The circuit breaker's maximum ruptured current (C B M : M a x . c u r r . I t r i p , C B )
and the permitted number of CB operations at maximum ruptured current
(C B M : P e r m . C B o p . I m a x , C B )
The mean ruptured current is not available for all types of circuit breakers. In such a
case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to 'blocked'. A knee point is not
considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters for the knee point is
set to 'blocked'.

For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that the knee
points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously descending). When
setting currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible according to the
characteristic the P439 will issue an error message and block circuit breaker monitoring.

Calculating the CB wear

state
The current wear state of the circuit breaker is given as the number of remaining CB
operations at nominal current conditions. The number of remaining CB operations
nrem(Inom,CB) is calculated and displayed phase selectively after each disconnection by the
P439. Calculation is per this equation:

n (I nom,CB )
n rem (I nom,CB ) = n rem,0 (I nom,CB ) −
n (I d,CB )

With:

Inom,CB: Nominal current for the CB

n(Inom,CB): Max permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
Id,CB: Ruptured current
n(Id,CB): Permitted number of CB operations at Id,CB according to wear
characteristics
nrem,0(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB before
disconnection
nrem,(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB after
disconnection

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-405

3 Operation
(continued)

Operating modes
Setting the parameter C B M : O p e r a t i n g m o d e will select the condition under
which the function will be triggered:

with trip cmd. only:

Function triggered only by the general trip command 1
w i t h C B s i g . E X T only:
Function triggered by the CB open signal generated by an auxiliary contact
CB sig. EXT or trip:
Function triggered by the general trip command 1 or CB open signal generated by an
auxiliary contact

Measured values and counters are re-determined with each triggering and compared
with set threshold values.

A correction value can be set in order to determine the trip time

C B M : C o r r . a c q u i s . t i m e . This enables to correctly evaluate the leading or
lagging auxiliary contacts or the delay between issuing the trip command and opening of
the CB contacts.

Cycle for circuit breaker

monitoring
The circuit breaker monitoring cycle is defined pole-selectively. During an active cycle
the C B M : C y c l e r u n n i n g x (x = A, B or C) signal is issued.

The cycle is started by a trigger criterion. Definition for the end of a cycle: The remaining
time of a power cycle duration has elapsed after the last detected current zero crossing.
The C B M : C u r r . F l o w e n d e d x (x = A, B or C) signal is then issued.

The maximum cycle time duration is defined with 220 milliseconds. The start of the cycle
time is corrected by the settable correction times. A fault on a CB pole is considered to
be apparent if further current zero crossings are detected after the maximum cycle time
has elapsed. Measured values from the respective CB tripping are canceled and the
C B M : t m a x > x (x = A, B or C) signal is issued.

Linking control functions

with the trip command
With the P439, the trip command from the optional control function can be linked with the
general trip command 1 of the protection, when setting external devices. In such a case
the trip command from the control function must be associated by the parameter
C B M : S i g . a s g . T r i p c m d . so that operational trip commands, issued to the
circuit breaker by the control function, are considered additionally to the general trip
command 1.

3-406 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

CBM: Sig. asg.

trip cmd.
[ 022 152 ]

Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
>1 CBM: Internal
Selected signal trip cmd
310 025

MAIN: Gen. trip

command 1
[ 036 071 ]

19Z6124 C_EN

3-304 Forming the linked trip commands

The external devices' "open" state signal may be linked to the control function's "open"
state signal by setting the C B M : S i g . a s g . t r i p c m d . parameter so that the
function in the P439 will be triggered by CB auxiliary contacts.

MAIN: Sig. asg.

CB open
[ 021 017 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
MAIN: Internal
Selected signal CB trip
310 030

MAIN: CB open 3p EXT

[ 031 028 ]
19Z6125 C_EN

3-305 Forming the linked "open" state signal

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-407

3 Operation
(continued)

Pole-selective counter
values and measured
values
The P439 separately evaluates each phase current and generates an individual wear
presentation for each CB pole.

The following counter values are presented pole-selectively:

The number of mechanical switching operations made

The number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current
This value is derived by evaluating wear with reference to the CB's wear
characteristic.

The following measured values are presented pole-selectively, and per-unit values refer
to the CB's nominal current:

Primary ruptured current

This value is applied to evaluate wear with reference to the CB's wear characteristic.
Per-unit ruptured current
Squared per-unit ruptured current
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents

The ruptured current is derived from the RMS current value detected before a last zero
crossing.

The integral of the current-time area is calculated between the trip time and the current's
disappearance. The current's disappearance is recognized when no further current zero
crossings are detected. An example for calculation of the current-time integral is
displayed in figure 3-306.

3-408 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

20,00

15,00

10,00

5,00

0,00

-5,00

-10,00

-15,00

-20,00 Calculating the current-time integral

General trip command 1

Correction time running

19Z6126A_EN

3-306 Calculation of the current-time integral when CBM is triggered by a general trip command 1

Resetting measured values

Measured values from the respective last CB trip may be reset via the interfaces on the
device. Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset operation.

Setting measured values

Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary when the
respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has been replaced.
The available interfaces on the device may be used to set measured values in the circuit
breaker monitoring function.

Note: Only such measured values and counter values in the P439 may be set to
new values that do not have their default values set to 'blocked'.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to 'blocked'.
Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P439
to 'blocked'.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-409

3 Operation
(continued)

MAIN: Protection
active & C
306 001
CBM: Enabled
[ 044 130 ] CBM: Operating
mode
[ 022 007 ]

0 &

1 &

2 & C
1: With trip cmd. only
2: With CB sig.EXT only C CBM: Inom,CB
[ 022 012 ]
3: CB sig. EXT or trip
MAIN: Inom C.T.
CBM: Blocked prim.
[ 044 199 ] [ 010 001 ]
CBM: Internal CBM: Perm. CB op.
trip cmd Inom,CB
310 025 [ 022 013 ]
MAIN: Internal CB
trip CBM: Med. curr.
310 030 Itrip,CB
fnom [ 022 014 ]
Ix CBM: Perm. CB op.
Imed,CB[ 022 015 ]

CBM: Max. curr.

Itrip,CB
[ 022 016 ]
CBM: Perm. CB op.
Imax,CB
[ 022 017 ]
C
CBM: Corr. acquis.
time
CBM: Set No. CB [ 022 018 ]
oper. A
[ * ]
CBM: Set remain. CBM: Itrip A
CB op. A R [ * ]
[ * ]
CBM: Set Itrip CBM: I*t A
A [ * ] [ * ]
R
CBM: Set
Itrip**2 A CBM: Itrip,prim A
[ * ] [ * ]
R
CBM: Set I*t A
[ * ] CBM: Itrip**2 A
R [ * ]

CBM: Itrip A
S [ * ]

CBM: Itrip**2 A
S [ * ]

CBM: I*t A
S [ * ]

CBM: No. of CB
oper. A
S [ * ]

CBM: Remain. No.

CB op. A
S [ * ]
CBM: Initialize
values
[ 003 011 ]
CBM: Reset
meas.val. USER
[ 003 013 ]

Phase x / CBM: Set No. CB CBM: Set remain. CBM: Set Itrip CBM: Set CBM: Set I*t CBM: No. of CB CBM: Remain.
Current Ix oper. A CB op. A A Itrip**2 A A oper. A No. CB op. A
A / IA 022 131 022 134 022 137 022 140 022 143 008 011 008 014
B / IB 022 132 022 135 022 138 022 141 022 144 008 012 008 015
C / IC 022 133 022 136 022 139 022 142 022 145 008 013 008 016

Phase x / CBM: Itrip A CBM: I*t A CBM: Itrip,prim CBM: Itrip**2 CBM: Itrip A CBM: Itrip**2 CBM: I*t A
Current Ix A A A
A / IA 009 047 009 061 009 212 009 051 009 071 009 077 009 087
B / IB 009 048 009 062 009 213 009 052 009 073 009 078 009 088
C / IC 009 049 009 063 009 214 009 053 009 076 009 079 009 089

19Z6120 B_EN

3-307 Triggering and calculating circuit breaker monitoring

3-410 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the number of

CB operations
Depending on the selected operating mode the P439 will calculate the current wear state
of the circuit breaker after each disconnection. The number of remaining CB operations
at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed. A threshold value can be set with
the parameter C B M : N o . C B o p e r a t i o n s < . An alarm is issued should the
number of remaining CB operations drop below this threshold.

CBM: Remain No.

C CB op. <
[ 022 020 ]

CBM: Remain. CBM: Sig. Rem.

No. CB op. A No.CB op.<
[ 008 014 ] [ 044 136 ]

CBM: Remain.
No. CB op. B
[ 008 015 ]

CBM: Remain.
No. CB op. C
[ 008 016 ]

19Z6121 B_EN

3-308 Monitoring the remaining number of CB operations at nominal current

At the same time each switching operation will increment the P439's counter for the
number of CB operations. The number of CB operations performed is displayed.
A threshold value can be set with the parameter C B M : N o . C B o p e r a t i o n s > .
An alarm is issued should the number of CB operations performed exceed this threshold.

CBM: No. CB
C operations >
[ 022 019 ]

CBM: No. of CBM: Sig. No. CB

CB oper. A op. >
[ 008 011 ] [ 044 135 ]
CBM: No. of
CB oper. B
[ 008 012 ]

CBM: No. of
CB oper. C
[ 008 013 ]

19Z6122 B_EN

3-309 Monitoring the number of CB operations performed

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-411

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring ruptured
currents
In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and monitoring of the number of CB
operations performed, the P439 features the means to accumulate and display the
ruptured current values and the square of these values. Threshold values can be set
with the parameters C B M : Σ I t r i p > , C B M : Σ I t r i p * * 2 > and C B M : Σ I * t . An
alarm is issued should the accumulated current values exceed any of these thresholds.

Blocking circuit breaker

monitoring
When protection injection testing is carried out the circuit breaker monitoring function
should be blocked, so that such testing does not corrupt monitoring results. CBM
protection is blocked if one of the following conditions is met:

Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by parameters.

Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal
input.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CBM: Enabled CBM: Blocked

[ 044 130 ] [ 044 199 ]

&
CBM: Blocking
EXT
[ 044 128 ]

CBM: Blocking
USER
[ 022 150 ]

0
1
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5346C_EN

3-310 Blocking circuit breaker monitoring

3-412 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.42 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)

Enabling/disabling the Limit

Value Monitoring function
The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters.

Monitoring phase currents

and phase voltages
The P439 offers the possibility of monitoring of the following measured values in order to
determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit values:

Maximum phase current

Minimum phase current
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
Maximum phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum phase-to-ground voltage

If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below one of these thresholds, then a
signal is issued after the associated time delay has elapsed.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-413

3 Operation
(continued)

3-311 Limit value monitoring of minimum and maximum phase currents

3-414 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-312 Limit value monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltages and maximum and minimum phase-to-ground voltages

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-415

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the neutral-

point displacement voltage
The neutral-point displacement voltage, derived from the three phase-to-ground
voltages, is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. If
any of the thresholds are exceeded, then a signal is issued after the associated time
delay has elapsed.

3-313 Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage

3-416 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the linearized

measured DC values
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two
stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the measured
values exceed or fall below the thresholds then a signal is issued after the associated
time delay has elapsed.

3-314 Monitoring the linearized measured DC values

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-417

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the reference

voltage
The reference voltage Vref (when a synchrocheck VT is fitted) is monitored by two
stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding set thresholds.
If the measured value exceeds or falls below the thresholds then a signal is issued after
the associated time delay has elapsed.

LIMIT: General
enable USER
014 010

LIMIT:
Enabled
040 074
0: no
MAIN: Device 1: yes
on-line LIMIT: Vref> LIMIT: tVref>
003 030
042 144 042 148
1: yes (= on)

LIMIT: tVref>
elapsed
042 152

LIMIT: Vref>> LIMIT: tVref>>

042 145 042 149

LIMIT: tVref>>
Vref elapsed
042 153

LIMIT: Vref< LIMIT: tVref<

042 146 042 150

LIMIT: tVref<
elapsed
042 154

LIMIT: Vref<< LIMIT: tVref<<

042 147 042 151

LIMIT: tVref<<
abgelaufen
042 155

19Z5215A_EN

3-315 Monitoring the reference voltage

3-418 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the measured

temperature value
The temperature that is measured by the P439 using a resistance thermometer is
monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of
the measured values exceed or fall below the thresholds then a signal is issued after the
associated time delay has elapsed.

3-316 Monitoring the measured temperature value

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-419

3 Operation
(continued)

3.43 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)

Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within
a framework of Boolean equations.

Binary signals in the P439 may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations with the
option of additional NOT operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . a s s i g n m . o u t p . n ,
where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.

A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to

the signals generated by the P439, initial conditions for governing the equations can be
set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial
interfaces.

Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating
function, whereas the input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are latched.
The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for
L O G I C : S e t n E X T if the corresponding reset input L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T )
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions
is configured, then this is interpreted as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input signals of the
two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of
‘ 1 ’), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.

When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to
conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In particular,
it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by
setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and
when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.

3-420 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-317 Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals

The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to

be issued.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-421

3 Operation
(continued)

3-318 Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)

3-422 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation as an
input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The equations
are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation. It should be noted
that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the equation with the
highest order.

The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a
freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In
the 'Minimum time' operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures
3-319 to 3-323 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating
modes.

Note: If the device is switched to "off-line" the equations are not processed and all
outputs are set to a logic value of ' 0 '.

3-319 Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-423

3 Operation
(continued)

3-320 Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup

3-321 Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable

3-424 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-322 Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable

3-323 Operating mode 5: Minimum time

Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input

signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-425

3 Operation
(continued)

3-324 Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations

3-426 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.44 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units

(Function Groups DEV01 to DEV10)

The P439 is designed to control up to 6 switchgear units. The Bay type defines the
topology of a bay containing switchgear units.

Defining a bay type

By selecting a bay type, the user defines the following categories:

Manually operated switchgear units with position signals to be processed.

Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P439.
The bay interlock equations for the 'Open’ / ‘Close' control of the switchgear units, for
operation with or without station interlock.
Binary inputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
Outputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.

When a bay type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear position signals and the
output relays for control commands are configured automatically if M A I N : A u t o -
a s s i g n m e n t I / O is set to 'Yes'. If set to 'No', the user will need to specify the
configuration. The list of bay types in the Appendix shows which binary inputs and
output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of switchgear units in
the event of automatic configuration.

The setting options for the P439 and the different possibilities for integrating a
switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P439 (processing of position signals
only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below, using one switchgear unit as
an example. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. If a signal
is identified in the function diagrams by function group "COMM1:" with a blank address
[--- ---], this means that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it
has not been assigned an address.

Note: Switchgear units can be controlled only via the communications channel to
which function group COMM1 has been assigned.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-427

3 Operation
(continued)

3.44.1 Processing Position Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units

The position signals ‘Open’ and ‘Closed’ are assigned to binary signal inputs. The
signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see: ‘Main Functions of the
P439’) are used for further processing. If no logic value of '1' is present at any of the two
binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring function is started. For the duration of
running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined
position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.

If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit

position will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once the
contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated position is
signaled.

If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’
position after the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal
'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a
delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is no position
signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.

Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole position signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the position signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit
is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of '1'.

3-428 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

DEV01: Interm.
pos. suppr.
[ 210 012 ]

0
1

0: No
1: Yes

DEV01: Inp.asg.
sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n

Without function
Selected signal
DEV01: Switch.
device open
DEV01: Gr. [ 210 036 ]
assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ] DEV01: Switch.
device closed
[ 210 037 ]

DEV01: Sw. dev.

interm.pos.
[ 210 038 ]

Selected group

DEV01: Open
signal EXT Debouncing DEV01: Op.time
[ 210 030 ] switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
&

DEV01: Closed Chatter suppression

signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]

DEV01: Stat.ind.
interm.pos.
[ 210 027 ]

0
1
0: No
1: Yes

0
1

2
3
DEV01: Control
0 ... 3 state
[ 210 018 ]
0: Interm.position
1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position

49Z64AJA_EN

3-325 Processing Position Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-429

3 Operation
(continued)

3.44.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units

Local or remote control of

external devices
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. The selection of the
control point is described in the section entitled "Configuration of the Bay Panel and of
the Measured Value Panels; Selection of the Control Point". Usually, remote control is
carried out via the communication interface, local control via the keypad on the local
control panel. Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled via appropriately configured
binary inputs (configuration via D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r l . o p e n or
D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r . c l o s e ). The setting at M A I N : E l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l
defines whether the inputs will function as remote or local control points.
Depending on the respective position of control the P439 will issue the following logic
state signals:

MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf

or
MAIN: Command from HMI
or
MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating data
memory:

DEVxx: Open cmd. received

DEVxx: Close cmd. received

Selection of the switchgear

unit to be controlled and
generation of the switching
request
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to
this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the local control panel using
the selection key and pressing the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ key to generate the switching
request. For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be
configured for the switchgear units to be controlled. For control via the communication
interface, the control command ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ will also address the switchgear unit to
be controlled.

3-430 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-326 Generating the switching request

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-431

3 Operation
(continued)

Monitoring the number of

permitted CB operations
The maximum number of CB operations within an ARC cycle (or within a specific time
period) may be set with parameter M A I N : C B 1 m a x o p e r . c a p . Associated with
this parameter is the counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . to which the
maximum number of permitted CB operations is assigned as soon as the positive edge
of an event is present that has been selected by a '1 out of n' parameter at
MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign.

The number of permitted CB operations, set with the counter at

M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation.
Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals
D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n and D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d .

The counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . may only be decremented to a value

of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way affect the protection or control functionality,
in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB failure has occurred
(i.e. M A I N : C B 1 f a u l t y E X T is set to 'Yes') the counter
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . is immediately set to 1.
Enabling switching
commands
Before a switching command is executed, the P439 checks the interlocking conditions
defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is
permissible. Bay interlock equations for operation with or without station interlock can be
defined. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching
command determines the interlocking equations that define, for example, the conditions
for the 'Open' command for operation without station interlock.

3-432 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-327 Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands; enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock
function

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-433

3 Operation
(continued)

Bay interlock for operation

with station interlock
Interrogation of station interlock conditions is possible only if a communication link with
the substation control level has been established. If the P439 detects a communication
error or if there is no communication interface, it will automatically switch to bay interlock
without station interlock.

If bay and station interlocking is to be checked, the bay interlock will be checked first. If
bay interlocking issues a switching enable signal, a switching request will be sent to the
substation control level. At substation control level, there will then be a check – taking
into account the station interlock functions – as to whether switching is permitted or not.
If the substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching operation
is carried out provided that the enable signal from the bay interlock is still present.
Optionally, the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ switching operation can be carried out without checking
the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay interlock equations defined
for operation without station interlock will be used.

3-328 Enabling of the switching commands by the station interlock

3-434 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Linking protection
commands to switching
commands
For circuit breakers, the ‘Open’ command can be linked to the protection trip signals.
The 'Close' command can also be linked to the close command from the protection
device. The bay definitions specify which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers.
The trip (open) or close commands of the protection device are executed directly without
a prior check of the interlocking equations.

3-329 Linking to the protection commands

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-435

3 Operation
(continued)

Issue of switching
commands
Depending on the operating mode set for commands, commands are issued for the set
times or according to time control (time monitoring).

DEV01: Protection
trip cmd.
307 013

DEV01: Protect.
close cmd.
307 014
MAIN: Cmd.
dur.long cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
MAIN: Cmd. dur.
short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]

DEV01: Oper. mode

cmd.
[ 210 024 ]

2
3
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Time control

DEV01: Open
command
[ 210 028 ]

DEV01: Close
command
[ 210 029 ]

MAIN: Device
on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)

MAIN: Mon. mot.

drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
MAIN: Enable
control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN: Bay
interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
DEV01: Enable SI
Open
307 004

DEV01: Enable BI
Open
307 019

DEV01: Open
request
307 000

DEV01: Enable SI
Close
307 005
DEV01: Enable BI
Close
307 020

DEV01: Close
request
307 001

49Z64AGA_EN

3-330 Issue of switching commands

3-436 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Time control of switching

commands
As the switching command ends, running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is
started. The P439 expects that a position status signal – ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ will be
issued by the switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring. The status
signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at appropriately
configured binary inputs on the P439, which can be set to debouncing and chatter
suppression mode (see description for Debouncing and Chatter Suppression in section
'Main Functions of the P439'). For the duration of running time monitoring or until the
contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ -
the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.

If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit

position will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once the
contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated position is
signaled.

If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’
position after the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal
'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a
delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is no status
signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.

If the operating mode external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'No’) the switching command is terminated after the set
latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ position status signal is
received or the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed (see
Figure 3-326).

If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'Yes’) the switching command is terminated, after the set
latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is issued while the set time
period for running time monitoring is active.

Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole position signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the position signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit
is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-437

3 Operation
(continued)

3-331 Monitoring of switching commands

3-438 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Time monitoring without external

run-back of command,
example for switching operation close

DEV01: Close
command
210 029 1

3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036

DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
4

1 10 ms

3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005

4 DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004

19Z5201A_EN

3-332 Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-439

3 Operation
(continued)

Time monitoring with external

run-back of command,
example for switching operation close

DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1

3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036

DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037

DEV01:Inp.asg.
end Close
210 016

1 10 ms
3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005

19Z5202A_EN

3-333 Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control

3-440 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Time control for direct

motor control
The control sequence described above applies to all switchgear units operated via an
‘Open’ contact or a ‘Close’ contact. For bays with direct motor control of load
disconnecting switches, isolating links or grounding switches, the following modified
control sequence described below applies to motor-operated switchgear units. The list
of bay types shows which bay types are defined for direct motor control. An example for
the connection of a bay with direct motor control is illustrated in Chapter 5 ‘Installation
and Connection’.

If a bay type with direct motor control is selected, a binary input for the status signal of
the motor relay and one output relay each to trigger the motor relay and the shunt
windings will have to be configured. In the example illustrated in Figure 3-334, the
C M D _ 1 : C o m m a n d C 0 1 2 single-pole command is defined for control of the motor
relay, the C M D _ 1 : C o m m a n d C 0 1 1 single-pole command is defined for control of
the shunt windings and the S I G _ 1 : S i g n a l S 0 1 2 single-pole signal (debounced
and conditioned by chatter suppression) is defined for the status signal from the motor
relay.

With bay types, defined for direct motor control, it is possible to intervene directly in the
control process of motor driven switchgear units by using external termination contacts.
It will then be necessary to set M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . to 'Yes' and binary
signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination
contacts.

As the switching command – 'Open' or 'Close' – ends the output relays configured to
"motor relay" and "shunt windings" are triggered. At the same time the P439 starts a set
monitoring time period during which the status signal must be issued by the motor relay.
If the status signal is not received during this time period the 'Close' command issued to
the output relays, configured to control the motor relay and the shunt windings, is
terminated. In addition a signal is transferred to the substation control level.

If the status signal from the motor relay is issued during the monitoring time period, the
running time monitoring of the motor relay is started simultaneously with this status
signal. Monitoring of the switching command is then the same as with
electromechanically operated switchgear units.

If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected

(M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'No’) the ‘Close’ command to the motor
relay is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or
‘Closed’ position status signal is received or the set time period for running time
monitoring has elapsed (see Figure 3-326). The monitoring time period is again started
with the termination of the ‘Close’ command to the motor relay and after it has elapsed
the control commands 'Open' or ‘Close’ are also terminated. The same is valid for the
shunt windings.

If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'Yes’) the switching command to the motor relay is terminated
after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is issued while the
set time period for running time monitoring is active. The switching command to the
motor relay is always terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. The monitoring
time period is again started with the termination of the ‘Close’ command to the motor
relay and after it has elapsed the control commands 'Open' or ‘Close’ are also
terminated.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-441

3 Operation
(continued)

3-334 Control and monitoring of the motor relay

3-442 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Time monitoring for direct motor-control

without external run-back of command,
example for switching operation close

CMD_1: Command
C011
200 051

DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1 2

CMD_1: Command
C012
200 056 2

3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036

DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
4

1 10 ms

2 MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060

3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005

4 DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004

19Z5203A_EN

3-335 Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control without external termination

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-443

3 Operation
(continued)

Time monitoring for direct motor-control

without external run-back of command,
example for switching operation close

DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1 2

CMD_1: Command
C012
200 056 2

3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036

DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037

DEV01: Inp.
asg.end Close
210 016

1 10 ms

2 MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060

3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005

19Z5204A_EN

3-336 Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control with external termination

3-444 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.45 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK)

The switching commands to the controllable switchgear units in the bay are enabled only
after interlock conditions have been checked. The interlock conditions are defined in the
form of Boolean equations in the interlocking logic function.

The choice of the bay type automatically defines the bay interlock conditions (or
equations) for the ‘Open’ and ‘Close’ operations of the individual switchgear units in the
bay. The bay interlock equations for operation with station interlock differ from the bay
interlock equations for operation without station interlock (see Appendix, ‘List of Bay
Types’). These automatically defined interlock conditions – determined by the choice of
bay type – can be modified by the user at any time to fit particular station requirements.
The following signals acquired by the P439 are linked by logic operations for the bay
interlock:

Function blocks 1 and 2

Programmable logic outputs
Switchgear position signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
Single-pole signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression

A maximum of 32 equations with 32 equation elements each are available to define

interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
The output signal of one equation can be fed into a higher-order equation as an input
thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-445

3 Operation
(continued)

3-337 Interlocking logic as illustrated for equation 1

3-446 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3.46 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1)

Commands may be transmitted to the P439 via the communications interface. When the
P439 receives such a command, and if the remote control mode is enabled, an
appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal issued.

The operating mode may be selected individually for each single-pole command. The
following settings are possible:

Long command
Short command
Persistent command

If the operating mode long or short command has been selected the output relay will be
triggered for the time period set at M A I N : C m d . d u r . l o n g c m d . or
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd.

The setting options and the functional sequence are shown in the example for
Command C001. Equivalent considerations apply to all other single-pole commands.

3-338 Functional sequence for single-pole commands, as illustrated for Command C001

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-447

3 Operation
(continued)

3.47 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1)

Binary, single-pole signals issued by the system can be transmitted by the P439 to the
control station via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

Such single-pole input signals are conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression
(see ‘Main Functions of the P439’). This conditioned signal is then available as
SIG_1: Logic signal Sxxx.

Signaling characteristics can be defined through the communication interface by setting

the operating mode. The following settings are possible:

Without function
Start/end signal
Transient signal

If the setting is 'Without function' then no message is transmitted when the signal state at
the binary signal input changes. If the setting is 'Start/end signal' then a message is
transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal input changes. The
requirement for sending the 'start' signal is that the logic ' 1 ' signal be available for the
set minimum time. If the setting is "Transient signal" then a message is transmitted
when the signal state at the binary signal input changes form logic ' 0 ' to logic ' 1 '.

The following figure displays setting modes and the functional sequence with the
example for logic signal S001. Equivalent considerations apply to all other single-pole
signals.

3-448 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

3-339 Functional sequence for single-pole signals, as illustrated for logic signal S001

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-449

3 Operation
(continued)

3.48 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT)

The P439 features a binary counter that counts the positive edges of a binary signal
present at an appropriately configured binary signal input. Such a binary signal can be
provided with debouncing.

Enabling/disabling the
counting function
The counting function (COUNT) can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

Debouncing
The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted starts a timer stage
which will continue to run for the duration of the set debouncing time. Each positive
pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. The binary input
signal will be counted if it remains stable during the set debouncing time.

If the signal has the same state after the debouncing time has elapsed that it had before
the first edge appeared, it is not counted.

3-340 Signal sequence for debouncing,

set debouncing time: 50 ms

3-450 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

3 Operation
(continued)

Counting function
The debounced binary signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. The counter may be set to
a specific count value (preload function) by setting a parameter or via the serial
interfaces. The counter value can be shown on the LC-display and output via the PC
and communications interfaces.

Transmitting the counter

value the communications
interface
The counter value is transmitted via the communications interface when an appropriately
configured binary signal input is triggered, a trigger signal is issued by a setting
parameter or at cyclic intervals as set at the cycle time stage. If the counter value is
transmitted at cyclic intervals, transmission is time-synchronized, provided that the ratio
(60/set cycle time) is an integer. In all other cases the counter value is transmitted at
time intervals determined by the free-running internal clock.

Resetting the counter

The counter may be reset using setting parameters, via an appropriately configured
binary signal input, or by the general reset function.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 3-451

3 Operation
(continued)

3-341 Binary count

3-452 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

4 Design

4 Design

The P439 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of
modules.

The P439 – like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 system – is equipped with the
standard local control panel (LOC). The local control panel is covered with a tough film
so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the
essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 17 LED
indicators is also incorporated. The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in
plain text on a label strip.

The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at
the bottom of the local control panel.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 4-1

4 Design
(continued)

4.1 Designs

The P439 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. Depending on

the terminals selected – for pin-type cable lugs or ring-type cable lugs – the case width
will be different.

Pin-type cable lug terminals: 40TE

Ring-type cable lug terminals: 84TE

Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded
terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device
after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1, c) and removing
the local control panel. The local control panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs
in the slots in the left side wall (see Figure 4-1, d). The flush-mounted case is
connected at the back of the case.

!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting
cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control panel by inserting it in
the slots provided on the left.

The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.

The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.

4-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

4 Design
(continued)

4-1 Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (example for a 40TE device)

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 4-3

4 Design
(continued)

4.2 Dimensional Drawings

4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case

Aus-Kommando
War nung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod .

147,5
177,5
184,5

213,4 257,1

242,6

260,2

4-2 Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted 40TE case

Aus-Kommando
War nung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod
.
147,5
177,5
184,5

434,8 257,1
464,0
481,6

4-3 Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted 84TE case

4-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

4 Design
(continued)

4.2.2 Flush Mounted Case

Aus- Kommando
War nung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod
.

177,5
213,4 227,9
253,6

203,0
155,4

159,0
168,0
5,0

5,0

181,3

4-4 Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted 40TE case with instrument panel cut-out, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and
frame) (dimensions in mm)

Aus- Kommando
War nung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod
.
101,6

177,5

213,4 227,9
253,6
242,6

260,2

6,4
101,6

186,5

224,5
242,6

4-5 Flush-mounted 40TE case with instrument panel cut-out, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Note: The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown in this
drawing) is used for the flush-mounted case.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 4-5

4 Design
(continued)

Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./ Störung
Betr ieb
Änderungsmod
.

177,5
434,8 227,9
253,6

284,9
259,0
25,9

159,0
168,0
5,0

5,0
410,0

4-6 Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted 84TE case with panel opening flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
(dimensions in mm)

Aus-Kommando
War nung
Block./ Sö
t r ung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod .
101,6

177,5

434,8 227,9
253,6
464,0

481,6

6,4
101,6
186,5

445,9
464,0

4-7 Flush-mounted 84TE case with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Note: The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown in this
drawing) is used for the flush-mounted case.

4-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

4 Design
(continued)

4.2.3 Device views for Connection of Detachable HMI

View of case 40T for connection of detachable HMI:

Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb

ACHTUNG:

Anschluss nur für

abgesetztes Bedienfeld.
Kein Netzwerkanschluss!

View of case 84T for connection of detachable HMI:

Aus- Kommando
War nung
Block./ Störung
Betr ieb

ACHTUNG:

Anschluss nur für

abgesetztes Bedienfeld.
Kein Netzwerkanschluss!

Detachable HMI with panel opening:

Aus- Kommando
War nung
107,3

Block ./Störung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod.
177,5

213,4 20,7
46,3

197,5

192,5
148,0
168,0

3,0

181,3

4-8 Device and panel opening views for connection of detachable HMI
Note: Connection of protective grounding conductor: see Chapter 5.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 4-7

 4.3 Modules

The P439 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an
overview of the modules relevant for the P439.
(*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, {: optional, z: standard
equipment, : depending on order).

Type Item number Description Width 40TE 84TE

Index
A 9650 356 A ff Communication module (for RS 485 wire connection) 4T { {

A 9650 354 A ff Communication module (for glass fiber, ST connector) 4T { {

A 9650 355 A ff Communication module (for plastic fiber) 4T { {

A 9650 353 A ff Communication module (IRIG-B only) 4T { {

A 9651 427 A ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, 4T { {
SC connector and RJ45 wire)
A 9651 471 A ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, 4T { {
ST connector and RJ45 wire)
A 9650 827 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 485) 4T { {

A 9650 828 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (for glass fiber) 4T { {

A 9650 829 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (for plastic fiber) 4T { {

A 9650 830 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 232) 4T { {

B 0336 187 D ff * Bus module (digital) z

B 0336 188 C ff * Bus module (digital) z

B 0336 421 B ff * Bus module (analog) z z

L 9650 319 D ff * Local Control Module (for device version 40TE without
DHMI)

L 9650 257 D ff * Local Control Module (for device version 84TE without
DHMI)
L 9651 470 B ff * Local control module (for device version with DHMI)

L 9650 563 F ff * Front plate (for device version 40TE with DHMI)

L 9651 920 A ff * Front plate (for device version 84TE with DHMI)

N 0337 086 B ff Transient ground fault evaluation module 4T { {

P 9650 135 C ff Processor module (for P439 without DHMI) 4T z z

P 9651 428 B ff Processor module (for P439 with DHMI) 4T z z

T 9650 307 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (pin connection) 8T

T 9650 308 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (pin connection) 8T

T 9650 321 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (ring connection) 8T

T 9650 322 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (ring connection) 8T

T 9650 419 A ff CT/VT-Board (NCIT) 8T

V 0337 437 E ff Power supply module 24 V DC 4T

Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)

V 9651 300 A ff Power supply module 24 V DC, 4T

switching threshold 73 V

V 9651 328 A ff Power supply module 24 V DC, 4T

switching threshold 90 V

4-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

4 Design
(continued)

Type Item number Description Width 40TE 84TE

Index

V 9651 439 A ff Power supply module 24 V DC, 4T

switching threshold 146 V

V 9651 356 A ff Power supply module 24 V DC, 4T

switching threshold 155 V

V 0337 191 M ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC,
Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)

V 9651 301 A ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC, switching threshold 73 V

V 9651 329 A ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC, switching threshold 90 V

V 9651 437 A ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC, switching threshold 146 V

V 9651 357 A ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC,
switching threshold 155 V
X 0337 612 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), 4T { {
Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)
X 9651 304 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), 4T { {
switching threshold 73 V
X 9651 332 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), 4T { {
switching threshold 90 V
X 9651 443 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), 4T { {
switching threshold 146 V
X 9651 360 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), 4T { {
switching threshold 155 V
X 0337 377 E ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { {
Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)
X 9651 305 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { {
switching threshold 73 V
X 9651 333 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { {
switching threshold 90 V
X 9651 444 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { {
switching threshold 146 V
X 9651 361 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { {
switching threshold 155 V
X 0336 973 D ff Binary module (6 output relays) 4T { {

X 9650 341 B ff Binary module (6 output relays, 4 of these with triacs) 4T { {

Y 0337 406 D ff Analog I/O module, 4T { {

Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)
Y 9651 307 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold 73 V 4T { {

Y 9651 335 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold 90 V 4T { {

Y 9651 446 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold 146 V 4T { {

Y 9651 363 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold 155 V 4T { {

Y 9650 735 C ff Analog I/O module (RTD) / temperature p/c board 4T { {

The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 40TE or 84TE in width
(H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the position of
the threaded terminal blocks in the P439 are shown in the location figures and terminal
connection diagrams at the end of Chapter 5.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 4-9

4-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615
5 Installation and Connection

5 Installation and Connection

Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.

The instructions given in the "Protective and Operational Grounding" section should be
noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth
lock washer, as per the diagram "Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal".
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective
grounding should be checked again.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the
same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)

Installation of the detachable HMI:

A protective conductor (protective earth) with a cross section at least 1.5 mm² must
be connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the detachable HMI
at one end and on the other end to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the
device’s case.
Both the detachable HMI and the device have to be installed in the same substation.
In order to prevent personal injuries the communications cable installed to the
detachable HMI must never come in contact with parts that may be subjected to
dangerous live voltages.
It is prohibited to install or run the communications cable to the detachable HMI next to
high-voltage lines or high-voltage connections. This is to prevent induced currents that
would lead to electromagnetic interferences.

5.1 Unpacking and Packing

All P439 units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer
packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices, and do not
use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type
identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton.

The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped can be
determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of components should
be filed carefully.

After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper

mechanical condition.

If the P439 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the
original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-1

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type

The nominal data and design type of the P439 can be determined by checking the type
identification label (see Figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the
upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the inside of
the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the
P439 packaging.

P439 P439-XXXXXXX-304-40x-615 Diagram P439.40x xx.yy

Unom / NE,nom = 50 ... 130 V Inom = 1 / 5 A IN,nom = 1 / 5 A IEP,nom = A fnom = 50/60 Hz

UH,nom = UN,nom = 24 ... 250 V DC CE

Specification F 6.xxxxxx.y
EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6

5-1 P439 type identification label

The P439 design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual and in the supporting documents
supplied with the unit.

5-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5.3 Location Requirements

The P439 has been designed to conform to DIN 57 435 part 303. Therefore it is
important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several of
these important operating conditions are listed below.

Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]

Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa

Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P439.

Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt content.

Mechanical conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g

Earthquake resistance: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s2,

3 x 1 cycle

Electrical conditions for

auxiliary voltage of the
power supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom

Electromagnetic conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-3

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5.4 Installation

The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P439 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring to the P439 is
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the back,
an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case. Figure 5-2
shows such an opening below the surface-mounted case.

5-2 Opening for running the wiring

The opening width

of the surface-mounted 40TE case is: 213 mm (shown in this figure)
of the surface-mounted 84TE case is: 435 mm

The other dimensions are the same for all cases.

5-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and mounting
dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P439 is mounted on a cabinet door,
special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for
the cabinet (IP 51).

Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5 "Protective and

Operational Grounding"

Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:

The P439 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or –
for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is
used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity class of the
shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of the shock
resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.

Dimensions of the panel cutouts:

Dimensional drawings of the panel cutouts for all cases and for the detachable HMI can
be found in section “Dimensional Drawings“ in chapter 4.

For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Before the P439 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel (or the front
element of the case for devices with detachable display) must be taken down. The local
control panel is removed as described below:

Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower both hinged
flaps 180°up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. The side
mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
Remove the M3 screws (see Figure 5-3).
Then remove the local control panel.

The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor module P by a
plug-in connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.

Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Figure 5-3). Now insert the P439 into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper
M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this,
replace the local control panel.

Note: If the control panel thickness ≥ 2 mm, the longer M3 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-5

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

Beforeinstallation , loosen If panel thickness > 2 mm

theupper screws andinsert replacetheM3andM4
thedevice. screws by thelonger
screws provided.

Completely removethe
lower screws before
installation.

12Y6181 A_EN

5-3 Installation of the case into a control panel, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame).
Example for a device in a 40TE case.

The P439 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see figure 5-5)) is used.

Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5

5-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:

Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-4, c and mount the enclosed angle
brackets using these same screws.
Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Figure 5-5).
Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.

5-4 Mounting the angle brackets

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-7

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

Angle brackets

M6
B6

6.4

M6 x 15

Height: 204 mm
for the
Frame 80 mm
W idt h: 2 n te d cas e
s h-m o u
40T E flu

12Y6183 B_EN

5-5 Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Example for a device in a 40TE case.

The cover frame's width is

of the 40TE case is: 280 mm
of the 84TE case is: 486 mm

The cover frame's height is

for all cases: 204 mm

The device has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is
used for the flush-mounted cases.

Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5

5-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

The flush-mounted 84TE cases - after being fitted with angle brackets - are also suitable
for installation in enclosures or cubicles equipped with a 19" mounting rack. Figure 5-7
shows this type of installation. A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-
mounted 40TE case with a second sub-rack to form a 19" mounting rack (see
Figure 5-6). The second sub-rack can be another device, for example, or an empty sub-
rack with a blank front panel.

5-6 Combining flush-mounted 40TE cases to form a 19" mounting rack

Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-9

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-7 Installation of the P439 in a cabinet with a 19" mounting rack

Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5

5-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding

The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding

requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section
of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum
cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.

In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.

The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept
as short as possible.

19Y5220A_EN

5-8 Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal

The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the
safety given by this set-up.

The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-11

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5.6 Connection

The P439 must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram
indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included in
the supporting documents supplied with the device. The terminal connection diagrams
that apply to the P439 are to be found at the end of this chapter.

In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm² are sufficient to connect a
system current transformer to a current input on the P439. To reduce CT knee-point
voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a
greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on
the P439. Copper conductors with a cross section of 1.5 mm2 are adequate to connect
the binary signal inputs, the signaling and tripping circuits and the power supply input.

All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.

5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits

Power supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P439 power supply, it must be ensured
that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value
of the auxiliary system voltage.

Current-measuring inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.

The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.

The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.

Connecting the measuring

circuits
The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard
schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-9. It is essential that the grounding configuration
shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be
taken into account when making settings (see Chapter 7).

5-12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-9 Standard schematic connection diagram for the P439

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-13

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

Connecting the measuring

circuits for ground fault
direction determination
If the P439 is to function using ground fault direction determination by steady-state
values (the GFDSS function), then the T 4 current transformer must be connected to a
core balance current transformer or a current transformer in Holmgreen configuration. If
the metal shield of the cable is routed through the core balance transformer, the ground
wire must be fed through the core again before it is connected to ground. The cable
sealing end must be attached so that it is isolated from ground. This ensures that any
currents flowing through the shield will not affect measurement.

The steady-state ground fault direction determination requires either the three
phase-to-ground voltages or, alternatively, the neutral-point displacement voltage from
the open delta winding of a voltage transformer assembly as the measured voltage.
Phase voltage values are obtained from the same VTs as the measured values for
distance protection. An additional voltage transformer (T 90) is available in the P439 to
connect an open delta winding. When setting the protection function, the selected
voltage needs to be taken into account.

Figure 5-10 shows the standard connection for ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values where the voltage measuring circuit is connected to an open delta
winding. With this connection configuration, ‘forward/LS’ is displayed if a ground fault
occurs on the line side. A reversed connection is possible for the system current or
voltage transformer if the appropriate setting is configured (see Chapter 7).

5-14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-10 Connecting the steady-state ground fault direction determination function to Holmgreen-configuration and core balance transformers

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-15

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

Connecting a resistance
thermometer
A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y.
This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Figure 5-11). No supply
conductor compensation is required in this case.

5-11 Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method

5-16 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

Connecting signal inputs

for protective signaling
Either a transmission device or pilot wires are required for signal transmission,
depending on the operating mode selected. Twisted pair cores should be used as pilot
wires. Two or four cores are required. If only two cores are available, there must be an
all-or-nothing relay in each station for coupling received and transmitted signals. The
coils of the all-or-nothing relays must be designed for half the loop voltage. Figure 5-12
shows connection with two cores and Figure 5-13 connection with four cores.

The protective signaling transmitting relay can be set to either Transm. rel. break con. or
Transm. rel. make con. In the first case the break contact of the transmitting relay must
be wired, and in the second case the make contact must be wired. The figures show the
connection for the setting Transm. rel. break con.

Furthermore the P439 is capable to operate with the protective signaling device type
SV 35A and the comparator relay type V 34 if it is guaranteed that there is at least one
10 mA pilot wire current flowing.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-17

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-12 Connection of protective signaling with two cores

5-18 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-13 Connection of protective signaling with four cores

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-19

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

Connecting binary inputs

and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. When configuring these
components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O modules (X)
varies (see Chapter 2 “Technical Data”). Once the user has selected a bay type, the
P439 can automatically configure the binary inputs and output relays with function
assignments for the control of switchgear units. The standard configuration of binary
inputs and output relays for each bay type is given in the list of bay types to be found in
the Appendix to this operating manual.

The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal connection
diagrams. This is to be understood as a recommendation only. Connection to binary
inputs can be made as desired.

Connection of switchgear
units having direct motor
control
In the case of bay types having direct motor control, one binary input is configured for
the status signal and one output relay is configured for triggering and resetting the motor
relay. Configuration of appropriate output relays to trigger the armature and shunt
windings of motors on load disconnect switches, isolating links or grounding switches is
in accordance with the ‘List of Bay Types’ (see Appendix). A connection example for a
direct motor control is shown in Figure 5-14.

5-20 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-14 Connection example with pin-type cable plug terminals for a direct motor control,
bay type No. 89 (A23.105.M04), feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-21

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface.

An IRIG-B interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is

connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of
50 Ω must be used as the connecting cable.

5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces

PC interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal
computer (PC).

!
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that
is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.

Communication interface
The communication interface is provided as a permanent connection of the device to a
control system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type,
communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic
connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Communication
interface 2 is only available as a RS 485 interface.

The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.

!
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the device is shut off.

5-22 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

An RS485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices can be
established by using the optional communication interface. The communication master
could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices linked to the communication
master, e.g. P439, are set-up as slave devices.

The RS 485 interface available on the P439 was designed so that data transfer in a full
duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices. Data
transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only for a half duplex
transmission mode. To connect the RS485 communication interface the following must
be observed:

Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
Strip cable cores and cable shield right at the connection point and connect properly
in accordance with specifications.
All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at both
ends.
Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.

A 4-wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communication link is also possible.

A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire data link. A 2-
wire data link is shown in Figure 5-15, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-16 as
an example for channel 2 on the communication module. The same is valid if channel 1
on the communication module is available as a RS 485 interface.

2-wire data link:

The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically
with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P439. The two devices situated at
either far end must have a 200 to 220 Ω resistor installed to terminate the data
transmission conductor. In most AREVA devices, as with the P439, a 220 Ω resistor is
integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper.
An external resistor is therefore not necessary.

4-wire data link:

Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the
data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an electrically
full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system, e.g. the P439, are
connected to the transmitter of the communication master device, and the transmitters of
slave devices are connected to the receiver of the master device. Devices equipped
electrically with only a half duplex RS485 communication interface are connected to the
transmitter of the communication master device. The last device in line (master or slave
device) on the data transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver
terminated with a 200 to 220 Ω resistor each. In most AREVA devices, as with the P439,
a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be connected
with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. The second resistor
must be connected externally to the device (resistor order number see Chapter 13).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-23

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-15 2-wire data link

5-24 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-16 4-wire data link

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-25

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5.7 Assembly diagrams and terminal connection diagrams

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

P A N T X X X V X
CH1 4I 6I 6I 24I 4I
CH2 4U 6O 6O 8O 6O

alt. alt. alt. alt .

A A T Y
ETH CH3 4I 4I
CH2 5U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

5-17 P439 in the 40TE case with pin- terminal connection (P439-407)

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

P A N T X X X X V
CH1 4I 6I 6I 24I 4I
CH2 4U 6O 6O 6O 8O

alt. alt. alt. alt.

A A T Y
ETH CH3 4I 4I
CH2 5U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

5-18 P439 in the 84TE case with ring-terminal connection (P439-408)

5-26 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

Transformer Type T Binary Type X Binary Type X Binary Type X Power Supply Type V
module -/4J -/4V/5V module 6I 6O module 24I module 6O Module 4I / 8O

Ring Pin Voltage measuring Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin
X041 X041 inputs X_1 X_1 Output relays Ring Pin Signal inputs X_1 X_1 Output relays X_1 X_1 Output Relays
Option: 1 1 X_1 X_1 V in 1 1 1 1
13 1 VAG 2 2 1 1 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01
14 2 VBG T5 3 3 2 2
U_01 3 3 3 3
U_02
15 3 VCG T6 4 4 K_1 3 3 4 4 4 4
16 4 T7 5 5 4 4
U_03 5 5 5 5
U_04
17 5 VNG 6 6 K_2 5 5 6 6 6 6 K_02
T90 U_05
18 6 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 7
8 8 7 7
U_06 8 8 K_02 8 8
Option: 9 9 8 8
U_07 9 9 9 9 K_03
11 7 K_3 9 9
U_08
Vref
12 8 T15 X_2 X_2
10 1 X_2 10 1
11 2 K_4 X_2
V in 10 1 1) 11 2 K_04
Current measuring 12 3 10 1 11 2 12 3 K_05
inputs U_9
13 4 11 2 12 3 13 4 K_06
X042 Option: 14 5 12 3
U_10 13 4 1) 14 5 K_07
U_11
1 1 IA T1 15 6 K_5 13 4 14 5 K_03 15 6
U_12
2 2 16 7 14 5 15 6 16 7 K_08
U_13
3 3 IB T2 17 8 K_6 15 6 16 7 17 8
U_14
4 4 18 9 16 7 17 8
5 5 IC T3 17 8
U_15 18 9 Signal Inputs
6 6 18 9
U_16 18 9 UE
7 7 IN T4 X_3 Signal inputs U_01
8 8 19 1 Vin X_3 X_3
U_1 X_3 19 1 1) 19 1
V in
20 2 Vin 19 1 20 2 K_04 20 2
21 3 20 2
U_18 21 3 21 3
UE
U_02
22 4 U_2 21 3
U_18 22 4 1) 22 4
Vin U_19 UE
22 4 23 5 K_05 U_03
U_20
23 5 Vin U_3 23 5 24 6 23 5
U_21 UE
24 6 24 6 25 7 24 6 U_04
25 7 U_4 25 7
U_22 26 8 K_06
Vin
U_23
26 8 27 9 Power Supply
26 8 U_5 27 9
U_24
Vin 25 7 + UH
27 9 26 8 - U100
U_6 27 9 PE

Analog Type Y Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A

module 4I module CH1 / CH2 module ETH / CH2 module CH3

Per order Per order Per order

Ring Pin
X_1 X_1 Measuring outputs Channel 1 IEC 61850 COMM3
1 1 optical fiber link optical fiber link ST optical fiber link
2 2 K_01 X7 X7 X31
3 3 valid 1 RX X/Y U17 1
X//Y U17 X//Y U22
4 4
U X8 X8 X32
5 5 1 TX X/Y U18 1
# X//Y U18 X//Y U23
6 6
0..20 mA U_08
7 7 or wire link or or wire link
8 8 K_02 X9 optical fiber link SC X33
valid X// Y X13 X// Y
9 9 1 1
2 D2[ R] RX
U26 2 D2[ R]
X_2 3 3
U U19 TX X/Y U24
10 1 4 4
11 2 5 D1[ T] 5 D1[ T]
#
12 3
0..20 mA U_09 RS 485 RS 485
and wire link or wire link
Signal and Channel 2 X12
X//Y
1
measuring inputs wire link only X//Y U25 X34
13 4
Vin U_01 1
M5[DCD]
14 5 X10 RJ45
X// Y 2
D2[R]
15 6 1
Vin U_02 3
D1[T]
16 7 2 D2[ R] 4
COMM2
17 8 3 E U27
Vin U_03 U20 wire link 5
E2[G]
4
18 9 5 D1[ T]
Vin U_04 X10 7 +UB
1
X//Y
X_3 RS 485
2 D2[ R]
19 1
3
RS 232
20 2
U
U_05 IRIG-B U20
0..20 mA 4
21 3
# time synchronization D1[ T]
5
22 4 U X11
23 5 PT100 U_06 1 # U21 RS 485
24 6 # #

5-19 Connection diagrams P439

Notes: ‘_’ is a placeholder for the slot. See also section 5.5 for the Protective and Operational Grounding.
1)
The binary (I/O) module X (6xO) is now optionally available with 4 static outputs, parallel to the make contacts K_02.2,
K_03.1, K_04, K_05.
See also section "Protective grounding conductor connection / Case grounding / Protective grounding conductor"!

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 5-27

5 Installation and Connection
(continued)

5-28 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel

6 Local Control Panel

Local control panel

Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel. All the
data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control
panel, and the data important for system management is read out there as well. The
following tasks can be handled from the local control panel:

Controlling switchgear units

Readout and modification of settings
Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning

Control through the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and
support software (MiCOM S1).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-1

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.1 Display and Keypad

Control and display

elements
The local control panel includes a LCD display with a resolution of 128 x 128 pixels
(divided semi graphically into 16 lines of 21 characters each), twelve function keys and
17 LED indicators.

H4 Trip
H3
H2
Alarm
Out of service
C
G G

H1 Healthy G
H17 Edit mode
H5
H6

G
G G
H7
H8
H9 G
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16 O I L/R

49Z6200A_DE

6-1 View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators on case 40T and case 84T devices

6-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels. Data
such as the switching status or the measured operating values is displayed at the panel
level and provides an up-to-date overview of the status of the bay. The menu tree level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured values, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event
recording from either the panel level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the
G
"READ" key .

Bay Panel Signal Panel Measured Value Panel (s) Event Panel
(state-dependent)
P432 Page H 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Fault 17:58:44 Record View
Signals 17:58:44 Ground fault 17:58:44
P432 Page B 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Overload 17:58:44 Oper/Rec/OP_RC
P432 Page A 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Meas. values 17:58:44 Events 17:58:54 Operat. data record.
BB1 MAIN: Voltage A-B prim.
20.04.98
G
BB2 M.c.b. trip V EXT 20.7 kV 05:21:32.331 ARC
Q Q PBB : Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV Enabled
1 2 PS 1 active Start
Q PBB : Voltage C-A prim.
PS 2 active 20.8 kV
0 23:58:17.501 MAIN

G
MAIN: Current IA prim. CB closed sig. EXT
Q Bay interlock. act. 416 A
8 End
MAIN: Current IB prim. 21.04.98
Locked Subst. interl. act. 415 A 05:21:32.331 DEV01
Remote Current IC prim.
1088 A ↑ 417 A Switch.device closed
Curr. IP,max prim. ↓ Start
↑↓ ↑↓

Gerätetyp
Control and Display Panels

Parameters Operation Events

Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings

Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1 Logical state signals
Parameter subset...
Control
Menu tree

6-2 Display panels and menu tree

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-3

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Display panels
The following display panels are available with the P439:

Bay Panel
Measured Value Panels, which are called up according to system conditions
Signal Panel
Event Panel

The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a one line
diagram. If user-defined bay types are applied, resulting information may be sub-divided
into up to eight pages. A maximum of 28 physical and logic binary status may be
configured to one Signal Panel and, depending on the operating mode, acknowledged.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. Only the
Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and
its associated range of functions are actually available.
The Event Panel displays the most recent events, each with a time tag, such as the
opening of a switchgear unit.

Menu tree and data points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a
menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LC-Display
always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user. The
data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are displayed
either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form, as selected by the
user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of
measurement are displayed in the line below.

List data points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one associated value element. This category includes tripping
matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is
selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating that a sub-
level is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data
point are found at this sub-level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value
elements are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.

6-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Short description of keys

G
‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Keys /
Panel Level:
The effect of using the ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ keys differs between the individual panels.
Bay Panel: The 'Up'/'Down' keys switch between the measured values
selected for this panel.
Measured Value Panel: The ‘up’/‘down’ keys switch between the pages of the
Measured Value Panel.
Signal Panel: The ‘up’/‘down’ keys switch between the event pages of
the Signal Panel.
Event Panel: The ‘up’/‘down’ keys switch between the event pages of
the Event Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a
vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys in this mode to change
the setting value.
(‘Up’ key: the next higher value is selected.
‘Down’ key: the next lower value is selected.)
With list settings, press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ key to change the logic operator of the
value element.

‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Keys /

Panel Level:
Bay Panel: Pressing the 'right'/'left' keys switches between the
individual Bay Panel pages.
Signal Panel: Pressing the 'Right'/'Left' keys switches between Bay
Panel and Measured Value Panel.
Measured Value Panel: Pressing the ‘Right’/Left’ keys switches between Signal
Panel and Event Panel.
Event Panel: Pressing the 'Right'/'Left' keys switches between
Measured Value Panel and Bay Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal
direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys are pressed, the cursor
positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the
right or left.
(‘Left’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
‘Right’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list setting, press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the list
of items available for selection.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-5

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

ENTER Key

G
Panel Level:
By pressing the ENTER key at the Panel level, the user can go to the first menu tree
level.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
CLEAR Key C G

Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Panel Level:
Bay Panel:
If the CLEAR key is pressed while selecting a switchgear unit on the Bay Panel then
the selection of the switchgear unit is canceled. The LED indicators are not reset in
this procedure.
Signal Panel:
A selected flashing signal may be acknowledged individually by pressing the CLEAR
key. This acknowledgement will switch the flashing signal to a static status but will
not cause the LED indicators to reset or clear measured event data.
Menu Tree Level:
Input mode:
When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input
mode is exited.
G
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.

Local/Remote Key L/R

The local/remote key is effective in the Bay Panel except where a binary signal input
has been configured for this function.
The local/remote key is the transfer switch between remote and local control (setting
R<->L), or between remote&local and local control (setting R&L <-> L). If the
local/remote key is set to transfer from remote to local control then this can only take
place if the L/R password has been entered first. Switching from local control to
remote control occurs without checking for the password.

Page Key
Panel Level:
Pressing the page key shows the next panel.
Menu Tree Level:
When the page key is pressed the Menu Tree Level is exited and the Bay Panel is
accessed.

6-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Selection Key
Bay Panel:
The Selection key is effective only in the Bay Panel and only if local control is
activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the switchgear
unit to be controlled. The selected external device will be marked by an asterisk (*) –
as long as no external device names are displayed. Otherwise the external device
name will flash and will be displayed in the status line.
Signal Panel:
The Selection key is used to select a flashing signal (not yet acknowledged) and will
also automatically switch to pages that might be available. When the last flashing
signal has been reached pressing the Selection key again will start with the first
flashing signal.

OPEN Key O
The OPEN key is effective in the Bay Panel only.
Pressing the OPEN key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account
the interlock equation – to assume the ‘open’ status.
CLOSE Key I
The CLOSE key is effective in the Bay Panel only.
Pressing the CLOSE key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account
the interlock equation – to assume the ‘closed’ status.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-7

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can be
changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right of the enter
key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is illuminated. An underscored
external device name in the Bay Panel indicates a selected switchgear unit. The
examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in this
manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.

6.2 Changing between Display Levels

After start-up of the device, the display is at the Panel Level. The Bay Panel is
displayed.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Jumping from Panel Level to
Menu Tree Level 0 Example of a display after start-up of the X YYY

BB1
10:33:22

device. BB2

Q1 Q2
Note:
When the device is delivered, it is set for a Q0
dummy bay without switchgear units.
Q9
Therefore only the name of the device appears
Q8
on the Bay Panel. The display shown in the Locked
example will not appear until a ‘real’ bay type Remote
1088 A
has been selected. Curr. IP,max prim.

1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel X YYY

G

Parameters
Level to the Menu Tree Level.

Jumping from Menu Tree

Level to Panel Level 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
jump to the Panel Level from any position No (=off)
within the menu tree.

1 Pressing the Page key. or

X YYY

BB1
10:33:22

BB2

Alternatively first press the ‘up’ key and hold it G Q1 Q2

+ C
G

down while pressing the CLEAR key.

Q0
Note:
Q9
It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and
Q8
release it last in order to avoid unintentional Locked
resetting of stored data. Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: "Par/Conf/LOC"), the display
will switch automatically to the Bay Panel.

6-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.3 Display Illumination

If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
"hold" time has elapsed (‘Backlight time’ setting in the menu tree at ‘Par/Conf/LOC’).
Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again. In this case
the control action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed. Reactivation
of the display illumination is also possible by using a binary input.

If continuous display illumination is required, the ‘return time illumination’ function is set
to ‘blocked’.

6.4 Control at Panel Level

At Panel Level, the user can move from one Panel type to another by pressing the Page
key (in one direction only) or the ‘left’/’right’ keys (in both directions).

6.4.1 Bay Panel

Information displayed on
the Bay Panel
Figure 6-3 shows an example of a Bay Panel. The top line shows the device type on the
left and the current time of day on the right. Together with a customized Bay Type with
more than one Bay Panel page the top line will include a page marker in the center.
The page markers run from "Page A" (first page) to "Page H" (eighth page).

The Bay Panel shown below in one-line diagram representation is a function of the set
BayType. The symbols shown in the following table are used to represent the
switchgear units and other external devices as well as the status of switchgear units.
The user can switch between character sets 1, 2, and 3. Character set 3 is identical to
character set 1 in as-delivered condition but can be replaced by a user-defined character
set – by using a special ancillary tool. The symbols of character set 2 are used in the
following description.

The fourth line from the bottom shows (in abbreviated form) whether a bay interlock is
active. The third line from the bottom indicates whether remote or local control is
permitted. In the example shown here, remote control is activated. The two lines at the
bottom contain measured value data. The arrows to the right of the measured value
data indicate that additional measured values can be called up by pressing the ‘up’ or
’down’ keys.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-9

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

X YYY 10:33:22

BB1
BB2

Q1 Q2

Q0

Q9

Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

6-3 Example of a Bay Panel

Representation of the external

devices using
External device Status Character set 1 Character set 2
Circuit breaker ‘Open’

'Closed'

‘Off-end’, ’Faulty’

Switch disconnector ‘Open’

'Closed'

‘Off-end’, ’Faulty’

Disconnector ‘Open’

'Closed'

‘Off-end’, ’Faulty’

Switch truck ‘Open’

'Closed'

‘Off-end’, ’Faulty’

Fuse unit ‘Open’

'Closed'

6-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Measured value display in the
Bay Panel 0 Measured values are shown one at a time. X YYY

BB1
10:33:22

A configuration step determines whether the BB2

measured value will also be displayed in bar Q1 Q2

chart form.
A configuration step determines whether the Q0
measured value will also be displayed in bar
Q9
chart form. The position of the bar chart can
Q8
also be set for horizontal or vertical display Locked
(the setting applies to all measured values). Remote
1088 A
The arrows under the bar chart indicate that Curr. IP,max prim.

additional measured values can also be

displayed.
G
1 By pressing the ‘up’ or ‘down’ key the next or
X YYY

BB1
10:33:25

measured value is displayed. In the example BB2

shown, no bar chart display has been Q1 Q2

configured for the measured value.
Q0

Q9

Q8
Locked
Remote
1000 A
Curr. IA prim.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-11

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Controlling switchgear
units
Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the unit has
been set for 'local control'. If the local/remote key is set to switch between remote and
local control (R↔L), then the switch from 'remote' to 'local' operation requires a
password. When more than one Bay Panel page is used only joint 'local/remote'
switching is available.

The following example is based on the (R↔L) setting for the local/remote key and the
factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the
section 'Changing the Password') the following description will apply accordingly.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 Select the Bay Panel. X YYY

BB1
10:33:22

BB2

Q1 Q2

Q0

Q9

Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

1 Press the 'local/remote' key (L/R) to switch L/R

XX YYY 10:33:25
the device to local operation. The Bay Panel is
no longer displayed. The device type appears ********
in the first line and eight asterisks (*) appear in
the fourth line as a prompt to enter the
password.

2a Press the following keys in sequence:

G
XX YYY 10:33:27
G

‘Left’
*

‘Down’ G
XX YYY 10:33:29
G

‘Right’ G
XX YYY 10:33:31
G

‘Up’ G
XX YYY 10:33:33
The display will change as shown in the
G

column on the right.

*

6-12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Now press the ENTER key. X YYY 10:33:25

BB1
If the correct password has been entered, the BB2
Bay Panel will re-appear. The third line from Q1 Q2
the bottom will display ‘Local’.
If an invalid password has been entered, the Q0
display shown above in Step 1 will appear. Q9

Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

2b This control step can be canceled at any C X YYY

BB1
10:33:22

time by pressing the CLEAR key before the BB2

ENTER key is pressed. Q1 Q2

Q0

Q9

Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

3a Press the Selection key to select a X YYY

BB1
10:33:28

switchgear unit. Only switchgear units that are BB2

electrically controllable can be selected. The Q1 Q2

external device designation for the selected
switchgear unit –‘Q0’, for example – is Q0
displayed in flashing characters (underlined in
Q9
the example to the right) and also appears in
Q8
the bottom line of the display. If the display of Locked
external device designations has been Local
1088 A
disabled, the selected switchgear unit will be Q0

marked by a flashing asterisk (*). The

designation of the selected external device
appears in the bottom line of the display.

3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear C

X YYY

BB1
10:33:28

unit, press the CLEAR key. Press the BB2

Selection key to select a new switchgear unit. Q1 Q2

Q0

Q9

Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-13

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

4 After selecting a switchgear unit,

press the keys “Open” O

or
“Close” I
to control the switchgear unit. Before this
switching action is executed, compliance with
bay interlock conditions – if applicable – is
checked.

4a If the check of bay interlock conditions X YYY

BB1
10:33:33

determines that an operation can be carried BB2

out, then the switch command is executed. Q1 Q2
The ‘off-end’ (intermediate position) symbol is
displayed while the switchgear unit is
Q0
operating.
Q9

Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

Once the operating time of the switchgear unit X YYY 10:33:35

has elapsed, the resulting switching status is BB1

displayed. BB2

Q1 Q2

Q0

Q9

Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

4b If the check of interlock conditions X YYY

BB1
10:33:35

determines that switching is not allowed, then BB2

the selected switchgear unit is no longer Q1 Q2
highlighted.
If the LED indicators have been configured
Q0
accordingly, the LED indicator for ‘Interlock
Q9
equations violated’ will be illuminated.
The factory default setting is H 15. Locked
Q8

Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

5 If no control action takes place within a set

time period after selection of a switchgear unit
or if the return time for illumination has
elapsed, then the selection is canceled.

6-14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to L/R X YYY

BB1
10:33:38

remote control; this is accomplished without a BB2

password prompt. Q1 Q2

Q0

Q9

Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-15

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.4.2 Signal Panel(s)

The Signal Panel is used to display the up to 28 different physical and logical binary
states that the device has available. The top line in the display shows the panel
designation 'Signals' and the current time of day. The following empty line separates the
heading from actual signals. This gives display capacity of up to seven signals to one
Signal Panel. Additional pages are created when more than seven signals have been
configured. As with all other panels, switching between pages is carried out
automatically, after the parameter panel hold-time (LOC: H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s )
has elapsed, or manually by pressing the ‘Up’/‘Down’ keys.

Each signal consists of two lines. The first line shows a status marker (square)

F clear Signal inactive / not powered or

J black Signal active / powered or
ÑFÒ flashing Signaling

and the associated function group. The second line shows the full text for this signal.

Automatic activation
When automatic activation of the Signal Panel is set (L O C : A u t . a c t i v . S i g n . P a n e l )
each status change of signals, configured to a panel, is automatically switched from the
Bay Panel page or the Operation Panel/Event Panel (depending on the actual selection)
to the Signal Panel. Depending on the range of functions available in the device, the
displays of Overload Panels, Ground Fault Panels or Fault Panels have a higher priority
and will be shown when an event has occurred. Using the Page key will make the
display jump to the other panels at any time.

Status display and

signaling
To differentiate between the states 'signal active / powered' and 'signal inactive / not
powered' shown on the Signal Panel the parameter (L O C : S t a t . i n d . S i g n . P a n e l ) is
used. This will distinguish between a clear/black square alone and the simultaneous
change over from normal display to highlighting of text in both lines (the first line with the
status marker will remain unchanged!).

By using the parameter (L O C : I n d i c a t . S i g n . P a n e l ) the signaling of status

changes of signals in the Signal Panel is controlled. There is a difference between no
signaling (acknowledgement is not necessary, but, if so configured, the Signal Panel is
switched on at any status change), signaling by the flashing status marker ÑFÒalone
or by flashing of the two lines (change over from normal display to highlighting of text
and the status marker). The flashing frequency is fixed and may not be changed.

6-16 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Each status change of signals, configured to a panel of the Bay Panel page can be set to
call for user attention either by having the status marker or both signal lines flash when a
new event has occurred. The switching control will then automatically switch to the
page, which includes the first signal that has experienced a status change. After
pressing the Selection key this flashing signal is selected on the current page (signal
preceded by a flashing cursor “>“). The next flashing signal can be called up by pressing
the Selection key again. At this point it may occur that the display will automatically
jump to the next page. When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the
Selection key again will start with the first flashing signal.

Depending on L O C : S i g n . c a u s . S i g n . P a n e l the cause of a flashing signal may

be set. Either each status change of the binary information or only "incoming" edges for
transient signals will lead to a flashing signal. The status change is generally shown as
"storing" i.e. the flashing signal will remain until it has been acknowledged.

Acknowledging flashing
signals
Acknowledging a flashing signal that has been selected will occur by pressing the
CLEAR key C . This will not reset illuminated LED indicators but will only acknowledge
the display. The flashing will stop when the CLEAR key is pressed and a static status
display will appear. Then the display will automatically jump to the next flashing signal.
This will enable the user to acknowledge any flashing signals by multiple pressing of the
CLEAR key. As long as the Selection key is pressed and no resetting has occurred the
current page will be continuously displayed (no automatic switching to the next page).
The selection will remain active until the time set in L O C : R e t u r n t i m e s e l e c t has
elapsed. When the time has elapsed the display will jump to the next page. During an
active selection the user may at any time jump to the next or the previous page by
pressing the 'up’ or 'down' keys (similar to the Measured Value Panel and the Event
Panel).

Status change signaling

In order to be able to continue with the processing of flashing signals the device has two
internal logic signals available.

As long as at least one status change signal in the Signal Panel has not been
acknowledged, L O C : C h g . S i g . P a n e l s t a t . will show the status change of the
Signal Panel as a static signal. This signal is made available in the selection tables for
the function groups LED, OUTP, LOGIC, PC, COMM1 and COMM2.

The second internal logic signal L O C : C h g . S i g . P a n e l f l a s h . shows the status

change of the Signal Panel as an alternating signal with a frequency of about 0.5 Hz.
This signal is only made available in the selection tables for the function groups LED,
OUTP and LOGIC. It is generated independent of the operating mode as set in
L O C : I n d i c a t . S i g n . P a n e l ; for example a LED configured to this signal will also be
triggered as flashing even if the operating mode is set to "without signaling".

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-17

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Description Display

1 Example of a Signal Panel with status S i g n a l s 2 3 : 5 6 : 1 0

display by status markers (squares) I N P :

S t a t e U 1 6 0 4
M A I N :
M . c . b . t r i p V r e f E X T
F R _ R C :
F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w
L O C :
R e m . a c c . b l o c k . a c t i v e
O U T P :
O u t p . r e l a y s b l o c k e d
P S S :
A c t i v a t e P S 3 E X T
L O G I C :
R e s e t 3 E X T

2 Example of a Signal Panel with status S i g n a l s 2 3 : 5 6 : 1 0

display by status markers (squares) and I N P :

highlighting of lines S t a t e U 1 6 0 4
M A I N :
M . c . b . t r i p V r e f E X T
F R _ R C :
F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w
L O C :
R e m . a c c . b l o c k . a c t i v e
O U T P :
O u t p . r e l a y s b l o c k e d
P S S :
A c t i v a t e P S 3 E X T
L O G I C :
R e s e t 3 E X T

3a Example of the selection of a status

display with status markers.
Cursor “>” is flashing

3b Example of the selection of a status

display with status markers and highlighting of
text.
Cursor “>” and highlighted text are flashing

6-18 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.4.3 Measured Value Panels

Measured Value Panels

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the
section entitled ‘Setting a List Parameter’ for instructions regarding selection. The
measured value display can be structured by inserting a dummy or placeholder in the list
of selected measured values. If the M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n setting has been
selected for a given panel, then that panel is disabled.

The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active
until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key C , for example.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 The uppermost line of the display shows the Meas. values 16:57:33

type of measured values being displayed. In Voltage A-B prim.

this example, the display shows measured 20.7 kV
operating values (abbreviated as Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
'Meas. values'). The time of day is shown at Voltage C-A prim.
the upper right of the display. 20.8 kV
Up to six selected measured values can be Current A prim.
displayed on the Panel simultaneously. 415 A
Current B prim.
416 A
Current C prim.
417 A

1 If more than six measured values have been or

Meas. values 16:57:35

selected, they can be viewed one page at a Voltage A-B norm.

time by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys. The 0.7 Vnom
device will also show the next page of the Voltage B-C norm.
0.6 Vnom
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time Voltage C-A norm.
for Panels (setting in menu tree: 0.8 Vnom
"Par/Conf/LOC") has elapsed. Current A norm.
1.5 Inom
Current B norm.
1.6 Inom
Current C norm.
1.7 Inom

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-19

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.4.4 Event Panel

The Event Panel shows the signals relevant for operation, each with the complete time
tag (date and time of day). A maximum of three signals are displayed. The Event Panel
is based on entries in the operating data memory (menu tree: "Oper/Rec/OP_RC").

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 The uppermost line of the display shows the Events 16:57:33

panel designation and the current time of day. 20.04.98

Below this line, the signals are shown in 05:21:32.331 MAIN
chronological order. The arrows at the bottom Trip command
Start
of the display area indicate that additional
signals can also be displayed. 05:21:35.501 MAIN
Trip command
End
21.04.98
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/faulty
Start

1 Pressing the ‘up’ or ‘down’ keys will display or

Events 16:57:35

the signals one at a time.

05:21:35.501 MAIN
Trip command
End
21.04.98
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/faulty
End

08:10:59.688 MAIN
Blocked/faulty
End

6-20 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.5 Control at the Menu Tree Level

6.5.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree

Folders and function

groups
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.

At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders
‘Parameters’, ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’, which form the first folder level. Up to two further
folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and
a maximum of three folder levels.

At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.

PX yyy
Unit
type

PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Parameters Operation Events
level 1

Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
level 2

Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
level 3

Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups

Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
points 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy

6-5 Basic menu tree structure

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-21

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.5.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode

The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain
text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured
values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings,
signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. In
either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is
displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in
plain text mode only.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 In this example, the user switches from plain Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Device on-line
text mode to address mode. No (=off)

1 To switch from address mode to plain text C

+
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or 0
either the ‘left’ key or the ‘right’ key
simultaneously. This can be done at any point C +
in the menu tree.

6-22 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.5.3 Change-Enabling Function

Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This
safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.

There are two ways to enter the input mode.

Global change-enabling
function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Param. change enabl.’
parameter to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see
section ‘Password-Protected Control Actions’) – are enabled without entering the
password.
Selective change-enabling
function
Password input prior to any setting change.

This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the
factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see section
'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’, select Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Param. change enabl.
the ‘Param. change enabl.’ parameter. No

1 Press the ENTER key.

G

Eight asterisks (*) Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Param. change enabl.
appear in the fourth line of the display. No
********

2 Press the following keys in sequence:

G
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
G

‘left’ No
*

‘Right’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
G

No
*

‘up’ G

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
G

No
*

‘down’. The G
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
display will change as shown in the column on Param. change enabl.
G

the right. No
*

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-23

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Param. change enabl.
indicates that the setting can now be changed No
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.

If an invalid password has been entered, the

display shown in Step 1 appears.

3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’.

G
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.

G
Yes

4 Press the ENTER key again.

G
The LED Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for Yes
further setting changes.

The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling
function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change
only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is
preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been
activated.

6-24 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu
tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
disabled, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.

Forced return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by either pressing
the Page key or by first pressing the ‘Up’ key and then holding it down and also pressing
the CLEAR key.

Note: It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.

Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed.
For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree:
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection enabled'). Such settings include the configuration
settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system.

The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-25

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.5.4 Changing Parameters

If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 Example of a display. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Param. change enabl.
In this example, the change-enabling function Yes
is activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.

1 Select the desired setting by pressing the

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time

G
keys. 50000 s

2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit 50000 s
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).

3 Press the ‘left’ or ’right’ keys to move the

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
G

cursor to the left or right. 50000 s

4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
G

by pressing the ‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In the 50010 s

meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.

5 Press the ENTER key.

G

The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device 50010 s
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting for a value
change.

6 If you wish to reject the new setting while C

Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled 50000 s
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old value. A
further setting can be selected for a value
change by pressing the keys.

6-26 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.5.5 Setting a List Parameter

Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be
displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an
‘OR’ operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available
in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals
and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user
requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a
setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used
here as an illustration.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 Select a list setting (in this example, the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Fct.assign.trip cmd.
parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at
‘Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN’ in the menu tree). The
down arrow (È) indicates that a list setting has
been selected.

1 Press the ‘down’ key.

G

The first function and Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Fct.assign.trip cmd.
G
the first selected signal will appear in the third #01 DIST
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol Trip zone 1
‘#01’ in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If 'MAIN: Without function’ appears
for the first item, then this means that no
function assignment has been made yet.

2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
G

by pressing the ‘right’ and ’left’ keys.

OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 2

Once the end of the list is reached, the display Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

shown on the right will appear. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#05 MAIN
?????

3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Fct.assign.trip cmd.
list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE #02 DIST
will light up. Trip zone 2

4 Scroll through the assignable functions by

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
G

pressing the ‘right’ and ‘left’ keys in the input #02 DIST
mode. Trip zone 4

5 Select the operator or the class using the

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
G

‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In this particular case, OR #02 DIST

only the ‘OR’ operator can be selected. There Trip zone 4
is no limitation on the selection of classes.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-27

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

6 Press the ENTER key.

G
The LED indicator Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
will go out. The assignment has been made. OR #02 DIST
The unit will now operate with the new settings. Trip zone 4

If no operator has been selected, the ‘OR’

operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.

7 Press the ‘up’ key to exit the list at any point

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.

G
in the list.

8 If you wish to reject the new setting while C

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled OR #02 DIST
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The Trip zone 2
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.

Deleting a list setting

If ‘MAIN: Without function’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.

6-28 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.5.6 Memory Readout

Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not
necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective
functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.

The following memories are available:

In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory

In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
„ In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/FT_RC’: Fault memories 1 to 8
„ In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/OL_RC’: Overload memories 1 to 8
„ In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/GF_RC’: Ground fault memories 1 to 8

Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-29

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Readout of the operating

data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100
entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten. Entries in the operating
data memory are displayed on the Event Panel.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 Select the entry point for the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
memory.

1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the operating

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC

G
data memory. The latest entry is displayed. Enabled USER
No

2 Press the ‘left’ key repeatedly to display the

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 10:01 PSIG
G
entries one after the other in chronological Enabled USER
order. Once the end of the operating data Yes
memory has been reached, pressing the ‘left’
key again will have no effect.

3 Press the ‘right’ key to display the previous

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
G

entry. Enabled USER

No

4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
G

operating data memory to return to the entry

point.

6-30 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Readout of the monitoring

signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an ‘overflow’ signal is issued.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 Select the entry point for the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. signal record.
signal memory.

1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the monitoring

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON

G
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed. Checksum error param

2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to display

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 10:01 SFMON

G
the entries one after the other in chronological Exception oper. syst.
order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the ‘overflow’
signal is displayed as the last entry.

3 Press the ‘left’ key to display the previous

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
G

entry. Checksum error param

4 If the ‘down’ key is held down while a Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
monitoring signal is being displayed, the Checksum error param
following additional information will be
displayed:
First: Time when the signal first occurred G
First: 13:33:59.744
Active: Yes
G

Active: The fault is still being detected Reset: No

(Yes) or is no Number: 5
longer detected (No) by the self-
monitoring function.

Reset: The fault was no longer detected by

the self-monitoring function and
has been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.

5 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the

G
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
G

monitoring signal memory to return to the entry

point.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-31

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Readout of the event

memories (records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.

Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 Select the entry point for the first fault Events/Rec/FT_RC

Fault recording 1
memory, for example. If the memory contains 01.01.99 10:00:33
entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.

1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the fault

G
Fault recording 1
FT_RC

G
memory. First, the fault number is shown. Event
In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last 22
reset.

2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to see first

G
Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
G

the measured fault data and then the binary Running time
signals in chronological order. The time shown 0.17 s
in the second line is the time, measured from
the onset of the fault, at which the value was
measured or the binary signal started or G
Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
G

Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached Start
(after the ‘right’ key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the ‘right’ key again will G

have no effect. Fault recording 1

241 ms FT_RC
G

Record. in progress
End

3 Press the ‘left’ key to see the previous

G
Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
G

measured value or the previous signal. Record. in progress

Start

4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the

G
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
G

fault memory to return to the entry point. 01.01.99 10:00:33

6-32 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.5.7 Resetting

All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the
latest fault.

The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.

Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be
the case after injection testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting.
The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example.
In this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
display shows the number of faults since the 10
last reset, 10 in this example.

1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. 10
Don't execute
G

2 Press the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys to change the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

G

Reset recording
setting to ‘Execute’. 10
Execute

3 Press the ENTER key.

G

The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in 0
line 3 is reset to ‘0’.

4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault C

Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
recordings after leaving the standard control 10
mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED
indicator will go out, and the fault recordings
remain stored in the device unchanged. Any
setting can be selected again for a value
change by pressing the keys.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-33

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

6.5.8 Password-Protected Control Actions

Some actions initiated from the local control panel (e.g. a manual trip command for
testing purposes) can only be carried out after entering a password, and only if the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled 'Enabling
Parameter Changes'), so as to prevent any unwanted operations.

This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined
sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has
been changed by the user (see section 'Changing the Password'), the following
description will apply accordingly.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN’, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
select the parameter ‘Man. trip cmd. USER’. Don't execute

1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) G

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
appear in the fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********

2 Press the following keys in sequence:

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G

‘left’ Don't execute

*

‘Right’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G

Don't execute
*

‘up’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G

Don't execute
*

‘down’. G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
The display will change as shown in the Man. trip cmd USER
G

column on the right. Don't execute

*

Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Man. trip cmd. USER
indicates that the setting can now be changed Don't execute
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.

3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’.

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G

Execute

6-34 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

4 Press the ENTER key again.

G
The LED Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. Don't execute
The unit will execute the command.

5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT C

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
MODE is on, the control action can be Don't execute
terminated by pressing the CLEAR key.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go
out.

6.5.9 Changing the Password

The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:

3
G

1 2
G

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-35

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 In the menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
‘Password’ setting. ********

1 Press the ENTER key.

G
Eight asterisks (*) Par/Conf/LOC
Password
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********

2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password

G
to enter the valid password. The display will ********
change as shown in the column on the right. *

G
Par/Conf/LOC
G Password
********
*

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G

********
*

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G

********
*

3 Now press the ENTER key. The LED Par/Conf/LOC

Password
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The _
third line shows an underscore character ( _ )
as the prompt for entering a new password.

4 Enter the new password, which in this

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G

example is done by pressing the UP key *

followed by the DOWN key.
G

Par/Conf/LOC
G

Password
**

5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

Password
appear in the third line, and a cursor **
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user _
to enter the new password again.

6-36 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

6 Re-enter the password.

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password

G
**
*

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password

G
**
**

7a Press the ENTER key again.

G
If the Par/Conf/LOC
Password
password has been re-entered correctly, the ********
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new Password L/R is now valid.

7b If the password has been re-entered Par/Conf/LOC

Password
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT **
MODE remains on and the display shown on _
the right appears. The password has to be re-
entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password L/R by pressing the
CLEAR key (see Step 8).

8 The change in password can be canceled at C

Par/Conf/LOC
Password
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR ********
key. If this is done, the original Password L/R
continues to be valid.

Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To
select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without
password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see section ‘Enabling Parameter
Changes’).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-37

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 Turn off the device.

1 Turn the device on again. At the very

G

G
beginning of device startup, press the four TEST
directional keys (‘left’, ‘right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’) at
the same time and hold them down.

2 When this condition is detected during

G

Password

G
startup, the password is displayed. 1234

3 After the four keys are released, startup will

continue. TEST

6-38 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Changing and displaying

the L/R password
In order to enable local control the L/R password has to be entered.

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

0 In the menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
‘Password L/R’ setting. ********

1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********

2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R

G
to enter the valid general password. The ********
display will change as shown in the column on *
the right.
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
G ********
*

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
G

********
*

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
G

********
*

3 Now press the ENTER key. The red LED Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be 1423
illuminated. The current Password L/R will
appear in the third line.

4 Enter the new password, which in this

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
G

example is done by pressing the UP key *

followed by the DOWN key.
G

Par/Conf/LOC
G

Password L/R
**

5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
appear in the third line, and a cursor **
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user _
to enter the new Password L/R again.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 6-39

6 Local Control Panel
(continued)

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action

6 Re-enter the new Password L/R.

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R

G
**
*
G

Par/Conf/LOC

G
Password L/R
**
**

7a Press the ENTER key again.

G
If the new Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
Password L/R has been re-entered correctly, ********
the red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will
be extinguished and the display appears as
shown on the right. The new Password L/R is
now valid.

7b If the new Password L/R has been re- Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
entered incorrectly, the red LED indicator **
labeled EDIT MODE remains illuminated and _
the display shown on the right hand side
appears. The new Password L/R needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password L/R by pressing the
CLEAR key (see Step 8).

8 The change of the Password L/R can be C

Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
canceled at any time before Step 7 by pressing ********
the CLEAR key. If this is done, the original
Password L/R continues to be valid.

6-40 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings

7 Settings

7.1 Parameter

The P439 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate
settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located in
the folder titled ‘Parameters’ in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are
listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.

All settings are reset to their default values after a cold restart. The P439 is blocked in
that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart.

7.1.1 Device Identification

The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the
design version of the P439. They have no effect on the device functions. These settings
should only be changed if the design version of the P439 is modified.

Device DVICE: Device type 000 000

The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: Software version 002 120

Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW date 002 122

Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW version communic. 002 103

Software version for the device's communication software. This display

cannot be altered.
DVICE: DM IEC 61850 version 002 059

Software version of the communication software based on the device's

protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: Language version 002 123

Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
DVICE: Text vers.data model 002 121

Using the ‘text replacement tool’ provided by the operating program, the
user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and
load them into the device. These customized data models contain an
identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier
is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the
identifier ‘0’ (factory-set default).
DVICE: F number 002 124

The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000

DVICE: PCS Order No. 001 200

Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-1

7 Settings
(continued)

DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 000 003

DVICE: Order ext. No. 2 000 004

DVICE: Order ext. No. 3 000 005

DVICE: Order ext. No. 4 000 006

DVICE: Order ext. No. 5 000 007

DVICE: Order ext. No. 6 000 008

DVICE: Order ext. No. 7 000 009

DVICE: Order ext. No. 8 000 010

DVICE: Order ext. No. 9 000 011

DVICE: Order ext. No. 10 000 012

DVICE: Order ext. No. 11 000 013

DVICE: Order ext. No. 12 000 014

DVICE: Order ext. No. 13 000 015

DVICE: Order ext. No. 14 000 016

DVICE: Order ext. No. 15 000 017

DVICE: Order ext. No. 16 000 018

DVICE: Order ext. No. 17 000 019

DVICE: Order ext. No. 18 000 020

DVICE: Order ext. No. 19 000 021

DVICE: Order ext. No. 20 000 022

DVICE: Order ext. No. 21 000 023

DVICE: Order ext. No. 22 000 024

DVICE: Order ext. No. 23 000 025

DVICE: Order ext. No. 24 000 026

DVICE: Order ext. No. 25 000 027

DVICE: Order ext. No. 26 000 028

DVICE: Order ext. No. 27 000 029

Order extension numbers for the device.

DVICE: Module var. slot 1 086 050

DVICE: Module var. slot 2 086 051

DVICE: Module var. slot 3 086 052

DVICE: Module var. slot 4 086 053

DVICE: Module var. slot 5 086 054

DVICE: Module var. slot 6 086 055

DVICE: Module var. slot 7 086 056

DVICE: Module var. slot 8 086 057

DVICE: Module var. slot 9 086 058

DVICE: Module var. slot 10 086 059

DVICE: Module var. slot 12 086 061

DVICE: Module var. slot 14 086 063

DVICE: Module var. slot 16 086 065

DVICE: Module var. slot 18 086 067

DVICE: Module var. slot 20 086 069

DVICE: Module var. slot 21 086 070

Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 20. The
display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.

7-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DVICE: Module vers. slot 1 086 193

DVICE: Module vers. slot 2 086 194

DVICE: Module vers. slot 3 086 195

DVICE: Module vers. slot 4 086 196

DVICE: Module vers. slot 5 086 197

DVICE: Module vers. slot 6 086 198

DVICE: Module vers. slot 7 086 199

DVICE: Module vers. slot 8 086 200

DVICE: Module vers. slot 9 086 201

DVICE: Module vers. slot 10 086 202

DVICE: Module vers. slot 12 086 204

DVICE: Module vers. slot 14 086 206

DVICE: Module vers. slot 16 086 208

DVICE: Module vers. slot 18 086 210

DVICE: Module vers. slot 20 086 212

DVICE: Module vers. slot 21 086 213

Index letter specifying the version of the module inserted in the respective
slot (1 to 20).
DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047

Item number of module A in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module A 086 190

Index letter specifying the version of module A.

DVICE: MAC address module A 104 061

MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This
address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048

Item number of module L in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module L 086 191

Index letter specifying the version of module L.

DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049

Item number of module B in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module B 086 192

Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.

DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046

Item number of analog bus module B.

DVICE: Version module B (a) 086 189

Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.

DVICE: Customer ID data 1 000 040

DVICE: Customer ID data 2 000 041

DVICE: Customer ID data 3 000 042

DVICE: Customer ID data 4 000 043

DVICE: Customer ID data 5 000 044

DVICE: Customer ID data 6 000 045

DVICE: Customer ID data 7 000 046

DVICE: Customer ID data 8 000 047

Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-3

7 Settings
(continued)

DVICE: Location 001 201

Reference input for the device’s location as selected by user.

DVICE: Device ID 000 035

ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Substation ID 000 036

ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Feeder ID 000 037

ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Device password 1 000 048

DVICE: Device password 2 000 049

ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: SW version DHMI 002 131

DVICE: SW version DHMI DM 002 132

Internal software version numbers.

Local control panel LOC: Local HMI exists 221 099

When set to 'Yes' it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).

7-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

7.1.2 Configuration Parameters

Local control panel LOC: Language 003 020

Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.

LOC: Decimal delimiter 003 021

Character to be used as decimal separator on the local control panel.

LOC: Password 003 035

The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is given
in Chapter 6.
LOC: Password L/R 221 040

The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is given
in Chapter 6.
LOC: Displ. ext.dev.desig 221 032 Fig. 3-2

This setting defines whether the external device designations shall be

displayed on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Display L/R 221 070 Fig. 3-2

This setting defines whether the control site – local or remote – shall be
displayed on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Displ. interl. stat. 221 071 Fig. 3-2

This setting defines whether the "Locked" or "Unlocked" status shall be

displayed on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Designation busbar 1 221 033 Fig. 3-2
LOC: Designation busbar 2 221 034 Fig. 3-2
LOC: Designation busbar 3 221 043 Fig. 3-2

Setting for the busbar designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel.

LOC: Designat. bus sect.1 221 035 Fig. 3-2
LOC: Designat. bus sect.2 221 036 Fig. 3-2

Setting for the busbar section designations to be displayed on the Bay

Panel.
LOC: Character set 221 038 Fig. 3-2

The user can choose between several character sets to represent

switchgear and their switching states on the Bay Panel. The symbols
assigned to the character sets are shown in Chapter 6: Local Control Panel.

Note: Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in the factory

default setting, but can be replaced by an user-defined character
set, by applying an accessory tool to the operating program.
LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key 225 208 Fig. 3-3

This setting determines whether the switching (using either the L/R key or
the key switch) is between local and remote control (L↔R) or between
local+remote and local control (R&L↔L).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-5

7 Settings
(continued)

LOC: Assignment reset key 005 251 Fig. 3-82

Selection of specified counters or event logs that are reset by pressing the
RESET key on the local control panel.
LOC: Assignment read key 080 110 Page: 3-10

Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is
pressed.
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 030 238 Page: 3-10,
3-121
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2 030 239

Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by

repeated reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
LOC: Fct. Operation Panel 053 007 Fig. 3-4

Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also

referred to as the Operation Panel.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel 053 005 Fig. 3-7

Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.

LOC: Fct. Grd.Fault Panel 053 004 Fig. 3-6

Definition of the values to be displayed on the Ground Fault Panel.

LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003 Fig. 3-5

Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.

LOC: Fct. Signal Panel 221 072

Definition of the values to be displayed on the Signal Panel.

LOC: Aut.activ.Sign.Panel 221 073

Activation of the automatic switching to the Signal Panel at every change of

state of a configured signal.
LOC: Stat.ind.Sign.Panel 221 074

Definition of display type of active / inactive signals on the Signal Panel.

LOC: Indicat.Sign.Panel 221 075

Definition of signal type at change of state and response to an acknowledge

command.
LOC: Sign.caus.Sign.Panel 221 078

Definition of cause for signaling (every change of state / incoming signals

only).
LOC: Fct.asg. num. displ. 221 041 Fig. 3-2

Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in

numerical form.

7-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

LOC: Fct. asg. bar displ. 221 042 Fig. 3-2

Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in bar

form.
Note:
Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected for
display as numerical measured values. However, not all measured values
that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart
form! In such cases, a dummy or placeholder must be included in the
selection list for the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured
value that cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list
for numerical measured values.

Example:
Current IB is to be displayed. In this case, either the primary current IB or
the per-unit current IB shall be selected for the numerical display. The per-
unit current IB shall be entered at the same position in the selection list for
the bar chart display.
LOC: Bar display type 221 039 Fig. 3-2

Disablion of the bar chart display or definition of the orientation of the bar
chart to display measured values on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Scal. bar display I 221 044 Fig. 3-2

Scaling of measured current values to be displayed in bar chart form.

LOC: Scal. bar display V 221 045 Fig. 3-2

Scaling of measured voltage values to be displayed in bar chart form.

LOC: Display bar scale 221 046 Fig. 3-2

Setting this window can disable the scalable bar chart.

LOC: Hold-time for Panels 031 075 Fig. 3-4

Setting for the time period for which a panel is displayed before the unit
switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected for display than can be shown on the LCD display.
LOC: Autom. return time 003 014 Fig. 3-4

If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, the change-enabling function is disabled.
LOC: Return time select. 221 030 Fig. 3-2

If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
LOC: Return time illumin. 003 023

If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-7

7 Settings
(continued)

PC link PC: Name of manufacturer 003 183 Fig. 3-8

Setting for the manufacturer's name.

Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
PC: Bay address 003 068 Fig. 3-8

PC: Device address 003 069 Fig. 3-8

Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in

communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC: Baud rate 003 081 Fig. 3-8

Baud rate of the PC interface.

PC: Parity bit 003 181 Fig. 3-8

Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P439.
PC: Spontan. sig. enable 003 187 Fig. 3-8

Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.

PC: Select. spontan.sig. 003 189

Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.

PC: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 084 Fig. 3-8

Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 185 Fig. 3-8

Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the PC interface.
PC: Delta V 003 055 Fig. 3-8

A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta I 003 056 Fig. 3-8

A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta P 003 059 Fig. 3-8

The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta f 003 057 Fig. 3-8

The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs

by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 155 Fig. 3-8

The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta

quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta t 003 058 Fig. 3-8

All measured data are transmitted again through the PC interface after this
time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
PC: Time-out 003 188 Fig. 3-8

Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module B.

7-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

Communication interface 1 COMM1: Function group COMM1 056 026

Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM1: General enable USER 003 170 Fig: 3-10,
3-11, 3-12,
3-13, 3-14,
3-15
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.
COMM1: Basic IEC870-5 enabl 003 215 Fig. 3-9

Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.

COMM1: Addit. -101 enable 003 216 Fig. 3-9

Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1: Addit. ILS enable 003 217 Fig. 3-9

Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS enable 003 220 Fig. 3-9

Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.

COMM1: DNP3 enable 003 231 Fig. 3-9

Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.

COMM1: COURIER enable 103 040 Fig. 3-9

Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Communicat. protocol 003 167 Fig. 3-9

Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
COMM1: -103 prot. variant 003 178 Fig. 3-10

The user may select either the ALSTOM D or the VDEW variant of the 103
protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant 003 214 Fig. 3-13

The user may select either the ALSTOM D or the ALSTOM variant of the
MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-9

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: Line idle state 003 165 Fig: 3-10,

3-11,3-12,
3-13,3-14,
3-15
Setting for the line idle state indication.
COMM1: Baud rate 003 071 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12,
3-13,3-14,
3-15
Baud rate of the communication interface.
COMM1: Parity bit 003 171 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12,
3-13,3-14,
3-15
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P439.
COMM1: Dead time monitoring 003 176 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12,
3-13,3-14,
3-15
The P439 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Mon. time polling 003 202 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12,
3-13,3-14,
3-15
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM1: Octet comm. address 003 072 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12,
3-13,3-14,
3-15
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note: The former designation for C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m .
a d d r e s s was: I L S A : B a y a d d r e s s
COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 003 240 Fig. 3-14

In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The
address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s is the lower-order octet of
the DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Test monitor on 003 166 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12,
3-13,3-14,
3-15
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.

7-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: Name of manufacturer 003 161 Fig: 3-10,

3-11,3-12
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility. This setting
is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet address ASDU 003 073 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
The former designation for C O M M 1 : O c te t a d d r e s s A S D U :
I L S A : Device address.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable 003 177 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. 003 179 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication
interface 1.
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 074 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the
communication interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 175 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the communication interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta V 003 050 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-11

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: Delta I 003 051 Fig: 3-10,

3-11,3-12
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta P 003 054 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta f 003 052 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 150 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta
quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t 003 053 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t (energy) 003 151 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted
via the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Contin. general scan 003 077 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
A continuous or background general scan means that the P439 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication
interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures
that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The
time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.

7-12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: Comm. address length 003 201 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the communication address length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Cause transm. length 003 192 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Address length ASDU 003 193 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit.
COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU 003 194 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification
of telegram structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit.
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj. 003 196 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the length of the address for information objects.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type 003 195 Fig. 3-11

Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be

reversed in the object address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Time tag length 003 198 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the time tag length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-13

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv. 003 190 Fig. 3-11

Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as

a single signal or double signal.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: ASDU2 conversion 003 191 Fig. 3-11

Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a

single signal or double signal.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Initializ. signal 003 199 Fig. 3-11

Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Balanced operation 003 226 Fig. 3-11

Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced

basis (full duplex operation).
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Direction bit 003 227 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Time-out interval 003 228 Fig. 3-11

Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.

7-14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds 003 210 Fig. 3-13

MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the

selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first command is given to the register no. 00301, the second
to the register no. 00302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig. 003 211 Fig. 3-13

MODBUS registers in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the

selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given to the register no. 10301, the second to the
register no. 10302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val. 003 212 Fig. 3-13

MODBUS registers in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the

selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the
register no. 30302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param. 003 213 Fig. 3-13

MODBUS registers in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the

selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first parameter is given to the register no. 40301, the second
to the register no. 40302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) 003 152 Fig. 3-13

All MODBUS registers are transmitted again via the communication

interface after this time has elapsed.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Autom.event confirm. 003 249 Fig. 3-13

Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master, in

order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay 003 241 Fig. 3-14

Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-15

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout 003 242 Fig. 3-14

Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode 003 243 Fig. 3-14

Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244 Fig. 3-14

Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Link Max. Retries 003 245 Fig. 3-14

Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout 003 246 Fig. 3-14

Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del. 003 247 Fig. 3-14

Time interval within which the slave cyclically requests time synchronization
from the master.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs 003 232 Fig. 3-14

Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs 003 233 Fig. 3-14

Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

7-16 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. count. 003 234 Fig. 3-14

Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 – binary counters.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp. 003 235 Fig. 3-14

Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp 003 236 Fig. 3-14

Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3) 003 250 Fig. 3-14

Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values

in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master
for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting
deadband'.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3) 003 248 Fig. 3-14

Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).

Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Command selection 103 042 Fig. 3-15

Selection of commands to be issued via the Courier protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Signal selection 103 043 Fig. 3-15

Selection of signals to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Meas. val. selection 103 044 Fig. 3-15

Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-17

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM1: Parameter selection 103 045 Fig. 3-15

Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) 103 046 Fig. 3-15

Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are
again transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.

Communication interface 2 COMM2: Function group COMM2 056 057

Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM2: General enable USER 103 170 Fig. 3-17

Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.

COMM2: Line idle state 103 165 Fig. 3-17

Setting for the line idle state indication.

COMM2: Baud rate 103 071 Fig. 3-17

Baud rate of the communication interface.

COMM2: Parity bit 103 171 Fig. 3-17

Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P439.
COMM2: Dead time monitoring 103 176 Fig. 3-17

The P439 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive

pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM2: Mon. time polling 103 202 Fig. 3-17

The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM2: Positive ackn. fault 103 203

It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively

after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
COMM2: Octet comm. address 103 072 Fig. 3-17

The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
COMM2: Name of manufacturer 103 161 Fig. 3-17

Setting for the name of the manufacturer.

Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.

7-18 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM2: Octet address ASDU 103 073 Fig. 3-17

The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable 103 177 Fig. 3-17

Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Select. spontan.sig. 103 179

Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication

interface 2.
COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 103 074 Fig. 3-17

Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the

communication interface.
COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel. 103 175 Fig. 3-17

Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the communication interface.
COMM2: Delta V 103 050 Fig. 3-17

A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta I 103 051 Fig. 3-17

A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta P 103 054 Fig. 3-17

The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta f 103 052 Fig. 3-17

The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication

interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 103 150 Fig. 3-17

The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta

quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta t 103 053 Fig. 3-17

All measured data are transmitted again through the communication

interface after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has
not been triggered by the other delta conditions.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-19

7 Settings
(continued)

Communication interface 3 COMM3: Function group COMM3 056 058

Cancelling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration.

This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM3: General enable USER 120 030

Disabling or enabling communication interface 3.

COMM3: Baud rate 120 038 Page: 3-25

Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the teleprotection
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
COMM3: Source address 120 031 Page: 3-25

Address for send signals.

COMM3: Receiving address 120 032 Page: 3-25

Address for receive signals.

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 1 121 001 Page: 3-25
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 2 121 003

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 3 121 005

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 4 121 007

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 5 121 009

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 6 121 011

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 7 121 013

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 8 121 015

Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 1 120 001 Page: 3-25
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 2 120 004

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 3 120 007

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 4 120 010

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 5 120 013

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 6 120 016

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 7 120 019

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 8 120 022

Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 1 120 002 Page: 3-26

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 2 120 005

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 3 120 008

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 4 120 011

Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 1 to 4 (single-bit transmission).
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 5 120 014

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 6 120 017

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 7 120 020

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 8 120 023

Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 5 to 8 (bit-pair transmission).

7-20 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM3: Default value rec. 1 120 060 Page: 3-27

COMM3: Default value rec. 2 120 061

COMM3: Default value rec. 3 120 062

COMM3: Default value rec. 4 120 063

COMM3: Default value rec. 5 120 064

COMM3: Default value rec. 6 120 065

COMM3: Default value rec. 7 120 066

COMM3: Default value rec. 8 120 067

Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.

COMM3: Time-out comm.fault 120 033 Fig: 3-20,
Page: 3-27
This timer triggers the alarm signals C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a ti o n s fa u l t
and SF M O N : C o m m u n i c .fa u l t C O M M 3 and sets the received signals
to their user-defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has
elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
COMM3: Sig.asg. comm.fault 120 034 Page: 3-27

Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the
corresponding PSIG input signal.
COMM3: Time-out link fail. 120 035 Fig: 3-20,
Page: 3-27
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this
timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals C O M M 3 : C o m m . l i n k fa i l u r e
and SF M O N : C o m m .l i n k fa i l .C O M M 3 are raised. These can be
mapped to give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that
maintenance attention is required.
COMM3: Limit telegr. errors 120 036 Page: 3-29

Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted

before an alarm is raised (COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. and SFMON:
L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . ) . When this threshold is exceeded, the receive
signals are set to their user-defined default values.

IRIG-B IRIGB: Function group IRIGB 056 072

Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
IRIGB: General enable USER 023 200 Fig. 3-22

Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-21

7 Settings
(continued)

IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Function group GSSE 056 060

Status Events
Cancelling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
only active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if
the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device
off-line/on-line.
GSSE: General enable USER 104 049

Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.

GSSE: Min. cycle 104 052 Page: 3-37

Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition
cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with
this formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state
change of a GSSE bit pair.
GSSE: Max. cycle 104 053 Page: 3-37

Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated
value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max.
value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
GSSE: Increment 104 054 Page: 3-37

Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see Min. cycle.
GSSE: Operating mode 104 055

In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC

address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed.
In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices
have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have
logged-on successfully, are read and processed.

7-22 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GSSE: Output 1 bit pair 104 101 Page: 3-37

GSSE: Output 2 bit pair 104 104

GSSE: Output 3 bit pair 104 107

GSSE: Output 4 bit pair 104 110

GSSE: Output 5 bit pair 104 113

GSSE: Output 6 bit pair 104 116

GSSE: Output 7 bit pair 104 119

GSSE: Output 8 bit pair 104 122

GSSE: Output 9 bit pair 104 125

GSSE: Output 10 bit pair 104 128

GSSE: Output 11 bit pair 104 131

GSSE: Output 12 bit pair 104 134

GSSE: Output 13 bit pair 104 137

GSSE: Output 14 bit pair 104 140

GSSE: Output 15 bit pair 104 143

GSSE: Output 16 bit pair 104 146

GSSE: Output 17 bit pair 104 149

GSSE: Output 18 bit pair 104 152

GSSE: Output 19 bit pair 104 155

GSSE: Output 20 bit pair 104 158

GSSE: Output 21 bit pair 104 161

GSSE: Output 22 bit pair 104 164

GSSE: Output 23 bit pair 104 167

GSSE: Output 24 bit pair 104 170

GSSE: Output 25 bit pair 104 173

GSSE: Output 26 bit pair 104 176

GSSE: Output 27 bit pair 104 179

GSSE: Output 28 bit pair 104 182

GSSE: Output 29 bit pair 104 185

GSSE: Output 30 bit pair 104 188

GSSE: Output 31 bit pair 104 191

GSSE: Output 32 bit pair 104 194

Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual
GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted
consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are
used by this device (IED) during a send operation.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-23

7 Settings
(continued)

GSSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 104 102 Page: 3-37

GSSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 104 105

GSSE: Output 3 fct.assig. 104 108

GSSE: Output 4 fct.assig. 104 111

GSSE: Output 5 fct.assig. 104 114

GSSE: Output 6 fct.assig. 104 117

GSSE: Output 7 fct.assig. 104 120

GSSE: Output 8 fct.assig. 104 123

GSSE: Output 9 fct.assig. 104 126

GSSE: Output 10 fct.assig. 104 129

GSSE: Output 11 fct.assig. 104 132

GSSE: Output 12 fct.assig. 104 135

GSSE: Output 13 fct.assig. 104 138

GSSE: Output 14 fct.assig. 104 141

GSSE: Output 15 fct.assig. 104 144

GSSE: Output 16 fct.assig. 104 147

GSSE: Output 17 fct.assig. 104 150

GSSE: Output 18 fct.assig. 104 153

GSSE: Output 19 fct.assig. 104 156

GSSE: Output 20 fct.assig. 104 159

GSSE: Output 21 fct.assig. 104 162

GSSE: Output 22 fct.assig. 104 165

GSSE: Output 23 fct.assig. 104 168

GSSE: Output 24 fct.assig. 104 171

GSSE: Output 25 fct.assig. 104 174

GSSE: Output 26 fct.assig. 104 177

GSSE: Output 27 fct.assig. 104 180

GSSE: Output 28 fct.assig. 104 183

GSSE: Output 29 fct.assig. 104 186

GSSE: Output 30 fct.assig. 104 189

GSSE: Output 31 fct.assig. 104 192

GSSE: Output 32 fct.assig. 104 195

Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as
configured above.

7-24 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GSSE: Input 1 bit pair 105 001 Page: 3-37

GSSE: Input 2 bit pair 105 006

GSSE: Input 3 bit pair 105 011

GSSE: Input 4 bit pair 105 016

GSSE: Input 5 bit pair 105 021

GSSE: Input 6 bit pair 105 026

GSSE: Input 7 bit pair 105 031

GSSE: Input 8 bit pair 105 036

GSSE: Input 9 bit pair 105 041

GSSE: Input 10 bit pair 105 046

GSSE: Input 11 bit pair 105 051

GSSE: Input 12 bit pair 105 056

GSSE: Input 13 bit pair 105 061

GSSE: Input 14 bit pair 105 066

GSSE: Input 15 bit pair 105 071

GSSE: Input 16 bit pair 105 076

GSSE: Input 17 bit pair 105 081

GSSE: Input 18 bit pair 105 086

GSSE: Input 19 bit pair 105 091

GSSE: Input 20 bit pair 105 096

GSSE: Input 21 bit pair 105 101

GSSE: Input 22 bit pair 105 106

GSSE: Input 23 bit pair 105 111

GSSE: Input 24 bit pair 105 116

GSSE: Input 25 bit pair 105 121

GSSE: Input 26 bit pair 105 126

GSSE: Input 27 bit pair 105 131

GSSE: Input 28 bit pair 105 136

GSSE: Input 29 bit pair 105 141

GSSE: Input 30 bit pair 105 146

GSSE: Input 31 bit pair 105 151

GSSE: Input 32 bit pair 105 156

Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input.
A GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of
which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-25

7 Settings
(continued)

GSSE: Input 1 IED name 105 002 Page: 3-37

GSSE: Input 2 IED name 105 007

GSSE: Input 3 IED name 105 012

GSSE: Input 4 IED name 105 017

GSSE: Input 5 IED name 105 022

GSSE: Input 6 IED name 105 027

GSSE: Input 7 IED name 105 032

GSSE: Input 8 IED name 105 037

GSSE: Input 9 IED name 105 042

GSSE: Input 10 IED name 105 047

GSSE: Input 11 IED name 105 052

GSSE: Input 12 IED name 105 057

GSSE: Input 13 IED name 105 062

GSSE: Input 14 IED name 105 067

GSSE: Input 15 IED name 105 072

GSSE: Input 16 IED name 105 077

GSSE: Input 17 IED name 105 082

GSSE: Input 18 IED name 105 087

GSSE: Input 19 IED name 105 092

GSSE: Input 20 IED name 105 097

GSSE: Input 21 IED name 105 102

GSSE: Input 22 IED name 105 107

GSSE: Input 23 IED name 105 112

GSSE: Input 24 IED name 105 117

GSSE: Input 25 IED name 105 122

GSSE: Input 26 IED name 105 127

GSSE: Input 27 IED name 105 132

GSSE: Input 28 IED name 105 137

GSSE: Input 29 IED name 105 142

GSSE: Input 30 IED name 105 147

GSSE: Input 31 IED name 105 152

GSSE: Input 32 IED name 105 157

IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.

7-26 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GSSE: Input 1 default 105 003

GSSE: Input 2 default 105 008

GSSE: Input 3 default 105 013

GSSE: Input 4 default 105 018

GSSE: Input 5 default 105 023

GSSE: Input 6 default 105 028

GSSE: Input 7 default 105 033

GSSE: Input 8 default 105 038

GSSE: Input 9 default 105 043

GSSE: Input 10 default 105 048

GSSE: Input 11 default 105 053

GSSE: Input 12 default 105 058

GSSE: Input 13 default 105 063

GSSE: Input 14 default 105 068

GSSE: Input 15 default 105 073

GSSE: Input 16 default 105 078

GSSE: Input 17 default 105 083

GSSE: Input 18 default 105 088

GSSE: Input 19 default 105 093

GSSE: Input 20 default 105 098

GSSE: Input 21 default 105 103

GSSE: Input 22 default 105 108

GSSE: Input 23 default 105 113

GSSE: Input 24 default 105 118

GSSE: Input 25 default 105 123

GSSE: Input 26 default 105 128

GSSE: Input 27 default 105 133

GSSE: Input 28 default 105 138

GSSE: Input 29 default 105 143

GSSE: Input 30 default 105 148

GSSE: Input 31 default 105 153

GSSE: Input 32 default 105 158

Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite
side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-27

7 Settings
(continued)

GSSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 105 004 Page: 3-37

GSSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 105 009

GSSE: Input 3 fct.assig. 105 014

GSSE: Input 4 fct.assig. 105 019

GSSE: Input 5 fct.assig. 105 024

GSSE: Input 6 fct.assig. 105 029

GSSE: Input 7 fct.assig. 105 034

GSSE: Input 8 fct.assig. 105 039

GSSE: Input 9 fct.assig. 105 044

GSSE: Input 10 fct.assig. 105 049

GSSE: Input 11 fct.assig. 105 054

GSSE: Input 12 fct.assig. 105 059

GSSE: Input 13 fct.assig. 105 064

GSSE: Input 14 fct.assig. 105 069

GSSE: Input 15 fct.assig. 105 074

GSSE: Input 16 fct.assig. 105 079

GSSE: Input 17 fct.assig. 105 084

GSSE: Input 18 fct.assig. 105 089

GSSE: Input 19 fct.assig. 105 094

GSSE: Input 20 fct.assig. 105 099

GSSE: Input 21 fct.assig. 105 104

GSSE: Input 22 fct.assig. 105 109

GSSE: Input 23 fct.assig. 105 114

GSSE: Input 24 fct.assig. 105 119

GSSE: Input 25 fct.assig. 105 124

GSSE: Input 26 fct.assig. 105 129

GSSE: Input 27 fct.assig. 105 134

GSSE: Input 28 fct.assig. 105 139

GSSE: Input 29 fct.assig. 105 144

GSSE: Input 30 fct.assig. 105 149

GSSE: Input 31 fct.assig. 105 154

GSSE: Input 32 fct.assig. 105 159

Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state

signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive
the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with
GSSE

7-28 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Function group IEC 056 059

Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
IEC: General enable USER 104 000

Enabling and disabling function group IEC.

IEC: Enable configuration 104 058 Page: 3-30,
3-34
This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain
consistency of all parameters in function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE,
they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this command is
sent to the device, the actual state of the previously changed parameter
setting of the three function groups is enabled in the communication data
model of the connected device. This function is carried out automatically
with the off-line/on-line switching of the device.
IEC: Ethernet media 104 056

Selecting the physical communication channel on the Ethernet module from

either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering
option) connection.
IEC: IED name 104 057

Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as
device identification in the IEC 61850 system; it is included in the Logical
Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous.
All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names.
IEC: TCP keep-alive timer 104 062

This defines a "heart-beat" time interval used to actively monitor a

communication link to a logged-on client.
IEC: IP address 104 001

IEC: IP address 1 104 002

IEC: IP address 2 104 003

IEC: IP address 3 104 004

IP address for the device (IED has server function).

Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
I E C : I P a d d r e s s . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: Subnet mask 104 005

IEC: Subnet mask 1 104 006

IEC: Subnet mask 2 104 007

IEC: Subnet mask 3 104 008

The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
I E C : S u b n e t m a s k . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-29

7 Settings
(continued)

IEC: Gateway address 104 011

IEC: Gateway address 1 104 012

IEC: Gateway address 2 104 013

IEC: Gateway address 3 104 014

This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway of a

communication link to a client outside of the local network.
Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
I E C : G a t e w a y a d d r e s s . The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: SNTP operating mode 104 200

Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to

Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server
transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each
device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization
signal after its own cycle time.
IEC: SNTP poll cycle time 104 201

Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode
is set to Request from Server.
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 104 202

IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 1 104 203

IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 2 104 204

IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 3 104 205

IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IEC : SN T P s e r ve r 1 IP. The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: SNTP server 2 IP 104 210

IEC: SNTP server 2 IP 1 104 211

IEC: SNTP server 2 IP 2 104 212

IEC: SNTP server 2 IP 3 104 213

IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IEC : SN T P s e r ve r 2 IP. The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: Diff. local time 104 206

Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation
(IED).
IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time 104 207

Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.

IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time 104 219

This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time

is wanted.

7-30 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

IEC: Dayl.sav.time start 104 220

IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d 104 221

IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m 104 222

These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t are the values 'first', 'second', 'third',
'fourth', and 'last'. For I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d the seven weekdays
are available so that for example a setting like "on the last Sunday in March"
may be used.
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + 104 223

This defines the time difference and the time of day (on the specific
changeover day) when the clock is to be switched to daylight saving time.
The time is given in the number of minutes after midnight, e.g. when the
clock changeover to 3:00 AM always occurs at 2:00 AM, then the value to
be entered at I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is 120 [minutes] and at
I E C : D i f f . d a y l . s a v . t i m e it is 60 [minutes].
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end 104 225

IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d 104 226

IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m 104 227

IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+ 104 228

This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover
from daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for
the clock changeover to daylight saving time.
IEC: Deadband value 104 051

Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control
Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. Should a change
occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value,
the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter
value is calculated according to this formula:
Step size measured value • setting IEC: Deadband value
IEC: Update Measurements 104 229

Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report

Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy.
IEC: Dead band IP 104 230

Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d I P
IEC: Dead band IN 104 231

Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d I N

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-31

7 Settings
(continued)

IEC: Dead band VPP 104 232

Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d V P P
IEC: Dead band VPG 104 233

Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead band VPG
IEC: Dead band f 104 234

Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d f
IEC: Dead band P 104 235

Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d P
IEC: Dead band phi 104 236

Setting to calculate the filter value for all φ Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the φ measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d p h i
IEC: Dead band Z 104 237

Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d Z
IEC: Dead band min/max 104 238

Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d m i n / m a x

7-32 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

IEC: Dead band ASC 104 239

Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d A S C
IEC: Dead band temp. 104 240

Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d t e m p .
IEC: Dead band 20mA 104 241

Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d b a n d 2 0 m A
IEC: Update cycle energy 104 060

Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB
transmission with setting to blocked!
IEC: DEV control model 221 081

Setting of which control model is to be used to control all external devices.

Suggested setting when performing switching operations at maximum
safety is SBO enh. Security (SBO = Select-Before-Operate).

Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Function group GOOSE 056 068 Page: 3-34
Substation Event
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
only active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if
the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device
off-line/on-line.
GOOSE: General enable USER 106 001 Page: 3-34

Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.

GOOSE: Multic. MAC address 106 003

Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving

clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard
according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE
may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the
number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE: Application ID 106 004 Fig. 3-21

Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-33

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Goose ID 106 002 Fig. 3-21

Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with
32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the
maximum of 10 monitored external devices
GOOSE: VLAN Identifier 106 006 Fig. 3-21

VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN
identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages,
if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC
addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the
network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE: VLAN Priority 106 007 Fig. 3-21

VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: DataSet Reference 106 008 Fig. 3-21

DataSet Reference of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: DataSet Cfg.Revision 106 009 Fig. 3-21

Display of the 'DataSet Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is

sent from this device (IED).

7-34 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 106 011 Fig. 3-21

GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 106 013 Fig. 3-21

GOOSE: Output 3 fct.assig. 106 015

GOOSE: Output 4 fct.assig. 106 017

GOOSE: Output 5 fct.assig. 106 019

GOOSE: Output 6 fct.assig. 106 021

GOOSE: Output 7 fct.assig. 106 023

GOOSE: Output 8 fct.assig. 106 025

GOOSE: Output 9 fct.assig. 106 027

GOOSE: Output 10 fct.assig. 106 029

GOOSE: Output 11 fct.assig. 106 031

GOOSE: Output 12 fct.assig. 106 033

GOOSE: Output 13 fct.assig. 106 035

GOOSE: Output 14 fct.assig. 106 037

GOOSE: Output 15 fct.assig. 106 039

GOOSE: Output 16 fct.assig. 106 041

GOOSE: Output 17 fct.assig. 106 043

GOOSE: Output 18 fct.assig. 106 045

GOOSE: Output 19 fct.assig. 106 047

GOOSE: Output 20 fct.assig. 106 049

GOOSE: Output 21 fct.assig. 106 051

GOOSE: Output 22 fct.assig. 106 053

GOOSE: Output 23 fct.assig. 106 055

GOOSE: Output 24 fct.assig. 106 057

GOOSE: Output 25 fct.assig. 106 059

GOOSE: Output 26 fct.assig. 106 061

GOOSE: Output 27 fct.assig. 106 063

GOOSE: Output 28 fct.assig. 106 065

GOOSE: Output 29 fct.assig. 106 067

GOOSE: Output 30 fct.assig. 106 069

GOOSE: Output 31 fct.assig. 106 071

GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig. 106 073 Fig. 3-21

Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured
Dataset of GOOSE.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-35

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID 107 000

GOOSE: Input 2 Applic. ID 107 010

GOOSE: Input 3 Applic. ID 107 020

GOOSE: Input 4 Applic. ID 107 030

GOOSE: Input 5 Applic. ID 107 040

GOOSE: Input 6 Applic. ID 107 050

GOOSE: Input 7 Applic. ID 107 060

GOOSE: Input 8 Applic. ID 107 070

GOOSE: Input 9 Applic. ID 107 080

GOOSE: Input 10 Applic. ID 107 090

GOOSE: Input 11 Applic. ID 107 100

GOOSE: Input 12 Applic. ID 107 110

GOOSE: Input 13 Applic. ID 107 120

GOOSE: Input 14 Applic. ID 107 130

GOOSE: Input 15 Applic. ID 107 140

GOOSE: Input 16 Applic. ID 107 150

Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for

the virtual binary GOOSE input.
GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID 107 001

GOOSE: Input 2 Goose ID 107 011

GOOSE: Input 3 Goose ID 107 021

GOOSE: Input 4 Goose ID 107 031

GOOSE: Input 5 Goose ID 107 041

GOOSE: Input 6 Goose ID 107 051

GOOSE: Input 7 Goose ID 107 061

GOOSE: Input 8 Goose ID 107 071

GOOSE: Input 9 Goose ID 107 081

GOOSE: Input 10 Goose ID 107 091

GOOSE: Input 11 Goose ID 107 101

GOOSE: Input 12 Goose ID 107 111

GOOSE: Input 13 Goose ID 107 121

GOOSE: Input 14 Goose ID 107 131

GOOSE: Input 15 Goose ID 107 141

GOOSE: Input 16 Goose ID 107 151

Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual binary GOOSE input.

7-36 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref 107 002

GOOSE: Input 2 DataSet Ref 107 012

GOOSE: Input 3 DataSet Ref 107 022

GOOSE: Input 4 DataSet Ref 107 032

GOOSE: Input 5 DataSet Ref 107 042

GOOSE: Input 6 DataSet Ref 107 052

GOOSE: Input 7 DataSet Ref 107 062

GOOSE: Input 8 DataSet Ref 107 072

GOOSE: Input 9 DataSet Ref 107 082

GOOSE: Input 10 DataSet Ref 107 092

GOOSE: Input 11 DataSet Ref 107 102

GOOSE: Input 12 DataSet Ref 107 112

GOOSE: Input 13 DataSet Ref 107 122

GOOSE: Input 14 DataSet Ref 107 132

GOOSE: Input 15 DataSet Ref 107 142

GOOSE: Input 16 DataSet Ref 107 152

'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device

(IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of
a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the
device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical
node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20
characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind 107 003

GOOSE: Input 2 DataObj Ind 107 013

GOOSE: Input 3 DataObj Ind 107 023

GOOSE: Input 4 DataObj Ind 107 033

GOOSE: Input 5 DataObj Ind 107 043

GOOSE: Input 6 DataObj Ind 107 053

GOOSE: Input 7 DataObj Ind 107 063

GOOSE: Input 8 DataObj Ind 107 073

GOOSE: Input 9 DataObj Ind 107 083

GOOSE: Input 10 DataObj Ind 107 093

GOOSE: Input 11 DataObj Ind 107 103

GOOSE: Input 12 DataObj Ind 107 113

GOOSE: Input 13 DataObj Ind 107 123

GOOSE: Input 14 DataObj Ind 107 133

GOOSE: Input 15 DataObj Ind 107 143

GOOSE: Input 16 DataObj Ind 107 153

Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index
indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-37

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind 107 004

GOOSE: Input 2 DatAttr Ind 107 014

GOOSE: Input 3 DatAttr Ind 107 024

GOOSE: Input 4 DatAttr Ind 107 034

GOOSE: Input 5 DatAttr Ind 107 044

GOOSE: Input 6 DatAttr Ind 107 054

GOOSE: Input 7 DatAttr Ind 107 064

GOOSE: Input 8 DatAttr Ind 107 074

GOOSE: Input 9 DatAttr Ind 107 084

GOOSE: Input 10 DatAttr Ind 107 094

GOOSE: Input 11 DatAttr Ind 107 104

GOOSE: Input 12 DatAttr Ind 107 114

GOOSE: Input 13 DatAttr Ind 107 124

GOOSE: Input 14 DatAttr Ind 107 134

GOOSE: Input 15 DatAttr Ind 107 144

GOOSE: Input 16 DatAttr Ind 107 154

Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index
indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Input 1 default 107 005 Page: 3-36

GOOSE: Input 2 default 107 015

GOOSE: Input 3 default 107 025

GOOSE: Input 4 default 107 035

GOOSE: Input 5 default 107 045

GOOSE: Input 6 default 107 055

GOOSE: Input 7 default 107 065

GOOSE: Input 8 default 107 075

GOOSE: Input 9 default 107 085

GOOSE: Input 10 default 107 095

GOOSE: Input 11 default 107 105

GOOSE: Input 12 default 107 115

GOOSE: Input 13 default 107 125

GOOSE: Input 14 default 107 135

GOOSE: Input 15 default 107 145

GOOSE: Input 16 default 107 155

Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the
opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.

7-38 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006 Page: 3-36

GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 107 016

GOOSE: Input 3 fct.assig. 107 026

GOOSE: Input 4 fct.assig. 107 036

GOOSE: Input 5 fct.assig. 107 046

GOOSE: Input 6 fct.assig. 107 056

GOOSE: Input 7 fct.assig. 107 066

GOOSE: Input 8 fct.assig. 107 076

GOOSE: Input 9 fct.assig. 107 086

GOOSE: Input 10 fct.assig. 107 096

GOOSE: Input 11 fct.assig. 107 106

GOOSE: Input 12 fct.assig. 107 116

GOOSE: Input 13 fct.assig. 107 126

GOOSE: Input 14 fct.assig. 107 136

GOOSE: Input 15 fct.assig. 107 146

GOOSE: Input 16 fct.assig. 107 156

Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical

state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will
receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was
received with the Dataset of GOOSE

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-39

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Applic. ID 108 000

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Applic. ID 108 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Applic. ID 108 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Applic. ID 108 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Applic. ID 108 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Applic. ID 108 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Applic. ID 108 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Applic. ID 108 070

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Applic. ID 108 080

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Applic. ID 108 090

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Applic. ID 108 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Applic. ID 108 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Applic. ID 108 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Applic. ID 108 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Applic. ID 108 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Applic. ID 108 150

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Applic. ID 110 000

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Applic. ID 110 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Applic. ID 110 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Applic. ID 110 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Applic. ID 110 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Applic. ID 110 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Applic. ID 110 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Applic. ID 110 066

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Applic. ID 110 080

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Applic. ID 110 090

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Applic. ID 110 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Applic. ID 110 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Applic. ID 110 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Applic. ID 110 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Applic. ID 110 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Applic. ID 110 150

Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for

the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.

7-40 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Goose ID 108 001

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Goose ID 108 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Goose ID 108 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Goose ID 108 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Goose ID 108 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Goose ID 108 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Goose ID 108 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Goose ID 108 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Goose ID 108 081

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Goose ID 108 091

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Goose ID 108 101

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Goose ID 108 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Goose ID 108 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Goose ID 108 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Goose ID 108 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Goose ID 108 151

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Goose ID 110 001

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Goose ID 110 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Goose ID 110 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Goose ID 110 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Goose ID 110 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Goose ID 110 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Goose ID 110 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Goose ID 110 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Goose ID 110 081

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Goose ID 110 091

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Goose ID 110 101

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Goose ID 110 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Goose ID 110 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Goose ID 110 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Goose ID 110 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Goose ID 110 151

Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
Virtual GOOSE inputs can be linked with interlocking equations of assigned
external devices.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-41

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataSetRef 108 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataSetRef 108 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataSetRef 108 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataSetRef 108 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataSetRef 108 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataSetRef 108 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataSetRef 108 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataSetRef 108 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataSetRef 108 082

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataSetRef 108 092

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataSetRef 108 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataSetRef 108 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataSetRef 108 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataSetRef 108 132

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataSetRef 108 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataSetRef 108 152

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataSetRef 110 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataSetRef 110 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataSetRef 110 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataSetRef 110 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataSetRef 110 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataSetRef 110 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataSetRef 110 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataSetRef 110 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataSetRef 110 082

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataSetRef 110 092

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataSetRef 110 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataSetRef 110 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataSetRef 110 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataSetRef 110 132

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataSetRef 110 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataSetRef 110 152

'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device

(IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an
external device. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters
including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on
the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data
attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first
20 characters are to be entered.

7-42 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataObjInd 108 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataObjInd 108 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataObjInd 108 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataObjInd 108 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataObjInd 108 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataObjInd 108 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataObjInd 108 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataObjInd 108 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataObjInd 108 083

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataObjInd 108 093

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataObjInd 108 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataObjInd 108 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataObjInd 108 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataObjInd 108 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataObjInd 108 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataObjInd 108 153

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataObjInd 110 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataObjInd 110 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataObjInd 110 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataObjInd 110 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataObjInd 110 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataObjInd 110 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataObjInd 110 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataObjInd 110 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataObjInd 110 083

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataObjInd 110 093

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataObjInd 110 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataObjInd 110 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataObjInd 110 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataObjInd 110 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataObjInd 110 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataObjInd 110 153

Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device. A data object index indicates which data object element
in the Dataset is to be evaluated.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-43

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatAttrInd 108 004

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DatAttrInd 108 014

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DatAttrInd 108 024

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DatAttrInd 108 034

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DatAttrInd 108 044

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DatAttrInd 108 054

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DatAttrInd 108 064

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DatAttrInd 108 074

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DatAttrInd 108 084

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DatAttrInd 108 094

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DatAttrInd 108 104

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DatAttrInd 108 114

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DatAttrInd 108 124

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DatAttrInd 108 134

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DatAttrInd 108 144

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DatAttrInd 108 154

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DatAttrInd 110 004

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DatAttrInd 110 014

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DatAttrInd 110 024

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DatAttrInd 110 034

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DatAttrInd 110 044

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DatAttrInd 110 054

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DatAttrInd 110 064

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DatAttrInd 110 074

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DatAttrInd 110 084

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DatAttrInd 110 094

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DatAttrInd 110 104

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DatAttrInd 110 114

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DatAttrInd 110 124

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DatAttrInd 110 134

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DatAttrInd 110 144

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DatAttrInd 110 154

Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device. A data object index indicates which data attribute
element in the data object is to be evaluated.

7-44 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 default 108 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 default 108 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 default 108 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 default 108 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 default 108 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 default 108 055

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 default 108 065

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 default 108 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 default 108 085

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 default 108 095

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 default 108 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 default 108 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 default 108 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 default 108 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 default 108 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 default 108 155

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 default 110 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 default 110 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 default 110 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 default 110 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 default 110 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 default 110 055

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 default 110 065

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 default 110 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 default 110 085

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 default 110 095

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 default 110 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 default 110 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 default 110 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 default 110 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 default 110 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 default 110 155

Default for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an
external device. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to
default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a
GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-45

7 Settings
(continued)

Binary input
The P439 has opto-coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The number and connection schemes for the available binary signal inputs are shown in
the terminal connection diagrams.

The P439 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this
slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are
automatically hidden in the menu tree.

When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be
assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several
control points having different signal voltages.

The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs U C01 to
U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. (Whether automatic
configuration occurs, is defined in the setting at M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O .)
Depending on the connection type chosen for the P439 – pin type or ring type cable
socket terminals – the symbolic slots A, B and C refer to the following slots:

Symbolic slot Pin type cable socket Ring type cable socket
terminals terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
C 08 16

The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type – in the case of auto-assignment – is
given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.

In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:

Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the binary inputs at slots A
and B as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for
functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there will be an
error message, and the new bay type will not be activated.

Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all binary inputs specified in
the List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the
device. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will
not be activated.

In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.

The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal.

7-46 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

INP: Fct. assignm. U 601 152 091 Fig: 3-23,

3-161, 3-200,
3-202, 3-292,
3-295, 3-296
INP: Fct. assignm. U 602 152 094

INP: Fct. assignm. U 603 152 097

INP: Fct. assignm. U 604 152 100

INP: Fct. assignm. U 605 152 103

INP: Fct. assignm. U 606 152 106

INP: Fct. assignm. U 701 152 109

INP: Fct. assignm. U 702 152 112

INP: Fct. assignm. U 703 152 115

INP: Fct. assignm. U 704 152 118

INP: Fct. assignm. U 705 152 121

INP: Fct. assignm. U 706 152 124

INP: Fct. assignm. U 801 184 002

INP: Fct. assignm. U 802 184 006

INP: Fct. assignm. U 803 184 010

INP: Fct. assignm. U 804 184 014

INP: Fct. assignm. U 805 184 018

INP: Fct. assignm. U 806 184 022

INP: Fct. assignm. U 807 184 026

INP: Fct. assignm. U 808 184 030

INP: Fct. assignm. U 809 184 034

INP: Fct. assignm. U 810 184 038

INP: Fct. assignm. U 811 184 042

INP: Fct. assignm. U 812 184 046

INP: Fct. assignm. U 813 184 050

INP: Fct. assignm. U 814 184 054

INP: Fct. assignm. U 815 184 058

INP: Fct. assignm. U 816 184 062

INP: Fct. assignm. U 817 184 066

INP: Fct. assignm. U 818 184 070

INP: Fct. assignm. U 819 184 074

INP: Fct. assignm. U 820 184 078

INP: Fct. assignm. U 821 184 082

INP: Fct. assignm. U 822 184 086

INP: Fct. assignm. U 823 184 090

INP: Fct. assignm. U 824 184 094

INP: Fct. assignm. U 901 152 145

INP: Fct. assignm. U 902 152 148

INP: Fct. assignm. U 903 152 151

INP: Fct. assignm. U 904 152 154

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1201 152 199

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1202 152 202

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1203 152 205

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1204 152 208

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1205 152 211

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1206 152 214

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1401 190 002

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1402 190 006

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1403 190 010

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1404 190 014

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-47

7 Settings
(continued)

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1405 190 018

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1406 190 022

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1601 192 002

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1602 192 006

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1603 192 010

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1604 192 014

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1605 192 018

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1606 192 022

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1607 192 026

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1608 192 030

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1609 192 034

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1610 192 038

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1611 192 042

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1612 192 046

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1613 192 050

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1614 192 054

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1615 192 058

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1616 192 062

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1617 192 066

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1618 192 070

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1619 192 074

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1620 192 078

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1621 192 082

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1622 192 086

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1623 192 090

INP: Fct. assignm. U 1624 192 094

INP: Fct. assignm. U 2001 153 087

INP: Fct. assignm. U 2002 153 090

INP: Fct. assignm. U 2003 153 093

INP: Fct. assignm. U 2004 153 096

Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.

INP: Oper. mode U 601 152 092 Fig. 3-23
INP: Oper. mode U 602 152 095

INP: Oper. mode U 603 152 098

INP: Oper. mode U 604 152 101

INP: Oper. mode U 605 152 104

INP: Oper. mode U 606 152 107

INP: Oper. mode U 701 152 110

INP: Oper. mode U 702 152 113

INP: Oper. mode U 703 152 116

INP: Oper. mode U 704 152 119

INP: Oper. mode U 705 152 122

INP: Oper. mode U 706 152 125

INP: Oper. mode U 801 184 003

INP: Oper. mode U 802 184 007

INP: Oper. mode U 803 184 011

INP: Oper. mode U 804 184 015

INP: Oper. mode U 805 184 019

INP: Oper. mode U 806 184 023

INP: Oper. mode U 807 184 027

INP: Oper. mode U 808 184 031

INP: Oper. mode U 809 184 035

7-48 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

INP: Oper. mode U 810 184 039

INP: Oper. mode U 811 184 043

INP: Oper. mode U 812 184 047

INP: Oper. mode U 813 184 051

INP: Oper. mode U 814 184 055

INP: Oper. mode U 815 184 059

INP: Oper. mode U 816 184 063

INP: Oper. mode U 817 184 067

INP: Oper. mode U 818 184 071

INP: Oper. mode U 819 184 075

INP: Oper. mode U 820 184 079

INP: Oper. mode U 821 184 083

INP: Oper. mode U 822 184 087

INP: Oper. mode U 823 184 091

INP: Oper. mode U 824 184 095

INP: Oper. mode U 901 152 146

INP: Oper. mode U 902 152 149

INP: Oper. mode U 903 152 152

INP: Oper. mode U 904 152 155

INP: Oper. mode U 1201 152 200

INP: Oper. mode U 1202 152 203

INP: Oper. mode U 1203 152 206

INP: Oper. mode U 1204 152 209

INP: Oper. mode U 1205 152 212

INP: Oper. mode U 1206 152 215

INP: Oper. mode U 1401 190 003

INP: Oper. mode U 1402 190 007

INP: Oper. mode U 1403 190 011

INP: Oper. mode U 1404 190 015

INP: Oper. mode U 1405 190 019

INP: Oper. mode U 1406 190 023

INP: Oper. mode U 1601 192 003

INP: Oper. mode U 1602 192 007

INP: Oper. mode U 1603 192 011

INP: Oper. mode U 1604 192 015

INP: Oper. mode U 1605 192 019

INP: Oper. mode U 1606 192 023

INP: Oper. mode U 1607 192 027

INP: Oper. mode U 1608 192 031

INP: Oper. mode U 1609 192 035

INP: Oper. mode U 1610 192 039

INP: Oper. mode U 1611 192 043

INP: Oper. mode U 1612 192 047

INP: Oper. mode U 1613 192 051

INP: Oper. mode U 1614 192 055

INP: Oper. mode U 1615 192 059

INP: Oper. mode U 1616 192 063

INP: Oper. mode U 1617 192 067

INP: Oper. mode U 1618 192 071

INP: Oper. mode U 1619 192 075

INP: Oper. mode U 1620 192 079

INP: Oper. mode U 1621 192 083

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-49

7 Settings
(continued)

INP: Oper. mode U 1622 192 087

INP: Oper. mode U 1623 192 091

INP: Oper. mode U 1624 192 095

INP: Oper. mode U 2001 153 088

INP: Oper. mode U 2002 153 091

INP: Oper. mode U 2003 153 094

INP: Oper. mode U 2004 153 097

Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.

Measured Data Input MEASI: Function group MEASI 056 030

Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
MEASI: General enable USER 011 100 Fig. 3-24

Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.

MEASI: Enable IDC p.u. 037 190 Fig. 3-27

Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P439 to
display a measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
MEASI: IDC< open circuit 037 191 Fig. 3-27

If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P439 will issue an ‘open
circuit’ signal.
MEASI: IDC 1 037 150 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 2 037 152 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 3 037 154 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 4 037 156 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 5 037 158 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 6 037 160 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 7 037 162 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 8 037 164 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 9 037 166 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 10 037 168 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 11 037 170 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 12 037 172 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 13 037 174 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 14 037 176 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 15 037 178 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 16 037 180 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 17 037 182 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 18 037 184 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 19 037 186 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC 20 037 188 Fig. 3-27

Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that
has been set accordingly.

7-50 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

MEASI: IDC,lin 1 037 151 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 2 037 153 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 3 037 155 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 4 037 157 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 5 037 159 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 6 037 161 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 7 037 163 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 8 037 165 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 9 037 167 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 10 037 169 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 11 037 171 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 12 037 173 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 13 037 175 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 14 037 177 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 15 037 179 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 16 037 181 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 17 037 183 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 18 037 185 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 19 037 187 Fig. 3-27

MEASI: IDC,lin 20 037 189 Fig. 3-27

Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1 037 192 Fig. 3-28

Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.

MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20 037 193 Fig. 3-28

Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-51

7 Settings
(continued)

Binary outputs
The P439 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection
schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.
The Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all
binary outputs.

The P439 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden
in the menu tree.

The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating of the
binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter 'Technical Data'). One signal can also be
assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of contact
multiplication.

Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B! (Whether
automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting at M A I N : A u t o -
a s s i g n m e n t I / O .) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P439 – pin type
or ring type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A and B correspond to the
following slots:

Symbolic slot Pin type cable socket Ring type cable socket
terminals terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14

The configuration of output relays for each bay type – in the case of auto-assignment –
is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.

In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:

Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays at slots A
and B are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.

Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all output relays specified in
the List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the
device. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will
not be activated.

An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode
or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For
output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines
when latching will be cancelled.

7-52 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 601 150 121 Fig. 3-338

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 602 150 124 Fig. 3-31
OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 603 150 127

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 604 150 130

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 605 150 133

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 606 150 136

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 701 150 145

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 702 150 148

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 703 150 151

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 704 150 154

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 705 150 157

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 706 150 160

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 801 150 169

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 802 150 172

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 901 150 193

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 902 150 196

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 903 150 199

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 904 150 202

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 905 150 205

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 906 150 208

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 907 150 211

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 908 150 214

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1001 150 217

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1002 150 220

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1003 150 223

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1004 150 226

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1005 150 229

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1006 150 232

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1201 151 009

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1202 151 012

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1203 151 015

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1204 151 018

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1205 151 021

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1206 151 024

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1401 169 002

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1402 169 006

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1403 169 010

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1404 169 014

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1405 169 018

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1406 169 022

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1601 171 002

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1602 171 006

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1801 173 002

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1802 173 006

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1803 173 010

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1804 173 014

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1805 173 018

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1806 173 022

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2001 151 201

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2002 151 204

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2003 151 207

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2004 151 210

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-53

7 Settings
(continued)

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2005 151 213

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2006 151 216

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2007 151 219

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 2008 151 222

Assignment of functions to output relays.

OUTP: Oper. mode K 601 150 122

OUTP: Oper. mode K 602 150 125

OUTP: Oper. mode K 603 150 128

OUTP: Oper. mode K 604 150 131

OUTP: Oper. mode K 605 150 134

OUTP: Oper. mode K 606 150 137

OUTP: Oper. mode K 701 150 146

OUTP: Oper. mode K 702 150 149

OUTP: Oper. mode K 703 150 152

OUTP: Oper. mode K 704 150 155

OUTP: Oper. mode K 705 150 158

OUTP: Oper. mode K 706 150 161

OUTP: Oper. mode K 801 150 170

OUTP: Oper. mode K 802 150 173

OUTP: Oper. mode K 901 150 194

OUTP: Oper. mode K 902 150 197

OUTP: Oper. mode K 903 150 200

OUTP: Oper. mode K 904 150 203

OUTP: Oper. mode K 905 150 206

OUTP: Oper. mode K 906 150 209

OUTP: Oper. mode K 907 150 212

OUTP: Oper. mode K 908 150 215

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1001 150 218

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1002 150 221

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1003 150 224

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1004 150 227

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1005 150 230

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1006 150 233

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1201 151 010

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1202 151 013

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1203 151 016

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1204 151 019

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1205 151 022

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1206 151 025

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1401 169 003

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1402 169 007

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1403 169 011

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1404 169 015

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1405 169 019

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1406 169 023

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1601 171 003

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1602 171 007

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1801 173 003

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1802 173 007

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1803 173 011

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1804 173 015

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1805 173 019

7-54 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

OUTP: Oper. mode K 1806 173 023

OUTP: Oper. mode K 2001 151 202

OUTP: Oper. mode K 2002 151 205

OUTP: Oper. mode K 2003 151 208

OUTP: Oper. mode K 2004 151 211

OUTP: Oper. mode K 2005 151 214

OUTP: Oper. mode K 2006 151 217

OUTP: Oper. mode K 2007 151 220

OUTP: Oper. mode K 2008 151 223

Selection of operating mode for output relays.

Measured Data Output MEASO: Function group MEASO 056 020

Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
MEASO: General enable USER 031 074 Fig. 3-32

Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.

MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD 053 002 Fig. 3-36

Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.

MEASO: Hold time output BCD 010 010 Fig. 3-36

Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD
form.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-55

7 Settings
(continued)

MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140 Fig. 3-36

MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value 037 142 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 037 143 Fig. 3-36

The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.

For measured values in the range "measured values to be issued" the output value
should change linearly with the measured value.
Measured values Range
Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2

Associated scaled measured values 0 ... 1

Measured values to be issued Range

Measured values to be issued Mx,min. ... Mx,max.

Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max

Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. BCD" ...

in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1

Display values Range

BCD display values "BCD-Out min. value" ...
for measured values in the range ... "BCD-Out max. value"
"measured values to be issued"

BCD display values "BCD-Out min. value"

for measured values = Mx,min.

BCD display values "BCD-Out max. value" ...

for measured values = Mx,max.

MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 053 000 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2 053 001

Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.

MEASO: Hold time output A-1 010 114 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Hold time output A-2 010 115

Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.

7-56 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 037 104 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2 037 110

Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to
be set is calculated according to the following formula:
M x,min
M x,scal,min =
M x,RL
where:
Mx,min : maximum transmitted value for the selected measured
value
M x,RL : range limit value of selected measured value
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 037 105 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2 037 111

Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point
of the characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the
following formula:
M x,knee
M x,scal,knee =
M x,RL
where:
M x,knee : knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured
value
M x,RL : range limit value of selected measured value

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-57

7 Settings
(continued)

MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 037 106 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2 037 112

After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax

(x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range
"measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic
has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.

Measured values Range

Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measured values 0 ... 1

Measured values to be issued Range

Measured values to be issued Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. Ax" ...
in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1

Knee point for characteristic Designation

Value for knee point Mx,knee
Scaled knee point value Mx,scaled,knee
Designation of this set value "Scaled knee val. Ax"
in the data model
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1

MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 037 107 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2 037 113

Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller
than or equal to the minimum measured value to be transmitted.
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 037 108 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2 037 114

Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is in the
knee point of the characteristic.

7-58 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 037 109 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2 037 115

Output values Designation in the data model

Output current range "An-Out min. val. Ax" ...
for measured values in the range ... "An-Out max. val. Ax"
"measured values to be issued"
Output current to be set "An-Out min. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,min.
Output current to be set "An-Out max. val. Ax" ...
for measured values = Mx,max.
Output current to be set "AnOut knee point Ax"
for measured values = Mx,knee

with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max : measured values to be issued
MEASO: Output value 1 037 120 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: Output value 2 037 121 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: Output value 3 037 122 Fig. 3-38

Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%,

can be issued.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-59

7 Settings
(continued)

LED indicators
The P439 has a total of 17 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. LED
indicator H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled "HEALTHY" and signals the operational
readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and H 3 are
not configurable either. H 2 is labeled "OUT OF SERVICE" and signals a blocking or
malfunction; H 3 is labeled "ALARM" and signals a warning alarm. LED indicator H 17
indicates that the user is in the "EDIT MODE".

An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode
('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and
in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode,
the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.

With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 – H 16), the red and green colors can be
independently assigned to functions. The third color, amber, is a combination of red and
green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator are simultaneously
present.

LED: Fct.assig. H 1 green 085 184 Fig. 3-39

Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.

The function M A I N : H e a l t h y is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H 2 yell. 085 001

Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.

The M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y function is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H 3 yell. 085 004

Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3.

The function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H17 red 085 185

Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 17.

The function L O C : E d i t m o d e i s permanently assigned.

7-60 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

LED: Fct.assig. H 4 red 085 007

LED: Fct.assig. H 4 green 085 057

LED: Fct.assig. H 5 red 085 010 Fig. 3-39

LED: Fct.assig. H 5 green 085 060

LED: Fct.assig. H 6 red 085 013

LED: Fct.assig. H 6 green 085 063

LED: Fct.assig. H 7 red 085 016

LED: Fct.assig. H 7 green 085 066

LED: Fct.assig. H 8 red 085 019

LED: Fct.assig. H 8 green 085 069

LED: Fct.assig. H 9 red 085 022

LED: Fct.assig. H 9 green 085 072

LED: Fct.assig. H10 red 085 025

LED: Fct.assig. H10 green 085 075

LED: Fct.assig. H11 red 085 028

LED: Fct.assig. H11 green 085 078

LED: Fct.assig. H12 rot 085 031

LED: Fct.assig. H12 green 085 081

LED: Fct.assig. H13 red 085 034

LED: Fct.assig. H13 green 085 084

LED: Fct.assig. H14 red 085 037

LED: Fct.assig. H14 green 085 087

LED: Fct.assig. H15 red 085 040

LED: Fct.assig. H15 green 085 090

LED: Fct.assig. H16 red 085 043

LED: Fct.assig. H16 green 085 093

Assignment of functions to LED indicators.

LED: Operating mode H 1 085 182 Fig. 3-39

The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.

LED: Operating mode H 2 085 002

The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.

LED: Operating mode H 3 085 005

The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.

LED: Operating mode H 17 085 183

The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.

LED: Operating mode H 4 085 008

LED: Operating mode H 5 085 011

LED: Operating mode H 6 085 014

LED: Operating mode H 7 085 017

LED: Operating mode H 8 085 020

LED: Operating mode H 9 085 023

LED: Operating mode H 10 085 026

LED: Operating mode H 11 085 029

LED: Operating mode H 12 085 032

LED: Operating mode H 13 085 035

LED: Operating mode H 14 085 038

LED: Operating mode H 15 085 041

LED: Operating mode H 16 085 044

Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-61

7 Settings
(continued)

Main function MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2 003 169 Fig. 3-83

Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication

channels.
MAIN: Type of bay 220 000 Fig. 3-43

Configuration of a bay type.

MAIN: Customized bay type 221 062 Fig. 3-43

If a user-specific (customized) bay type has been loaded, its bay type No.
will be displayed. If no customized bay type has been loaded, the number '0'
will be displayed.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync 103 210 Fig.*: 3-80

Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync 103 211 Fig.*: 3-80

Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by
the primary source after M AIN : T i m e s yn c . ti m e - o u t has elapsed.
MAIN: Time sync. time-out 103 212 Fig.*: 3-80

Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary

source.

Fault Recording FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 160 Fig.*: 3-107

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 161

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 3 035 162

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 4 035 163

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 5 035 164

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 6 035 165

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 7 035 166

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 8 035 167

FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 9 035 168

The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.

7-62 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

Canceling a protection
or control function
The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage system by
including the relevant protection or control functions in the device configuration and
cancelling all others (removing them from the device configuration).

The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection or control function:

The protection or control function in question must be disabled.

None of the functions of the protection or control function to be cancelled may be
assigned to a binary input.
None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to a binary
output or an LED indicator.
None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to other signals
by way of an ‘m out of n’ parameter.

The protection or control function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured value

belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: ‘LIMIT’).

Distance protection DIST: Function group DIST 056 014

Cancelling function group DIST or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Power swing blocking PSB: Function group PSB 056 001

Cancelling function group PSB or including it in the configuration.

If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCMON: Function group MCMON 056 015

Cancelling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Backup overcurrent-time BUOC: Function group BUOC 056 002

protection (Backup DTOC)

Cancelling function group BUOC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: Function group SOTF 056 003

Cancelling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Protective Signaling PSIG: Function group PSIG 056 004

Cancelling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-63

7 Settings
(continued)

Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: Function group ARC 056 005

Cancelling function group ARC or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Automatic Synchronism ASC: Function group ASC 056 006

Check
Cancelling function group ASC or including it in the configuration.
If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Function group DTOC 056 008

protection
Cancelling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: Function group IDMT 056 009

Protection
Cancelling function group IDMT or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: Function group GFDSS 056 012

Determination Using Steady-

State Values
Cancelling function group GFDSS or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Ground Fault Tripping GFTRP: Function group GFTRP 056 016

Cancelling function group GFTRP or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Ground Fault Protection GFSIG: Function group GFSIG 056 018

Signaling
Canceling function group GFSIG or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Transient ground fault TGFD: Function group TGFD 056 019

direction determination
Cancelling function group TGFD or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Function group THERM 056 023

Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

7-64 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Function group V<> 056 010

Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Function group f<> 056 033

Protection
Cancelling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Power Directional Protection P<>: Function group P<> 056 045

Cancelling function group P<> or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Function group CBF 056 007

Protection
Cancelling function group CBF or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Function group CBM 056 062

Cancelling function group CBM or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Function group LIMIT 056 025

Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC 056 017

Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.

External devices 01 to 10 DEV01: Function group DEV01 210 047

DEV02: Function group DEV02 210 097

DEV03: Function group DEV03 210 147

DEV04: Function group DEV04 210 197

DEV05: Function group DEV05 210 247

DEV06: Function group DEV06 211 047

DEV07: Function group DEV07 211 097

DEV08: Function group DEV08 211 147

DEV09: Function group DEV09 211 197

DEV10: Function group DEV10 211 247

Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV10 or including them in the

configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then
all associated settings and signals are hidden.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-65

7 Settings
(continued)

DEV01: Funct. type, signal 210 034

DEV02: Funct. type, signal 210 084

DEV03: Funct. type, signal 210 134

DEV04: Funct. type, signal 210 184

DEV05: Funct. type, signal 210 234

DEV06: Funct. type, signal 211 034

DEV07: Funct. type, signal 211 084

DEV08: Funct. type, signal 211 134

DEV09: Funct. type, signal 211 184

DEV10: Funct. type, signal 211 234

Setting for the function type of the signal.

Note:
This parameter is visible only when
C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035

DEV02: Inform. No., signal 210 085

DEV03: Inform. No., signal 210 135

DEV04: Inform. No., signal 210 185

DEV05: Inform. No., signal 210 235

DEV06: Inform. No., signal 211 035

DEV07: Inform. No., signal 211 085

DEV08: Inform. No., signal 211 135

DEV09: Inform. No., signal 211 185

DEV10: Inform. No., signal 211 235

Setting for the information number of the signal.

Note:
This parameter is visible only when
C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.

7-66 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DEV01: Funct. type, command 210 032

DEV02: Funct. type, command 210 082

DEV03: Funct. type, command 210 132

DEV04: Funct. type, command 210 182

DEV05: Funct. type, command 210 232

DEV06: Funct. type, command 211 032

DEV07: Funct. type, command 211 082

DEV08: Funct. type, command 211 132

DEV09: Funct. type, command 211 182

DEV10: Funct. type, command 211 232

Setting for the function type of the command.

Note: This parameter is visible only when

C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033

DEV02: Inform. No., command 210 083

DEV03: Inform. No., command 210 133

DEV04: Inform. No., command 210 183

DEV05: Inform. No., command 210 233

DEV06: Inform. No., command 211 033

DEV07: Inform. No., command 211 083

DEV08: Inform. No., command 211 133

DEV09: Inform. No., command 211 183

DEV10: Inform. No., command 211 233

Setting for the information number of the signal.

Note: This parameter is visible only when

C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-67

7 Settings
(continued)

Single-Pole Commands CMD_1: Function group CMD_1 249 252

Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
CMD_1: Command C001 config. 200 004 Fig. 3-338

CMD_1: Command C002 config. 200 009

CMD_1: Command C003 config. 200 014

CMD_1: Command C004 config. 200 019

CMD_1: Command C005 config. 200 024

CMD_1: Command C006 config. 200 029

CMD_1: Command C007 config. 200 034

CMD_1: Command C008 config. 200 039

CMD_1: Command C009 config. 200 044

CMD_1: Command C010 config. 200 049

CMD_1: Command C011 config. 200 054

CMD_1: Command C012 config. 200 059

CMD_1: Command C013 config. 200 064

CMD_1: Command C014 config. 200 069

CMD_1: Command C015 config. 200 074

CMD_1: Command C016 config. 200 079

CMD_1: Command C017 config. 200 084

CMD_1: Command C018 config. 200 089

CMD_1: Command C019 config. 200 094

CMD_1: Command C020 config. 200 099

CMD_1: Command C021 config. 200 104

CMD_1: Command C022 config. 200 109

CMD_1: Command C023 config. 200 114

CMD_1: Command C024 config. 200 119

CMD_1: Command C025 config. 200 124

CMD_1: Command C026 config. 200 129

Cancelling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration.

If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden.

Single-Pole Signals SIG_1: Function group SIG_1 249 250

Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

7-68 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

SIG_1: Signal S001 config. 226 007 Fig. 3-339

SIG_1: Signal S002 config. 226 015

SIG_1: Signal S003 config. 226 023

SIG_1: Signal S004 config. 226 031

SIG_1: Signal S005 config. 226 039

SIG_1: Signal S006 config. 226 047

SIG_1: Signal S007 config. 226 055

SIG_1: Signal S008 config. 226 063

SIG_1: Signal S009 config. 226 071

SIG_1: Signal S010 config. 226 079

SIG_1: Signal S011 config. 226 087

SIG_1: Signal S012 config. 226 095

SIG_1: Signal S013 config. 226 103

SIG_1: Signal S014 config. 226 111

SIG_1: Signal S015 config. 226 119

SIG_1: Signal S016 config. 226 127

SIG_1: Signal S017 config. 226 135

SIG_1: Signal S018 config. 226 143

SIG_1: Signal S019 config. 226 151

SIG_1: Signal S020 config. 226 159

SIG_1: Signal S021 config. 226 167

SIG_1: Signal S022 config. 226 175

SIG_1: Signal S023 config. 226 183

SIG_1: Signal S024 config. 226 191

SIG_1: Signal S025 config. 226 199

SIG_1: Signal S026 config. 226 207

SIG_1: Signal S027 config. 226 215

SIG_1: Signal S028 config. 226 223

SIG_1: Signal S029 config. 226 231

SIG_1: Signal S030 config. 226 239

SIG_1: Signal S031 config. 226 247

SIG_1: Signal S032 config. 226 255

SIG_1: Signal S033 config. 227 007

SIG_1: Signal S034 config. 227 015

SIG_1: Signal S035 config. 227 023

SIG_1: Signal S036 config. 227 031

SIG_1: Signal S037 config. 227 039

SIG_1: Signal S038 config. 227 047

SIG_1: Signal S039 config. 227 055

SIG_1: Signal S040 config. 227 063

Cancelling signals S001 to S040 or including them in the configuration.

If any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden.

Binary Counts COUNT: Function group COUNT 217 047

Canceling function group COUNT or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-69

7 Settings
(continued)

7.1.3 Function Parameters

7.1.3.1 Global

PC link PC: Command blocking 003 182 Fig. 3-8

When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected from the PC

interface.
PC: Sig./meas.val.block. 003 086 Fig. 3-8

When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.

Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. USER 003 172 Fig. 3-9

When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from

communication interface 1.
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER 003 076 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.

Communication interface 2 COMM2: Command block. USER 103 172 Fig. 3-17

When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from

communication interface 2.
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER 103 076 Fig. 3-17

When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.

Binary outputs OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER 021 014 Fig. 3-30

When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.

Main function MAIN: Device on-line 003 030 Fig. 3-57

Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can be changed

only when the device is switched to "offline", i.e. when protection is
disabled.
MAIN: Test mode USER 003 012 Fig. 3-84

When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom 010 030 Fig: 3-252, 3-
277
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
MAIN: Phase sequence 010 049 Fig: 3-45,
3-48, 3-122,
3-157, 3-158,
3-160, 3-215,
3-225, 3-234,
3-268
Setting for the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B.(Alternative terminology:
Setting for the rotary field's direction, either clockwise or anticlockwise.)

7-70 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

MAIN: Time tag 221 098 Page: 3-69

For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time
tag for the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse
edge is detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating
data memory are made in chronological order or not.
MAIN: Inom C.T. prim. 010 001 Fig: 3-45,
3-307
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim. 010 018 Fig. 3-46

Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. 010 002 Fig. 3-49

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. prim. 010 027 Fig. 3-50

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. prim. 010 100 Fig. 3-51

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Inom prim. NCIT 010 037

Setting for the primary nominal current of the non-conventional instrument

transformer (NCIT) for measurement of phase currents.
MAIN: IN,nom prim. NCIT 010 039

Setting for the primary nominal current of the NCIT for measurement of
residual current.
MAIN: Vnom prim. NCIT 010 038

Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the NCIT for measurement of
phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,1 NCIT 010 180

MAIN: Ph. err. VBG,1 NCIT 010 181

MAIN: Ph. err. VCG,1 NCIT 010 182

Setting for the phase error of the system transformer for each phase-to-
ground voltage in voltage measuring channel 1 of the NCIT.
MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,2 NCIT 010 192

MAIN: Ph.e.VBG/Vref,2 NCIT 010 193

MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,2 NCIT 010 194

Setting for the phase error of the system transformer for each phase-to-
ground voltage (or for the reference voltage Vref, with ASC activated) in
voltage measuring channel 2 of the NCIT.
MAIN: Channel select. NCIT 010 187

Activating voltage measuring channel 1 or 2 of the NCIT. The setting

'Without' (voltage measuring channel) is also possible.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-71

7 Settings
(continued)

MAIN: Inom device 010 003 Fig. 3-44

Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: IN,nom device 010 026 Fig. 3-44

Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: Dynamic range I 031 082 Fig: 3-52,
3-110
Setting for the dynamic range of the phase current transformers as used by
the P439.
'Highest range' dynamic range: IP = 100 Inom
'Sensitive range' dynamic range: IP = 25 Inom

Note: The lower the setting for dynamic range, the more accurately the
device will operate. However, make sure that the dynamic range
is set no lower than the maximum possible short-circuit current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. 010 009 Fig. 3-44

Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. sec. 010 028 Fig. 3-44

Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. sec. 031 052 Fig. 3-44

Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IP 010 004 Fig. 3-44

Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the

measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the
setting must be 'Standard', if the P439’s 'Forward' decision is to be in the
direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or –
given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’
decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IN 010 019 Fig. 3-44

The direction determination of the ground fault measuring systems is

governed by the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as
shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard', if the P439’s
'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the
connection direction is reversed or – given a connection scheme according
to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’ decision is to be in the busbar direction, then
the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
MAIN: Meas. direction P,Q 006 096 Fig. 3-52

This parameter allows inverting the sign for the following measured
operating values:
MAIN: Active power P prim. (004 050)
MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. (004 052)
MAIN: Active power P p.u. (004 051)
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. (004 053)

7-72 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP 011 030 Fig. 3-45

Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents
are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN 011 031 Fig. 3-46

Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the
measured operating value of the residual current is displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. V 011 032 Fig. 3-49

Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages,
and, if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. VNG 011 033 Fig. 3-50

Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the
measured operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is
displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. Vref 011 034 Fig. 3-51

Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the
measured operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic
synchronism check is displayed.
MAIN: Op. mode energy cnt. 010 138 Page: 3-86

Selection of the procedure to determine the active and reactive energy

output. 1st procedure: Data acquisition every 2s (approximately).
2nd procedure: Data acquisition every 100ms (approximately)
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del 010 113 Fig. 3-45

Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1 005 248 Fig. 3-82

Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 1 U S E R is enabled.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 2 005 249 Fig. 3-82

Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 2 U S E R is enabled.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1 021 021 Fig. 3-60

Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 1 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 2 021 022 Fig. 3-60

Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 2 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 2 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER 021 012 Fig. 3-73

Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1 021 001 Fig. 3-70

Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.

MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2 021 002 Fig. 3-70

Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 2.

MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1 021 003 Fig. 3-70

Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-73

7 Settings
(continued)

MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 2 021 004 Fig. 3-70

Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2.

MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1 021 023

Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.

MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 2 021 024

Specification as to whether trip command 2 should latch.

MAIN: Close cmd.pulse time 015 067 Fig. 3-63

Setting for the duration of the close command.

MAIN: tCB,close 000 032 Page: 3-286

This setting determines the CB close time. In slightly asynchronous power

systems, the CB close time is taken into account by the automatic
synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command. This is only
possible if setting A S C : A R w i t h t C B P S x = 'yes’ or A S C : M C w i t h
t C B P S x = 'yes’.
MAIN: RC inhib.by CB close 015 042 Fig. 3-63

This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as

soon as the "Circuit breaker closed" signal starts.
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB open 021 017 Fig. 3-305

Definition of the binary signal used by the P439 to evaluate the 'CB open'
position signal.
MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl. 221 057 Fig. 3-76

Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output

enable.
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1 221 200 Fig. 3-40
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 2 221 203

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 3 221 206

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 4 221 209

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 5 221 212

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 6 221 215

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 7 221 218

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 8 221 221

Setting for the debouncing time.

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1 221 201 Fig. 3-40
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.2 221 204

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.3 221 207

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.4 221 210

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.5 221 213

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.6 221 216

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.7 221 219

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.8 221 222

Setting for the chatter monitoring time.

7-74 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

MAIN: Change of state gr.1 221 202 Fig. 3-40

MAIN: Change of state gr.2 221 205

MAIN: Change of state gr.3 221 208

MAIN: Change of state gr.4 221 211

MAIN: Change of state gr.5 221 214

MAIN: Change of state gr.6 221 217

MAIN: Change of state gr.7 221 220

MAIN: Change of state gr.8 221 223

Setting for the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter
monitoring time before chatter suppression operates.
MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd. 221 230 Fig: 3-330,
3-338
Setting for the command duration for a long command.
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. 221 231 Fig: 3-330,
3-338
Setting for the command duration for a short command.
MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact 221 007 Fig. 3-76

Definition of the binary signal used to disable interlocking of control

commands for switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw. 221 008 Fig. 3-3

Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O 221 065 Fig. 3-43

When a bay type is selected the binary inputs and outputs, required to
control switchgear, are automatically configured with function assignments.
MAIN: Electrical control 221 061 Fig. 3-326

This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to
control switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control
MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv. 221 079 Page: 3-428

After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal "Sw. dev. interm. pos." already present and the status signal
continuously absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from
the respective binary inputs, will be issued. (See also "Processing status
signals from manually operated switchgear")
MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin. 221 063 Fig. 3-334

This setting determines if bay types, defined for direct motor control, can be
used together with external termination contacts to directly influence the
control process of motor driven switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping 221 010 Fig. 3-75

Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external

protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped 221 012 Fig. 3-75

Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form
the CB trip signal.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-75

7 Settings
(continued)

MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip 221 013 Fig. 3-75

Definition of the binary signal used by the P439 to signal the 'CB open'
position signal.
MAIN: Sig.assign. CB close 021 020 Fig. 3-62

Definition of the binary signal used by the P439 to signal the 'CB closed'
position signal.
MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext 221 050 Fig. 3-75

Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an

external device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext 221 024 Fig. 3-75

Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051 Fig. 3-64

MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052 Fig. 3-64

Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group

signal).
MAIN: Fct. assign. fault 021 031 Fig. 3-61

Selection of signals whose appearance will result in a ‘Blocked/faulty’ signal

and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled ‘OUT OF SERVICE’.
Signals that lead to a blocking of the device are not configurable and always
result in the above signal and indication.
MAIN: Rel.t. enab. man.cmd 003 088 Fig. 3-63

Setting for the reset time of the manual trip command enable.

Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via USER 003 100 Fig. 3-85

If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local

control panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting 'Yes'.
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER 003 060 Fig. 3-85

Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.

PSS: Keep time 003 063 Fig. 3-85

The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection
is carried out via binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected
from the local control panel shall apply.

Self-Monitoring SFMON: Fct. assign. warning 021 030 Fig. 3-86

Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals

'Warning (LED)' and 'Warning (relay)' and in the activation of the LED
indicator labeled 'ALARM'. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading
to a blocking of the device are not configurable. They always result in the
above signals and indication.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention 021 018 Page: 3-129

This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the

monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs.

7-76 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

Fault Recording FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger 003 085 Fig. 3-105

This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording and fault data
acquisition.
FT_RC: Pre-fault time 003 078 Fig. 3-107

Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before a fault occurs
(pre-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Post-fault time 003 079 Fig. 3-107

Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a
fault (post-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Max. recording time 003 075 Fig. 3-107

Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-77

7 Settings
(continued)

7.1.3.2 General Functions

Distance protection DIST: General enable USER 031 073 Fig. 3-108

Enabling or disabling the distance protection function.

DIST: CVT stabilization 010 031 Fig. 3-120

This setting defines whether distance protection will operate with or without
stabilization against transient transformation errors of capacitive voltage
transformers.

Power swing blocking PSB: General enable USER 014 050 Fig. 3-151

Disabling or enabling power swing blocking.

PSB: Operate value 014 054 Fig. 3-154

The threshold operate value setting for the blocking function is a

percentage. It reflects the change in apparent power over a sampling
interval as referred to the apparent power at the end of the sampling
interval.
PSB: Operating mode 014 091 Page: 3-221

This setting defines whether a power swing detection is based on

impedance variation (Delta Z) as an alternative to apparent power change
(Delta S).
PSB: Operate delay 014 052 Fig. 3-154

Setting for the operate delay.

PSB: Release delay 014 053 Fig. 3-154

Setting for the release delay (reset time).

PSB: Operate value, trip 014 059 Fig. 3-155

The threshold operate value setting for the power swing blocking is a
percentage. It reflects the change in apparent power over a sampling
interval as referred to the apparent power at the end of the sampling
interval.
PSB: Operate delay, trip 014 063 Fig. 3-155

Setting for the operate delay.

PSB: R 014 060 Fig. 3-152
PSB: X 014 061 Fig. 3-152
PSB: α 014 062 Fig. 3-152

Setting for the power swing polygon.

PSB: Fct. assign. block. 012 017 Fig. 3-154

Selection of the zones to be blocked if the blocking criterion is present.

PSB: Max. blocking time 014 055 Fig. 3-154

Time limit of the blocking effect.

PSB: Delta T 014 090 Page: 3-221

Setting of the timer stage for operating mode P S B : O p e r a t i n g m o d e =

Mode Delta Z.
PSB: IP> 014 058 Fig. 3-154

If the phase current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled

without time delay.

7-78 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

PSB: Ineg> 014 057 Fig. 3-154

If the negative-sequence current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is

cancelled without time delay.
PSB: IN> 014 056 Fig. 3-154

If the residual current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled

without time delay.

Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCMON: General enable USER 014 001 Fig. 3-157

Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.

MCMON: Current monitoring 014 006 Fig. 3-157

This setting defines whether the current-measuring circuits shall be

monitored.
MCMON: Ineg> 014 002 Fig. 3-157

Setting for the operate value Ineg> (permissible unbalance threshold in the
current-measuring circuit).
MCMON: Op. mode volt. mon. 014 007 Fig. 3-158

Selection of the monitoring mode in the voltage-measuring circuit.

MCMON: Operate delay 017 011 Fig. 3-158

Setting for the operate delay after which the Meas. circ. (V/I) faulty signals
will be issued.
MCMON: FF, V enabled USER 014 009 Fig. 3-159

Enabling or disabling the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function.

MCMON: Vpos<, FF 031 053 Fig. 3-159

Setting for the Vpos< operate value of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: Vneg>, FF 031 056 Fig. 3-159

Setting for the Vneg> operate value of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: Vneg<, FF 031 054 Fig. 3-160

Setting for the Vneg< operate value of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: Ineg>, FF 031 057 Fig. 3-159

Setting for the Ineg> operate value of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: Operate delay FF, V 031 058 Fig. 3-160

Setting for the operate delay of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: FF,Vref enabled USER 014 013 Fig. 3-161

Enabling or disabling the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function of the reference

voltage Vref.
MCMON: Oper. delay FF, Vref 014 012 Fig. 3-161

Setting for the time delay for "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference
voltage Vref.

Backup overcurrent-time BUOC: General enable USER 014 011 Fig. 3-162
protection (Backup DTOC)
Enabling or disabling BUOC protection
BUOC: Operating mode 014 000 Fig. 3-162

Setting for the BUOC protection operating mode.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-79

7 Settings
(continued)

Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: General enable USER 011 068 Fig. 3-163

Enabling or disabling the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.

SOTF: Operating mode 011 061 Fig. 3-163

The setting of the operating mode defines whether a general start shall
cause a trip while a timer stage is running ('Trip with starting') or if the
measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone
extension factor D IST : k z e H SR PSx ('Trip with overreach').
SOTF: Manual close timer 011 060 Fig. 3-163

Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.

Protective Signaling PSIG: General enable USER 015 004 Fig. 3-164

Enabling or disabling the protective signaling.

Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: General enable USER 015 060 Fig. 3-187

Enabling or disabling the auto-reclosing control.

Automatic Synchronism ASC: General enable USER 018 000 Fig. 3-200
Check
Enabling or disabling the automatic synchronism check.
ASC: Transm.cycle,meas.v. 101 212 Fig. 3-211

Cycle period for transmission of ASC measured values.

Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: General enable USER 031 068 Fig. 3-213
protection
Enabling or disabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.

Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: General enable USER 017 096 Fig. 3-224
Protection
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.

Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: General enable USER 016 060 Fig. 3-236

Determination Using Steady-

State Values
Enabling or disabling ground fault direction determination by steady-state
values.
GFDSS: Operating mode 016 090 Fig. 3-236

This setting specifies whether steady-state power evaluation or steady-state

current evaluation will be performed.

Ground Fault Tripping GFTRP: General enable USER 014 005 Fig. 3-250

Disabling and enabling ground fault protection signaling.

7-80 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

Ground Fault Protection GFSIG: General enable USER 016 078 Fig. 3-251
Signaling
Disabling or enabling ground fault protection signaling.
GFSIG: Operate delay 016 076 Fig. 3-251

Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal.

GFSIG: Send reset time 016 074 Fig. 3-251

Setting for the reset time of the send signal.

GFSIG: DC loop op. mode 016 077 Fig. 3-251

Setting for the send relay operating mode.

Transient ground fault TGFD: General enable USER 016 040 Fig. 3-252
direction determination
Enabling or disabling the transient ground fault direction determination.
TGFD: Evaluation VNG 016 048 Fig. 3-253

This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used

for evaluation: The displacement voltage from the open delta winding of a
voltage transformer assembly or the displacement voltage calculated from
the three phase-to-ground voltages.
TGFD: Measurem. direction 016 045 Fig. 3-254

The direction measurement of the transient ground fault direction

determination function depends on the connection of the measuring circuits.
If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be
'Standard', if the P43x’s 'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the
outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or – given a
connection scheme according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’ decision is to
be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
Note: The global setting at M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N does
not affect the direction determination feature of the transient
ground fault direction determination function.
TGFD: VNG> 016 041 Fig. 3-254

Setting for the neutral-point displacement voltage threshold.

TGFD: Operate delay 016 044 Fig. 3-254

Setting for for the operate delay.

TGFD: IN,p> 016 042 Fig. 3-254

Setting for the residual current threshold. A peak value is evaluated.

TGFD: Buffer time 016 043 Fig. 3-255

Setting for the signal buffer time for transient ground fault direction
determination.

Thermal Overload Protection THERM: General enable USER 022 050 Fig. 3-259

Enabling or disabling the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Operating mode 022 063 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection.

Time-Voltage Protection V<>: General enable USER 023 030 Fig. 3-264

Enabling or disabling the time-voltage protection function.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-81

7 Settings
(continued)

Over-/Underfrequency f<>: General enable USER 023 031 Fig. 3-273

Protection
Enabling or disabling the over-/underfrequency protection function.
f<>: Selection meas. volt 018 202 Fig. 3-274

Setting for the voltage that is used for frequency measurement.

f<>: Evaluation time 018 201 Fig. 3-275

Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
f<>: Undervolt. block. V< 018 200 Fig. 3-275

Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below
this threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.

Power Directional Protection P<>: General enable USER 014 220 Fig. 3-278

Enabling or disabling the power directional protection function.

Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: General enable USER 022 080 Fig. 3-292
Protection
Enabling or disabling the circuit breaker failure protection function.
CBF: Start with man. trip 022 154 Fig. 3-296

Setting that permit a manual trip signal to also be used as a start criterion.
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux. 022 159 Fig. 3-296

Selection of trip signals - assigned to Gen. trip command 1 - for which, in

addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated.
CBF: I> 022 160 Fig: 3-294,
3-296, 3-300,
3-301
Setting for the threshold to detect a break in current flow.
CBF: t1 3p 022 165 Fig. 3-297

Setting the 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.

CBF: t2 022 166 Fig. 3-297

Setting for the 2nd CBF timer stage.

CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t1 022 167 Fig. 3-297

Setting the 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t2 022 168 Fig. 3-297

Setting the 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t1 022 169 Fig. 3-297

The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t2 022 170 Fig. 3-297

The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.

7-82 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

CBF: Delay/starting trig. 022 155 Fig. 3-299

The signal C BF : T r i p s i g n a l is issued when this timer stage’s time

duration has elapsed.
CBF: Delay/fault beh. CB 022 171 Fig. 3-300

If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal
from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are
recognized through the current criterion (see section "Fault behind CB
protection").
CBF: Delay/CB sync.superv 022 172 Fig. 3-301

Setting for the time delay to bridge circuit breaker operate times during CB
synchronization supervision.

Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: General enable USER 022 010 Fig. 3-302

Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.

CBM: Blocking USER 022 150 Fig. 3-310

Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker monitoring during protection

injection testing.
CBM: Sig. asg. trip cmd. 022 152 Fig. 3-304

Using the setting for external devices the trip command issued by the
control function may be linked to the trip command 1 issued by the
protection by assigning the trip command issued by the control function by
this parameter.
CBM: Operating mode 022 007 Fig. 3-307

This setting defines starting criteria for circuit breaker monitoring. To

evaluate all trip commands issued by the protection device 'With trip cmd.
Only' must be selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands
the additional CB auxiliary contact 'CB sig. EXT or trip' is used.
CBM: Inom,CB 022 012 Fig. 3-307

Setting for the CB nominal current.

CBM: Perm. CB op. Inom,CB 022 013 Fig. 3-307

Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at nominal current.

CBM: Med. curr. Itrip,CB 022 014 Fig. 3-307

Setting for the average CB disconnection current.

Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.

CBM: Perm. CB op. Imed,CB 022 015 Fig. 3-307

Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at average disconnection

(ruptured) current.

Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.

CBM: Max. curr. Itrip,CB 022 016 Fig. 3-307

Setting for the maximum CB disconnection (ruptured) current.

CBM: Perm. CB op. Imax,CB 022 017 Fig. 3-307

Setting for the maximum number of CB operations permitted at maximum

CB disconnection (ruptured) current.
CBM: No. CB operations > 022 019 Fig. 3-309

Setting for the maximum number of mechanical CB switching operations.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-83

7 Settings
(continued)

CBM: Remain No. CB op. < 022 020 Fig. 3-308

Setting for the warning stage with the number of remaining CB operations at
CB nominal current.
CBM: ΣItrip> 022 022

Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection

(ruptured) current values.
CBM: ΣItrip**2> 022 081

Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection

(ruptured) current values to the second power.
CBM: ΣI*t> 022 096

Setting for the warning stage with the sum of the current-time integrals of
the CB disconnection (ruptured) current values
CBM: ΣI**2*t> 022 097

Setting for the warning stage with the sum of the squared current-time
integrals of the CB disconnection current values
CBM: Corr. acquis. time 022 018 Fig. 3-307

Correction of the time tolerances permissible for leading or lagging CB

auxiliary contacts.

Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: General enable USER 014 010 Fig. 3-315

Enabling or disabling the limit value monitoring function.

LIMIT: I> 014 004 Fig. 3-311

Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I>> 014 020 Fig. 3-311

Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI> 014 031 Fig. 3-311

Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI>> 014 032 Fig. 3-311

Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I< 014 021 Fig. 3-311

Setting for the operate value of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I<< 014 022 Fig. 3-311

Setting for the operate value of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI< 014 033 Fig. 3-311

Setting for the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI<< 014 034 Fig. 3-311

Setting for the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.

7-84 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

LIMIT: VPG> 014 023 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG>> 014 024 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG> 014 035 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG>> 014 036 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG< 014 025 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG<< 014 026 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG< 014 037 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG<< 014 038 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP> 014 027 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP>> 014 028 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP> 014 039 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP>> 014 040 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP< 014 029 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP<< 014 030 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP< 014 041 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-85

7 Settings
(continued)

LIMIT: tVPP<< 014 042 Fig. 3-312

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG> 014 043 Fig. 3-313

Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG>> 014 044 Fig. 3-313

Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG> 014 045 Fig. 3-313

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG>> 014 046 Fig. 3-313

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: Vref> 042 144 Fig. 3-315

Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V, i.e. ordering option Vnom
= 50 to 130 V {5 poles} for ASC).
LIMIT: Vref>> 042 145 Fig. 3-315

Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: tVref> 042 148 Fig. 3-315

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: tVref>> 042 149 Fig. 3-315

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: Vref< 042 146 Fig. 3-315

Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: Vref<< 042 147 Fig. 3-315

Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: tVref< 042 150 Fig. 3-315

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: tVref<< 042 151 Fig. 3-315

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: IDC,lin> 014 110 Fig. 3-314

Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>> 014 111 Fig. 3-314

Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.

7-86 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

LIMIT: tIDC,lin> 014 112 Fig. 3-314

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> 014 113 Fig. 3-314

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.

LIMIT: IDC,lin< 014 114 Fig. 3-314

Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin<< 014 115 Fig. 3-314

Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< 014 116 Fig. 3-314

Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< 014 117 Fig. 3-314

Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.

LIMIT: T> 014 100 Fig. 3-316

Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: T>> 014 101 Fig. 3-316

Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: tT> 014 103 Fig. 3-316

Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: tT>> 014 104 Fig. 3-316

Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: T< 014 105 Fig. 3-316

Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: T<< 014 106 Fig. 3-316

Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.

LIMIT: tT< 014 107 Fig. 3-316

Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: tT<< 014 108 Fig. 3-316

Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.

Logic LOGIC: General enable USER 031 099 Fig. 3-318

Enabling or disabling the logic function.

LOGIC: Set 1 USER 034 030 Fig: 3-317, 3-
324
LOGIC: Set 2 USER 034 031

LOGIC: Set 3 USER 034 032

LOGIC: Set 4 USER 034 033

LOGIC: Set 5 USER 034 034

LOGIC: Set 6 USER 034 035

LOGIC: Set 7 USER 034 036

LOGIC: Set 8 USER 034 037 Fig. 3-324

These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-87

7 Settings
(continued)

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 030 000 Fig. 3-318

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 030 004

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 030 008

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 030 012

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 030 016

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 030 020

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 030 024

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 030 028

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 030 032

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 10 030 036

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.11 030 040

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.12 030 044

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.13 030 048

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.14 030 052

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.15 030 056

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 16 030 060

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 17 030 064

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 18 030 068

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.19 030 072

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 20 030 076

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.21 030 080

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 22 030 084

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 23 030 088

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 24 030 092

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 25 030 096

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 26 031 000

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 27 031 004

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.28 031 008

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.29 031 012

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 30 031 016

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 31 031 020

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 32 031 024

These settings assign functions to the outputs.

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 030 001 Fig. 3-318
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2 030 005

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 3 030 009

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 4 030 013

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 5 030 017

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 6 030 021

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 7 030 025

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 8 030 029

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 9 030 033

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 10 030 037

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 11 030 041

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 12 030 045

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 13 030 049

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 14 030 053

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 15 030 057

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 16 030 061

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 17 030 065

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 18 030 069

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 19 030 073

7-88 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 20 030 077

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 21 030 081

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 22 030 085

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 23 030 089

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 24 030 093

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 25 030 097

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 26 031 001

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 27 031 005

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 28 031 009

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 29 031 013

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 30 031 017

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 31 031 021

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 32 031 025

These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 030 002 Fig. 3-318
LOGIC: Time t1 output 2 030 006

LOGIC: Time t1 output 3 030 010

LOGIC: Time t1 output 4 030 014

LOGIC: Time t1 output 5 030 018

LOGIC: Time t1 output 6 030 022

LOGIC: Time t1 output 7 030 026

LOGIC: Time t1 output 8 030 030

LOGIC: Time t1 output 9 030 034

LOGIC: Time t1 output 10 030 038

LOGIC: Time t1 output 11 030 042

LOGIC: Time t1 output 12 030 046

LOGIC: Time t1 output 13 030 050

LOGIC: Time t1 output 14 030 054

LOGIC: Time t1 output 15 030 058

LOGIC: Time t1 output 16 030 062

LOGIC: Time t1 output 17 030 066

LOGIC: Time t1 output 18 030 070

LOGIC: Time t1 output 19 030 074

LOGIC: Time t1 output 20 030 078

LOGIC: Time t1 output 21 030 082

LOGIC: Time t1 output 22 030 086

LOGIC: Time t1 output 23 030 090

LOGIC: Time t1 output 24 030 094

LOGIC: Time t1 output 25 030 098

LOGIC: Time t1 output 26 031 002

LOGIC: Time t1 output 27 031 006

LOGIC: Time t1 output 28 031 010

LOGIC: Time t1 output 29 031 014

LOGIC: Time t1 output 30 031 018

LOGIC: Time t1 output 31 031 022

LOGIC: Time t1 output 32 031 026

Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.

LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 030 003 Fig. 3-318
LOGIC: Time t2 output 2 030 007

LOGIC: Time t2 output 3 030 011

LOGIC: Time t2 output 4 030 015

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-89

7 Settings
(continued)

LOGIC: Time t2 output 5 030 019

LOGIC: Time t2 output 6 030 023

LOGIC: Time t2 output 7 030 027

LOGIC: Time t2 output 8 030 031

LOGIC: Time t2 output 9 030 035

LOGIC: Time t2 output 10 030 039

LOGIC: Time t2 output 11 030 043

LOGIC: Time t2 output 12 030 047

LOGIC: Time t2 output 13 030 051

LOGIC: Time t2 output 14 030 055

LOGIC: Time t2 output 15 030 059

LOGIC: Time t2 output 16 030 063

LOGIC: Time t2 output 17 030 067

LOGIC: Time t2 output 18 030 071

LOGIC: Time t2 output 19 030 075

LOGIC: Time t2 output 20 030 079

LOGIC: Time t2 output 21 030 083

LOGIC: Time t2 output 22 030 087

LOGIC: Time t2 output 23 030 091

LOGIC: Time t2 output 24 030 095

LOGIC: Time t2 output 25 030 099

LOGIC: Time t2 output 26 031 003

LOGIC: Time t2 output 27 031 007

LOGIC: Time t2 output 28 031 011

LOGIC: Time t2 output 29 031 015

LOGIC: Time t2 output 30 031 019

LOGIC: Time t2 output 31 031 023

LOGIC: Time t2 output 32 031 027

Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the ‘minimum time’ operating mode.
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1 044 000 Fig. 3-324
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2 044 002

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 3 044 004

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 4 044 006

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 5 044 008

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 6 044 010

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 7 044 012

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 8 044 014

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 9 044 016

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 10 044 018

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 11 044 020

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 12 044 022

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 13 044 024

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 14 044 026

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 15 044 028

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 16 044 030

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 17 044 032

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 18 044 034

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 19 044 036

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 20 044 038

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 21 044 040

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 22 044 042

7-90 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 23 044 044

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 24 044 046

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 25 044 048

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 26 044 050

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 27 044 052

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 28 044 054

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 29 044 056

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 30 044 058

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 31 044 060

LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 32 044 062

These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t) 044 001 Fig. 3-324

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t) 044 003

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 3(t) 044 005

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 4(t) 044 007

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 5(t) 044 009

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 6(t) 044 011

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 7(t) 044 013

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 8(t) 044 015

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 9(t) 044 017

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t) 044 019

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.11(t) 044 021

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.12(t) 044 023

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.13(t) 044 025

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.14(t) 044 027

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.15(t) 044 029

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.16(t) 044 031

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.17(t) 044 033

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.18(t) 044 035

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.19(t) 044 037

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.20(t) 044 039

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.21(t) 044 041

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.22(t) 044 043

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.23(t) 044 045

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.24(t) 044 047

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.25(t) 044 049

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.26(t) 044 051

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.27(t) 044 053

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.28(t) 044 055

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.29(t) 044 057

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.30(t) 044 059

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.31(t) 044 061

LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.32(t) 044 063

These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-91

7 Settings
(continued)

Single-Pole Commands CMD_1: Design. command C001 200 000

CMD_1: Design. command C002 200 005

CMD_1: Design. command C003 200 010

CMD_1: Design. command C004 200 015

CMD_1: Design. command C005 200 020

CMD_1: Design. command C006 200 025

CMD_1: Design. command C007 200 030

CMD_1: Design. command C008 200 035

CMD_1: Design. command C009 200 040

CMD_1: Design. command C010 200 045

CMD_1: Design. command C011 200 050

CMD_1: Design. command C012 200 055

CMD_1: Design. command C013 200 060

CMD_1: Design. command C014 200 065

CMD_1: Design. command C015 200 070

CMD_1: Design. command C016 200 075

CMD_1: Design. command C017 200 080

CMD_1: Design. command C018 200 085

CMD_1: Design. command C019 200 090

CMD_1: Design. command C020 200 095

CMD_1: Design. command C021 200 100

CMD_1: Design. command C022 200 105

CMD_1: Design. command C023 200 110

CMD_1: Design. command C024 200 115

CMD_1: Design. command C025 200 120

CMD_1: Design. command C026 200 125

Selection of the command designation.

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001 200 002 Fig. 3-338
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C002 200 007

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C003 200 012

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C004 200 017

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C005 200 022

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C006 200 027

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C007 200 032

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C008 200 037

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C009 200 042

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C010 200 047

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C011 200 052

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C012 200 057

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C013 200 062

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C014 200 067

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C015 200 072

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C016 200 077

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C017 200 082

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C018 200 087

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C019 200 092

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C020 200 097

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C021 200 102

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C022 200 107

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C023 200 112

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C024 200 117

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C025 200 122

7-92 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C026 200 127

Selection of the command operating mode.

Single-Pole Signals SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001 226 000

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S002 226 008

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S003 226 016

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S004 226 024

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S005 226 032

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S006 226 040

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S007 226 048

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S008 226 056

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S009 226 064

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S010 226 072

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S011 226 080

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S012 226 088

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S013 226 096

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S014 226 104

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S015 226 112

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S016 226 120

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S017 226 128

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S018 226 136

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S019 226 144

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S020 226 152

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S021 226 160

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S022 226 168

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S023 226 176

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S024 226 184

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S025 226 192

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S026 226 200

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S027 226 208

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S028 226 216

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S029 226 224

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S030 226 232

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S031 226 240

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S032 226 248

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S033 227 000

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S034 227 008

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S035 227 016

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S036 227 024

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S037 227 032

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S038 227 040

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S039 227 048

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S040 227 056

Selection of the signal designation.

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001 226 001 Fig. 3-339
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S002 226 009

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S003 226 017

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S004 226 025

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S005 226 033

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S006 226 041

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S007 226 049

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-93

7 Settings
(continued)

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S008 226 057

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S009 226 065

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S010 226 073

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S011 226 081

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S012 226 089

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S013 226 097

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S014 226 105

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S015 226 113

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S016 226 121

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S017 226 129

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S018 226 137

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S019 226 145

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S020 226 153

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S021 226 161

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S022 226 169

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S023 226 177

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S024 226 185

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S025 226 193

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S026 226 201

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S027 226 209

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S028 226 217

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S029 226 225

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S030 226 233

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S031 226 241

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S032 226 249

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S033 227 001

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S034 227 009

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S035 227 017

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S036 227 025

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S037 227 033

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S038 227 041

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S039 227 049

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S040 227 057

Selection of the signal operating mode.

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001 226 003 Fig. 3-339
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S002 226 011

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S003 226 019

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S004 226 027

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S005 226 035

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S006 226 043

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S007 226 051

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S008 226 059

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S009 226 067

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S010 226 075

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S011 226 083

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S012 226 091

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S013 226 099

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S014 226 107

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S015 226 115

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S016 226 123

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S017 226 131

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S018 226 139

7-94 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S019 226 147

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S020 226 155

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S021 226 163

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S022 226 171

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S023 226 179

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S024 226 187

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S025 226 195

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S026 226 203

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S027 226 211

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S028 226 219

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S029 226 227

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S030 226 235

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S031 226 243

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S032 226 251

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S033 227 003

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S034 227 011

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S035 227 019

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S036 227 027

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S037 227 035

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S038 227 043

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S039 227 051

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S040 227 059

Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001 226 002 Fig. 3-339
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S002 226 010

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S003 226 018

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S004 226 026

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S005 226 034

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S006 226 042

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S007 226 050

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S008 226 058

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S009 226 066

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S010 226 074

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S011 226 082

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S012 226 090

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S013 226 098

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S014 226 106

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S015 226 114

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S016 226 122

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S017 226 130

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S018 226 138

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S019 226 146

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S020 226 154

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S021 226 162

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S022 226 170

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S023 226 178

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S024 226 186

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S025 226 194

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S026 226 202

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S027 226 210

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S028 226 218

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S029 226 226

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-95

7 Settings
(continued)

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S030 226 234

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S031 226 242

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S032 226 250

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S033 227 002

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S034 227 010

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S035 227 018

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S036 227 026

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S037 227 034

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S038 227 042

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S039 227 050

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S040 227 058

The logic '1' signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the 'Start/end signal' mode.

Binary Counts COUNT: General enable USER 217 000 Fig. 3-341

Enabling or disabling the counting function.

COUNT: Debounce t. count. 1 217 160 Fig. 3-341

Setting for the debounce time of the binary signal to be counted.

COUNT: Cycle t.count transm 217 007 Fig. 3-341

Setting for the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.

7-96 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets

Main function MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx 010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078 Fig: 3-109,
3-110, 3-111,
3-112, 3-194,
3-208
The neutral-point treatment of the system must be set here.
MAIN: Ground starting PSx 001 249 001 250 001 251 002 001

Setting whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'-

linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds.
MAIN: Phase prio. 2pG PSx 010 041 001 082 001 083 001 084 Fig. 3-120

The selection of measured variables in the event of two-phase grounded

faults is a function of the set phase priority.
MAIN: Transfer for 1p PSx 010 040 001 079 001 080 001 081 Fig. 3-118

For single-phase overcurrent starting without ground starting, either ground

starting or another phase starting needs to be transfer-tripped. The user
may choose to always trip the ground starting function or - as a function of
current magnitude - to trip ground or phase starting. See the section
entitled Starting Logic in Chapter 3 for more information.
MAIN: Op. mode rush r. PSx 017 097 001 088 001 089 001 090 Fig. 3-58

Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.

MAIN: I> lift rush r. PSx 017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087 Fig. 3-58

Setting for the current threshold for disablion of inrush stabilization.

MAIN: Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx 017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093 Fig. 3-58

Setting for the operate value of inrush stabilization.

Fault Data Acquisition FT_DA: Line length PSx 010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008 Fig. 3-103

This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Line reactance PSx 010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015 Fig. 3-103

This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Start data acqu. PSx 010 011 010 042 010 043 010 044 Fig. 3-101

This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault
data should take place.
FT_DA: Outp. flt.locat. PSx 010 032 010 033 010 034 010 035 Fig. 3-101

Setting for the conditions under which a fault location output occurs.

Distance protection DIST: I>> PSx 010 054 010 074 010 094 011 014 Fig. 3-109

Setting for the operate value of overcurrent starting.

DIST: I> (Ibl) high r. PSx 010 068 010 088 011 008 011 028 Fig. 3-112

Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance

starting is enabled.
Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-97

7 Settings
(continued)

DIST: I> (Ibl) sens. r.PSx 010 119 010 120 010 121 010 122 Fig. 3-112

Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance

starting is enabled.
Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
DIST: Operat. mode V< PSx 010 067 010 087 011 007 011 027 Fig. 3-113

Operating mode setting for undervoltage starting.

DIST: V< PSx 010 069 010 089 011 009 011 029 Fig: 3-112, 3-
113
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage starting.
DIST: Operat. mode Z< PSx 010 066 010 086 011 006 011 026 Fig. 3-114

Operating mode setting for underimpedance starting.

DIST: Xfw PSx 010 050 010 070 010 090 011 010 Fig. 3-117

Setting for the reactance limit of underimpedance starting.

DIST: Rfw,PG PSx 010 051 010 071 010 091 011 011 Fig. 3-117

Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-

ground loops.
DIST: Rfw,PP PSx 010 052 010 072 010 092 011 012 Fig. 3-117

Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-

phase loops.
DIST: ß PSx 010 063 010 083 011 003 011 023 Fig. 3-117

Angle setting for load blinding during underimpedance starting.

DIST: Zfw,PG PSx 010 101 010 102 010 103 010 104 Fig. 3-117

Setting for the load-angle-independent limit of underimpedance starting for

phase-to-ground loops.
DIST: Zfw,PP PSx 010 105 010 106 010 107 010 108 Fig. 3-117

Setting for the load-angle-independent limit of underimpedance starting for

phase-to-phase loops.
DIST: Zbw/Zfw PSx 010 053 010 073 010 093 011 013 Fig. 3-117

Setting for the limit of underimpedance starting in the backward (reverse)

direction.
DIST: Z evaluation PSx 025 093 024 013 024 073 025 033 Fig. 3-117

This setting determines whether the P439 will carry out the starting
impedance calculation of the phase-to-ground loops using the phase
current corrected by the set ground factor or using twice the phase current.

Note: Calculation with twice the phase current may be necessary in

low-impedance-grounded networks in order to avoid inadvertent starting in
healthy lines as the result of the high ground fault current. Impedance is
calculated by the distance measuring system using solely the phase current
corrected by the set ground factor.
DIST: IN> high range PSx 010 055 010 075 010 095 011 015 Fig. 3-110

Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.

7-98 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DIST: IN> sens. range PSx 010 123 010 124 010 125 010 126 Fig. 3-110

Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
DIST: tIN> PSx 010 057 010 077 010 097 011 017 Fig. 3-110

In isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded systems, the operate delay tIN>

should be set so as to avoid erroneous ground starting resulting from
residual current flow due to switching phenomena related to phase-to-
ground capacitances.
Note: For single-pole ungrounded faults, starting proceeds does not
occur until tIN> has elapsed. tIN> should be set to at least 20 ms so that
transferred starting does not anticipate starting in another phase.
DIST: VNG> PSx 010 056 010 076 010 096 011 016 Fig. 3-110

Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG> of ground starting.
DIST: VNG>> PSx 010 062 010 082 011 002 011 022 Fig. 3-110

Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG>> of ground starting.
DIST: tVNG>> PSx 010 061 010 081 011 001 011 021 Fig. 3-110

Setting for the operate delay of the VNG>> trigger.

DIST: Characteristic PSx 012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097 Fig. 3-125

Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.

DIST: Op. mode zone 4 PSx 012 000 012 050 013 000 013 050 Fig: 3-135, 3-
136, 3-137,
3-140, 3-142,
3-144, 3-146,
3-148, 3-173
Zone 4 can be used as a special zone. This setting defines the use of
zone 4.
DIST: X1 (polygon) PSx 012 001 012 051 013 001 013 051 Fig. 3-133
DIST: X2 (polygon) PSx 012 002 012 052 013 002 013 052 Fig. 3-132
DIST: X3 (polygon) PSx 012 003 012 053 013 003 013 053 Fig. 3-132
DIST: X4 (polygon) PSx 012 004 012 054 013 004 013 054 Fig. 3-132
DIST: X5 (polygon) PSx 012 100 012 101 012 102 012 103 Fig. 3-132
DIST: X6 (polygon) PSx 012 104 012 105 012 106 012 107 Fig. 3-132

Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic (in secondary values).
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a special zone (see setting at
D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x ). This must be taken into
account when setting X4.
DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx 012 005 012 055 013 005 013 055 Fig. 3-133
DIST: R2,PG (polygon) PSx 012 007 012 057 013 007 013 057 Fig. 3-132
DIST: R3,PG (polygon) PSx 012 009 012 059 013 009 013 059 Fig. 3-132
DIST: R4,PG (polygon) PSx 012 011 012 061 013 011 013 061 Fig. 3-132
DIST: R5,PG (polygon) PSx 012 108 012 109 012 110 012 111 Fig. 3-132
DIST: R6,PG (polygon) PSx 012 116 012 117 012 118 012 119 Fig. 3-132

Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a special zone (see setting at
D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x ). This must be taken into
account when setting R4.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-99

7 Settings
(continued)

DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx 012 006 012 056 013 006 013 056 Fig. 3-133
DIST: R2,PP (polygon) PSx 012 008 012 058 013 008 013 058 Fig. 3-132
DIST: R3,PP (polygon) PSx 012 010 012 060 013 010 013 060 Fig. 3-132
DIST: R4,PP (polygon) PSx 012 012 012 062 013 012 013 062 Fig. 3-132
DIST: R5,PP (polygon) PSx 012 112 012 113 012 114 012 115 Fig. 3-132
DIST: R6,PP (polygon) PSx 012 120 012 121 012 122 012 123 Fig. 3-132

Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a special zone (see setting at
D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x ). This must be taken into
account when setting R4.
DIST: α1 (polygon) PSx 012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063 Fig. 3-133
DIST: α2 (polygon) PSx 012 014 012 064 013 014 013 064 Fig. 3-132
DIST: α3 (polygon) PSx 012 015 012 065 013 015 013 065 Fig. 3-132
DIST: α4 (polygon) PSx 012 016 012 066 013 016 013 066 Fig. 3-132
DIST: α5 (polygon) PSx 012 124 012 125 012 126 012 127 Fig. 3-132
DIST: α6 (polygon) PSx 012 128 012 129 012 130 012 131 Fig. 3-132

This setting defines the inclination of the limiting line of the tripping polygon
of impedance zones 1 to 6 in the R direction (resistance line).
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a special zone (see setting at
D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x ). This must be taken into
account when setting α4.
DIST: σ1 (polygon) PSx 072 086 073 086 074 086 075 086 Fig. 3-133
DIST: σ2 (polygon) PSx 072 087 073 087 074 087 075 087 Fig. 3-132
DIST: σ3 (polygon) PSx 072 088 073 088 074 088 075 088 Fig. 3-132
DIST: σ4 (polygon) PSx 072 089 073 089 074 089 075 089 Fig. 3-132
DIST: σ5 (polygon) PSx 012 156 012 157 012 158 012 159 Fig. 3-132
DIST: σ6 (polygon) PSx 012 160 012 161 012 162 012 163 Fig. 3-132

This setting defines the inclination of the limiting line of the tripping polygon
of impedance zones 1 to 4 in the X direction (reactance line).
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a special zone (see setting at
D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x ). This must be taken into
account when setting σ4.

7-100 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DIST: Z1 (circle) PSx 012 042 073 091 074 091 075 091 Fig. 3-129
DIST: Z2 (circle) PSx 012 043 073 092 074 092 075 092 Fig. 3-128
DIST: Z3 (circle) PSx 012 044 073 093 074 093 075 093 Fig. 3-128
DIST: Z4 (circle) PSx 012 045 073 094 074 094 075 094 Fig. 3-128
DIST: Z5 (circle) PSx 012 148 012 149 012 150 012 151 Fig. 3-128
DIST: Z6 (circle) PSx 012 152 012 153 012 154 012 155 Fig. 3-128

Setting for the impedance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the circular

characteristic (in secondary values).
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a special zone (see setting at
D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x ). This must be taken into
account when setting Z 4.
DIST: α1 (circle) PSx 072 090 073 090 074 090 075 090 Fig. 3-129
DIST: α2 (circle) PSx 072 095 073 095 074 095 075 095 Fig. 3-128
DIST: α3 (circle) PSx 072 096 073 096 074 096 075 096 Fig. 3-128
DIST: α4 (circle) PSx 072 099 073 099 074 099 075 099 Fig. 3-128
DIST: α5 (circle) PSx 012 164 012 165 012 166 012 167 Fig. 3-128
DIST: α6 (circle) PSx 012 168 012 169 012 170 012 171 Fig. 3-128

This setting is only important if the setting With arc compensation is active.
In this case, the setting at this address determines the angle where arc
compensation becomes active in zones 1 to 6.
DIST: Arc comp. circle PSx 012 038 012 090 012 091 012 092 Fig. 3-126

Disabling or enabling arc compensation when the circular characteristic is

selected.
DIST: Direction N1 PSx 012 023 012 073 013 023 013 073 Fig. 3-136
DIST: Direction N2 PSx 012 024 012 074 013 024 013 074 Fig. 3-136
DIST: Direction N3 PSx 012 025 012 075 013 025 013 075 Fig. 3-136
DIST: Direction N4 PSx 012 026 012 076 013 026 013 076 Fig. 3-136
DIST: Direction N5 PSx 012 027 012 077 013 027 013 077 Fig. 3-136
DIST: Direction N6 PSx 012 132 012 133 012 134 012 135 Fig. 3-136
DIST: Direction N7 PSx 012 136 012 137 012 138 012 139 Fig. 3-136

This directional setting defines the direction in which impedance stages 1 to

6 or final timer stage 7 measure – relative to the basic measuring direction
determined by the connection of the measuring circuits and the setting at
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IP.
DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx 010 109 010 116 010 117 010 118 Fig: 3-123, 3-
124
Setting for the voltage threshold below which the voltage must fall in order
for the voltage memory to be activated.
DIST: t1 PSx 012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078 Fig. 3-134
DIST: t2 PSx 012 029 012 079 013 029 013 079 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t3 PSx 012 030 012 080 013 030 013 080 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t4 PSx 012 031 012 081 013 031 013 081 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t5 PSx 012 032 012 082 013 032 013 082 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t6 PSx 012 033 012 083 013 033 013 083 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t7 PSx 012 140 012 141 012 142 012 143 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t8 PSx 012 144 012 145 012 146 012 147 Fig. 3-135

Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 1 to 6 and of directional

and non-directional backup timer stages 7 and 8.
Note: Zone 4 can be used as a special zone (see setting at
D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x ). This must be taken into
account when setting t4.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-101

7 Settings
(continued)

DIST: kze,PG HSR PSx 012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084 Fig: 3-129, 3-
133
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops.
The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and
resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the
measurement:
X1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) ⋅ X1
R1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR)⋅ R1

X1,ze HSR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,ze HSR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor

The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:

Z1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) ⋅ Z1

The zone extension HSR is controlled by

† Protective signaling
† Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective
signaling is not ready
† A reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready†
Switch on to fault protection
† An appropriately configured binary signal input.
DIST: kze,PP HSR PSx 012 035 012 085 013 035 013 085 Fig: 3-129, 3-
133
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-phase loops.
The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and
resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the
measurement:
X1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) ⋅ X1
R1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR)⋅ R1

X1,ze HSR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,ze HSR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor

The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:

Z1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) ⋅ Z1

Zone extension is controlled by the following factors:

† Protective signaling
† Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective
signaling is not ready
† A reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready
† Switch on to fault protection
† An appropriately configured binary signal input

7-102 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DIST: kze,PG TDR PSx 012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096 Fig: 3-129, 3-
133
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops.
The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and
resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the
measurement:

X1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) ⋅ X1

R1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR )⋅ R1

X1,ze TDR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,ze TDR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor

The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:

Z1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) ⋅ Z1

Z1,ze TDR : impedance modified by the zone extension factor

Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as

another TDR is permitted.
DIST: kze,PP TDR PSx 012 047 012 097 013 047 013 097 Fig: 3-129, 3-
133
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-phase loops.
The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and
resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the
measurement:

X1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) ⋅ X1

R1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR )⋅ R1

X1,ze TDR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,ze TDR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor

The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:

Z1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) ⋅ Z1

Z1,ze TDR : impedance modified by the zone extension factor

Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as

another TDR is permitted.
DIST: t1,ze PSx 026 025 027 025 028 025 029 025 Fig. 3-134

Setting for the timer stage of impedance zone 1 with extended reach.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-103

7 Settings
(continued)

DIST: Abs. value kG PSx 012 037 012 087 013 037 013 087 Fig. 3-116

Setting for the absolute value of the complex ground factor kG.

Z 0 − Zpos
kG =
3 ⋅ Zpos

Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
Z pos : positive-sequence impedance

kG =
( X 0 − X pos )2 + (R0 − Rpos )2
3 ⋅ Rpos 2 + X pos 2

R0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance

Rpos : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
X pos : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance

If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
DIST: Angle kG PSx 012 036 012 086 013 036 013 086 Fig. 3-116

Angle setting of the complex ground factor kG .

Z 0 − Zpos
kG =
3 ⋅ Zpos

Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
Z pos : positive-sequence impedance
X 0 − X pos X pos
k G angle = arc tan − arc tan
R0 − Rpos Rpos
R0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance
Rpos : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
X pos : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance

If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.

Power swing blocking PSB: Enabled PSx 015 090 015 091 015 092 015 093

This setting defines the setting group in which the power swing blocking
function is enabled.

Backup overcurrent-time BUOC: I> PSx 010 058 010 078 010 098 011 018 Fig. 3-162
protection (Backup DTOC)
Operate value setting for the phase currents of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.

7-104 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

BUOC: tI> PSx 010 059 010 079 010 099 011 019 Fig. 3-162

Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.

BUOC: IN> PSx 010 064 010 084 011 004 011 024 Fig. 3-162

Operate value setting for the residual current of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.
Note: This setting is only active if the setting at
MAIN: Neutral-point treatm.
is low-impedance grounding.
BUOC: tIN> PSx 010 065 010 085 011 005 011 025 Fig. 3-162

Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.

Protective Signaling PSIG: Enabled PSx 015 014 015 015 015 016 015 017 Fig. 3-164

This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is

enabled.
PSIG: Operating mode PSx 015 000 024 000 024 060 025 020 Fig. 3-169

Setting for the operating mode of protective signaling.

PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx 015 036 015 037 015 040 015 041 Fig: 3-175,3-
177
This setting defines whether protective signaling generates the send signal
as a function of direction or distance.
PSIG: Oper. mode trip PSx 015 107 015 108 015 113 015 114 Fig: 3-173, 3-
175,3-177
This setting defines whether a trip triggered by protective signaling will be a
function of direction or distance.
PSIG: Tripping time PSx 015 011 024 003 024 063 025 023 Fig. 3-165

The tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection when
protective signaling is ready.
PSIG: Release t. send PSx 015 002 024 001 024 061 025 021 Fig: 3-170, 3-
171, 3-173,
3-175, 3-177,
3-179,3-182
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.
PSIG: DC loop op. mode PSx 015 012 024 051 025 011 025 071 Fig. 3-179

This setting defines whether the transmitting relay will be operated in

energize-on-signal (ES) mode ('open-circuit principle') or normally-
energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle'), i.e., 'Transm.relay make co'
or 'Transm.relay break c', respectively.

Note: This setting is active only in the 'DC loop' operating mode.
PSIG: Echo on receive PSx 015 003 024 002 024 062 025 022 Fig. 3-184

This setting determines whether protective signaling operates with or

without echo.
PSIG: Op. delay echo PSx 015 022 024 008 024 068 025 028 Fig. 3-184

Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.

PSIG: Pulse dur. echo PSx 015 023 024 009 024 069 025 029 Fig. 3-184

Setting for echo pulse duration.

PSIG: Trip signal V< PSx 015 021 024 007 024 067 025 027 Fig. 3-183

This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weak-
infeed logic is triggered.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-105

7 Settings
(continued)

PSIG: V< weak infeed PSx 015 020 024 006 024 066 025 026 Fig. 3-183

Setting for the threshold of the weak infeed logic.

PSIG: tV< PSx 015 019 024 005 024 065 025 025 Fig. 3-183

Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.

PSIG: tBlock PSx 015 024 024 010 024 070 025 030 Fig. 3-168

Setting for the transient blocking time of protective signaling.

PSIG: Frequency monit. PSx 015 025 024 011 024 071 025 031 Fig. 3-167

This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be

monitored.

Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: Enabled PSx 015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049 Fig. 3-187

This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.

ARC: CB clos.pos.sig. PSx 015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044 Fig. 3-188

This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be scanned or not.
If the setting is 'With', a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
ARC: Operating mode PSx 015 100 015 101 015 102 015 103 Fig. 3-186

This setting defines whether the ARC will carry out HSR and TDR, only
TDR, or only a test HSR.
ARC: Operative time 1 PSx 015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055 Fig. 3-197

Setting for the operative time 1.

ARC: Trip time HSR PSx 015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060 Fig. 3-190

The HSR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or
the operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection – provided that the
BUOC operating mode is set accordingly – if a HSR is permitted and
protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: Dead time 3p PSx 015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050 Fig. 3-197

Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.

ARC: Zone ext. f. HSR PSx 015 059 024 033 024 093 025 053 Fig. 3-196

This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by

the zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and
while the operative times are elapsing.
Note: This setting is only active if protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: No. permit. TDR PSx 015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057 Fig. 3-197

Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the ‘0’
setting, only one HSR is carried out.
ARC: Trip time TDR PSx 015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061 Fig. 3-190

The TDR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or
the operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection – provided that the
BUOC operating mode is set accordingly – if a TDR is permitted and
protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: TDR dead time PSx 015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051 Fig. 3-197

Setting for the TDR dead time.

ARC: Zone ext. f. TDR PSx 015 071 024 039 024 099 025 059 Fig. 3-196

This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended

prior to a TDR.

7-106 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

ARC: Enable RRC PSx 015 085 024 044 025 004 025 064 Fig. 3-194

Enabling the rapid reclosure (RRC) function.

ARC: tRRC PSx 015 086 024 045 025 005 025 065 Fig. 3-197

Setting for the timer stage of rapid reclosure (RRC).

ARC: V> RRC PSx 015 087 024 046 025 006 025 066 Fig. 3-194

Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded in order for an RRC
to be carried out.
ARC: Reclaim time PSx 015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048 Fig. 3-197

Setting for the reclaim time.

ARC: Block. time int. PSx 015 043 024 021 024 081 025 041 Fig. 3-189

Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
cancellation of the blocks set by the P439.
ARC: Block. time ext. PSx 015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052 Fig. 3-189

Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
ARC: Zone ext.dur. RC PSx 015 088 024 047 025 007 025 067 Fig. 3-196

This setting defines whether the following takes place:

† A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR.
† Zone extension will occur with each reclosure command.
ARC: Parallel trip PSx 015 053 024 027 024 087 025 047 Fig. 3-197

This setting defines whether the trip commands of a protection device

operating together with the P439 will affect operation of the ARC function.
For further details see the section entitled ‘Parallel Blocking’ in Chapter 3.

Automatic Synchronism ASC: Enabled PSx 018 020 018 021 018 022 018 023 Fig. 3-200
Check
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism
check (ASC) is enabled.
ASC: CB assignment PSx 037 131 037 132 037 133 037 134 Fig. 3-210

This setting defines the function group DEVxx that will control the circuit
breaker.
ASC: System integrat. PSx 037 135 037 136 037 137 037 138 Fig. 3-210

This setting defines whether ASC will operate in 'Autom. synchron. check'
or 'Autom. synchr. control' mode.
ASC: Active for HSR PSx 018 001 077 030 078 030 079 030 Fig. 3-201

This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for TDR PSx 018 002 077 031 078 031 079 031 Fig. 3-201

This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for RRC PSx 018 006 077 033 078 033 079 033 Fig. 3-201

This setting specifies whether enabling by the ASC function is required

before reclosing after a rapid reclosure can occur.
ASC: Clos.rej.w.block PSx 018 003 077 032 078 032 079 032 Fig. 3-201

This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by

ASC.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-107

7 Settings
(continued)

ASC: Operative time PSx 018 010 077 034 078 034 079 034 Fig. 3-209

Setting for the operative time for ASC.

ASC: Measurement loop PSx 031 060 077 044 078 044 079 044 Fig. 3-199

The voltage measurement loop, corresponding to the reference voltage,

must be selected so that determination of differential values is correct.

Example: Connect transformer T 15 to measure the reference voltage to

phases A & B The measurement loop should be set to 'Loop A-B'.
ASC: Phi offset PSx 018 034 077 042 078 042 079 042 Fig: 3-207, 3-
208
Setting a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the
differential angle is correct.
ASC: AR op. mode PSx 018 025 018 026 018 027 018 028 Fig: 3-207, 3-
208
Auto-reclosing control:
Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
ASC: AR with tCB PSx 000 038 000 039 000 050 000 051 Page: 3-286

Auto-reclosing control:
In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this parameter to yes
ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into account by the
automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command.
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx 018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032 Fig. 3-205

Auto-reclosing control:
This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage
controlled close enable.
ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx 026 017 077 043 078 043 079 043 Fig. 3-205

Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC :
A R O p . m o d e v - c h k . P S x bestimmt.
ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx 018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040 Fig. 3-205

Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx.
ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx 018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041 Fig. 3-205

Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is
effected.

7-108 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx 018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035 Fig. 3-203

Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism
checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx 018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036 Fig. 3-207

Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the maximum differential voltage between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta f max PSx 018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038 Fig. 3-207

Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the maximum differential frequency between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta phi max PSx 018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037 Fig. 3-207

Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the maximum differential angle between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PSx 018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039 Fig. 3-207

Auto-reclosing control:
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the
ASC is effected.
ASC: MC op. mode PSx 000 056 000 057 000 058 000 059 Fig: 3-206, 3-
208
Manual close command:
Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
ASC: MC with tCB PSx 000 102 000 103 000 104 000 105 Fig: 3-204,
Page: 3-286
Manual close command:
In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this parameter to yes
ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into account by the
automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command.
ASC: MC op.mode v-chk.PSx 000 060 000 061 000 062 000 063 Fig. 3-206

Manual close command:

This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage
controlled close enable.
ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx 000 064 000 065 000 066 000 067 Fig. 3-206

Manual close command:

Setting for the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC :
M C o p . m o d e v - c h k . P S x bestimmt.
ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx 000 068 000 069 000 070 000 071 Fig. 3-206

Manual close command:

Setting for the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting
ASC: MC Op.mode v-chk.PSx.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-109

7 Settings
(continued)

ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx 000 072 000 073 000 074 000 075 Fig. 3-206

Manual close command:

Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is
effected.
ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx 000 052 000 053 000 054 000 055 Fig. 3-208

Manual close command:

Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism
checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx 000 080 000 081 000 082 000 083 Fig. 3-208

Manual close command:

Setting for the maximum differential voltage between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta f max PSx 000 084 000 086 000 087 000 088 Fig. 3-208

Manual close command:

Setting for the maximum differential frequency between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta phi max PSx 000 089 000 091 000 092 000 093 Fig. 3-208

Manual close command:

Setting for the maximum differential angle between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx 000 098 000 099 000 100 000 101 Fig. 3-208

Manual close command:

Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the
ASC is effected.

Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Enabled PSx 072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098 Fig. 3-213
protection
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent
protection is enabled.
DTOC: Evaluation IN PSx 073 189 073 190 073 202 073 219 Fig. 3-216

This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents
or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
DTOC: I> PSx 072 007 073 007 074 007 075 007 Fig. 3-214

Setting for operate value I>.

DTOC: I>> PSx 072 008 073 008 074 008 075 008 Fig. 3-214

Setting for operate value I>>.

DTOC: I>>> PSx 072 009 073 009 074 009 075 009 Fig. 3-214

Setting for operate value I>>>.

DTOC: I>>>> PSx 072 010 073 010 074 010 075 010 Fig. 3-214

Setting for operate value I>>>>.

DTOC: tI> PSx 072 019 073 019 074 019 075 019 Fig. 3-214

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>.

DTOC: tI>> PSx 072 020 073 020 074 020 075 020 Fig. 3-214

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>.

7-110 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DTOC: tI>>> PSx 072 021 073 021 074 021 075 021 Fig. 3-214

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>>.

DTOC: tI>>>> PSx 072 022 073 022 074 022 075 022 Fig. 3-214

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>>>.

DTOC: Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx 017 055 073 042 074 042 075 042 Fig. 3-221

Setting for the pulse prolongation time of the hold-time logic for intermittent
ground faults.
DTOC: tIN,interm. PSx 017 056 073 038 074 038 075 038 Fig. 3-221

Setting for the tripping time of the hold-time logic for intermittent ground
faults.
DTOC: Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx 017 057 073 039 074 039 075 039 Fig. 3-221

Setting for the hold-time for intermittent ground faults.

DTOC: Ineg> PSx 072 011 073 011 074 011 075 011 Fig. 3-215

Setting for operate value Ineg> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>> PSx 072 012 073 012 074 012 075 012 Fig. 3-215

Setting for operate value Ineg>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>>> PSx 072 013 073 013 074 013 075 013 Fig. 3-215

Setting for operate value Ineg>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>>>> PSx 072 014 073 014 074 014 075 014 Fig. 3-215

Setting for operate value Ineg>>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: tIneg> PSx 072 023 073 023 074 023 075 023 Fig. 3-215

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg> (Ineg = negative-
sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>> PSx 072 024 073 024 074 024 075 024 Fig. 3-215

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>

(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>>> PSx 072 025 073 025 074 025 075 025 Fig. 3-215

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>

(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>>>> PSx 072 026 073 026 074 026 075 026 Fig. 3-215

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>>

(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: IN> PSx 072 015 073 015 074 015 075 015 Fig. 3-217

Setting for operate value IN> (IN = residual current).

DTOC: IN>> PSx 072 016 073 016 074 016 075 016 Fig. 3-217

Setting for operate value IN>> (IN = residual current).

DTOC: IN>>> PSx 072 017 073 017 074 017 075 017 Fig. 3-217

Setting for operate value IN>>> (IN = residual current).

DTOC: IN>>>> PSx 072 018 073 018 074 018 075 018 Fig. 3-217

Setting for operate value IN>>>> (IN = residual current).

DTOC: tIN> PSx 072 027 073 027 074 027 075 027 Fig. 3-217

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-111

7 Settings
(continued)

DTOC: tIN>> PSx 072 028 073 028 074 028 075 028 Fig. 3-217

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>.

DTOC: tIN>>> PSx 072 029 073 029 074 029 075 029 Fig. 3-217

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>.

DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx 072 030 073 030 074 030 075 030 Fig. 3-217

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>>.

DTOC: VNG> PSx 010 045 010 060 010 080 010 139 Fig. 3-219

This setting defines the threshold value that the neutral-point displacement
voltage must exceed so that the direction determination is enabled.
DTOC: Angle phiG PSx 004 092 004 247 004 248 004 249 Fig. 3-219

Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
DTOC: Direction tIN> PSx 072 032 072 042 072 082 072 091 Fig. 3-220
DTOC: Direction tIN>> PSx 072 033 072 043 072 083 072 092 Fig. 3-220
DTOC: Direction tIN>>> PSx 072 034 072 044 072 084 072 093 Fig. 3-220
DTOC: Direction tIN>>>>PSx 072 035 072 045 072 085 072 094 Fig. 3-220

The setting for the measurement direction determines the measurement

direction of the residual current stages.

Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: Evaluation IN PSx 073 222 073 239 073 245 073 255 Fig. 3-225
Protection
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents
or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
IDMT: Enabled PSx 072 000 073 000 074 000 075 000 Fig. 3-224

This setting defines the parameter subset in which inverse-time overcurrent

protection is enabled (phase current system).
IDMT: Iref,P PSx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the reference current (phase current system).

IDMT: Characterist. P PSx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).

IDMT: Ch. factor kt,P PSx 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current
system).
IDMT: Release P PSx 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).

IDMT: Direction P PSx 072 062 073 062 074 062 075 062 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT

protection function (phase current system).
IDMT: Direct. meas. P PSx 072 065 073 065 074 065 075 065 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance

protection function will be used or the directional decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (phase current system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt. P PSx 072 068 073 068 074 068 075 068 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event
of measuring voltage failure (phase current system).

7-112 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

IDMT: Iref,neg PSx 072 051 073 051 074 051 075 051 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT: Character. neg. PSx 072 057 073 057 074 057 075 057 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT: Factor kt,neg PSx 072 054 073 054 074 054 075 054 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence

current system).
IDMT: Release neg. PSx 072 060 073 060 074 060 075 060 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the release or reset characteristic (negative-sequence current

system).
IDMT: Direction neg. PSx 072 063 073 063 074 063 075 063 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT

protection function (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Dir. meas. neg PSx 072 066 073 066 074 066 075 066 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance

protection function will be used or the directional decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (negative-sequence current
system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt.neg PSx 072 069 073 069 074 069 075 069 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event
of measuring voltage failure (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Iref,N (meas.) PSx 001 169 001 170 001 171 001 172 Page: 3-311,
Fig.*: 3-231
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).
Depending on the setting at ID M T : Eva l u a ti o n IN PSx, either
I D M T : I r e f , N ( c a l c .) P S x or I D M T : I r e f , N ( m e a s . ) P S x is used.
The measured base current allows lower settings.
IDMT: Iref,N PSx 072 052 073 052 074 052 075 052 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the reference current (residual current system).

IDMT: Factor KI,N PSx 001 173 001 174 001 175 001 176

The set factor I D M T : F a c to r I r e f , I N is multiplied by the reference

quantity Iref,N in order to constitute the minimum operate value for the
current in the residual current measuring system. (available as of version
P439 -609)
IDMT: Characterist. N PSx 072 058 073 058 074 058 075 058 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).

IDMT: Min. trip time N PSx 072 079 073 079 074 079 075 079 Fig. 3-230

Setting for the minimum trip time of the residual current measuring system
This timer stage is started as soon as the minimum operate value is
exceeded. After the timer has elapsed, the trip signal is issued, regardless
of the value of the current.
IDMT: Factor kt,N PSx 072 055 073 055 074 055 075 055 Fig. 3-231
Setting for the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
IDMT: Release N PSx 072 061 073 061 074 061 075 061 Fig. 3-231

Setting for the reset characteristic (residual current system).

IDMT: Direction N PSx 072 064 073 064 074 064 075 064 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT

protection function (residual current system).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-113

7 Settings
(continued)

IDMT: Direct. meas. N PSx 072 067 073 067 074 067 075 067 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance

protection function will be used or the direction decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (residual current system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt. N PSx 072 076 073 076 074 076 075 076 Fig. 3-235

This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event
of measuring voltage failure (residual current system).

Ground fault direction GFDSS: Enabled PSx 001 050 001 051 001 052 001 053 Fig. 3-236
determination using
steady-state values
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFDSS function is
enabled.
GFDSS: Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx 016 063 000 236 000 237 000 238 Fig: 3-238, 3-
244, 3-247
Setting for the operating mode of the ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values. The following settings are possible: The following
settings are possible:
† "Cos ϕ circuit" for resonant-grounded systems.
† "Sin ϕ circuit" for isolated neutral-point systems.

GFDSS: Evaluation VNG PSx 016 083 001 011 001 012 001 013 Fig. 3-237

This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used

for direction determination: The displacement voltage calculated from the
phase-to-ground voltages or the displacement voltage measured at the T 90
transformer of the P439.
GFDSS: Meas. direction PSx 016 070 001 002 001 003 001 004 Fig: 3-238, 3-
244
This setting defines the measuring direction for the 'forward' or 'backward'
decision.
GFDSS: VNG> PSx 016 062 000 233 000 234 000 235 Fig: 3-238, 3-
244
Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
GFDSS: tVNG> PSx 016 061 000 230 000 231 000 232 Fig: 3-238, 3-
244
Setting for the operate delay of the VNG> trigger.
GFDSS: f/fnom (P.meas.) PSx 016 091 001 044 001 045 001 046 Fig: 3-238, 3-
244
Setting for the frequency of the measured variables evaluated in steady-
state power evaluation.
GFDSS: f/fnom (I.meas.) PSx 016 092 001 047 001 048 001 049 Fig. 3-242

Setting for the frequency of the measured variables evaluated in steady-

state current evaluation.
GFDSS: IN,act>/reac> LS PSx 016 064 000 239 000 240 000 241 Fig. 3-241

Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive power component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the ‘LS’ (line side) directional
decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Sector angle LS PSx 016 065 000 242 000 243 000 244 Fig. 3-241

Setting for the sector angle for measurement in the line side direction.
Note: This setting is only effective in the "cos ϕ circuit" operating mode.

7-114 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

GFDSS: Operate delay LS PSx 016 066 000 245 000 246 000 247 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
Setting for the operate delay of the direction decision in the forward
direction.
GFDSS: Release delay LS PSx 016 072 001 005 001 006 001 007 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the direction decision in the
forward direction.
GFDSS: IN,act>/reac> BS PSx 016 067 000 251 000 252 000 253 Fig. 3-241

Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive power component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the 'BS' (busbar side)
directional decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Sector angle BS PSx 016 068 000 248 000 249 000 250 Fig. 3-241

Setting for the sector angle for measurement in the direction of the busbar side.
Note: This setting is only effective in the "cos ϕ circuit" operating mode.
GFDSS: Operate delay BS PSx 016 069 000 254 000 255 001 001 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
Setting for the operate delay of the direction decision in the backward
(reverse) direction.
GFDSS: Release delay BS PSx 016 073 001 008 001 009 001 010 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the direction decision in the
backward direction.
GFDSS: IN> PSx 016 093 001 017 001 018 001 019 Fig. 3-242

Setting for the operate value of steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: Operate delay IN PSx 016 094 001 020 001 021 001 022 Fig. 3-242

Setting for the operate delay of steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: Release delay IN PSx 016 095 001 023 001 024 001 025 Fig. 3-242

Setting for the release delay (reset time) of steady-state current evaluation.
GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx 016 111 001 029 001 030 001 031 Fig: 3-245, 3-
246,3-247
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of
residual current that must be exceeded so that the ‘LS’ (line side) directional
decision is enabled.
GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx 016 112 001 032 001 033 001 034 Fig: 3-245, 3-
247
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of
residual current that must be exceeded so that the ‘BS’ (busbar side)
directional decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Y(N)> PSx 016 113 001 035 001 036 001 037 Fig. 3-248

Setting for the operate value of the admittance for non-directional ground
fault determination (in operating mode 'admittance evaluation').
GFDSS: Phi offset PSx 016 110 001 026 001 027 001 028 Fig. 3-244

This setting is provided to compensate for phase-angle errors of the system

transformers (in operating mode 'admittance evaluation').
GFDSS: Oper.delay Y(N)> PSx 016 114 001 038 001 039 001 040 Fig. 3-248

Setting for the operate delay value of the admittance for non-directional
ground fault determination (in operating mode 'admittance evaluation').

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-115

7 Settings
(continued)

GFDSS: Rel. delay Y(N)> PSx 016 115 001 041 001 042 001 043 Fig. 3-248

Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the admittance for non-
directional ground fault determination (in operating mode 'admittance
evaluation').

Ground Fault Tripping GFTRP: Enabled PSx 001 135 001 148 001 149 001 150

This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFTRP function is
enabled.

Ground Fault Protection GFSIG: Enabled PSx 001 134 001 136 001 137 001 138

Signaling
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFSIG function is
enabled.

Transient ground fault TGFD: Enabled PSx 001 054 001 055 001 056 001 057

direction determination
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the TGFD function is
enabled.

Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Enabled PSx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175 Fig. 3-259

This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload

protection is enabled.
THERM: Iref PSx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the reference current.

THERM: Factor kP PSx 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP.

THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
THERM: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running.
In all other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time
constant 1.
THERM: Max.object temp. PSx 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Max. cool. temp. PSx 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

Note: This setting is only active if the coolant temperature is measured
via the PT 100 or 20 mA.
THERM: Select CTA PSx 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177 Fig. 3-261

Selecting if and how the coolant temperature is measured: Via the PT100 or
the 20mA input.
THERM: Coolant temp. PSx 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time
if coolant temperature is not measured.

7-116 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

THERM: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx 072 178 073 178 074 178 075 178 Fig. 3-261

This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will
be blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
THERM: Θ warning PSx 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.

THERM: Θ trip PSx 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.

Note: If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the
setting here will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter
will be hidden as far as the local control panel is concerned.
THERM: Hysteres. Θ,trip PSx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183 Fig. 3-262

Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.

THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191 Fig. 3-262

A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between
the warning time and the trip time is set here.

Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Enabled PSx 076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000 Fig. 3-264

This setting defines the parameter subset in which V<> protection is

enabled.
V<>: Operating mode PSx 076 001 077 001 078 001 079 001 Fig. 3-265

This setting specifies whether the phase-to-ground voltages ('Star'

operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages ('Delta' operating mode)
will be monitored.
Note:
In the settings for the operate values of the time-voltage protection function,
the reference quantity is Vnom in the Delta operating mode, but Vnom/√3 in the
Star operating mode.
To work out the settings for the over/undervoltage stages, consider the
following example for Vnom = 100 V:
Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of
80 V (phase-to-phase):
Operate Value 80 V
Setting = = = 0.80
Vnom 100 V

Setting in the Star operating mode for an operate value of

46.2 V (phase-to-phase):

Operate Value 46.2 V 46.2V ⋅ 3

Setting = = = = 0.80
Vnom 100 V 100 V
3 3
V<>: I enable V< PSx 001 155 001 159 001 160 001 161 Page: 3-361

This setting defines the threshold value of the minimum current monitoring
for undervoltage stage V<.
V<>: Op. mode V< mon. PSx 001 162 001 163 001 164 001 165 Page: 3-361

Activation of the minimum current monitoring mode for undervoltage stage V<.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-117

7 Settings
(continued)

V<>: Evaluation VNG PSx 076 002 077 002 078 002 079 002 Fig. 3-271

This setting determines which neutral-point displacement voltage will be

monitored: The displacement voltage calculated by the P439 or the
displacement voltage measured at the T 90 voltage transformer.
V<>: V> PSx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003 Fig. 3-266

Setting for the operate value V>.

V<>: V>> PSx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004 Fig. 3-266

Setting for the operate value V>>.

V<>: tV> PSx 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005 Fig. 3-266

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.

V<>: tV> 3-pole PSx 076 027 077 027 078 027 079 027 Fig. 3-266

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV>> PSx 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006 Fig. 3-266

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

V<>: V< PSx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007 Fig. 3-267

Setting for the operate value V<.

V<>: V<< PSx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008 Fig. 3-267

Setting for the operate value V<<.

V<>: tV< PSx 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009 Fig. 3-267

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.

V<>: tV< 3-pole PSx 076 028 077 028 078 028 079 028 Fig. 3-267

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV<< PSx 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010 Fig. 3-267

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.

V<>: Vpos> PSx 076 015 077 015 078 015 079 015 Fig. 3-269

Setting for the operate value Vpos>.

V<>: Vpos>> PSx 076 016 077 016 078 016 079 016 Fig. 3-269

Setting for the operate value Vpos>>.

V<>: tVpos> PSx 076 017 077 017 078 017 079 017 Fig. 3-269

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>.

V<>: tVpos>> PSx 076 018 077 018 078 018 079 018 Fig. 3-269

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>>.

V<>: Vpos< PSx 076 019 077 019 078 019 079 019 Fig. 3-269

Setting for the operate value Vpos<.

V<>: Vpos<< PSx 076 020 077 020 078 020 079 020 Fig. 3-269

Setting for the operate value Vpos<<.

V<>: tVpos< PSx 076 021 077 021 078 021 079 021 Fig. 3-269

Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<.

V<>: tVpos<< PSx 076 022 077 022 078 022 079 022 Fig. 3-269
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<<.

7-118 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

V<>: Vneg> PSx 076 023 077 023 078 023 079 023 Fig. 3-270
Setting for the operate value Vneg>.
V<>: Vneg>> PSx 076 024 077 024 078 024 079 024 Fig. 3-270

Setting for the operate value Vneg>>.

V<>: tVneg> PSx 076 025 077 025 078 025 079 025 Fig. 3-270

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>.

V<>: tVneg>> PSx 076 026 077 026 078 026 079 026 Fig. 3-270

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>>.

V<>: VNG> PSx 076 011 077 011 078 011 079 011 Fig. 3-272

Setting for the operate value VNG>.

V<>: VNG>> PSx 076 012 077 012 078 012 079 012 Fig. 3-272

Setting for the operate value VNG>>.

V<>: tVNG> PSx 076 013 077 013 078 013 079 013 Fig. 3-272

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>.

V<>: tVNG>> PSx 076 014 077 014 078 014 079 014 Fig. 3-272

Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>>.

V<>: tTransient PSx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 Fig. 3-267

Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage
stages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048 Fig. 3-266

Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx 076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049 Fig. 3-269

Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring derived
voltages such as Vneg and VNG.

Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Enabled PSx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199 Fig. 3-273
Protection
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
protection is enabled.
f<>: Oper. mode f1 PSx 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Oper. mode f2 PSx 018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147

f<>: Oper. mode f3 PSx 018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171

f<>: Oper. mode f4 PSx 018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195

Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency

protection.
f<>: f1 PSx 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103 Fig. 3-277
f<>: f2 PSx 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127

f<>: f3 PSx 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151

f<>: f4 PSx 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175

Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection

function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies:
The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-119

7 Settings
(continued)

f<>: tf1 PSx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107 Fig. 3-277
f<>: tf2 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131

f<>: tf3 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155

f<>: tf4 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179

Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.

f<>: df1/dt PSx 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111 Fig. 3-277
f<>: df2/dt PSx 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135

f<>: df3/dt PSx 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159

f<>: df4/dt PSx 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183

Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored

Note: This setting is inactive unless operating mode
'f with df/dt' has been selected.
f<>: Delta f1 PSx 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Delta f2 PSx 018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139

f<>: Delta f3 PSx 018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163

f<>: Delta f4 PSx 018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187

Setting for Delta f.

Note: This setting is inactive unless operating mode
'f w. Delta f/Delta t' has been selected.
f<>: Delta t1 PSx 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Delta t2 PSx 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143

f<>: Delta t3 PSx 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167

f<>: Delta t4 PSx 018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191

Setting for Delta t.

Note: This setting is inactive unless operating mode
'f w. Delta f/Delta t' has been selected.

Power Directional Protection P<>: Enabled PSx 014 252 014 253 014 254 014 255 Fig. 3-278

This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional

protection is enabled.
P<>: P> high range PSx 017 203 017 204 017 205 017 213 Fig. 3-280

Setting operate value P> for the active power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: P> sens. range PSx 017 120 017 200 017 201 017 202 Fig. 3-280

Setting operate value P> for the active power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay P> PSx 017 128 017 129 017 130 017 131 Fig. 3-280

Setting for the operate delay of stage P>.

P<>: Release delay P> PSx 017 132 017 133 017 134 017 135 Fig. 3-280

Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P>.

7-120 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

P<>: Direction P> PSx 017 136 017 137 017 138 017 139 Fig. 3-281

This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a P> trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx 017 124 017 125 017 126 017 127 Fig. 3-280

Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P> of active power.
P<>: P>> high range PSx 017 214 017 215 017 216 017 217 Fig. 3-280

Setting operate value P>> for the active power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: P>> sens. range PSx 017 140 017 141 017 142 017 143 Fig. 3-280

Setting operate value P>> of active power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx 017 148 017 149 017 150 017 151 Fig. 3-280

Setting for the operate delay of stage P>>.

P<>: Release delay P>>PSx 017 152 017 153 017 154 017 155 Fig. 3-280

Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P>>.

P<>: Direction P>> PSx 017 156 017 157 017 158 017 159 Fig. 3-281

This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip
signal will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>PSx 017 144 017 145 017 146 017 147 Fig. 3-280

Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P>> of active power.
P<>: Q> high range PSx 017 218 017 219 017 220 017 221 Fig. 3-282

Setting for operate value Q> of reactive power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q> sens. range PSx 017 160 017 161 017 162 017 163 Fig. 3-282

Setting for operate value Q> of reactive power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx 017 168 017 169 017 170 017 171 Fig. 3-282

Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>.

P<>: Release delay Q> PSx 017 172 017 173 017 174 017 175 Fig. 3-282

Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q>.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-121

7 Settings
(continued)

P<>: Direction Q> PSx 017 176 017 177 017 178 017 179 Fig. 3-283

This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a Q> trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> PSx 017 164 017 165 017 166 017 167 Fig. 3-282

Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q> of reactive power.
P<>: Q>> high range PSx 017 222 017 223 017 224 017 225 Fig. 3-282

Setting for operate value Q>> of reactive power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q>> sens. range PSx 017 180 017 181 017 182 017 183 Fig. 3-282

Setting for operate value Q>> of reactive power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx 017 188 017 189 017 190 017 191 Fig. 3-282

Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>>.

P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx 017 192 017 193 017 194 017 195 Fig. 3-282

Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q>>.

P<>: Direction Q>> PSx 017 196 017 197 017 198 017 199 Fig. 3-283

This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a Q>> trip
signal will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx 017 184 017 185 017 186 017 187 Fig. 3-282

Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q>> of reactive power.
P<>: P< high range PSx 017 013 017 014 017 016 017 020 Fig. 3-284

Setting operate value P< for the active power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: P< sens. range PSx 017 030 017 031 017 032 017 033 Fig.*: 3-284

Setting operate value P< for the active power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay P< PSx 017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063 Fig: 3-284, 3-
286
Setting for the operate delay of stage P<.
P<>: Release delay P< PSx 017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229 Fig: 3-284, 3-
286
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P<.
P<>: Direction P< PSx 017 230 017 231 017 232 017 233 Fig. 3-285

This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal
will be issued for 'forward', 'backward' (reverse) or 'non-directional' fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx 017 034 017 035 017 036 017 037 Fig. 3-284

Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P< of active power.

7-122 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

P<>: P<< high range PSx 017 068 017 021 017 025 017 026 Fig. 3-284

Setting for operate value P<< of active power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: P<< sens. range PSx 017 234 017 235 017 236 017 237 Fig.*: 3-284

Setting for operate value P<< of active power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx 017 242 017 243 017 244 017 245 Fig. 3-284

Setting for the operate delay of stage P<<.

P<>: Release delay P<<PSx 017 246 017 247 017 248 017 249 Fig: 3-284, 3-
286
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P<<.
P<>: Direction P<< PSx 017 250 017 251 017 252 017 253 Fig. 3-285

This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal
will be issued for 'forward', 'backward' (reverse) or 'non-directional' fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<< PSx 017 238 017 239 017 240 017 241 Fig. 3-284

Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P<< of active power.
P<>: Q< high range PSx 017 069 017 038 017 039 017 045 Fig. 3-287

Setting for operate value Q< of reactive power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q<< high range PSx 017 079 017 046 017 049 017 051 Fig. 3-287

Setting for operate value Q<< of reactive power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q< sens. range PSx 018 035 018 036 018 037 018 038 Fig.*: 3-287

Setting for operate value Q< of reactive power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Q<< sens. range PSx 018 085 018 086 018 087 018 088 Fig.*: 3-287

Setting for operate value Q<< of reactive power.

Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx 018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055 Fig. 3-287

Setting for the operate delay of stage Q<.

P<>: Release delay Q< PSx 018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059 Fig. 3-287

Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q<.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-123

7 Settings
(continued)

P<>: Direction Q< PSx 018 081 018 082 018 083 018 084 Fig. 3-288

This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal
will be issued for 'forward', 'backward' (reverse) or 'non-directional' fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx 018 044 018 045 018 046 018 047 Fig. 3-287

Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q< of reactive power.
P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx 018 213 018 214 018 215 018 216 Fig. 3-287

Setting for the operate delay of stage Q<<.

P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx 018 236 018 237 018 238 018 239 Fig. 3-287

Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q<<.

P<>: Direction Q<< PSx 018 242 018 243 018 244 018 245 Fig. 3-288

This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip
signal will be issued for 'forward', 'backward' (reverse) or 'non-directional'
fault decisions.
P<>: Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx 018 095 018 096 018 097 018 098 Fig. 3-287

Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q<< of reactive power.
P<>: tTransient pulse PSx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249 Fig: 3-284, 3-
287
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by stages P<, P<<, Q<
and Q<< after the respective operate delays have elapsed.

7-124 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

7.1.3.4 Control

Main function MAIN: BI active USER 221 003 Fig. 3-76

Enabling the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
MAIN: SI active USER 221 002 Fig. 3-76

Enabling the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
Note: This parameter is visible only when
C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.

MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1 221 014 Fig. 3-59

MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2 221 022 Fig. 3-59

Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.

MAIN: Op. delay fct. block 221 029 Fig. 3-59

Setting for the operate delay of the function blocks.

MAIN: Perm.No.mot.drive op 221 027 Fig. 3-78

Setting for the permissible motor drive operations within the time interval
defined at M A I N : M o n . t i m e m o t . d r i v e s .
MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. 221 084

MAIN: CB2 max. oper. cap. 221 088

Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for
a limited time period).
MAIN: Cool.time mot.drives 221 028 Fig. 3-78

Setting for the cooling time for motors in motor-operated switchgear.

MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060 Fig: 3-78,
3-334
Setting for the monitoring time for the motor relay.
MAIN: Mon.time mot.drives 221 026 Fig. 3-78

Setting for the monitoring time to monitor the number of motor drives.
MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign 221 085 Page: 3-277,
3-430
MAIN: CB2 ready fct.assign 221 089

Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . with the value at
MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-125

7 Settings
(continued)

External devices 01 to 10 DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. 210 000 Fig. 3-2
DEV02: Designat. ext. dev. 210 050

DEV03: Designat. ext. dev. 210 100

DEV04: Designat. ext. dev. 210 150

DEV05: Designat. ext. dev. 210 200

DEV06: Designat. ext. dev. 211 000

DEV07: Designat. ext. dev. 211 050

DEV08: Designat. ext. dev. 211 100

DEV09: Designat. ext. dev. 211 150

DEV10: Designat. ext. dev. 211 200

Setting for the designation of the respective external device.

Note: This setting is only active if the external device designations are
displayed on the Bay Panel.
DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004 Fig: 3-325, 3-
331
DEV02: Op.time switch. dev. 210 054

DEV03: Op.time switch. dev. 210 104

DEV04: Op.time switch. dev. 210 154

DEV05: Op.time switch. dev. 210 204

DEV06: Op.time switch. dev. 211 004

DEV07: Op.time switch. dev. 211 054

DEV08: Op.time switch. dev. 211 104

DEV09: Op.time switch. dev. 211 154

DEV10: Op.time switch. dev. 211 204

Setting for the switchgear operating time (switching device).

DEV01: Latching time 210 005 Fig. 3-326
DEV02: Latching time 210 055

DEV03: Latching time 210 105

DEV04: Latching time 210 155

DEV05: Latching time 210 205

DEV06: Latching time 211 005

DEV07: Latching time 211 055

DEV08: Latching time 211 105

DEV09: Latching time 211 155

DEV10: Latching time 211 205

Setting for the time during which a control command persists after a
switchgear position signal –Open or Closed – has been received.
DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 011 Fig: 3-325, 3-
331
DEV02: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 061

DEV03: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 111

DEV04: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 161

DEV05: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 211

DEV06: Gr. assign. debounc. 211 011

DEV07: Gr. assign. debounc. 211 061

DEV08: Gr. assign. debounc. 211 111

DEV09: Gr. assign. debounc. 211 161

DEV10: Gr. assign. debounc. 211 211

Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and
chatter suppression.

7-126 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 012 Fig: 3-325, 3-

331
DEV02: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 062

DEV03: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 112

DEV04: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 162

DEV05: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 212

DEV06: Interm. pos. suppr. 211 012

DEV07: Interm. pos. suppr. 211 062

DEV08: Interm. pos. suppr. 211 112

DEV09: Interm. pos. suppr. 211 162

DEV10: Interm. pos. suppr. 211 212

This setting determines whether the 'intermediate position’ signal will be

suppressed or not while the switchgear is operating.
DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 027 Fig: 3-325, 3-
331
DEV02: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 077

DEV03: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 127

DEV04: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 177

DEV05: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 227

DEV06: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 211 027

DEV07: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 211 077

DEV08: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 211 127

DEV09: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 211 177

DEV10: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 211 227

This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the 'Faulty position' signal is issued.
DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. 210 024 Fig. 3-330
DEV02: Oper. mode cmd. 210 074

DEV03: Oper. mode cmd. 210 124

DEV04: Oper. mode cmd. 210 174

DEV05: Oper. mode cmd. 210 224

DEV06: Oper. mode cmd. 211 024

DEV07: Oper. mode cmd. 211 074

DEV08: Oper. mode cmd. 211 124

DEV09: Oper. mode cmd. 211 174

DEV10: Oper. mode cmd. 211 224

Select the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 014 Fig: 3-325, 3-
331
DEV02: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 064

DEV03: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 114

DEV04: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 164

DEV05: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 214

DEV06: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 211 014

DEV07: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 211 064

DEV08: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 211 114

DEV09: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 211 164

DEV10: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 211 214

Definition of the binary signal used to signal the position (plugged-in /

unplugged) of the switch truck plug.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-127

7 Settings
(continued)

DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 021 Fig. 3-329

DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 071

DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 121

DEV04: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 171

DEV05: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 221

DEV06: With gen. trip cmd.1 211 021

DEV07: With gen. trip cmd.1 211 071

DEV08: With gen. trip cmd.1 211 121

DEV09: With gen. trip cmd.1 211 171

DEV10: With gen. trip cmd.1 211 221

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general
trip command 1” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay
type definitions.
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 022 Fig. 3-329

DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 072

DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 122

DEV04: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 172

DEV05: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 222

DEV06: With gen. trip cmd.2 211 022

DEV07: With gen. trip cmd.2 211 072

DEV08: With gen. trip cmd.2 211 122

DEV09: With gen. trip cmd.2 211 172

DEV10: With gen. trip cmd.2 211 222

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general
trip command 2” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay
type definitions.
DEV01: With close cmd./prot 210 023 Fig. 3-329

DEV02: With close cmd./prot 210 073

DEV03: With close cmd./prot 210 123

DEV04: With close cmd./prot 210 173

DEV05: With close cmd./prot 210 223

DEV06: With close cmd./prot 211 023

DEV07: With close cmd./prot 211 073

DEV08: With close cmd./prot 211 123

DEV09: With close cmd./prot 211 173

DEV10: With close cmd./prot 211 223

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the "close
command" of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay
type definitions.

7-128 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 019 Fig. 3-326

DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 069

DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 119

DEV04: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 169

DEV05: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 219

DEV06: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 211 019

DEV07: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 211 069

DEV08: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 211 119

DEV09: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 211 169

DEV10: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 211 219

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 020 Fig. 3-326

DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 070

DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 120

DEV04: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 170

DEV05: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 220

DEV06: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 211 020

DEV07: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 211 070

DEV08: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 211 120

DEV09: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 211 170

DEV10: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 211 220

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the 'Closed' position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open 210 015 Fig. 3-334
DEV02: Inp. asg. end Open 210 065

DEV03: Inp. asg. end Open 210 115

DEV04: Inp. asg. end Open 210 165

DEV05: Inp. asg. end Open 210 215

DEV06: Inp. asg. end Open 211 015

DEV07: Inp. asg. end Open 211 065

DEV08: Inp. asg. end Open 211 115

DEV09: Inp. asg. end Open 211 165

DEV10: Inp. asg. end Open 211 215

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Open' command.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for bay types that are defined
for ‘direct motor control’.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-129

7 Settings
(continued)

DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close 210 016 Fig. 3-334

DEV02: Inp. asg. end Close 210 066

DEV03: Inp. asg. end Close 210 116

DEV04: Inp. asg. end Close 210 166

DEV05: Inp. asg. end Close 210 216

DEV06: Inp. asg. end Close 211 016

DEV07: Inp. asg. end Close 211 066

DEV08: Inp. asg. end Close 211 116

DEV09: Inp. asg. end Close 211 166

DEV10: Inp. asg. end Close 211 216

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Close' command.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for bay types that are defined
for ‘direct motor control’.
DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl 210 025 Fig. 3-328
DEV02: Open w/o stat.interl 210 075

DEV03: Open w/o stat.interl 210 125

DEV04: Open w/o stat.interl 210 175

DEV05: Open w/o stat.interl 210 225

DEV06: Open w/o stat.interl 211 025

DEV07: Open w/o stat.interl 211 075

DEV08: Open w/o stat.interl 211 125

DEV09: Open w/o stat.interl 211 175

DEV10: Open w/o stat.interl 211 225

This setting specifies whether switching to 'Open' position is permitted

without a check by the station interlock function.
Note: This parameter is visible only when
C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.

DEV01: Close w/o stat. int. 210 026 Fig. 3-328

DEV02: Close w/o stat. int. 210 076

DEV03: Close w/o stat. int. 210 126

DEV04: Close w/o stat. int. 210 176

DEV05: Close w/o stat. int. 210 226

DEV06: Close w/o stat. int. 211 026

DEV07: Close w/o stat. int. 211 076

DEV08: Close w/o stat. int. 211 126

DEV09: Close w/o stat. int. 211 176

DEV10: Close w/o stat. int. 211 226

This setting specifies whether switching to 'Closed' position is permitted

without a check by the station interlock function.
Note: This parameter is visible only when
C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.

7-130 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 039 Fig. 3-327

DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 089

DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 139

DEV04: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 189

DEV05: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 239

DEV06: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 211 039

DEV07: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 211 089

DEV08: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 211 139

DEV09: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 211 189

DEV10: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 211 239

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.
Note: This parameter is visible only when
C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 040 Fig. 3-327
DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 090

DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 140

DEV04: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 190

DEV05: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 240

DEV06: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 211 040

DEV07: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 211 090

DEV08: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 211 140

DEV09: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 211 190

DEV10: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 211 240

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.
Note: This parameter is visible only when
C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-131

7 Settings
(continued)

DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 041 Fig. 3-327

DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 091

DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 141

DEV04: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 191

DEV05: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 241

DEV06: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 211 041

DEV07: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 211 091

DEV08: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 211 141

DEV09: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 211 191

DEV10: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 211 241

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock
are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in
the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is
possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the
interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation.
Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function
assignment.
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 042 Fig. 3-327

DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 092

DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 142

DEV04: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 192

DEV05: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 242

DEV06: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 211 042

DEV07: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 211 092

DEV08: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 211 142

DEV09: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 211 192

DEV10: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 211 242

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock
are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in
the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is
possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the
interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation.
Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function
assignment.

7-132 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

7 Settings
(continued)

Interlocking logic ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000 Fig. 3-337

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 250 001

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 250 002

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 250 003

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 250 004

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 250 005

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 250 006

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 250 007

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 250 008

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 10 250 009

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.11 250 010

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.12 250 011

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.13 250 012

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.14 250 013

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.15 250 014

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 16 250 015

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 17 250 016

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 18 250 017

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.19 250 018

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 20 250 019

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.21 250 020

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 22 250 021

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 23 250 022

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 24 250 023

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 25 250 024

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 26 250 025

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 27 250 026

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.28 250 027

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.29 250 028

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 30 250 029

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 31 250 030

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 32 250 031

Definition of the interlock conditions.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 7-133

7-134 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615
8 Information and Control Functions

8 Information and Control Functions

The P439 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical purposes.
This information can be read out from the integrated local control panel. All this
information can be found in the ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’ folders in the menu tree.

8.1 Operation

8.1.1 Cyclic Values

8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data

Device DVICE: Processor frequency 104 099

Display of the clock frequency of the processor on processor module P.

Communication interface 3 COMM3: No. tel. errors p.u. 120 040 Page: 3-29

Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of

corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored 120 041 Page: 3-29

Display of the maximum value for the proportion of corrupted messages

within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: Loop back result 120 057 Page: 3-29

COMM3: Loop back receive 120 056 Page: 3-29

While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.

Measured Data Input MEASI: Current IDC 004 134 Fig. 3-27

Display of the input current.

MEASI: Current IDC p.u. 004 135 Fig. 3-27

Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin p.u. 004 136 Fig. 3-27

Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin 004 180 Fig. 3-28

Display of the scaled linearized value.

MEASI: Temperature 004 133 Fig. 3-29

Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer.

MEASI: Temperature Tmax 004 233 Fig. 3-29

Display of the maximum temperature measured at the "PT 100"

temperature input on the analog p/c board.
MEASI: Temperature p.u. 004 221 Fig. 3-29

Display of the temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature input on

the analog p/c board referred to 100°C.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-1

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Measured Data Output MEASO: Current A-1 005 100 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Current A-2 005 099

Display of the current on the analog measured data output

(A1: channel 1; A2: channel 2)

Main function MAIN: Date 003 090 Fig. 3-80

Date display.

Note: The date can also be set here.

MAIN: Time of day 003 091 Fig. 3-80

Display of the time of day.

Note: The time can also be set here.

MAIN: Time switching 003 095 Fig. 3-80

Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.

This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
communication interfaces.

Note: The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving
time.
In the case of clock synchronization via the clock
synchronization
telegram from a central control system or a central device, this
setting will be overwritten each time a new clock synchronization
telegram is received. With a free-running clock or
synchronization by minute pulse through a binary input, the time
of day setting and the time switching setting in the device must
be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other.
MAIN: Frequency f 004 040 Fig. 3-54

Display of system frequency.

MAIN: Curr. IP,max prim. 005 050 Fig. 3-45

Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay 005 036 Fig. 3-45

Display of the delayed maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IP,max prim.,stored 005 034 Fig. 3-45

Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Curr. IP,min prim. 005 055 Fig. 3-45

Display of the minimum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current A prim. 005 040 Fig. 3-45

Display of phase current A as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current B prim. 006 040 Fig. 3-45

Display of phase current B as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current C prim. 007 040 Fig. 3-45

Display of phase current C as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current Σ(IP) prim. 005 010 Fig. 3-45

Display of the calculated resultant current as a primary quantity.

8-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

MAIN: Current IN prim. 004 043 Fig. 3-46

Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim. 008 042 Fig. 3-49

Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim. 009 042 Fig. 3-49

Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage A-G prim. 005 042 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-G prim. 006 042 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-G prim. 007 042 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/3 prim. 005 012 Fig. 3-49

Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage VNG prim. 004 041 Fig. 3-50

Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer

T 90 as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage Vref prim. 005 046 Fig. 3-51

Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim. 008 044 Fig. 3-49

Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Volt. VPP,min prim. 009 044 Fig. 3-49

Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage A-B prim. 005 044 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-C prim. 006 044 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-A prim. 007 044 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Appar. power S prim. 005 025 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated apparent power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Active power P prim. 004 050 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. 004 052 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Active power factor 004 054 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated active power factor.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-3

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

MAIN: Act.energy outp.prim 005 061 Fig. 3-55

Display of the updated active energy output as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Act.energy inp. prim 005 062 Fig. 3-55

Display of the updated active energy input as a primary quantity.

MAIN: React.en. outp. prim 005 063 Fig. 3-55

Display of the updated reactive energy output as a primary quantity.

MAIN: React. en. inp. prim 005 064 Fig. 3-55

Display of the updated reactive energy input as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Load angle phi A 004 055 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated load angle value in phase A.

MAIN: Load angle phi B 004 056 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated load angle value in phase B.

MAIN: Load angle phi C 004 057 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated load angle value in phase C.

MAIN: Angle phiG 004 072 Fig. 3-52

Display of the angle between the measured residual current system

quantities IN and VNG.
MAIN: Angle ΣVPG vs. IN 005 009 Fig. 3-52

Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN.
MAIN: Frequency f p.u. 004 070 Fig. 3-54

Display of system frequency referred to fnom.

MAIN: Current IP,max p.u. 005 051 Fig. 3-45

Display of the maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay 005 037 Fig. 3-45

Display of the delayed maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored 005 035 Fig. 3-45

Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IP,min p.u. 005 056 Fig. 3-45

Display of the minimum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current A p.u. 005 041 Fig. 3-45

Display of phase current A referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current B p.u. 006 041 Fig. 3-45

Display of phase current B referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current C p.u. 007 041 Fig. 3-45

Display of phase current C referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Ipos p.u. 009 016 Fig. 3-45

Display of the positive sequence current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Ineg p.u. 009 015 Fig. 3-45

Display of the negative-sequence current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Σ(IP) p.u. 005 011 Fig. 3-45

Display of the calculated residual current referred to Inom.

8-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

MAIN: Current IN p.u. 004 044 Fig. 3-46

Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom.

MAIN: Voltage VPG,max p.u. 008 043 Fig. 3-49

Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage VPG,min p.u. 009 043 Fig. 3-49

Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u. 005 043 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u. 006 043 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u. 007 043 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage Vpos p.u. 009 018 Fig. 3-49

Display of the positive-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Load angle phi A p.u 005 073 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated load angle value in phase A referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Load angle phi B p.u 005 074 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated load angle value in phase B referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Load angle phi C p.u 005 075 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated load angle value in phase C referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Angle phi N p.u. 005 076 Fig. 3-52

Display of the angle between the measured residual current system

quantities IN and VNG referred to 100°.
MAIN: Angle VPG/IN p.u. 005 072 Fig. 3-52

Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN referred to 100°.
MAIN: Voltage Vneg p.u. 009 017 Fig. 3-49

Display of the negative-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/©3 p.u. 005 013 Fig. 3-49

Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to

Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage VNG p.u. 004 042 Fig. 3-50

Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer

T 90 referred to Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u. 005 047 Fig. 3-51

Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 referred to

Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage VPP,max p.u. 008 045 Fig. 3-49

Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-5

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

MAIN: Voltage VPP,min p.u. 009 045 Fig. 3-49

Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. 005 045 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-C p.u. 006 045 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-A p.u. 007 045 Fig. 3-49

Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Appar. power S p.u. 005 026 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated apparent power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
MAIN: Active power P p.u. 004 051 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. 004 053 Fig. 3-52

Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal

apparent power Snom.
MAIN: Phase rel. IN vs ΣIP 004 073 Fig. 3-53

The phase relations of measured and calculated residual current are

compared.
MAIN: Current ΣI unfilt. 004 074

Display of calculated unfiltered resultant current.

Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: Current IN,act p.u. 004 045 Fig. 3-241

Determination Using Steady-

State Values
Display of the updated value for the active component of residual current
referred to IN,nom.
GFDSS: Curr.IN,reac p.u. 004 046 Fig. 3-241

Display of the updated value for the reactive component of residual current
referred to IN,nom.
GFDSS: Curr. IN filt. p.u. 004 047 Fig. 3-242

Display of the updated value for the harmonic content of residual current
referred to IN,nom. This display is only active when the steady-state current
evaluation mode of the ground fault direction determination function
(GFDSS) is enabled.
GFDSS: Admitt. Y(N) p.u. 004 191 Fig. 3-247

Display of the updated admittance value referred to YN,nom.

With setting: G F D S S : E v a l u a t i o n V N G set to 'Measured':
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNGnom
With setting: G F D S S : E v a l u a t i o n V N G set to 'Calculated':
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom

8-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

GFDSS: Conduct. G(N) p.u. 004 192 Fig. 3-247

Display of the updated conductance value referred to YN,nom.

With setting: GFDSS: Eva l u a ti o n VN G set to 'Measured':
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNGnom
With setting: GFDSS: Eva l u a ti o n VN G set to ”Calculated”:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
GFDSS: Suscept. B(N) p.u. 004 193 Fig. 3-247

Display of the updated susceptance value referred to YN,nom.

With setting: GFDSS: Eva l u a ti o n VN G set to 'Measured':
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNGnom
With setting: GFDSS: Eva l u a ti o n VN G set to 'Calculated':
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom

Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Status THERM replica 004 016 Fig. 3-262

Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Object temperature 004 137 Fig. 3-262

Display of the temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Coolant temperature 004 149 Fig. 3-262

Display of the coolant temperature depending on the setting at T H ER M :

Select CTA.
When set to 'Default temp. value' the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to "From PT 100" the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to 'From 20 mA input'
the temperature measured via a 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
THERM: Pre-trip time left 004 139 Fig. 3-262

Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold.
THERM: Therm. replica p.u. 004 017 Fig. 3-262

Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

referred to a buffer content of 100 %.
THERM: Object temp. p.u. 004 179 Fig. 3-262

Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Coolant temp. p.u. 004 178 Fig. 3-262

Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Temp. offset replica 004 109 Fig. 3-262

Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into

account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.

If the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant

temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature
is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current
only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.

Binary Counts COUNT: Count 1 217 100 Fig. 3-341

Display of the updated count.

Note: The count value can be set here (Preload-Function).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-7

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals

Communication interface 3 COMM3: State receive 1 120 000 Seite:3-30

COMM3: State receive 2 120 003

COMM3: State receive 3 120 006

COMM3: State receive 4 120 009

COMM3: State receive 5 120 012

COMM3: State receive 6 120 015

COMM3: State receive 7 120 018

COMM3: State receive 8 120 021

Display of the relevant receive signal.

COMM3: State send 1 121 000 Seite:3-30
COMM3: State send 2 121 002

COMM3: State send 3 121 004

COMM3: State send 4 121 006

COMM3: State send 5 121 008

COMM3: State send 6 121 010

COMM3: State send 7 121 012

COMM3: State send 8 121 014

Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.

Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Output 1 state 106 010

Substation Event
GOOSE: Output 2 state 106 012

GOOSE: Output 3 state 106 014

GOOSE: Output 4 state 106 016

GOOSE: Output 5 state 106 018

GOOSE: Output 6 state 106 020

GOOSE: Output 7 state 106 022

GOOSE: Output 8 state 106 024

GOOSE: Output 9 state 106 026

GOOSE: Output 10 state 106 028

GOOSE: Output 11 state 106 030

GOOSE: Output 12 state 106 032

GOOSE: Output 13 state 106 034

GOOSE: Output 14 state 106 036

GOOSE: Output 15 state 106 038

GOOSE: Output 16 state 106 040

GOOSE: Output 17 state 106 042

GOOSE: Output 18 state 106 044

GOOSE: Output 19 state 106 046

GOOSE: Output 20 state 106 048

GOOSE: Output 21 state 106 050

GOOSE: Output 22 state 106 052

GOOSE: Output 23 state 106 054

GOOSE: Output 24 state 106 056

GOOSE: Output 25 state 106 058

GOOSE: Output 26 state 106 060

GOOSE: Output 27 state 106 062

GOOSE: Output 28 state 106 064

GOOSE: Output 29 state 106 066

GOOSE: Output 30 state 106 068

8-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

GOOSE: Output 31 state 106 070

GOOSE: Output 32 state 106 072

Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.

GOOSE: Input 1 state 106 200

GOOSE: Input 2 state 106 201

GOOSE: Input 3 state 106 202

GOOSE: Input 4 state 106 203

GOOSE: Input 5 state 106 204

GOOSE: Input 6 state 106 205

GOOSE: Input 7 state 106 206

GOOSE: Input 8 state 106 207

GOOSE: Input 9 state 106 208

GOOSE: Input 10 state 106 209

GOOSE: Input 11 state 106 210

GOOSE: Input 12 state 106 211

GOOSE: Input 13 state 106 212

GOOSE: Input 14 state 106 213

GOOSE: Input 15 state 106 214

GOOSE: Input 16 state 106 215

Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.

IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Output 1 state 104 100

Status Events
GSSE: Output 2 state 104 103

GSSE: Output 3 state 104 106

GSSE: Output 4 state 104 109

GSSE: Output 5 state 104 112

GSSE: Output 6 state 104 115

GSSE: Output 7 state 104 118

GSSE: Output 8 state 104 121

GSSE: Output 9 state 104 124

GSSE: Output 10 state 104 127

GSSE: Output 11 state 104 130

GSSE: Output 12 state 104 133

GSSE: Output 13 state 104 136

GSSE: Output 14 state 104 139

GSSE: Output 15 state 104 142

GSSE: Output 16 state 104 145

GSSE: Output 17 state 104 148

GSSE: Output 18 state 104 151

GSSE: Output 19 state 104 154

GSSE: Output 20 state 104 157

GSSE: Output 21 state 104 160

GSSE: Output 22 state 104 163

GSSE: Output 23 state 104 166

GSSE: Output 24 state 104 169

GSSE: Output 25 state 104 172

GSSE: Output 26 state 104 175

GSSE: Output 27 state 104 178

GSSE: Output 28 state 104 181

GSSE: Output 29 state 104 184

GSSE: Output 30 state 104 187

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-9

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

GSSE: Output 31 state 104 190

GSSE: Output 32 state 104 193

Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.

GSSE: Input 1 state 105 000

GSSE: Input 2 state 105 005

GSSE: Input 3 state 105 010

GSSE: Input 4 state 105 015

GSSE: Input 5 state 105 020

GSSE: Input 6 state 105 025

GSSE: Input 7 state 105 030

GSSE: Input 8 state 105 035

GSSE: Input 9 state 105 040

GSSE: Input 10 state 105 045

GSSE: Input 11 state 105 050

GSSE: Input 12 state 105 055

GSSE: Input 13 state 105 060

GSSE: Input 14 state 105 065

GSSE: Input 15 state 105 070

GSSE: Input 16 state 105 075

GSSE: Input 17 state 105 080

GSSE: Input 18 state 105 085

GSSE: Input 19 state 105 090

GSSE: Input 20 state 105 095

GSSE: Input 21 state 105 100

GSSE: Input 22 state 105 105

GSSE: Input 23 state 105 110

GSSE: Input 24 state 105 115

GSSE: Input 25 state 105 120

GSSE: Input 26 state 105 125

GSSE: Input 27 state 105 130

GSSE: Input 28 state 105 135

GSSE: Input 29 state 105 140

GSSE: Input 30 state 105 145

GSSE: Input 31 state 105 150

GSSE: Input 32 state 105 155

Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.

8-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Binary input INP: State U 601 152 090 Fig. 3-23

INP: State U 602 152 093

INP: State U 603 152 096

INP: State U 604 152 099

INP: State U 605 152 102

INP: State U 606 152 105

INP: State U 701 152 108

INP: State U 702 152 111

INP: State U 703 152 114

INP: State U 704 152 117

INP: State U 705 152 120

INP: State U 706 152 123

INP: State U 801 184 001

INP: State U 802 184 005

INP: State U 803 184 009

INP: State U 804 184 013

INP: State U 805 184 017

INP: State U 806 184 021

INP: State U 807 184 025

INP: State U 808 184 029

INP: State U 809 184 033

INP: State U 810 184 037

INP: State U 811 184 041

INP: State U 812 184 045

INP: State U 813 184 049

INP: State U 814 184 053

INP: State U 815 184 057

INP: State U 816 184 061

INP: State U 817 184 065

INP: State U 818 184 069

INP: State U 819 184 073

INP: State U 820 184 077

INP: State U 821 184 081

INP: State U 822 184 085

INP: State U 823 184 089

INP: State U 824 184 093

INP: State U 901 152 144

INP: State U 902 152 147

INP: State U 903 152 150

INP: State U 904 152 153

INP: State U 1201 152 198

INP: State U 1202 152 201

INP: State U 1203 152 204

INP: State U 1204 152 207

INP: State U 1205 152 210

INP: State U 1206 152 213

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-11

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

INP: State U 1401 190 001

INP: State U 1402 190 005

INP: State U 1403 190 009

INP: State U 1404 190 013

INP: State U 1405 190 017

INP: State U 1406 190 021

INP: State U 1601 192 001

INP: State U 1602 192 005

INP: State U 1603 192 009

INP: State U 1604 192 013

INP: State U 1605 192 017

INP: State U 1606 192 021

INP: State U 1607 192 025

INP: State U 1608 192 029

INP: State U 1609 192 033

INP: State U 1610 192 037

INP: State U 1611 192 041

INP: State U 1612 192 045

INP: State U 1613 192 049

INP: State U 1614 192 053

INP: State U 1615 192 057

INP: State U 1616 192 061

INP: State U 1617 192 065

INP: State U 1618 192 069

INP: State U 1619 192 073

INP: State U 1620 192 077

INP: State U 1621 192 081

INP: State U 1622 192 085

INP: State U 1623 192 089

INP: State U 1624 192 093

INP: State U 2001 153 086

INP: State U 2002 153 089

INP: State U 2003 153 092

INP: State U 2004 153 095

The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:

'Without function': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.

'Low': Not energized.

'High': Energized.

This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input
mode.

8-12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Binary outputs OUTP: State K 601 150 120

OUTP: State K 602 150 123

OUTP: State K 603 150 126

OUTP: State K 604 150 129

OUTP: State K 605 150 132

OUTP: State K 606 150 135

OUTP: State K 701 150 144

OUTP: State K 702 150 147

OUTP: State K 703 150 150

OUTP: State K 704 150 153

OUTP: State K 705 150 156

OUTP: State K 706 150 159

OUTP: State K 801 150 168

OUTP: State K 802 150 171

OUTP: State K 901 150 192

OUTP: State K 902 150 195

OUTP: State K 903 150 198

OUTP: State K 904 150 201

OUTP: State K 905 150 204

OUTP: State K 906 150 207

OUTP: State K 907 150 210

OUTP: State K 908 150 213

OUTP: State K 1001 150 216

OUTP: State K 1002 150 219

OUTP: State K 1003 150 222

OUTP: State K 1004 150 225

OUTP: State K 1005 150 228

OUTP: State K 1006 150 231

OUTP: State K 1201 151 008

OUTP: State K 1202 151 011

OUTP: State K 1203 151 014

OUTP: State K 1204 151 017

OUTP: State K 1205 151 020

OUTP: State K 1206 151 023

OUTP: State K 1401 169 001

OUTP: State K 1402 169 005

OUTP: State K 1403 169 009

OUTP: State K 1404 169 013

OUTP: State K 1405 169 017

OUTP: State K 1406 169 021

OUTP: State K 1601 171 001

OUTP: State K 1602 171 005

OUTP: State K 1801 173 001

OUTP: State K 1802 173 005

OUTP: State K 1803 173 009

OUTP: State K 1804 173 013

OUTP: State K 1805 173 017

OUTP: State K 1806 173 021

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-13

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

OUTP: State K 2001 151 200

OUTP: State K 2002 151 203

OUTP: State K 2003 151 206

OUTP: State K 2004 151 209

OUTP: State K 2005 151 212

OUTP: State K 2006 151 215

OUTP: State K 2007 151 218

OUTP: State K 2008 151 221

The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:

'Without function': No functions are assigned to the output relay.

'Low': The output relay is not energized.

'High': The output relay is energized.

This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output
relay.

8-14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

LED indicators LED: State H 1 green 085 180 Fig. 3-39

LED: State H 3 yell. 085 003

LED: State H 4 red 085 006 Fig. 3-39

LED: State H 5 red 085 009

LED: State H 6 red 085 012

LED: State H 7 red 085 015

LED: State H 8 red 085 018

LED: State H 9 red 085 021

LED: State H10 red 085 024

LED: State H11 red 085 027

LED: State H12 red 085 030

LED: State H13 red 085 033

LED: State H14 red 085 036

LED: State H15 red 085 039

LED: State H16 red 085 042

LED: State H17 red. 085 181

LED: State H 4 green 085 056

LED: State H 5 green 085 059

LED: State H 6 green 085 062

LED: State H 7 green 085 065

LED: State H 8 green 085 068

LED: State H 9 green 085 071

LED: State H10 green 085 074

LED: State H11 green 085 077

LED: State H12 green 085 080

LED: State H13 green 085 083

LED: State H14 green 085 086

LED: State H15 green 085 089

LED: State H16 green 085 092

The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:

'Inactive': The LED indicator is not energized.

'Active': The LED indicator is energized.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-15

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals

Local control panel LOC: Edit mode 080 111

LOC: Trig. menu jmp 1 EXT 030 230 Page: 3-10

LOC: Trig. menu jmp 2 EXT 030 231

LOC: Illumination on EXT 037 101

LOC: Loc.acc.block.active 221 005 Fig. 3-3

LOC: Rem.acc.block.active 221 004 Fig. 3-3
LOC: Chg.Sig.Panel stat. 221 076

LOC: Chg.Sig.Panel flash. 221 077

Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. EXT 003 173 Fig. 3-9
COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT 037 074 Fig: 3-10,
3-11,3-12
COMM1: Command blocking 003 174 Fig. 3-9
COMM1: Buffer overrun 221 100

COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. 037 075 Fig: 3-10,

3-11,3-12
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 003 219 Fig. 3-10
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 003 218 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: IEC 870-5, ILS 003 221 Fig. 3-12
COMM1: MODBUS 003 223 Fig. 3-13
COMM1: DNP3 003 230 Fig. 3-14
COMM1: COURIER 103 041 Fig. 3-15

Communication interface 3 COMM3: Reset No.tlgerr EXT 006 054 Fig.*: 3-82
COMM3: Communications fault 120 043 Fig. 3-20
COMM3: Comm. link failure 120 044 Fig. 3-20
COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 120 045

IRIG-B IRIGB: Enabled 023 201 Fig. 3-22

IRIGB: Synchron. ready 023 202 Fig. 3-22

EC Generic Substation Status GSSE: IED link faulty 105 181

Events
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE
sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GSSE the GSSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GSSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period
at which the next state signal must be received.

IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Comm. link faulty 105 180

Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC
address is missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting!
IEC: Control reservation 221 082

Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device

("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").

8-16 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000

Substation Event
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 position 109 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 position 109 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 position 109 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 position 109 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 position 109 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 position 109 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 position 109 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 position 109 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 position 109 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 position 109 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 position 109 055

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 position 109 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 position 109 065

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 position 109 070

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 position 109 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 position 109 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 position 109 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 position 109 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 position 109 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 position 109 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 position 109 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 position 109 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 position 109 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 position 109 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 position 109 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 position 109 150

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 position 109 155

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 position 109 160

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 position 109 165

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 position 109 170

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 position 109 175

State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an

external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 open 109 006

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 open 109 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 open 109 016

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 open 109 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 open 109 026

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 open 109 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 open 109 036

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 open 109 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 open 109 046

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 open 109 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 open 109 056

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 open 109 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 open 109 066

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 open 109 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 open 109 076

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 open 109 101

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-17

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 open 109 106

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 open 109 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 open 109 116

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 open 109 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 open 109 126

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 open 109 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 open 109 136

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 open 109 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 open 109 146

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 open 109 151

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 open 109 156

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 open 109 161

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 open 109 166

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 open 109 171

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 open 109 176

Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 closed 109 007

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 closed 109 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 closed 109 017

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 closed 109 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 closed 109 027

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 closed 109 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 closed 109 037

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 closed 109 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 closed 109 047

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 closed 109 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 closed 109 057

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 closed 109 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 closed 109 067

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 closed 109 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 closed 109 077

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 closed 109 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 closed 109 107

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 closed 109 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 closed 109 117

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 closed 109 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 closed 109 127

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 closed 109 132

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 closed 109 137

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 closed 109 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 closed 109 147

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 closed 109 152

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 closed 109 157

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 closed 109 162

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 closed 109 167

8-18 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 closed 109 172

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 closed 109 177

Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 interm.pos 109 008

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 interm.pos 109 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 interm.pos 109 018

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 interm.pos 109 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 interm.pos 109 028

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 interm.pos 109 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 interm.pos 109 038

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 interm.pos 109 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 interm.pos 109 048

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 interm.pos 109 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 interm.pos 109 058

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 interm.pos 109 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 interm.pos 109 068

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 interm.pos 109 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 interm.pos 109 078

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 interm.pos 109 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 interm.pos 109 108

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 interm.pos 109 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 interm.pos 109 118

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 interm.pos 109 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 interm.pos 109 128

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 interm.pos 109 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 interm.pos 109 138

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 interm.pos 109 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 interm.pos 109 148

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 interm.pos 109 153

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 interm.pos 109 158

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 interm.pos 109 163

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 interm.pos 109 168

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 interm.pos 109 173

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 interm.pos 109 178

Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,

representing the state of an external device.
GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250

Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried
out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-19

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Measured Data Input MEASI: Rst. temp. Tmax EXT 006 076 Fig.*: 3-82
MEASI: Enabled 035 008 Fig. 3-24
MEASI: PT100 open circuit 040 190 Fig. 3-29
MEASI: Overload 20mA input 040 191 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp. 040 192 Fig. 3-27

Binary outputs OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT 040 014 Fig. 3-30
OUTP: Reset latch. EXT 040 015 Fig: 3-30,
Fig.*: 3-82
OUTP: Outp. relays blocked 021 015 Fig. 3-30
OUTP: Latching reset 040 088 Fig. 3-30

Measured Data Output MEASO: Enabled 037 102 Fig. 3-32

MEASO: Outp. enabled EXT 036 085 Fig. 3-33
MEASO: Reset output EXT 036 087 Fig: 3-34,
Fig.*: 3-82
MEASO: Output reset 037 117 Fig. 3-34
MEASO: Valid BCD value 037 050 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD) 037 051 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 1-digit bit 1 (BCD) 037 052 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 1-digit bit 2 (BCD) 037 053 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 1-digit bit 3 (BCD) 037 054 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BCD) 037 055 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 10-digit bit 1 (BCD) 037 056 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 10-digit bit 2 (BCD) 037 057 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 10-digit bit 3 (BCD) 037 058 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 100-digit bit 0 (BCD) 037 059 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 100-digit bit 1 (BCD) 037 060 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: Value A-1 valid 069 014 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Value A-1 output 037 118 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Value A-2 valid 069 015

MEASO: Value A-2 output 037 119

8-20 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Main function MAIN: Healthy 060 001

Signal that the protection unit is operational. As a standard this signal is

linked to L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 g r e e n .
MAIN: Enable protect. EXT 003 027 Fig. 3-57
MAIN: Disable protect. EXT 003 026 Fig. 3-57
MAIN: General reset EXT 005 255 Fig: 3-3, 3-4,
3-53-6, 3-30,
3-34, 3-39,
3-45, 3-63,
3-64, 3-73,
3-77, 3-86,
3-88, 3-89,
3-90, 3-91,
3-92, 3-93,
3-94, 3-95,
3-96, 3-97,
3-98, 3-99,
3-101, 3-102,
3-103, 3-104,
3-105, 3-106,
3-207, 3-236,
3-247,
Bild*: 3-82
MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT 005 209 Fig. 3-82
MAIN: Group reset 2 EXT 005 252

MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT 065 001 Fig. 3-81

MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT 040 138 Fig.*: 3-82
MAIN: Rst.c.cl./tripc. EXT 005 210 Fig: 3-63,
3-73,
Bild*: 3-82
MAIN: Rst IP,max,stor. EXT 005 211 Fig: 3-47,
Fig.*: 3-82
MAIN: Rst meas.v.ener. EXT 005 212 Fig: 3-55,
Fig.*: 3-82
MAIN: CB1 faulty EXT 221 086 Page: 3-277,
3-430
MAIN: CB2 faulty EXT 221 090

MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT 040 060 Fig. 3-60

MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT 040 061 Fig. 3-60
MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT 036 045 Fig. 3-73
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT 004 061 Fig. 3-156
MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vref EXT 036 086 Fig. 3-156
MAIN: CB open 3p EXT 031 028 Fig: 3-295, 3-
296, 3-300,
3-301,3-305
MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT 036 051 Fig: 3-62,
3-63, 3-158,
3-188,3-250
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT 037 018 Fig. 3-72
MAIN: Parallel trip EXT 037 019 Fig: 3-63,
3-197, 3-292
MAIN: Transfer trip. EXT 120 046 Fig. 3-71
MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT 041 023 Fig. 3-63
MAIN: Man. close cmd. EXT 041 022 Fig. 3-63
MAIN: Manual close EXT 036 047 Fig. 3-163
MAIN: Test mode EXT 037 070 Fig. 3-84
MAIN: Time switching EXT 003 096

MAIN: Min-pulse clock EXT 060 060 Fig. 3-80

MAIN: Ch.1 an. NCIT on EXT 010 188

MAIN: Ch.2 an. NCIT on EXT 010 190

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-21

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

MAIN: Prot. ext. enabled 003 028 Fig. 3-57

MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled 038 046 Fig. 3-57
MAIN: Device not ready 004 060 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Blocked/faulty 004 065 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked 021 013 Fig. 3-73
MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset 040 139

MAIN: Test mode 037 071 Fig. 3-84

MAIN: CB open 3p 031 040

MAIN: CB pos.sig. unplaus. 031 041

MAIN: CB closed 3p 031 042

MAIN: Manual trip signal 034 017 Fig. 3-72

MAIN: Gen. trip command 035 071 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 036 251 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 036 005 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 036 023 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 036 071 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Gen. trip command 2 036 022 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Final trip 038 103 Fig. 3-74
MAIN: Send transfer trip 001 207 Fig. 3-71
MAIN: Man. cl. cmd.enabl. 039 113 Fig. 3-63
MAIN: Man. close command 037 068 Fig. 3-63
MAIN: Close command 037 009 Fig. 3-63
MAIN: General starting 036 000 Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Starting A 036 001 Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Starting B 036 002 Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Starting C 036 003 Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Starting GF 036 004 Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Rush restr. A trig. 041 027 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: Rush restr. B trig. 041 028 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: Rush restr. C trig. 041 029 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: Ground fault 041 087 Fig. 3-67
MAIN: Ground fault A 041 054 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Ground fault B 041 055 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Ground fault C 041 056 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Gnd. fault forw./LS 041 088 Fig. 3-67
MAIN: Gnd. fault backw./BS 041 089 Fig. 3-67
MAIN: Enable control 221 058 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Subst. interl. act. 221 000 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active 221 015 Fig. 3-59
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active 221 023 Fig. 3-59
MAIN: Mon. mot. drives tr. 221 056 Fig. 3-78
MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. 221 018 Fig. 3-77
MAIN: CB trip internal 221 006 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: CB tripped 221 016 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active 221 017 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored 221 054 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active 221 053 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored 221 055 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Communication error 221 019 Fig. 3-79
MAIN: Device selection key 006 001

MAIN: Device OPEN key 006 002

8-22 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf 221 101 Page: 3-428

MAIN: Device CLOSE key 006 003

MAIN: Command from HMI 221 102 Page: 3-428

MAIN: Local/Remote key 006 004

MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl 221 103 Page: 3-428

MAIN: Ch.1 analog NCIT on 010 189

MAIN: Ch.2 analog NCIT on 010 191

Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via user EXT 036 101 Fig. 3-85
PSS: Activate PS 1 EXT 065 002 Fig. 3-85
PSS: Activate PS 2 EXT 065 003 Fig. 3-85
PSS: Activate PS 3 EXT 065 004 Fig. 3-85
PSS: Activate PS 4 EXT 065 005 Fig. 3-85
PSS: Control via user 036 102 Fig. 3-85
PSS: Ext.sel.param.subset 003 061 Fig. 3-85
PSS: PS 1 activated ext. 036 094 Fig. 3-85
PSS: PS 2 activated ext. 036 095 Fig. 3-85
PSS: PS 3 activated ext. 036 096 Fig. 3-85
PSS: PS 4 activated ext. 036 097 Fig. 3-85
PSS: Actual param. subset 003 062 Fig. 3-85
PSS: PS 1 active 036 090 Fig. 3-85
PSS: PS 2 active 036 091 Fig. 3-85
PSS: PS 3 active 036 092 Fig. 3-85
PSS: PS 4 active 036 093 Fig. 3-85

Self-Monitoring SFMON: CB faulty EXT 098 072

SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070 Fig. 3-86

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100 Fig. 3-86
SFMON: Warm restart exec. 041 202

SFMON: Cold restart exec. 041 201

SFMON: Cold rest. checksum 093 024

SFMON: Cold rest. SW update 093 025

SFMON: Blocking HW failure 090 019

SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200

SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040

SFMON: Battery failure 090 010

SFMON: Faulty DSP 093 127

SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026

SFMON: +15V supply faulty 093 081

SFMON: +24V supply faulty 093 082

SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080

SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 096 100

SFMON: Wrong module slot 2 096 101

SFMON: Wrong module slot 3 096 102

SFMON: Wrong module slot 4 096 103

SFMON: Wrong module slot 5 096 104

SFMON: Wrong module slot 6 096 105

SFMON: Wrong module slot 7 096 106

SFMON: Wrong module slot 8 096 107

SFMON: Wrong module slot 9 096 108

SFMON: Wrong module slot 10 096 109

SFMON: Wrong module slot 11 096 110

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-23

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

SFMON: Wrong module slot 12 096 111

SFMON: Wrong module slot 13 096 112

SFMON: Wrong module slot 14 096 113

SFMON: Wrong module slot 15 096 114

SFMON: Wrong module slot 16 096 115

SFMON: Wrong module slot 17 096 116

SFMON: Wrong module slot 18 096 117

SFMON: Wrong module slot 19 096 118

SFMON: Wrong module slot 20 096 119

SFMON: Wrong module slot 21 096 120

SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 097 000

SFMON: Defect.module slot 2 097 001

SFMON: Defect.module slot 3 097 002

SFMON: Defect.module slot 4 097 003

SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 097 004

SFMON: Defect.module slot 6 097 005

SFMON: Defect.module slot 7 097 006

SFMON: Defect.module slot 8 097 007

SFMON: Defect.module slot 9 097 008

SFMON: Defect.module slot 10 097 009

SFMON: Defect.module slot11 097 010

SFMON: Defect.module slot12 097 011

SFMON: Defect.module slot13 097 012

SFMON: Defect.module slot14 097 013

SFMON: Defect.module slot15 097 014

SFMON: Defect.module slot16 097 015

SFMON: Defect.module slot 17 097 016

SFMON: Defect.module slot 18 097 017

SFMON: Defect.module slot19 097 018

SFMON: Defect.module slot20 097 019

SFMON: Defect.module slot21 097 020

SFMON: Module N +15V faulty 093 096 Fig. 3-252

SFMON: Module N -15V faulty 093 097 Fig. 3-252
SFMON: Module N DAC faulty 093 095 Fig. 3-252
SFMON: Module N DPR faulty 093 090 Fig. 3-252
SFMON: Module N RAM faulty 093 091 Fig. 3-252
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty 093 110

SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty 093 111

SFMON: Error K 601 097 070

SFMON: Error K 602 097 071

SFMON: Error K 603 097 072

SFMON: Error K 604 097 073

SFMON: Error K 605 097 074

SFMON: Error K 606 097 075

SFMON: Error K 701 097 078

SFMON: Error K 702 097 079

SFMON: Error K 703 097 080

SFMON: Error K 704 097 081

SFMON: Error K 705 097 082

SFMON: Error K 706 097 083

SFMON: Error K 801 097 086

SFMON: Error K 802 097 087

8-24 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

SFMON: Error K 901 097 094

SFMON: Error K 902 097 095

SFMON: Error K 903 097 096

SFMON: Error K 904 097 097

SFMON: Error K 905 097 098

SFMON: Error K 906 097 099

SFMON: Error K 907 097 100

SFMON: Error K 908 097 101

SFMON: Error K 1001 097 102

SFMON: Error K 1002 097 103

SFMON: Error K 1003 097 104

SFMON: Error K 1004 097 105

SFMON: Error K 1005 097 106

SFMON: Error K 1006 097 107

SFMON: Error K 1201 097 118

SFMON: Error K 1202 097 119

SFMON: Error K 1203 097 120

SFMON: Error K 1204 097 121

SFMON: Error K 1205 097 122

SFMON: Error K 1206 097 123

SFMON: Error K 1401 097 134

SFMON: Error K 1402 097 135

SFMON: Error K 1403 097 136

SFMON: Error K 1404 097 137

SFMON: Error K 1405 097 138

SFMON: Error K 1406 097 139

SFMON: Error K 1601 097 150

SFMON: Error K 1602 097 151

SFMON: Error K 1801 097 166

SFMON: Error K 1802 097 167

SFMON: Error K 1803 097 168

SFMON: Error K 1804 097 169

SFMON: Error K 1805 097 170

SFMON: Error K 1806 097 171

SFMON: Error K 2001 097 182

SFMON: Error K 2002 097 183

SFMON: Error K 2003 097 184

SFMON: Error K 2004 097 185

SFMON: Error K 2005 097 186

SFMON: Error K 2006 097 187

SFMON: Error K 2007 097 188

SFMON: Error K 2008 097 189

SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010

SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011

SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012

SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013

SFMON: Protection failure 090 021

SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003

SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041

SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012 Fig. 3-88

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015

SFMON: Time-out module N 093 092 Fig. 3-252

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-25

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

SFMON: Time-out module Y 093 112

SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121

SFMON: Invalid type of bay 096 122

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. DSP 093 128

SFMON: Invalid SW vers DHMI 093 145

SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. N 093 093 Fig. 3-252

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y 093 113

SFMON: Inom not adjustable 093 118

SFMON: Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz 093 098 Fig. 3-252

SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD 093 124

SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 093 114 Fig. 3-38

SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 093 115

SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC 093 116 Fig. 3-27

SFMON: Setting error THERM 098 035 Fig. 3-262
SFMON: Setting error f<> 098 028 Fig. 3-277
SFMON: Setting error CBM 098 020

SFMON: Peripheral fault 098 018 Fig. 3-156

SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000 Fig. 3-156
SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref 098 011 Fig. 3-156
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 098 001 Fig. 3-158
SFMON: Vneg> triggered 098 014 Fig. 3-158
SFMON: Undervoltage 098 009 Fig. 3-158
SFMON: FF,V triggered 098 021 Fig. 3-160
SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 098 022 Fig. 3-161
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 098 023 Fig. 3-156
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 098 017 Fig. 3-156
SFMON: BUOC not active 098 002 Fig. 3-162
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC 098 003 Fig. 3-162
SFMON: BUOC active with ARC 098 004 Fig. 3-162
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 098 005 Fig. 3-157
SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 098 016 Fig. 3-156
SFMON: Zero-sequ. starting 098 015 Fig. 3-156
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 093 140

SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143

SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 093 142

SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 093 141

SFMON: Telecom. faulty/PSIG 098 006 Fig. 3-166

SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GFSIG 098 012 Fig. 3-251
SFMON: CB pos.sig. unplaus. 098 124

SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered 093 094 Fig. 3-257

SFMON: CB No. CB op. > 098 066

SFMON: CB rem. No. CB op. < 098 067

SFMON: CB ΣItrip > 098 068

SFMON: CB ΣItrip**2 > 098 069

SFMON: CB tmax> A 098 070

SFMON: CB tmax> B 098 071

SFMON: CB tmax> C 098 077

SFMON: Output 30 098 053

SFMON: Output 30 (t) 098 054

SFMON: Output 31 098 055

SFMON: Output 31 (t) 098 056

8-26 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

SFMON: Output 32 098 057

SFMON: Output 32 (t) 098 058

SFMON: PT100 open circuit 098 024 Fig. 3-29

SFMON: Overload 20mA input 098 025 Fig. 3-27
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. 098 026 Fig. 3-27
SFMON: CTA error 098 034 Fig. 3-261

Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. USER 005 213 Fig. 3-82

Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Reset record. USER 005 240 Fig: 3-88,
Fig.*: 3-82

Overload Recording OL_RC: Reset record. USER 005 241 Fig: 3-6,
3-89,3-90,
3-91,3-92,
Bild*: 3-82
OL_RC: Record. in progress 035 003 Fig. 3-91
OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow 035 007 Fig. 3-92

Ground fault recording GF_RC: Reset record. USER 005 242 Fig: 3-5,
3-93, 3-98,
3-99,
Bild*: 3-82
GF_RC: Record. in progress 035 005 Fig. 3-98
GF_RC: GF memory overflow 035 006 Fig. 3-99

Fault Data Acquisition FT_DA: Trigger EXT 036 088 Fig. 3-101

Fault Recording FT_RC: Record. trig active 002 002 Fig. 3-105
FT_RC: Reset record. USER 005 243 Fig: 3-3,
3-4,3-105,
3-106,3-107,
Bild*: 3-82
FT_RC: Trigger EXT 036 089 Fig. 3-105
FT_RC: Trigger 037 076 Fig. 3-105
FT_RC: Record. in progress 035 000 Fig. 3-105
FT_RC: System disturb. runn 035 004 Fig. 3-105
FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow 035 001 Fig. 3-106
FT_RC: Faulty time tag 035 002

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-27

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Distance protection DIST: Enabled 036 104 Fig. 3-108

DIST: Blocking Z1 EXT 036 034 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Blocking Z1,ze EXT 036 036 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Blocking Z2 EXT 036 037 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Blocking Z3 EXT 036 039 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Blocking Z4 EXT 036 041 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Blocking Z5 EXT 036 044 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Blocking Z6 EXT 036 061 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Blocking Z7 EXT 036 067 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Blocking Z8 EXT 036 068 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Starting I>> A 040 064 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Starting I>> B 040 065 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Starting I>> C 040 097 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Starting V< A 040 067 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Starting V< B 040 075 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Starting V< C 040 096 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Starting Z< A 040 070 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Starting Z< B 040 071 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Starting Z< C 040 072 Fig. 3-119
DIST: Start. switch. to PG 040 052 Fig. 3-111
DIST: VNG>> triggered 036 015 Fig. 3-110
DIST: Fault forward / LS 036 018 Fig. 3-123
DIST: Fault backward / BS 036 019 Fig. 3-123
DIST: Direct. using Vmeas 038 045 Fig. 3-123
DIST: Direct. using memory 038 047 Fig. 3-123
DIST: Forw. w/o measurem. 038 044 Fig. 3-123
DIST: tVmemory running 040 034 Fig. 3-121
DIST: Zone extension 036 065 Fig: 3-129, 3-
133
DIST: Zone extension EXT 036 046 Fig: 3-129, 3-
133
DIST: Zone extension HSR 036 103 Fig: 3-129, 3-
133
DIST: Zone extension TDR 038 022 Fig: 3-129, 3-
133
DIST: tIN> running 036 105 Fig. 3-110
DIST: tVNG>> elapsed 036 016 Fig. 3-110
DIST: t1 elapsed 036 026 Fig. 3-134
DIST: t1,ze elapsed 035 079 Fig. 3-134
DIST: t2 elapsed 036 027 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t3 elapsed 036 028 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t4 elapsed 036 029 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t5 elapsed 036 030 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t6 elapsed 036 031 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t7 elapsed 037 127 Fig. 3-135
DIST: t8 elapsed 037 128 Fig. 3-135
DIST: Trip signal 036 009 Fig. 3-149
DIST: Trip signal zone 1 035 072 Fig: 3-137, 3-
140,3-142, 3-
144, 3-146,
3-148
DIST: Trip signal Z1,ze 035 074 Fig: 3-137, 3-
140, 3-142,
3-144, 3-146,
3-148
DIST: Trip sig. zone 2-6 035 073 Fig. 3-149

8-28 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

DIST: Trip signal zone 2 041 084 Fig: 3-137, 3-

140, 3-142,
3-144, 3-146,
3-148
DIST: Trip signal zone 3 040 056 Fig: 3-137, 3-
140, 3-142,
3-144, 3-146,
3-148
DIST: Trip signal zone 4 040 057 Fig: 3-137, 3-
142, 3-144,
3-146
DIST: Trip signal zone 5 040 058 Fig: 3-137, 3-
140, 3-142,
3-144, 3-146,
3-148
DIST: Trip signal zone 6 040 059 Fig: 3-137, 3-
140, 3-142,
3-144, 3-146,
3-148
DIST: Trip signal zone 7 037 129 Fig: 3-137, 3-
140, 3-142,
3-144, 3-146,
3-148
DIST: Trip signal zone 8 037 130 Fig: 3-137, 3-
140, 3-142,
3-144, 3-146,
3-148
DIST: Impedance in zone 6 037 200 Fig. 3-150
DIST: Zero-sequ. starting 036 021 Fig. 3-118
DIST: General starting 036 240 Fig. 3-118
DIST: Starting Z< 036 241 Fig. 3-119

Power swing blocking PSB: Blocking init. EXT 036 069 Fig. 3-154
PSB: Enabled 040 095 Fig. 3-151
PSB: Operate delay runn. 036 058 Fig. 3-154
PSB: Blocking initiated 036 032 Fig. 3-154
PSB: Z within polygon 036 024 Fig. 3-152
PSB: IP> triggered 036 012 Fig. 3-154
PSB: Ineg> triggered 036 011 Fig. 3-154
PSB: IN> triggered 036 010 Fig. 3-154
PSB: Trip signal 036 025 Fig. 3-155

Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCMON: Enabled 040 094 Fig. 3-157

MCMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 040 087 Fig. 3-157
MCMON: Undervoltage 038 038 Fig. 3-158
MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 038 049 Fig. 3-158
MCMON: Vneg> triggered 041 079 Fig. 3-158
MCMON: FF,V triggered 035 081 Fig. 3-160
MCMON: FF, Vref triggered 038 100 Fig. 3-161
MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 038 023 Fig: 3-151, 3-
156
MCMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 040 078 Fig. 3-156
MCMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 037 020 Fig. 3-156
MCMON: Zero-sequ. starting 041 080 Fig. 3-156
MCMON: Peripheral fault 038 024 Fig. 3-156
MCMON: Meas. voltage o.k. 038 048 Fig. 3-158

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-29

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Backup overcurrent-time BUOC: Enabled 040 093 Fig. 3-162

protection (Backup DTOC)
BUOC: Active 037 021 Fig. 3-162
BUOC: Starting 036 013 Fig. 3-162
BUOC: Trip signal 036 014 Fig. 3-162

Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: Par. ARC running EXT 039 063 Fig. 3-163
SOTF: Enabled 040 069 Fig. 3-163
SOTF: Z1 extended 035 076 Fig. 3-163
SOTF: tManual-close runn. 036 063 Fig. 3-163
SOTF: Trip signal 036 064 Fig. 3-163

Protective Signaling PSIG: Enable EXT 037 025 Fig. 3-164

PSIG: Disable EXT 037 026 Fig. 3-164
PSIG: Test telecom. EXT 036 038 Fig. 3-185
PSIG: Telecom. faulty EXT 004 064 Fig. 3-165
PSIG: Blocking EXT 036 049 Fig. 3-164
PSIG: Block. weak inf. EXT 036 255

PSIG: Receive EXT 036 048 Fig: 3-166, 3-

167, 3-170,
3-171, 3-173,
3-175, 3-177,
3-179, 3-180,
3-181, 3-182,
3-184
PSIG: Weak inf. trigg. EXT 043 062 Fig. 3-183
PSIG: Freq. mon. trig. EXT 038 080 Fig. 3-167
PSIG: Ext./user enabled 037 023 Fig. 3-164
PSIG: Enabled 015 008 Fig. 3-164
PSIG: Ready 037 027 Fig. 3-164
PSIG: Not ready 037 028 Fig. 3-164
PSIG: Test telecom. 034 016 Fig. 3-185
PSIG: Telecom. faulty 036 060 Fig. 3-166
PSIG: Send (signal) 036 035 Fig: 3-170, 3-
171, 3-173,
3-175, 3-177,
3-179, 3-182,
3-184, 3-185
PSIG: Send (transm.relay) 037 024 Fig: 3-170, 3-
171, 3-173,
3-175, 3-177,
3-179, 3-182,
3-184,3-185
PSIG: Receive (signal) 037 029 Fig: 3-170, 3-
171, 3-173,
3-175, 3-177,
3-179, 3-181,
3-182
PSIG: Z1 extended 035 075 Fig: 3-173, 3-
175, 3-177,
3-179, 3-181
PSIG: t1 revers.interlock 036 020 Fig. 3-181
PSIG: Weak infeed start. 043 064 Fig. 3-183
PSIG: Trip signal 038 007 Fig: 3-170, 3-
171, 3-173,
3-175, 3-177,
3-179, 3-182

8-30 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: Reset counters EXT 005 244 Fig.*: 3-82
ARC: Enable EXT 037 010 Fig. 3-187
ARC: Disable EXT 037 011 Fig. 3-187
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C EXT 037 017 Fig. 3-192
ARC: General starting EXT 037 096 Fig. 3-197
ARC: Blocking EXT 036 050 Fig. 3-189
ARC: CB drive ready EXT 004 066 Fig. 3-188
ARC: Ext./user enabled 037 013 Fig. 3-187
ARC: Enabled 015 064 Fig. 3-187
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C 034 023 Fig. 3-192
ARC: Blocked 004 069 Fig. 3-189
ARC: Ready 004 068 Fig. 3-188
ARC: Not ready 037 008 Fig. 3-188
ARC: Reject test HSR 036 055 Fig. 3-192
ARC: Block. time running 037 004 Fig. 3-189
ARC: Cycle running 037 000 Fig. 3-197
ARC: Oper. time 1 running 037 005 Fig. 3-197
ARC: Dead time running 037 002 Fig. 3-197
ARC: Dead time 3p running 037 067 Fig. 3-197
ARC: Dead time TDR runn. 037 003 Fig. 3-197
ARC: Reclaim time running 036 042 Fig. 3-197
ARC: (Re)close signal HSR 037 007 Fig. 3-197
ARC: (Re)close signal TDR 037 006 Fig. 3-197
ARC: Reclosure successful 036 062 Fig. 3-197
ARC: Sig.interr. CB trip 036 040 Fig. 3-197
ARC: 3p final trip 036 043 Fig. 3-197

Automatic Synchronism ASC: Reset counters EXT 006 074 Fig: 3-212,
Check Fig.*: 3-82
ASC: Enable EXT 037 049 Fig. 3-200
ASC: Disable EXT 037 061 Fig. 3-200
ASC: AR close request EXT 000 106 Page: 3-289
ASC: Blocking EXT 037 048 Fig. 3-201
ASC: Test close requ. EXT 037 064 Fig. 3-202
ASC: Enabl.close requ.EXT 037 063 Fig. 3-202
ASC: Close request EXT 037 062 Fig. 3-202
ASC: Ext. enabled 037 092 Fig. 3-200
ASC: Enabled 018 024 Fig. 3-200
ASC: Blocked 038 018 Fig. 3-201
ASC: Ready 037 079 Fig. 3-201
ASC: Not ready 037 082 Fig. 3-201
ASC: Test close request 034 019 Fig. 3-202
ASC: Close request 034 018 Fig. 3-202
ASC: Cycle running 038 019 Fig. 3-209
ASC: Operat.time running 037 093 Fig. 3-209
ASC: Close enable 037 083 Fig: 3-205, 3-
206
ASC: Close enable,volt.ch 037 085 Fig: 3-205, 3-
206
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch 037 084 Fig: 3-207, 3-
208
ASC: Close rejection 037 086 Fig. 3-209

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-31

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Blocking tI> EXT 041 060 Fig. 3-214
protection
DTOC: Blocking tI>> EXT 041 061 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: Blocking tI>>> EXT 041 062 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: Blocking tI>>>> EXT 041 100 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: Blocking tIneg> EXT 041 102 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: Blocking tIneg>> EXT 041 103 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: Block. tIneg>>> EXT 041 104 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: Block. tIneg>>>> EXT 041 105 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: Blocking tIN> EXT 041 063 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Blocking tIN>> EXT 041 064 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Blocking tIN>>> EXT 041 065 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Blocking tIN>>>> EXT 041 101 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Enabled 040 120 Fig. 3-213
DTOC: Starting I> 035 020 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: Starting I>> 035 021 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: Starting I>>> 035 022 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: Starting I>>>> 035 023 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: tI> elapsed 040 010 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: tI>> elapsed 040 011 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: tI>>> elapsed 040 012 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: tI>>>> elapsed 035 032 Fig. 3-214
DTOC: Starting Ineg> 035 024 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: Starting Ineg>> 035 025 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: Starting Ineg>>> 035 026 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: Starting Ineg>>>> 035 027 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: tIneg> elapsed 035 033 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: tIneg>> elapsed 035 034 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: tIneg>>> elapsed 035 035 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: tIneg>>>> elapsed 035 036 Fig. 3-215
DTOC: Starting IN> 035 028 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Starting IN>> 035 029 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Starting IN>>> 035 030 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Starting IN>>>> 035 031 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Fault N forward 035 047 Fig. 3-219
DTOC: Fault N backward 035 048 Fig. 3-219
DTOC: H.-time tIN>,i. runn 040 086 Fig. 3-221
DTOC: tIN>,interm. elapsed 040 099 Fig. 3-221
DTOC: tIN> elapsed 035 037 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: tIN>> elapsed 035 038 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: tIN>>> elapsed 035 039 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: tIN>>>> elapsed 035 040 Fig. 3-217
DTOC: Trip sig. tIN>,intm. 039 073 Fig. 3-221
DTOC: Trip signal tIN> 035 043 Fig. 3-220
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>> 035 044 Fig. 3-220
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>>> 035 045 Fig. 3-220
DTOC: Trip sign. tIN>>>> 035 046 Fig. 3-220

8-32 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: Block. tIref,P> EXT 040 101 Fig. 3-231
Protection
IDMT: Block. tIref,neg>EXT 040 102 Fig. 3-231
IDMT: Block. tIref,N> EXT 040 103 Fig. 3-231
IDMT: Enabled 040 100 Fig. 3-224
IDMT: Starting Iref,P> 040 080 Fig. 3-231
IDMT: Trip signal tIref,P> 040 084 Fig. 3-231
IDMT: Starting Iref,neg> 040 107 Fig. 3-231
IDMT: Trip sig. tIref,neg> 040 108 Fig. 3-231
IDMT: Starting Iref,N> 040 081 Fig. 3-231
IDMT: Trip signal tIref,N> 040 085 Fig. 3-231
IDMT: Neg.seq.syst. forw. 035 041 Fig. 3-234
IDMT: Neg.seq.syst. backw. 035 042 Fig. 3-234

Ground fault direction GFDSS: Reset counters EXT 005 245 Fig: 3-243,
determination using 3-249,
Bild*: 3-82
steady-state values
GFDSS: GF (curr.) eval. EXT 038 020 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: Enabled 042 096 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: GF (pow.) ready 038 026 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: GF (pow.) not ready 038 027 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: GF (curr.) evaluat. 039 071 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: GF (curr.) ready 038 028 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: GF (curr.) not ready 038 029 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: Admittance ready 038 167 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: Admittance not ready 038 168 Fig. 3-236
GFDSS: Grd. fault pow./adm. 009 037 Fig: 3-238, 3-
244
GFDSS: Forward / LS 009 035 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
GFDSS: Direct. backward/BS 009 036 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
GFDSS: Starting forward/LS 009 040 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
GFDSS: Starting backward/BS 009 041 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
GFDSS: Trip signal forw./LS 009 031 Fig: 3-241, 3-
247
GFDSS: Ground fault (curr.) 009 038 Fig. 3-242
GFDSS: Starting Y(N)> 009 074 Fig. 3-248
GFDSS: Trip Y(N)> 009 075 Fig. 3-248
GFDSS: Trip signal Y(N)> 009 072 Fig. 3-248

Ground Fault Tripping GFTRP: Blocking EXT 037 046 Fig. 3-250
GFTRP: VNG> triggered EXT 037 047 Fig. 3-250
GFTRP: Enabled 040 092 Fig. 3-250
GFTRP: Trip signal 037 091 Fig. 3-250

Ground Fault Protection GFSIG: Test telecom. EXT 037 045 Fig. 3-251
Signaling
GFSIG: Receive EXT 037 044 Fig. 3-251
GFSIG: Enabled 040 091 Fig. 3-251
GFSIG: Test telecom. 034 025 Fig. 3-251
GFSIG: Telecom. faulty 038 017 Fig. 3-251
GFSIG: Send (signal) 037 088 Fig. 3-251
GFSIG: Send (transm.relay) 037 089 Fig. 3-251
GFSIG: Trip signal 037 087 Fig. 3-251

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-33

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Transient ground fault TGFD: Blocking EXT 004 034 Fig. 3-252
direction determination
TGFD: Reset counters EXT 005 246 Fig: 3-247,
Fig.*: 3-82
TGFD: Reset signals EXT 004 140 Fig: 3-256,
Fig.*: 3-82
TGFD: Enabled 037 100 Fig. 3-252
TGFD: Ready 037 080 Fig. 3-252
TGFD: Not ready 037 081 Fig. 3-252
TGFD: Ground fault 004 033 Fig. 3-254
TGFD: Direct. determined 004 030 Fig. 3-255
TGFD: Forward / LS 004 031 Fig. 3-255
TGFD: Direct. backward/BS 004 032 Fig. 3-255
TGFD: Signal reset 004 141 Fig. 3-256

Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Replica block EXT 041 074 Fig. 3-262
THERM: Reset replica EXT 038 061 Fig: 3-263,
Fig.*: 3-82
THERM: Enabled 040 068 Fig. 3-259
THERM: Reset replica 039 061 Fig. 3-263
THERM: Starting k*Iref> 041 108 Fig. 3-262
THERM: CTA error EXT 038 062 Fig. 3-261
THERM: Warning 039 025 Fig. 3-262
THERM: Trip signal 039 020 Fig. 3-262
THERM: Buffer empty 039 112 Fig. 3-262
THERM: CTA error 039 111 Fig. 3-261
THERM: Within pre-trip time 041 109 Fig. 3-262
THERM: Setting error,block. 039 110 Fig. 3-262

Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Blocking tV> EXT 041 068 Fig. 3-266
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT 041 069 Fig. 3-266
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT 041 070 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT 041 071 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Blocking tVpos> EXT 041 090 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Blocking tVpos>> EXT 041 091 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Blocking tVpos< EXT 041 092 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Blocking tVpos<< EXT 041 093 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Blocking tVneg> EXT 041 094 Fig. 3-270
V<>: Blocking tVneg>> EXT 041 095 Fig. 3-270
V<>: Blocking tVNG> EXT 041 072 Fig. 3-272
V<>: Blocking tVNG>> EXT 041 073 Fig. 3-272
V<>: Enabled 040 066 Fig. 3-264
V<>: Ready 042 003 Fig. 3-264
V<>: Not ready 042 004 Fig. 3-264
V<>: Starting V>/>> A(-B) 041 031 Fig. 3-266
V<>: Starting V>/>> B(-C) 041 032 Fig. 3-266
V<>: Starting V>/>> C(-A) 041 033 Fig. 3-266
V<>: Starting V> 041 030 Fig. 3-266
V<>: Starting V> 3-pole 041 097 Fig. 3-266
V<>: Starting V>> 041 096 Fig. 3-266
V<>: tV> elapsed 041 034 Fig. 3-266
V<>: tV> 3-pole elapsed 041 098 Fig. 3-266
V<>: tV>> elapsed 041 035 Fig. 3-266
V<>: Starting V</<< A(-B) 041 038 Fig. 3-267

8-34 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

V<>: Starting V</<< B(-C) 041 039 Fig. 3-267

V<>: Starting V</<< C(-A) 041 040 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Starting V< 041 037 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Starting V< 3-pole 042 005 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Starting V<< 041 099 Fig. 3-267
V<>: tV< elapsed 041 041 Fig. 3-267
V<>: tV< elaps. transient 042 023 Fig. 3-267
V<>: tV< 3-pole elapsed 042 006 Fig. 3-267
V<>: tV< 3p elaps. trans. 042 024 Fig. 3-267
V<>: tV<< elapsed 041 042 Fig. 3-267
V<>: tV<< elapsed trans. 042 025 Fig. 3-267
V<>: tV</<< elaps. trans. 042 007 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Fault V< 041 110 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Fault V< 3-pole 041 111 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Fault V<< 041 112 Fig. 3-267
V<>: Starting Vpos> 042 010 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Starting Vpos>> 042 011 Fig. 3-269
V<>: tVpos> elapsed 042 012 Fig. 3-269
V<>: tVpos>> elapsed 042 013 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Starting Vpos< 042 014 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Starting Vpos<< 042 015 Fig. 3-269
V<>: tVpos< elapsed 042 016 Fig. 3-269
V<>: tVpos< elaps. trans. 042 026 Fig. 3-269
V<>: tVpos<< elapsed 042 017 Fig. 3-269
V<>: tVpos<< elaps.trans. 042 027 Fig. 3-269
V<>: tVpos</<< elap.trans 042 018 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Fault Vpos< 041 113 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Fault Vpos<< 041 114 Fig. 3-269
V<>: Starting Vneg> 042 019 Fig. 3-270
V<>: Starting Vneg>> 042 020 Fig. 3-270
V<>: tVneg> elapsed 042 021 Fig. 3-270
V<>: tVneg>> elapsed 042 022 Fig. 3-270
V<>: Starting VNG> 041 044 Fig. 3-272
V<>: Starting VNG>> 042 008 Fig. 3-272
V<>: tVNG> elapsed 041 045 Fig. 3-272
V<>: tVNG>> elapsed 041 046 Fig. 3-272

Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT 006 075 Fig.*: 3-82

Protection
f<>: Blocking f1 EXT 042 103 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Blocking f2 EXT 042 104

f<>: Blocking f3 EXT 042 105

f<>: Blocking f4 EXT 042 106

f<>: Enabled 042 100 Fig. 3-273

f<>: Ready 042 101 Fig. 3-273
f<>: Not ready 042 140 Fig. 3-273
f<>: Blocked by V< 042 102 Fig. 3-275
f<>: Starting f1 042 107 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Starting f1/df1 042 108 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Delta f1 triggered 042 109 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Delta t1 elapsed 042 110 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Trip signal f1 042 111 Fig. 3-277
f<>: Starting f2 042 115

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-35

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

f<>: Starting f2/df2 042 116

f<>: Delta f2 triggered 042 117

f<>: Delta t2 elapsed 042 118

f<>: Trip signal f2 042 119

f<>: Starting f3 042 123

f<>: Starting f3/df3 042 124

f<>: Delta f3 triggered 042 125

f<>: Delta t3 elapsed 042 126

f<>: Trip signal f3 042 127

f<>: Starting f4 042 131

f<>: Starting f4/df4 042 132

f<>: Delta f4 triggered 042 133

f<>: Delta t4 elapsed 042 134

f<>: Trip signal f4 042 135

Power Directional Protection P<>: Blocking tP> EXT 035 082 Fig. 3-280
P<>: Blocking tP>> EXT 035 083 Fig. 3-280
P<>: Blocking tQ> EXT 035 084 Fig. 3-282
P<>: Blocking tQ>> EXT 035 085 Fig. 3-282
P<>: Blocking tP< EXT 035 050 Fig. 3-284
P<>: Blocking tP<< EXT 035 051 Fig. 3-284
P<>: Blocking tQ< EXT 035 052 Fig. 3-287
P<>: Blocking tQ<< EXT 035 053 Fig. 3-287
P<>: Enabled 036 250 Fig. 3-278
P<>: Starting P> 035 086 Fig. 3-280
P<>: Starting P>> 035 089 Fig. 3-280
P<>: Signal P> delayed 035 087 Fig. 3-280
P<>: Signal P>> delayed 035 090 Fig. 3-280
P<>: Trip signal P> 035 088 Fig. 3-281
P<>: Trip signal P>> 035 091 Fig. 3-281
P<>: Starting Q> 035 092 Fig. 3-282
P<>: Starting Q>> 035 095 Fig. 3-282
P<>: Signal Q> delayed 035 093 Fig. 3-282
P<>: Signal Q>> delayed 035 096 Fig. 3-282
P<>: Trip signal Q> 035 094 Fig. 3-283
P<>: Trip signal Q>> 035 097 Fig. 3-283
P<>: Starting P< 035 054 Fig. 3-284
P<>: Starting P<< 035 060 Fig. 3-284
P<>: Signal P< delayed 035 055 Fig. 3-284
P<>: Signal P<< delayed 035 061 Fig. 3-284
P<>: tP< elapsed trans. 035 056 Fig. 3-284
P<>: tP<< elapsed trans. 035 062 Fig. 3-284
P<>: tP</tP<< elaps.trans 035 178 Fig. 3-284
P<>: Fault P< 035 057 Fig. 3-284
P<>: Fault P<< 035 063 Fig. 3-284
P<>: Trip signal P< 035 058 Fig. 3-285
P<>: Trip signal P<< 035 064 Fig. 3-285
P<>: Trip signal P< trans 035 059 Fig. 3-285
P<>: Trip sig. P<< trans. 035 065 Fig. 3-285
P<>: Starting Q< 035 066 Fig. 3-287
P<>: Starting Q<< 035 010 Fig. 3-287
P<>: Signal Q< delayed 035 067 Fig. 3-287

8-36 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

P<>: Signal Q<< delayed 035 011 Fig. 3-287

P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. 035 068 Fig. 3-287
P<>: tQ<< elapsed trans. 035 016 Fig. 3-287
P<>: tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans 035 179 Fig. 3-287
P<>: Fault Q< 035 069 Fig. 3-287
P<>: Fault Q<< 035 049 Fig. 3-287
P<>: Trip signal Q< 035 155 Fig. 3-288
P<>: Trip signal Q<< 035 176 Fig. 3-288
P<>: Trip sig. Q< trans. 035 156 Fig. 3-288
P<>: Trip sig. Q<< trans. 035 177 Fig. 3-288
P<>: Direction P forw. 035 181 Fig. 3-290
P<>: Direction P backw. 035 191 Fig. 3-290
P<>: Direction Q forw. 035 193 Fig. 3-291
P<>: Direction Q backw. 035 194 Fig. 3-291

Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Enable EXT 038 041 Fig. 3-292
Protection
CBF: Disable EXT 038 042 Fig. 3-292
CBF: Blocking EXT 038 058 Fig. 3-293
CBF: Start enable EXT 038 209 Fig. 3-296
CBF: Start 3p EXT 038 205 Fig. 3-296
CBF: Starting trig. EXT 038 016 Fig. 3-292
CBF: CB faulty EXT 038 234 Fig. 3-297
CBF: Ext./user enabled 038 040 Fig. 3-292
CBF: Enabled 040 055 Fig. 3-292
CBF: Ready 038 009

CBF: Not ready 040 025 Fig. 3-293

CBF: CB pos. implausible 038 210 Fig. 3-295
CBF: Current flow A 038 230 Fig. 3-294
CBF: Current flow B 038 231 Fig. 3-294
CBF: Current flow C 038 232 Fig. 3-294
CBF: Current flow Phx 038 233 Fig. 3-294
CBF: Startup 3p 038 211 Fig. 3-296
CBF: Trip signal t1 038 215 Fig. 3-297
CBF: Trip signal t2 038 219 Fig. 3-297
CBF: Trip command t1 038 220 Fig. 3-297
CBF: Trip command t2 038 224 Fig. 3-297
CBF: CB failure 036 017 Fig. 3-292
,3-297
CBF: Starting 038 021 Fig. 3-299
CBF: Trip signal 040 026 Fig: 3-292,
3-299
CBF: Fault behind CB 038 225 Fig. 3-300
CBF: TripSig CBsync.super 038 226 Fig. 3-301
CBF: CBsync.superv A open 038 227 Fig. 3-301
CBF: CBsync.superv B open 038 228 Fig. 3-301
CBF: CBsync.superv C open 038 229 Fig. 3-301

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-37

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Reset meas.val. EXT 005 247 Fig.*: 3-82
CBM: Blocking EXT 044 128 Fig. 3-310
CBM: Enabled 044 130 Fig. 3-302
CBM: Cycle running A 044 205 Page: 3-406
CBM: Cycle running B 044 206

CBM: Cycle running C 044 207

CBM: Blocked 044 199 Fig. 3-310

CBM: Sig. No. CB op. > 044 135 Fig. 3-309
CBM: Sig. Rem. No.CB op.< 044 136 Fig. 3-308
CBM: Signal ΣItrip> 044 137

CBM: Signal ΣItrip**2> 044 138

CBM: Signal ΣI*t> 044 139

CBM: tmax> A 044 177

CBM: tmax> B 044 178

CBM: tmax> C 044 179

CBM: Curr. flow ended A 044 201

CBM: Curr. flow ended B 044 202

CBM: Curr. flow ended C 044 203

CBM: Setting error CBM 044 204

8-38 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Enabled 040 074 Fig: 3-311,

3-315
LIMIT: tI> elapsed 040 220 Fig. 3-311
LIMIT: tI>> elapsed 040 221 Fig. 3-311
LIMIT: tI< elapsed 040 222 Fig. 3-311
LIMIT: tI<< elapsed 040 223 Fig. 3-311
LIMIT: tVPG> elapsed 040 224 Fig. 3-312
LIMIT: tVPG>> elapsed 040 225 Fig. 3-312
LIMIT: tVPG< elapsed 040 226 Fig. 3-312
LIMIT: tVPG<< elapsed 040 227 Fig. 3-312
LIMIT: tVPP> elapsed 040 228 Fig. 3-312
LIMIT: tVPP>> elapsed 040 229 Fig. 3-312
LIMIT: tVPP< elapsed 040 230 Fig. 3-312
LIMIT: tVPP<< elapsed 040 231 Fig. 3-312
LIMIT: tVNG> elapsed 040 168 Fig. 3-313
LIMIT: tVNG>> elapsed 040 169 Fig. 3-313
LIMIT: tVref> elapsed 042 152 Fig. 3-315
LIMIT: tVref>> elapsed 042 153 Fig. 3-315
LIMIT: tVref< elapsed 042 154 Fig. 3-315
LIMIT: tVref<< elapsed 042 155 Fig. 3-315
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> 040 180 Fig. 3-314
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> 040 181 Fig. 3-314
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed 040 182 Fig. 3-314
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed 040 183 Fig. 3-314
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< 040 184 Fig. 3-314
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< 040 185 Fig. 3-314
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed 040 186 Fig. 3-314
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed 040 187 Fig. 3-314
LIMIT: Starting T> 040 170 Fig. 3-316
LIMIT: Starting T>> 040 171 Fig. 3-316
LIMIT: tT> elapsed 040 172 Fig. 3-316
LIMIT: tT>> elapsed 040 173 Fig. 3-316
LIMIT: Starting T< 040 174 Fig. 3-316
LIMIT: Starting T<< 040 175 Fig. 3-316
LIMIT: tT< elapsed 040 176 Fig. 3-316
LIMIT: tT<< elapsed 040 177 Fig. 3-316

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-39

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Logic LOGIC: Input 1 EXT 034 000 Fig. 3-318

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT 034 001

LOGIC: Input 3 EXT 034 002

LOGIC: Input 4 EXT 034 003

LOGIC: Input 5 EXT 034 004

LOGIC: Input 6 EXT 034 005

LOGIC: Input 7 EXT 034 006

LOGIC: Input 8 EXT 034 007

LOGIC: Input 9 EXT 034 008

LOGIC: Input 10 EXT 034 009

LOGIC: Input 11 EXT 034 010

LOGIC: Input 12 EXT 034 011

LOGIC: Input 13 EXT 034 012

LOGIC: Input 14 EXT 034 013

LOGIC: Input 15 EXT 034 014

LOGIC: Input 16 EXT 034 015 Fig. 3-318

LOGIC: Set 1 EXT 034 051 Fig. 3-317
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT 034 052

LOGIC: Set 3 EXT 034 053

LOGIC: Set 4 EXT 034 054

LOGIC: Set 5 EXT 034 055

LOGIC: Set 6 EXT 034 056

LOGIC: Set 7 EXT 034 057

LOGIC: Set 8 EXT 034 058

LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT 034 059 Fig. 3-317

LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT 034 060

LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT 034 061

LOGIC: Reset 4 EXT 034 062

LOGIC: Reset 5 EXT 034 063

LOGIC: Reset 6 EXT 034 064

LOGIC: Reset 7 EXT 034 065

LOGIC: Reset 8 EXT 034 066

LOGIC: 1 has been set 034 067 Fig. 3-317

LOGIC: 2 has been set 034 068

LOGIC: 3 has been set 034 069

LOGIC: 4 has been set 034 070

LOGIC: 5 has been set 034 071

LOGIC: 6 has been set 034 072

LOGIC: 7 has been set 034 073

LOGIC: 8 has been set 034 074 Fig. 3-299

LOGIC: 1 set externally 034 075 Fig. 3-317
LOGIC: 2 set externally 034 076

LOGIC: 3 set externally 034 077

LOGIC: 4 set externally 034 078

LOGIC: 5 set externally 034 079

LOGIC: 6 set externally 034 080

LOGIC: 7 set externally 034 081

LOGIC: 8 set externally 034 082 Fig. 3-299

LOGIC: Enabled 034 046 Fig. 3-318
LOGIC: Output 1 042 032 Fig. 3-318
LOGIC: Output 1 (t) 042 033 Fig. 3-318
LOGIC: Output 2 042 034

8-40 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

LOGIC: Output 2 (t) 042 035

LOGIC: Output 3 042 036

LOGIC: Output 3 (t) 042 037

LOGIC: Output 4 042 038

LOGIC: Output 4 (t) 042 039

LOGIC: Output 5 042 040

LOGIC: Output 5 (t) 042 041

LOGIC: Output 6 042 042

LOGIC: Output 6 (t) 042 043

LOGIC: Output 7 042 044

LOGIC: Output 7 (t) 042 045

LOGIC: Output 8 042 046

LOGIC: Output 8 (t) 042 047

LOGIC: Output 9 042 048

LOGIC: Output 9 (t) 042 049

LOGIC: Output 10 042 050

LOGIC: Output 10 (t) 042 051

LOGIC: Output 11 042 052

LOGIC: Output 11 (t) 042 053

LOGIC: Output 12 042 054

LOGIC: Output 12 (t) 042 055

LOGIC: Output 13 042 056

LOGIC: Output 13 (t) 042 057

LOGIC: Output 14 042 058

LOGIC: Output 14 (t) 042 059

LOGIC: Output 15 042 060

LOGIC: Output 15 (t) 042 061

LOGIC: Output 16 042 062

LOGIC: Output 16 (t) 042 063

LOGIC: Output 17 042 064

LOGIC: Output 17 (t) 042 065

LOGIC: Output 18 042 066

LOGIC: Output 18 (t) 042 067

LOGIC: Output 19 042 068

LOGIC: Output 19 (t) 042 069

LOGIC: Output 20 042 070

LOGIC: Output 20 (t) 042 071

LOGIC: Output 21 042 072

LOGIC: Output 21 (t) 042 073

LOGIC: Output 22 042 074

LOGIC: Output 22 (t) 042 075

LOGIC: Output 23 042 076

LOGIC: Output 23 (t) 042 077

LOGIC: Output 24 042 078

LOGIC: Output 24 (t) 042 079

LOGIC: Output 25 042 080

LOGIC: Output 25 (t) 042 081

LOGIC: Output 26 042 082

LOGIC: Output 26 (t) 042 083

LOGIC: Output 27 042 084

LOGIC: Output 27 (t) 042 085

LOGIC: Output 28 042 086

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-41

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

LOGIC: Output 28 (t) 042 087

LOGIC: Output 29 042 088

LOGIC: Output 29 (t) 042 089

LOGIC: Output 30 042 090

LOGIC: Output 30 (t) 042 091

LOGIC: Output 31 042 092

LOGIC: Output 31 (t) 042 093

LOGIC: Output 32 042 094 Fig. 3-314

LOGIC: Output 32 (t) 042 095 Fig. 3-314

External devices 01 to 10 DEV01: Open signal EXT 210 030 Fig. 3-331
DEV01: Closed signal EXT 210 031 Fig. 3-331
DEV01: Control state 210 018 Fig: 3-21,
3-325, 3-331
DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036 Fig: 3-325, 3-
331
DEV01: Switch.device closed 210 037 Fig: 3-325, 3-
331
DEV01: Sw. dev. interm.pos 210 038 Fig: 3-325, 3-
331
DEV01: Open command 210 028 Fig. 3-330
DEV01: Close command 210 029 Fig. 3-330
DEV01: Open cmd. received 218 000 Page: 3-430
DEV01: Close cmd. received 218 001 Page: 3-430
DEV02: Open signal EXT 210 080

DEV02: Closed signal EXT 210 081 Fig. 3-62

DEV02: Control state 210 068 Fig. 3-21
DEV02: Switch. device open 210 086

DEV02: Switch.device closed 210 087

DEV02: Sw. dev. interm.pos 210 088

DEV02: Open command 210 078

DEV02: Close command 210 079

DEV02: Open cmd. received 218 002

DEV02: Close cmd. received 218 003

DEV03: Open signal EXT 210 130

DEV03: Closed signal EXT 210 131

DEV03: Control state 210 118 Fig. 3-21

DEV03: Switch. device open 210 136

DEV03: Switch.device closed 210 137

DEV03: Sw. dev. interm.pos 210 138

DEV03: Open command 210 128

DEV03: Close command 210 129

DEV03: Open cmd. received 218 004

DEV03: Close cmd. received 218 005

DEV04: Open signal EXT 210 180

DEV04: Closed signal EXT 210 181

DEV04: Control state 210 168

DEV04: Switch. device open 210 186

DEV04: Switch.device closed 210 187

DEV04: Sw. dev. interm.pos 210 188

DEV04: Open command 210 178

DEV04: Close command 210 179

DEV04: Open cmd. received 218 006

DEV04: Close cmd. received 218 007

8-42 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

DEV05: Open signal EXT 210 230

DEV05: Closed signal EXT 210 231

DEV05: Control state 210 218

DEV05: Switch. device open 210 236

DEV05: Switch.device closed 210 237

DEV05: Sw. dev. interm.pos 210 238

DEV05: Open command 210 228

DEV05: Close command 210 229

DEV05: Open cmd. received 218 008

DEV05: Close cmd. received 218 009

DEV06: Open signal EXT 211 030

DEV06: Closed signal EXT 211 031

DEV06: Control state 211 018

DEV06: Switch. device open 211 036

DEV06: Switch.device closed 211 037

DEV06: Sw. dev. interm.pos 211 038

DEV06: Open command 211 028

DEV06: Close command 211 029

DEV06: Open cmd. received 218 010

DEV06: Close cmd. received 218 011

DEV07: Open signal EXT 211 080

DEV07: Closed signal EXT 211 081

DEV07: Control state 211 068

DEV07: Switch. device open 211 086

DEV07: Switch.device closed 211 087

DEV07: Sw. dev. interm.pos 211 088

DEV07: Open command 211 078

DEV07: Close command 211 079

DEV07: Open cmd. received 218 012

DEV07: Close cmd. received 218 013

DEV08: Open signal EXT 211 130

DEV08: Closed signal EXT 211 131

DEV08: Control state 211 118

DEV08: Switch. device open 211 136

DEV08: Switch.device closed 211 137

DEV08: Sw. dev. interm.pos 211 138

DEV08: Open command 211 128

DEV08: Close command 211 129

DEV08: Open cmd. received 218 014

DEV08: Close cmd. received 218 015

DEV09: Open signal EXT 211 180

DEV09: Closed signal EXT 211 181

DEV09: Control state 211 168

DEV09: Switch. device open 211 186

DEV09: Switch.device closed 211 187

DEV09: Sw. dev. interm.pos 211 188

DEV09: Open command 211 178

DEV09: Close command 211 179

DEV09: Open cmd. received 218 016

DEV09: Close cmd. received 218 017

DEV10: Open signal EXT 211 230

DEV10: Closed signal EXT 211 231 Fig. 3-62

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-43

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

DEV10: Control state 211 218 Fig. 3-21

DEV10: Switch. device open 211 236 Fig: 3-74,
3-314
DEV10: Switch.device closed 211 237 Fig. 3-314
DEV10: Sw. dev. interm.pos 211 238 Fig. 3-314
DEV10: Open command 211 228

DEV10: Close command 211 229

DEV10: Open cmd. received 218 018

DEV10: Close cmd. received 218 019

Interlocking logic ILOCK: Output 1 250 032 Fig. 3-337

ILOCK: Output 2 250 033 Fig. 3-308
ILOCK: Output 3 250 034 Fig. 3-308
ILOCK: Output 4 250 035 Fig. 3-308
ILOCK: Output 5 250 036

ILOCK: Output 6 250 037

ILOCK: Output 7 250 038

ILOCK: Output 8 250 039

ILOCK: Output 9 250 040

ILOCK: Output 10 250 041

ILOCK: Output 11 250 042

ILOCK: Output 12 250 043

ILOCK: Output 13 250 044

ILOCK: Output 14 250 045

ILOCK: Output 15 250 046

ILOCK: Output 16 250 047

ILOCK: Output 17 250 048

ILOCK: Output 18 250 049

ILOCK: Output 19 250 050

ILOCK: Output 20 250 051

ILOCK: Output 21 250 052

ILOCK: Output 22 250 053

ILOCK: Output 23 250 054

ILOCK: Output 24 250 055

ILOCK: Output 25 250 056

ILOCK: Output 26 250 057

ILOCK: Output 27 250 058

ILOCK: Output 28 250 059

ILOCK: Output 29 250 060

ILOCK: Output 30 250 061

ILOCK: Output 31 250 062

ILOCK: Output 32 250 063 Fig. 3-308

8-44 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Single-Pole Commands CMD_1: Command C001 200 001 Fig. 3-338

CMD_1: Command C002 200 006

CMD_1: Command C003 200 011

CMD_1: Command C004 200 016

CMD_1: Command C005 200 021

CMD_1: Command C006 200 026

CMD_1: Command C007 200 031

CMD_1: Command C008 200 036

CMD_1: Command C009 200 041

CMD_1: Command C010 200 046

CMD_1: Command C011 200 051 Fig. 3-334

CMD_1: Command C012 200 056 Fig. 3-334
CMD_1: Command C013 200 061

CMD_1: Command C014 200 066

CMD_1: Command C015 200 071

CMD_1: Command C016 200 076

CMD_1: Command C017 200 081

CMD_1: Command C018 200 086

CMD_1: Command C019 200 091

CMD_1: Command C020 200 096

CMD_1: Command C021 200 101

CMD_1: Command C022 200 106

CMD_1: Command C023 200 111

CMD_1: Command C024 200 116

CMD_1: Command C025 200 121

CMD_1: Command C026 200 126

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-45

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Single-Pole Signals SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT 226 004 Fig. 3-339
SIG_1: Logic signal S001 226 005 Fig. 3-339
SIG_1: Signal S002 EXT 226 012

SIG_1: Logic signal S002 226 013

SIG_1: Signal S003 EXT 226 020

SIG_1: Logic signal S003 226 021

SIG_1: Signal S004 EXT 226 028

SIG_1: Logic signal S004 226 029

SIG_1: Signal S005 EXT 226 036

SIG_1: Logic signal S005 226 037

SIG_1: Signal S006 EXT 226 044

SIG_1: Logic signal S006 226 045

SIG_1: Signal S007 EXT 226 052

SIG_1: Logic signal S007 226 053

SIG_1: Signal S008 EXT 226 060

SIG_1: Logic signal S008 226 061

SIG_1: Signal S009 EXT 226 068

SIG_1: Logic signal S009 226 069

SIG_1: Signal S010 EXT 226 076

SIG_1: Logic signal S010 226 077

SIG_1: Signal S011 EXT 226 084

SIG_1: Logic signal S011 226 085

SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT 226 092 Fig. 3-334

SIG_1: Logic signal S012 226 093 Fig. 3-334
SIG_1: Signal S013 EXT 226 100

SIG_1: Logic signal S013 226 101

SIG_1: Signal S014 EXT 226 108

SIG_1: Logic signal S014 226 109

SIG_1: Signal S015 EXT 226 116

SIG_1: Logic signal S015 226 117

SIG_1: Signal S016 EXT 226 124

SIG_1: Logic signal S016 226 125

SIG_1: Signal S017 EXT 226 132

SIG_1: Logic signal S017 226 133

SIG_1: Signal S018 EXT 226 140

SIG_1: Logic signal S018 226 141

SIG_1: Signal S019 EXT 226 148

SIG_1: Logic signal S019 226 149

SIG_1: Signal S020 EXT 226 156

SIG_1: Logic signal S020 226 157

SIG_1: Signal S021 EXT 226 164

SIG_1: Logic signal S021 226 165

SIG_1: Signal S022 EXT 226 172

SIG_1: Logic signal S022 226 173

SIG_1: Signal S023 EXT 226 180

SIG_1: Logic signal S023 226 181

SIG_1: Signal S024 EXT 226 188

SIG_1: Logic signal S024 226 189

SIG_1: Signal S025 EXT 226 196

SIG_1: Logic signal S025 226 197

SIG_1: Signal S026 EXT 226 204

SIG_1: Logic signal S026 226 205

8-46 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

SIG_1: Signal S027 EXT 226 212

SIG_1: Logic signal S027 226 213

SIG_1: Signal S028 EXT 226 220

SIG_1: Logic signal S028 226 221

SIG_1: Signal S029 EXT 226 228

SIG_1: Logic signal S029 226 229

SIG_1: Signal S030 EXT 226 236

SIG_1: Logic signal S030 226 237

SIG_1: Signal S031 EXT 226 244

SIG_1: Logic signal S031 226 245

SIG_1: Signal S032 EXT 226 252

SIG_1: Logic signal S032 226 253

SIG_1: Signal S033 EXT 227 004

SIG_1: Logic signal S033 227 005

SIG_1: Signal S034 EXT 227 012

SIG_1: Logic signal S034 227 013

SIG_1: Signal S035 EXT 227 020

SIG_1: Logic signal S035 227 021

SIG_1: Signal S036 EXT 227 028

SIG_1: Logic signal S036 227 029

SIG_1: Signal S037 EXT 227 036

SIG_1: Logic signal S037 227 037

SIG_1: Signal S038 EXT 227 044

SIG_1: Logic signal S038 227 045

SIG_1: Signal S039 EXT 227 052

SIG_1: Logic signal S039 227 053

SIG_1: Signal S040 EXT 227 060

SIG_1: Logic signal S040 227 061

Binary Counts COUNT: Set counter 1 EXT 217 130 Fig. 3-341
COUNT: Transmit counts EXT 217 009 Fig. 3-341
COUNT: Reset EXT 217 004 Fig: 3-341,
Fig.*: 3-82
COUNT: Enabled 217 001 Fig. 3-341
COUNT: Transmit counts 217 010 Fig. 3-341
COUNT: Reset 217 005 Fig. 3-341

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-47

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

8.1.2 Control and Testing

Device DVICE: Service info 031 080 031 080

Local control panel LOC: Param. change enabl. 003 010

Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.

Communication interface 1 COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test 003 180 Fig. 3-16

Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM1: Test spont.sig.start 003 184 Fig. 3-16

Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".

COMM1: Test spont.sig. end 003 186 Fig. 3-16

Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".

Communication interface 2 COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test 103 180 Fig. 3-18

Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM2: Test spont.sig.start 103 184 Fig. 3-18

Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".

COMM2: Test spont.sig. end 103 186 Fig. 3-18

Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".

Communication interface 3 COMM3: Reset No.tlgerr USER 120 037 Page: 3-29
COMM3: Send signal for test 120 050 Page: 3-29
COMM3: Log. state for test 120 051 Page: 3-29
COMM3: Send signal, test 120 053 Page: 3-29
COMM3: Loop back send 120 055 Page: 3-29
COMM3: Loop back test 120 054 Page: 3-29
COMM3: Hold-time for test 120 052 Page: 3-29

IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Reset statistics 105 171

Status Events
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L 105 160

Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H 105 161

Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to
32).
GSSE: Tx message counter 105 162

Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: Rx message counter 105 163

Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset counters.

8-48 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

GSSE: No. bin.state chang. 105 164

Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: Tx last sequence 105 165

State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent with
each GSSE.
GSSE: Tx last message 105 166

State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
GSSE: No. reject. messages 105 167

Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible

message content. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED view selection 105 170

Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is
to be displayed.
GSSE: IED receiv. messages 105 172

Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.

GSSE: IED Rx last sequence 105 173

State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received
with each GSSE.
GSSE: IED Rx last message 105 174

State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with
each GSSE.
GSSE: IED missed messages 105 175

Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED missed changes 105 176

Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED time-outs 105 177

Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed. This
counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .

Measured Data Input MEASI: Rst. temp. Tmax USER 003 045

Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9)

to updated measured values.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-49

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Binary outputs OUTP: Reset latch. USER 021 009 Fig. 3-30

Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel.

OUTP: Relay assign. f.test 003 042 Fig. 3-31

Selection of an output relay to be tested.

OUTP: Relay test 003 043 Fig. 3-31

The output relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration of the set
time ( O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t ).

This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-

Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
OUTP: Hold-time for test 003 044 Fig. 3-31

Setting the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered
during functional testing.

Measured Data Output MEASO: Reset output USER 037 116 Fig. 3-34

Resetting the measured data output function.

Main function MAIN: General reset USER 003 002 Fig. 3-81

Reset of the following memories:

All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-
Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER 021 010 Fig. 3-81

Reset of the following displays:

LED indicators
Fault data
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER 021 005

Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER 003 007 Fig: 3-63,
3-74
The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset.
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.USER 003 033 Fig. 3-45

The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset.

8-50 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

MAIN: Reset meas.v.en.USER 003 032 Fig. 3-55

The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
MAIN: Group reset 1 USER 005 253 Fig. 3-82
MAIN: Group reset 2 USER 005 254

Group of resetting commands.

MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER 003 040 Fig. 3-72

A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel. This setting
is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control
Operations' in Chapter 6).

Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command

has been configured as trip command 1 or 2.
MAIN: En.man.clos.cmd.USER 003 105 Fig. 3-63

Setting for the release of a close command from the local control panel.
MAIN: Man. close cmd. USER 018 033 Fig. 3-63

A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled
'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Warm restart 003 039

A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the
power supply is turned on.
MAIN: Cold restart 000 085

A cold restart is carried out. This setting is password-protected (see section

entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. Parameter values
used by the after a cold restart have been selected in such a manner that
the is blocked after a cold restart.

Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. USER 100 001 Fig. 3-87

The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.

Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Reset record. USER 003 008 Fig. 3-88

Reset of the monitoring signal memory.

Overload Recording OL_RC: Reset record. USER 100 003 Fig. 3-92

Reset of the overload memory.

Ground fault recording GF_RC: Reset record. USER 100 000 Fig. 3-99

Reset of the ground fault memory.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-51

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Fault Recording FT_RC: Trigger USER 003 041 Fig. 3-105

Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
FT_RC: Reset record. USER 003 006 Fig. 3-106

Reset of the following memories:

LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values

Protective Signaling PSIG: Enable USER 003 132 Fig. 3-164

Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel.

PSIG: Disable USER 003 131 Fig. 3-164

Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel.

PSIG: Test telecom. USER 015 009 Fig. 3-185

A send signal is issued for 500 ms.

Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: Enable USER 003 134 Fig. 3-187

The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Disable USER 003 133 Fig. 3-187

The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C USER 011 066 Fig. 3-192

A three-pole test HSR is triggered.

ARC: Reset counters USER 003 005 Fig. 3-198

The ARC counters are reset.

Automatic Synchronism ASC: Enable USER 003 136 Fig. 3-200

Check
Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel.
ASC: Disable USER 003 135 Fig. 3-200

Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel.

ASC: Close request USER 018 004 Fig. 3-202

A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the
CB if the ASC check is positive.
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-
Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
ASC: Reset counters USER 003 089 Fig. 3-212

The ASC counters are reset.

ASC: Test close requ USER 018 005 Fig. 3-202

A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to
the CB if the check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.

8-52 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: Reset counters USER 003 004 Fig. 3-243
Determination Using Steady-
State Values
The counters for the ground fault direction determination function using
steady-state values are reset.

Ground Fault Protection GFSIG: Test telecom. USER 016 079 Fig. 3-251
Signaling
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.

Transient Ground Fault TGFD: Reset signals USER 003 009 Fig. 3-256
Direction Determination
The direction decisions can be reset while the buffer time is elapsing.
TGFD: Reset counters USER 003 022 Fig. 3-258

The counters for the transient ground fault direction determination function
are reset.

Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Reset replica USER 022 061 Fig. 3-263

Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.

Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Reset meas.val. USER 003 080

Protection
Resetting the measured event values f < > : m a x . f r e q u . f o r f > and
f<>: min. frequ. for f<.

Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Enable USER 003 016

Protection
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
CBF: Disable USER 003 015 Fig. 3-292

Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-53

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Initialize values 003 011 Fig. 3-288

Setting default values.

CBM: Reset meas.val. USER 003 013 Fig. 3-288

Resetting the measured value memories.

CBM: Set No. CB oper. A 022 131 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Set No. CB oper. B 022 132 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Set No. CB oper. C 022 133 Fig. 3-307

Set the number of CB operations.

CBM: Set remain. CB op. A 022 134 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Set remain. CB op. B 022 135 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Set remain. CB op. C 022 136 Fig. 3-307

Set the remaining CB operations.

CBM: Set ΣItrip A 022 137 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Set ΣItrip B 022 138 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Set ΣItrip C 022 139 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 A 022 140 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 B 022 141 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 C 022 142 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Set ΣI*t A 022 143 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Set ΣI*t B 022 144 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Set ΣI*t C 022 145 Fig. 3-307

Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)

Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1 034 038 Fig. 3-318

LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039

LOGIC: Trigger 3 034 040

LOGIC: Trigger 4 034 041

LOGIC: Trigger 5 034 042

LOGIC: Trigger 6 034 043

LOGIC: Trigger 7 034 044

LOGIC: Trigger 8 034 045 Fig. 3-318

Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point of a 100 ms pulse.

Binary Counts COUNT: Transmit counts USER 217 008 Fig. 3-341

Count transmission.
COUNT: Reset USER 217 003 Fig. 3-341

Count reset.

8-54 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

8.1.3 Operating data recording

Operating data recording OP_RC: Operat. data record. 003 024 Fig. 3-87

Point of entry into the operating data log.

Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Mon. signal record. 003 001 Fig. 3-88

Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-55

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

8.2 Events

8.2.1 Event counters

Communication interface 3 COMM3: No. telegram errors 120 042 Page: 3-29

Number of corrupted telegrams.

Main function MAIN: No. general start. 004 000 Fig. 3-68

Number of general starting signals.

MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. 221 087 Page: 3-277,
3-430
MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap. 221 091

Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1 004 006 Fig. 3-74

Number of general trip commands 1.

MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 2 009 050 Fig. 3-74

Number of general trip commands 2.

MAIN: No. final trip cmds. 004 005 Fig. 3-74

Number of final trip commands.

MAIN: No. close commands 009 055 Fig. 3-63

Number of close commands.

MAIN: No. motor drive op. 221 025 Fig. 3-78

Number of times external devices with direct motor control are activated
during the monitoring time.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.out 009 090 Fig. 3-55

Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.inp 009 091 Fig. 3-55

Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
input was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.out 009 092 Fig. 3-55

Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp 009 093 Fig. 3-55

Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.

Operating data recording OP_RC: No. oper. data sig. 100 002 Fig. 3-87

Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.

Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: No. monit. signals 004 019 Fig. 3-88

Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.

Overload Recording OL_RC: No. overload 004 101 Fig. 3-91

Number of overload events.

8-56 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Ground fault recording GF_RC: No. ground faults 004 100 Fig. 3-98

Number of ground faults.

Fault Recording FT_RC: No. of faults 004 020 Fig. 3-105

Number of faults.
FT_RC: No. system disturb. 004 010 Fig. 3-105

Number of system disturbances.

Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: No. of HSR A-B-C 004 004 Fig. 3-198

Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.

ARC: Number TDR 004 008 Fig. 3-198

Number of time-delay reclosures.

Automatic Synchronism ASC: No. RC aft. man.clos 004 009 Fig. 3-212
Check
Number of reclosures after a manual close request.
ASC: No. close requests 009 033 Fig. 3-212

Number of close requests.

ASC: No. close rejections 009 034 Fig. 3-212

Number of close rejections.

Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: No. GF power/admitt. 009 002 Fig. 3-249
Determination Using Steady-
State Values
Number of ground faults detected by steady-state power evaluation.
GFDSS: No. GF (curr. meas) 009 003 Fig. 3-243

Number of ground faults detected by steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: No. GF admitt. Y(N) 009 060 Fig. 3-249

Number of ground faults (non-directional) detected by the admittance

evaluation method.
GFDSS: No. GF forward/LS 009 000 Fig. 3-249

Number of ground faults in the forward direction.

GFDSS: No. GF backward/BS 009 001 Fig. 3-249

Number of ground faults in the backward direction.

Transient ground fault TGFD: No. GF 004 015 Fig. 3-258

direction determination
Number of transient ground faults.
TGFD: No. GF forward/LS 004 013 Fig. 3-258

Number of transient ground faults in the forward direction.

TGFD: No. GF backward/BS 004 014 Fig. 3-258

Number of ground faults in the backward direction.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-57

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: No. of CB oper. A 008 011 Fig. 3-307
CBM: No. of CB oper. B 008 012 Fig. 3-307
CBM: No. of CB oper. C 008 013 Fig. 3-307

Number of mechanical switching operations made.

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. A 008 014 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. B 008 015 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. C 008 016 Fig. 3-307

Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear

with reference to the CB wear characteristic).

External devices DEV01: Operation counter 210 043

DEV02: Operation counter 210 093

DEV03: Operation counter 210 143

DEV04: Operation counter 210 193

DEV05: Operation counter 210 243

DEV06: Operation counter 211 043

DEV07: Operation counter 211 093

DEV08: Operation counter 211 143

DEV09: Operation counter 211 193

DEV10: Operation counter 211 243

DEV01: Dev. op. capability 210 003

DEV02: Dev. op. capability 210 053

DEV03: Dev. op. capability 210 103

DEV04: Dev. op. capability 210 153

DEV05: Dev. op. capability 210 203

DEV06: Dev. op. capability 211 003

DEV07: Dev. op. capability 211 053

DEV08: Dev. op. capability 211 103

DEV09: Dev. op. capability 211 153

DEV10: Dev. op. capability 211 203

8-58 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

8.2.2 Measured event data

Overload Data Acquisition OL_DA: Overload duration 004 102 Fig. 3-89

Duration of the overload event.

OL_DA: Status THERM replica 004 147 Fig. 3-90

Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

OL_DA: Load current THERM 004 058 Fig. 3-90

Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function
to calculate the tripping time.
OL_DA: Object temp. THERM 004 035 Fig. 3-90

Display of the temperature of the protected object.

OL_DA: Coolant temp. THERM 004 036 Fig. 3-90

Display of the coolant temperature depending on the setting at T H ER M :

Select CTA.
When set to 'Default temp. value' the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to "From PT 100" the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to 'From 20 mA input'
the temperature measured via a 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHERM 004 148 Fig. 3-90

Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold.
OL_DA: Offset THERM replica 004 154 Fig. 3-90

Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into

account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.

If the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant

temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature
is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current
only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-59

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Ground Fault Data GF_DA: GF recording time 009 100 Fig. 3-93
Acquisition
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault.
GF_DA: GF duration pow.meas 009 024 Fig. 3-94

Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the steady-state power evaluation feature of the ground fault
direction determination function.
GF_DA: Voltage VNG p.u. 009 020 Fig. 3-95

Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage of the most recent ground

fault referred to Vnom.
Note: This display is active only when the steady-state power
evaluation mode of the GFDSS ground fault direction
determination function is enabled.
GF_DA: Current IN p.u. 009 021 Fig: 3-95,3-
97
Display of the residual current of the most recent ground fault referred to
IN,nom.

Note: This display is active only when the ground fault direction
determination function using steady state values (GFDSS)
is enabled.
GF_DA: Current IN,act p.u. 009 022 Fig. 3-95

Display of the active component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to IN,nom.
Note: This display is active only when the steady-state power
evaluation mode of the GFDSS ground fault direction
determination function is enabled.
GF_DA: Curr.IN,reac p.u. 009 023 Fig. 3-95

Display of the reactive component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to IN,nom.
Note: This display is active only when the steady-state power
evaluation mode of the GFDSS ground fault direction
determination function is enabled.
GF_DA: GF durat. curr.meas. 009 026 Fig. 3-96

Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the steady-state current evaluation feature of the ground fault
direction determination function.
GF_DA: Curr. IN filt. p.u. 009 025 Fig. 3-97

Display of the residual current component having the set filter frequency for
the most recent ground fault (referred to IN,nom).

8-60 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Fault Data Acquisition FT_DA: Fault duration 008 010 Fig. 3-100

Display of the fault duration.

FT_DA: Running time 004 021 Fig. 3-100

Display of the running time.

FT_DA: Meas. loop selected 004 079 Fig. 3-102

Display of the measuring loop selected for determination of fault data.

FT_DA: Fault current P p.u. 004 025 Fig. 3-102

Display of the fault current referred to Inom.

FT_DA: Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u. 004 026 Fig. 3-102

Display of the fault voltage referred to Vnom.

FT_DA: Fault loop angle P 004 024 Fig. 3-102

Display of the fault angle.

FT_DA: Fault curr. N p.u. 004 049 Fig. 3-102

Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,nom.

FT_DA: Fault loop angle N 004 048 Fig. 3-102

Display of the ground fault angle.

FT_DA: Fault react., prim. 004 029 Fig. 3-102

Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault reactance,sec. 004 028 Fig. 3-102

Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault impedance, sec 004 023 Fig. 3-102

Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault locat. percent 004 027 Fig. 3-103

Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting
FT_DA: Line reactance PSx.
FT_DA: Fault location 004 022 Fig. 3-103

Display of the fault location of the last fault in km.

FT_DA: Load imped.post-flt. 004 037 Fig. 3-104

Display of the load impedance (in Ω) after the general starting condition of
distance protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault has
been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P439.
FT_DA: Load angle post-flt. 004 038 Fig. 3-104

Display of the load angle (in degrees) after the general starting condition of
time-overcurrent protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault
has been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P439.
FT_DA: Resid.curr. post-flt 004 039 Fig. 3-104

Display of the residual current of the last fault referred to Inom. The display
only appears if the fault has been detected by the fault data acquisition
function of the P439.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-61

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Automatic Synchronism ASC: Voltage Vref 004 087 Fig. 3-211

Check
ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop 004 088 Fig: 3-207, 3-
208, 3-211
ASC: Volt. magn. diff. 004 091 Fig: 3-207, 3-
208, 3-211
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop
voltage and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
ASC: Angle difference 004 089 Fig: 3-207, 3-
208, 3-211
Display of the difference between angles (in degrees) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
ASC: Frequ. difference 004 090 Fig: 3-207, 3-
208, 3-211
Display of the difference between frequencies (in Hz) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.

The display only appears if ASC is operating.

Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Angle VNG/IN 009 004 Fig. 3-219

protection
Angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement
voltage

Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Max. frequ. for f> 005 002

Protection
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
f<>: Min. frequ. for f< 005 001

Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.

8-62 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

8 Information and Control Functions
(continued)

Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Itrip,prim A 009 212 Fig. 3-307

CBM: Itrip,prim B 009 213 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Itrip,prim C 009 214 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Itrip A 009 047 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Itrip B 009 048 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Itrip C 009 049 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Itrip**2 A 009 051 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Itrip**2 B 009 052 Fig. 3-307
CBM: Itrip**2 C 009 053 Fig. 3-307

Ruptured currents and their squared values.

CBM: ΣItrip A 009 071 Fig. 3-307
CBM: ΣItrip B 009 073 Fig. 3-307
CBM: ΣItrip C 009 076 Fig. 3-307
CBM: ΣItrip**2 A 009 077 Fig. 3-307
CBM: ΣItrip**2 B 009 078 Fig. 3-307
CBM: ΣItrip**2 C 009 079 Fig. 3-307
CBM: I*t A 009 061 Fig. 3-307
CBM: I*t B 009 062 Fig. 3-307
CBM: I*t C 009 063 Fig. 3-307
CBM: ΣI*t A 009 087 Fig. 3-307
CBM: ΣI*t B 009 088 Fig. 3-307
CBM: ΣI*t C 009 089 Fig. 3-307

Sum of the ruptured currents and of their squared values.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 8-63

8 Information and Control Functions

8.2.3 Event Recording

Overload Recording OL_RC: Overload recording 1 033 020 Fig. 3-92

OL_RC: Overload recording 2 033 021 Fig. 3-92
OL_RC: Overload recording 3 033 022 Fig. 3-92
OL_RC: Overload recording 4 033 023 Fig. 3-92
OL_RC: Overload recording 5 033 024 Fig. 3-92
OL_RC: Overload recording 6 033 025 Fig. 3-92
OL_RC: Overload recording 7 033 026 Fig. 3-92
OL_RC: Overload recording 8 033 027 Fig. 3-92

Point of entry into the overload log.

Ground fault recording GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 1 033 010 Fig. 3-99
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 2 033 011 Fig. 3-99
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 3 033 012 Fig. 3-99
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 4 033 013 Fig. 3-99
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 5 033 014 Fig. 3-99
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 6 033 015 Fig. 3-99
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 7 033 016 Fig. 3-99
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 8 033 017 Fig. 3-99

Point of entry into the ground fault log.

Fault Recording FT_RC: Fault recording 1 003 000 Fig. 3-106

FT_RC: Fault recording 2 033 001 Fig. 3-106
FT_RC: Fault recording 3 033 002 Fig. 3-106
FT_RC: Fault recording 4 033 003 Fig. 3-106
FT_RC: Fault recording 5 033 004 Fig. 3-106
FT_RC: Fault recording 6 033 005 Fig. 3-106
FT_RC: Fault recording 7 033 006 Fig. 3-106
FT_RC: Fault recording 8 033 007 Fig. 3-106

Point of entry into the fault log.

8-64 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning

9 Commissioning

9.1 Safety Instructions

Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.

When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the beginning of
Chapter 5 must be observed.

The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as
the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the
rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor must
conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is
required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.

Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected, always
disconnect the device from the supply.

The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.

The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.

The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage
for the device is shut off.

The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when connecting the prescribed connecting
cable be careful not to touch the socket contacts.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-1

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical
Data')

When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must carry out a
functional type test to conform to the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device
startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.

Installation of the detachable HMI:

A protective conductor (protective earth) with a cross section at least 1.5 mm² must be
connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the detachable HMI at one
end and on the other end to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the device’s
case. Both the detachable HMI and the device have to be installed in the same
substation.
In order to prevent personal injuries the communications cable installed to the
detachable HMI must never come in contact with parts that may be subjected to
dangerous live voltages.
It is prohibited to install or run the communications cable to the detachable HMI next to
high-voltage lines or high-voltage connections. This is to prevent induced currents that
would lead to electromagnetic interferences.

9-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

9.2 Commissioning Test

Preparation
After the P439 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the
commissioning procedure can begin.

Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:

Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?

Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of
the device?
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?

After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.

Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After
voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are
carried out (see Chapter 3, ‘Self-Monitoring’). The LED indicators for ‘Operation’ (H1)
and ‘Blocked/Faulty’ (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s, the P439 is ready for
operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart, the device type “P439 ” and
the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD after the device has started up. If a
bay type has already been selected this bay will then be shown as a single-pole display.

Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Chapter 6, ‘Enabling
Parameter Changes’), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings
from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.

Note: First the type of bay wanted is to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y ,

'Par/Conf/' folder. When the automatic assignment has been enabled at
M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder) then selecting
the type of bay will automatically configure binary signal inputs and output
relays according to the definitions corresponding to the bay type (see 'List of
Bay Types' in the Appendix).

After pressing the ENTER key to confirm the setting parameter 'Type of bay'
the signal 'Bay initialization' is displayed on the LCD for a time duration of
20 s. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. A control action is
not possible during this time period.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-3

9 Commissioning
(continued)

If either the PC interface or the communication interfaces is to be used for setting the
P439 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from
the integrated local control panel:

‘Par/DvID/’ folder:
„ DVICE: Device password 1
„ DVICE: Device password 2

‘Par/Conf/’ folder:
„ PC: Name of manufacturer
„ PC: Bay address
„ PC: Device address
„ PC: Baud rate
„ PC: Parity bit
„ COMM1: Function group COMM1
„ COMM1: General enable USER
„ COMM1: Name of manufacturer
„ COMM1: Line idle state
„ COMM1: Baud rate
„ COMM1: Parity bit
„ COMM1: Communicat. protocol
„ COMM1: Octet comm. address
„ COMM1: Octet address ASDU
„ COMM2: Function group COMM2
„ COMM2: General enable USER
„ COMM2: Name of manufacturer
„ COMM2: Line idle state
„ COMM2: Baud rate
„ COMM2: Parity bit
„ COMM2: Octet comm. address
„ COMM2: Octet address ASDU

9-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder:
„ PC: Command blocking
„ PC: Sig./meas.val.block.
„ COMM1: Command blocking
„ COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER
„ COMM2: Command blocking
„ COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER

Further instructions on these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8.

Note: The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface,
additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.

After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out again
before the blocking is cancelled:

Is the correct bay type configured?

Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection
diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
Are the interlocking conditions and the external interlock inputs correctly configured?
Have all settings been made correctly?

Now blocking can be cleared as follows (‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder):

M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e 'Yes' (on)'

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-5

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P439, it is possible to determine
whether the P439 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals
are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In
addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu
tree.

If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during testing, the trip commands
can be blocked through M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R (‘Par/Func/Glob’
folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit breaker testing is
desired, it is possible to issue a three-pole trip command for a set time duration at
M A I N : M a n . t r i p c m d . U S E R (‘Oper/CtrlTest’ folder) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command from the integrated local
control panel is password-protected (see Chapter 6, "Password-Protected Control
Operations").

Note: The manual trip command is only executed if it has been configured for trip
command 1 or trip command 2.

If the P439 is connected at the control station level, the user is advised to activate the
test mode via M A I N : T e s t m o d e U S E R (folder ‘Par/Func/Glob’) or an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified
accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).

9-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking the binary

signal inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder), it is possible to
determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the protection
device. The values displayed have the following meanings:

"Low": Not energized.

"High": Energized.
"Without function": No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.

This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.

Checking the output relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t in ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). First select the
output relay to be tested (O U T P : R e l a y a s s i g n . f . t e s t , ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
Test triggering then occurs via O U T P : R e l a y t e s t (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). This
control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control
Operations' in Chapter 6).

Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-7

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking the protection

function
Four parameter subsets are stored in the P439, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is
activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m .
s u b s e t (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder).

Checking distance
protection
Before checking the distance protection function using a single-phase testing device,
disable the measuring circuit monitoring function (M C M O N : E n a b l e d U S E R ,
‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) and the fuse failure monitoring function (M C M O N : F F , V
e n a b l e d U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) since they would otherwise always operate
and block distance protection after the set operate delay had elapsed. Furthermore, the
signal at the binary signal input configured for M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V E X T must
have a logic value of 0.

Checking starting
The starting settings can be illustrated in a V-I diagram (see Figure 9-1). The slope of
the impedance line plotted in the V-I diagram is a function of the settings for
underimpedance starting and the phase displacement between the measured variables
(see Figure 9-2).

9-1 Example of the starting settings in a V-I diagram

9-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking I> (Imin), V< and I>>:

The phase displacement between the measured variables V and I should be selected so
as to be smaller than the angle set at D I S T : β P S x .

Checking Z<:
The phase displacement between the measured variables V and I should be selected so
as to be greater than the angle set at D I S T : β P S x .

Note: The measured variables should be selected in accordance with the selected
operate values such that only one starting measuring system operates.
Operation of the checked starting threshold is possible by checking the
phase-selective and starting-selective state signals ('Oper/Cycl/Log' folder).

9-2 Characteristic of underimpedance starting

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-9

9 Commissioning
(continued)

When checking underimpedance starting using single-phase test current, we obtain the
following relation for the operate condition for phase-to-phase starting:

V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test

V test ⋅ e jϕtest
= 2 ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕZ
I test ⋅ e j0 °

For absolute value and angle this means:

V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test

ϕtest = ϕ Z

where:

Z<: Starting Impedance

ϕZ : Impedance Angle

Vtest: Test Voltage

I test : Test Current

ϕtest: Phase angle between test voltage and test current

In the range of the reactance limit, that is, for impedance angle ϕ Z in the range
φL < φz < 110°, the starting impedance is calculated as follows:

Xv
Z< =
sin ϕ Z

Xfw: D I S T : X f w P S x setting

The limit angle φL is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and resistance
limits and is calculated as follows:

X fw
ϕ L = arc tan
Rfw

Rfw : D I S T : R f w , P G P S x or D I S T : R f w , P P P S x setting

9-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

If underimpedance starting is to be checked under all angle conditions, then the starting
impedances for the individual angle ranges are calculated according to the following
formulas:

Angle Range Starting Impedance

β ≤ϕ Z ≤ϕ L Rfw
Z< =
cos ϕ Z

(180° + β )≤ϕ Z ≤(180° + ϕ L ) Rfw Z

Z< = ⋅ bw
cos ϕ Z Z fw

(180° + ϕ L ) < ϕ Z ≤ 290° X fw Z bw

Z< = ⋅
sin ϕ Z Z fw

β: D I S T : β P S x setting
Zbw
: D I S T : Z b w / Z f w P S x setting
Zfw

When phase-to-ground starting conditions are checked, the D I S T : Z e v a l u a t i o n

P S x setting must be taken into account. If ZPG=VPG / 2*/P is set, then the equations
given for phase-to-phase starting apply. If, on the other hand, ZPG=VPG /(/P + kG*IN) is
set, then the set complex ground factor kG must be taken into account if the setting for
D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to one and/or the setting for
D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test is carried out using single-
phase test current, the following relation for the operate condition is obtained:

V test
= (1 + k G ) ⋅ Z <
I test

V test ⋅ e jϕ test
I test ⋅ e j 0° ( )
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z

For absolute value and angle this means:

V test
= ⎛⎜1 + k G + 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cos ϕ G ⎞⎟ ⋅ Z <
2
I test ⎝ ⎠

sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
ϕ test = arc tan
cos ϕ Z + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ Z + ϕ G )

or

sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ test − ϕ G )

ϕ Z = arc tan
cos ϕ test + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ test − ϕ G )

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-11

9 Commissioning
(continued)

where:

Z<: Starting Impedance

ϕZ : Impedance Angle

kG : D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting

ϕG : D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting

V test : Test Voltage

I test : Test Current

ϕ test : Phase angle between test voltage and test current

From the input measured variables, the P439 calculates the residual current IN and the
neutral-displacement voltage VNG, which are used for zero-sequence starting. They are
calculated according to the following formulas:

I N = I A + I B + IC

1
V NG = ⋅ V A −G + V B −G + V C −G
3
For a single-phase test where |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation formula for
VNG given above is that the D I S T : V N G > P S x or D I S T : V N G > > P S x triggers
operate if the test voltage exceeds the following value:

V
V test = 3 ⋅ VNG > ⋅ nom
3
VNG > : D I S T : V N G > P S x or D I S T : V N G > > P S x setting

For a single-phase test where |I B | = |I C | = 0, the following applies to currents:

I test = IN > ⋅Inom

IN > : D I S T : I N > P S x setting

Operation of ground starting is only signaled by the LED indicator if starting also
operates in a phase. The operation of ground starting can be observed, independently
of the operation of phase starting, at D I S T : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g
(‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).

The values determined by the P439 for the residual current IN and the neutral-point
displacement voltage VNG are displayed by the operating data display (current:
M A I N : C u r r e n t I N p . u . and voltage: M A I N : V o l t a g e V N G p . u . in the
‘Oper/Cycl/Meas/’ folder).

9-12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking distance and

directional measurement
When checking the impedance zones using single-phase test current we obtain the
following relation for the operate condition for a phase-to-phase loop:

V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test

V test ⋅ e jϕ test
= 2 ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
j 0°
I test ⋅ e

For absolute value and angle this means:

V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test

ϕ test = ϕ Z

where:

Z<: Tripping impedance

ϕZ : Impedance Angle

V test : Test Voltage

I test : Test Current

ϕ test : Phase angle between test voltage and test current

Characteristics
With the P439, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping
characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern calculation of
the tripping impedances.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-13

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Circle characteristic
If the circle characteristic has been selected, the tripping impedance is set in the P439.
If the setting Arc compensation: yes has also been selected, then the characteristic
shown in Figure 9-3 is obtained when measuring with sinusoidal quantities.

9-3 Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the ‘Circle’ setting

The actual tripping impedance in the ranges −45 ° < ϕ Z < α and 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) is
then calculated as follows:

Z trip = Z ⋅ (1 + sin δ )

The following relation applies in the range −45 ° < ϕ Z < α :

δ = α − ϕZ

The following relation applies in the range 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) :
δ = α − ϕ Z + 180 °

where:

Z trip : Actual tripping impedance

Z: settings D I S T : Z 1 ( c i r c l e ) P S x to D I S T : Z 4 ( c i r c l e ) P S x

ϕZ : Impedance Angle

α: settings D I S T : α 1 ( c i r c l e ) P S x to D I S T : α 4 ( c i r c l e ) P S x

9-14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must be
taken into account if the setting for D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to
one and/or the setting for D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test
is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate
condition is obtained:

V test
I test
(
= 1 + kG ⋅ Z<)

V test ⋅ e jϕ test
I test ⋅ e j 0°
( )
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z

For absolute value and angle this means:

V test ⎛ 2 ⎞
= ⎜1 + k G + 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cosϕG ⎟ ⋅ Z <
I test ⎝ ⎠

sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin(ϕ Z + ϕ G )
ϕ test = arc tan
cos ϕ Z + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ Z + ϕ G )

or

sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin(ϕ test − ϕ G )

ϕ Z = arc tan
cos ϕ test + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ test − ϕ G )

where:

Z<: Tripping impedance

ϕZ : Impedance Angle

kG : D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting

ϕG : D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting

V test : Test Voltage

I test : Test Current

ϕ test : Phase angle between test voltage and test current

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-15

9 Commissioning
(continued)

In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.

Ztrip = kze ⋅ Z1

where:

Ztrip: Actual tripping impedance

kze: D I S T : k z e , P G H S R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P H S R P S x setting
or D I S T : k z e , P G T D R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P T D R P S x setting

Z1: DIST: Z1 (circle) P S x setting

Whether the zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:

Switch on to fault protection

An appropriately configured signal input.
Protective signaling.

If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to the zone extension
factor kze TDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function.
Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, the zone extension factor kze HSR
may be activated during the reclose command – if set accordingly.

9-16 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Polygon (quadrilateral)
characteristic
The tripping impedance is calculated in the range of the reactance limits (for impedance
angle φZ this means in the range φL < φZ < 90°) as follows:

X
Z< =
sin ϕ Z

X: DIST: X1 (polygon) PSx to

D I S T : X 6 ( p o l y g o n ) P S x setting
The limit angle φL is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and resistance
limits and is calculated as follows:

X
ϕ L = arc tan
X
R+
tan α

R: DIST: R1,PG (polygon) P S x to

DIST: R6,PG (polygon) P S x or
DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx to
DIST: R6,PP (polygon) P S x settings

α: DIST: α1 (polygon) PSx to

DIST: α6 (polygon) PSx settings

9-4 Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the ‘Polygon’ setting

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-17

9 Commissioning
(continued)

In the range of the resistance limits (for impedance angles this means in the range of
0° < φZ < φL), the tripping impedance is calculated according to the following formula:

R
Z< =
sin ϕ Z
cos ϕ Z −
tan α

When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must be
taken into account if the setting for D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to
one and/or the setting for D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test
is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate
condition is obtained:

V test
I test
(
= 1 + kG ⋅ Z< )

V test ⋅ e jϕ test
I test ⋅ e j 0° ( )
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z

For absolute value and angle this means:

V test ⎛ 2 ⎞
= ⎜1 + k G + 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cosϕG ⎟ ⋅ Z <
I test ⎝ ⎠

sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
ϕ test = arc tan
cos ϕ Z + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ Z + ϕ G )

or

sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ test − ϕ G )

ϕ Z = arc tan
cos ϕ test + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ test − ϕ G )

where:

Z<: Tripping impedance

ϕZ : Impedance Angle

kG : D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting

ϕG : D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting

V test : Test Voltage

I test : Test Current

ϕ test : Phase angle between test voltage and test current

9-18 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.

Rtrip = kze ⋅ R1

Xtrip = kze ⋅ X1

where:

Rtrip: Actual tripping resistance

Xtrip: Actual tripping reactance

k ze : D I S T : k z e , P G H S R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P H S R P S x or
D I S T : k z e , P G T D R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P T D R P S x setting

R1: DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx or

D I S T : R 1 , P P ( p o l y g o n ) P S x setting

X1: D I S T : X 1 ( p o l y g o n ) P S x setting

Whether the zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:

Switch on to fault protection

An appropriately configured binary signal input.
Protective signaling.

If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to the zone extension
factor kze TDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function.
Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, the zone extension factor kze HSR
may be activated during the reclose command – if set accordingly.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-19

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking the voltage

memory
The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for direction
determination. The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for
direction determination.

If the voltage memory is to be tested using a single-phase test device, checking should
only be done for an A-B fault.

Voltage V A −B is greater than 0.65 Vnom.

The frequency is in the range 0.95 ⋅ f nom < f < 1.05 ⋅ f nom .

With the starting signal, the voltage memory is decoupled from the synchronizing voltage
(VA-B), and the stored voltage can be used for directional measurement for 2 s maximum.

The P439 determines, on the basis of the magnitude of the fault voltage, whether the
direction will be determined using the fault voltage, the stored voltage, or the set angle α
(D I S T : α n ( p o l y g o n ) P S x , n: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6). The following possibilities exist:

Angle for Direction Determination with:

V memory 0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx Vmeas < 0.002 Vno
m

Enabled ϕX ϕX
Not enabled ϕF α

ϕX: Angle determined using the stored voltage

ϕF: Angle determined using the selected measured variables

V meas : Selected measuring voltage

The method for determining ϕX is described in Chapter 3 section ‘Distance and

Directional Measurement’.

The user can check to make sure connection to the system’s current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data displays for
load angle (M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i A , M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i B , and
M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i C in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Meas/’ folder). The load angles for all
three phases must be approximately equal. The load angles are only determined if at
least 5% of the nominal device current is flowing.

9-20 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking measuring-circuit
monitoring
Both the current- and voltage-measuring circuits are monitored. Operation of the
monitoring functions can be observed by selecting the logic state signals
M C M O N : M e a s . c i r c . V , I f a u l t y (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder). The monitoring
signals can also be entered into the monitoring signal memory and identified by reading
out the monitoring signal memory.
Current-measuring circuits
Monitoring of current-measuring circuits functions only if 0.125 Inom flows in at least one
phase. The P439 determines the absolute value of the negative-sequence component,
from the three phase currents; the negative-sequence component is calculated
according to the following formula:

Phase sequence A-B-C Phase sequence A-C-B

(alternative terminology: (alternative terminology:
Clockwise rotating field): Anticlockwise rotating field):

I neg =
1
(
I + a2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3 A
) I neg =
1
(
I + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ IC
3 A
)
0
a = e j 120
0
a 2 = e j 240

The operate condition for the current measuring circuits is:

I neg ≥ (Ineg > ) ⋅ I P,max

where

I neg > : M C M O N : I n e g > setting

With a single-phase test current we obtain:

1
I neg = ⋅I
3 test

I P,max = I test

For the operate condition that means:

1
⋅I ≥ ( I neg > ) ⋅ I test
3 test

0.333 ≥ ( I neg > )

Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits with single-
phase test current is only possible if the threshold operate value is set at less than 0.333.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-21

9 Commissioning
(continued)

For two-phase test current in phase opposition we obtain:

1 1
I neg = ⋅I + a2 ⋅ ( − I test ) = ⋅ I test
3 test 3

IP,max = Itest

For the operate condition that means:

1
⋅ I test ≥ ( Ineg >) ⋅ I test
3

0.577 ≥ ( Ineg > )

Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits with a two-
phase test current in phase opposition is only possible if the threshold operate value is
set at less than 0.577.

If the threshold operate value satisfies the respective condition, then the monitoring
function for current-measuring circuits operates with a test current greater than
0.125 Inom after the set operate delay of + 300 s has elapsed.

Voltage-measuring circuits
Negative-sequence monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits is enabled if at least one
phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the value 0.7 Vnom/√3. Other enabling criteria that can
be activated if desired are the following (selection of enabling criteria at
M C M O N : O p . m o d e v o l t . m o n . in the ‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder):

One of the phase currents must exceed 0.05 Inom.

The signal at the binary signal input configured for M A I N : C B c l o s e d
s i g . E X T must have a logic value of ‘1’.
If negative-sequence monitoring has been enabled, the P439 determines the absolute
value of negative-sequence voltage according to the following formula:

Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: clockwise rotating field):

1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A− G + a ⋅V B − G + a ⋅V C − G
3
2
)
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating field):
1
(
V neg = ⋅ V A− G + a ⋅V B − G + a ⋅V C − G
3
2
)
0
a = e j 120
0
a 2 = e j 240

9-22 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

The trigger threshold of Vneg is set permanently at 0.2 Vnom/√3. The result of a single-
phase test using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0 and also of the calculation formula for Vneg given
above is that the trigger operates when the test voltage exceeds the following value:

Vnom
V test = 3 ⋅ VNG > ⋅
3
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.

Checking backup
overcurrent-time protection
The switch to backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) – provided it has been
appropriately set – is brought about by the measuring-circuit monitoring function or the
tripping of the voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker on the line side.

If the current exceeds the set operate value (B U O C : I > P S x ), then starting occurs in
the corresponding phase(s). After the set time delay (B U O C : t I > P S x ) has elapsed,
the P439 trips. If M A I N : N e u t r a l p o i n t t r e a t is set to Low-impedance-
grounding, then SN starting occurs if the residual current IN calculated by the P439
exceeds the operate value set at B U O C : I N > P S x . After the set time delay has
elapsed (B U O C : t I N > P S x ) , the P439 trips.

When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the BUOC function is blocked.

If the BUOC is set to activate the ARC, then timer stages B U O C : t I > P S x and
B U O C : t I N > P S x are blocked when the ARC is ready. The trip signal is then
issued instantaneously for phase starting or with an 80 s delay for zero-sequence
starting. Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the ARC hold time
is elapsing.

The P439 calculates the resultant current IN according to the following formula:

I N = I A + I B + IC

In the case of a single-phase test (for example, IB = IC = 0), the following test current is
obtained:

I test = IN > ⋅Inom

at which the operate value (BUOC: I N > P S x ) is reached.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-23

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking protective
signaling
The protective signaling function can only be tested if protective signaling is ready.
This can be determined by checking logic state signal P S I G : R e a d y
(‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).

If protective signaling is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:

Protective signaling is not enabled.

(This can be determined by checking P S I G : E n a b l e d in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder.)
This may be due to the following reasons:
„ P S I G : E n a b l e d U S E R (‘Par/Func/Log/’ folder) is set to ‘No’.
„ P S I G : E n a b l e P S x ( i n one of the ‘Par/Func/PSx/’ folders, depending on the
parameter subset) is set to ‘No’.
„ Protective signaling is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input
or from the integrated local control panel. (This can be determined by checking
logic state signal P S I G : E x t . e n a b l e d in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)
Protective signaling is being blocked by triggering a correspondingly configured
binary signal input (P S I G : B l o c k i n g E X T ).
A fault has been detected in the communications channel. (This can be determined
by checking logic state signal P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder.)

If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible to generate a send signal for test
purposes from the integrated local control panel (P S I G : T e s t t e l e c o m . U S E R in
the ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder) or by triggering an appropriately configured binary signal
input. This pulse will be present for 500 ms and is extended for the set reset time. If the
‘with echo’ setting has been selected in the protection device at the remote station, then
the received signal will be returned.

9-24 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking the auto-

reclosing function
The auto-reclosing function (ARC) can only be checked if it is ready. This may be
determined by checking logic state signal ARC: R e a d y (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’).

If the ARC function is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:

The ARC function is not enabled.

(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A R C : E n a b l e d ,
( ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)). This can have the following causes:
„ A R C : E n a b l e d U S E R ('Par/Func/Log' folder) is set to ‘No’.
„ A R C : E n a b l e P S x ( i n one of the ‘Par/Func/PSx/’ folders, depending on the
parameter subset) is set to ‘No’.
„ ARC is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input or from the
integrated local control panel.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A R C : E x t . e n a b l e d ,
‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)
The ARC function is blocked by Switch On To Fault protection, Backup Overcurrent-
time protection, a manual trip command or via an appropriately configured signal
input (A R C : B l o c k i n g E X T ). (This can be determined by checking logic state
signal A R C : E n a b l e d , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
There is no signal with a logic value of ‘1’ at the binary signal input configured for
ARC: CB drive ready EXT.
There is no signal with a logic value of ‘1’ at the binary signal input configured for
M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T . The circuit breaker position signal is only
necessary if the setting at A R C : C B c l o s . p o s . s i g . P S x is 'Yes'.
An ARC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal
ARC: C y c l e r u n n i n g in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)

A test HSR can be executed for testing purposes from the integrated local control panel
or by triggering binary signal inputs. The test HSR function first issues a trip command
and then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-25

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking the steady-state-

power ground fault
direction detection
If values for both residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage are available as
measuring quantities the P439 will determine the direction of a ground fault by steady-
state power evaluation of the measuring values. Depending on the setting either the
value calculated by the P439 or the value measured at the transformer T 90 will be
evaluated as the neutral-point displacement voltage. If current values only can be
measured the P439 will decide on "ground fault" ('Steady-state current' evaluation)
because of the residual current value level. Switching from steady-state power to
steady-state current evaluation is made from the integrated local control panel or by
triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input.

Should the system permit such operation a ground fault on the busbar side (BS) or on
the line side (LS) may be simulated by wiring a short circuit. Then the P439 must issue
the respective signal. It is assumed that threshold values for residual current (set at
G F D S S : I N , a c t > / r e a c > B S P S x and G F D S S : I N , a c t > / r e a c > L S P S x
with steady-state power evaluation or G F D S S : I N > with steady-state current
evaluation) and the neutral-point displacement voltage (set at G F D S S : V N G > ) are
exceeded.

A ground fault functional test by wiring a short circuit is, in most cases, not possible as
there is the danger of a double ground fault occurring. As an alternative it is possible to
wire the system’s CTs and VTs such that a functional test is possible without causing a
ground fault.

The residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P439
are displayed as measured operating values in primary quantities referred to the nominal
quantities of the P439.

Ancillary circuit for systems

with ground fault
compensation
First the fuse in the phase A line to the voltage transformer is removed and the
associated secondary VT line is short circuited (see figures 9-5 and 9-6). This will
produce a neutral-point displacement voltage VN-G with an amplitude which is smaller by
the factor √3 than with a saturated ground fault.

If current is measured at a Holmgreen group the secondary side of the phase A line
current transformer must be disconnected and shorted (see figure 9-5).

9-26 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

9-5 Ancillary circuit for systems with ground fault compensation and Holmgreen group, ground fault towards BS

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-27

9 Commissioning
(continued)

If a core balance current transformer is used to measure residual current a test-wire is

inserted to obtain a current flow from the phase B line (see figure 9-6). The ancillary
circuit figures include vector diagrams displaying the position of current and voltage
vectors.

A simulated ground fault on the busbar is displayed in the example. The current
connections or the voltage connections must be exchanged to test a ground fault on the
line side.

9-6 Ancillary circuit for systems with ground fault compensation and core balance current transformer, ground fault towards BS

9-28 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Ancillary circuit for isolated

neutral-point systems
First the fuse in the phase A line to the voltage transformer’s primary side is removed
and the associated secondary VT line is short circuited (see figures 9-7 and 9-8). This
will produce a neutral-point displacement voltage VN-G with an amplitude which is smaller
by the factor √3 than with a saturated ground fault.

If current is measured at a Holmgreen group the secondary side of the phase A and B
line current transformers must be disconnected and shorted (see figure 9-7).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-29

9 Commissioning
(continued)

9-7 Ancillary circuit for isolated neutral-point systems and Holmgreen group, ground fault towards LS

9-30 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

If core balance current transformers are used to measure residual current a test-wire is
inserted to obtain a current flow from the phase B and C lines (see figure 9-8).
The ancillary circuit figures include vector diagrams displaying the position of current and
voltage vectors.

A simulated ground fault on the line side is displayed in the example.

The current connections or the voltage connections must be exchanged to test a ground
fault on the busbar side.

9-8 Ancillary circuit for isolated neutral-point systems and core balance current transformers, ground fault towards LS

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-31

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Checking the transient

ground fault direction
determination
A secondary check of the transient ground fault direction determination is only possible
by applying a testing device which is capable of simulating the transient pulse with
sufficient accuracy. Otherwise it is possible that the transient ground fault direction
determination will not operate as the logic has been designed specifically to detect such
transient pulses.

Checking Control
Functions
The selected bay type is displayed on the Bay Panel. The selection of the Bay Panel is
described in the Chapter 6. The current switching state of the switchgear units is
displayed on the Bay Panel if state signals from such switching devices are connected
properly to binary signal inputs on the P439. Should the switching state not be displayed
correctly then it can be determined by checking the physical state of binary signal inputs
whether the state signals are presented correctly to the P439 (check at parameter
I N P : S t a t e U x x x x ‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder).

Local/Remote selection
Controlling switchgear units may be carried out from keys on the local control panel,
remotely via the communication interface or through appropriately configured binary
signal inputs. The control site – Local or Remote – is selected by the L/R key on the
local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary signal input. The L/R key
has no effect when a binary signal input has been configured. Using the L/R key on the
local control panel to switch from 'Remote' to 'Local' is only possible after the 'Password
L/R' was entered (see Chapter 6 for further information). The Bay Panel display will
show which control site has been selected.

Local control
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected by pressing the selection key on the local
control panel, and pressing the 'Open' or 'Close' key will generate a switching request.
When control is carried out with binary signal inputs the respective binary signal input is
to be triggered.

Remote control
Remote control of switchgear units may be carried out via the communication interface
or with appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

Switchgear unit cannot be

controlled
Should a switchgear unit refuse to be controlled, then this may be due to the following
reasons:

General enable for switch commands has not been set.

(Configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . c t r l . e n a b l . , 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder)
Interlocking has operated.
(Check at M A I N : I n t e r l o c k e q u . v i o l . , 'Oper/Cycl/Log' folder).
Only with bays for direct motor control:
The motor protection has operated.
(Check at parameter M A I N : M o n . m o t . d r i v e s t r . , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’)

9-32 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Which interlock(s) is(are) activated may be checked at:

Bay interlock (BI): M A I N : B a y i n t e r l o c k . a c t . , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’

Substation interlock (SI): M A I N : S u b s t . i n t e r l . a c t . , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’
With control set to 'Local':
It is possible to disable the interlock through an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
(Configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . i n t e r l . d e a c t , Par/Func/Glob/’ folder)

Note: A substation interlock is only effective when a communication link exists

from the communication interface to the substation control level. If the
communication link is disrupted then the device switches automatically to bay
interlock (BI) without substation interlock (SI). Whether or not a
communication error is present can be checked at
M A I N : C o m m u n i c a t i o n e r r o r (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’).

The substation interlock (SI) can be disabled selectively for any switchgear
unit and in any control direction – "Open" or "Close".
(Check at D E V x x : O p e n w / o s t a t . i n t e r l or
D E V x x : C l o s e w / o s t a t . i n t e r l (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’).

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 9-33

9 Commissioning
(continued)

Completion of
commissioning
Before the protection device is released for operation, the user should make sure that
the following steps have been taken:

All memories have been reset.

(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t
r e c o r d i n g , both in ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder.)
Blocking of output relays has been canceled.
(O U T P : O u t p . r e l . b l o c k U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
Blocking of the trip command has been canceled.
(M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
The device is on-line.
(M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘Yes’ (on).)
The correct control point - 'Local' or 'Remote' – has been activated.
The required interlock equations have been activated.

After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling ‘Operation’
(H1) should be on.

9-34 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

10 Troubleshooting

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases
of doubt it is better to return the P439 to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging
instructions in the section entitled "Unpacking and Packing" in Chapter 5 when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.

Problem:

Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.

„ Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points.
„ Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P439
is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.

Before checking further, disconnect the P439 from the power supply.

The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting

cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the connecting cable.

„ Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is not fused.

If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of
failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger
that the damage will spread.

Required fuses:

VA,nom = 24 V DC: Type M3.5

VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: Type M2

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 10-1

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

The P439 issues an ‘Alarm’ signal on LED H3.

Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see
section "Monitoring Signal Memory Readout" in Chapter 6). The table below lists
possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting has
been entered at SF M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the P439
response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and
'Blocked/faulty'.

SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070

Warning configured for LED H3.

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100

Warning configured for an output relay.

Key:
-: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.

Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.

Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
: The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . f a u l t .
2)
: The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .

SFMON: Cold rest. checksum 093 024

A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Cold rest. SW update 093 025

A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Blocking HW failure 090 019

Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.

'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating

10-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200

Multiple signal: output relay defective.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040

The hardware clock has failed.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010

Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121

Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Invalid type of bay 096 122

If the user has selected a bay type that requires a P439 hardware
configuration that is not actually fitted, then this signal is generated.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: -/-
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: +15V supply faulty 093 081

The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: +24V supply faulty 093 082

The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 10-3

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080

The - 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 096 100

SFMON: Wrong module slot 2 096 101

SFMON: Wrong module slot 3 096 102

SFMON: Wrong module slot 4 096 103

SFMON: Wrong module slot 5 096 104

SFMON: Wrong module slot 6 096 105

SFMON: Wrong module slot 7 096 106

SFMON: Wrong module slot 8 096 107

SFMON: Wrong module slot 9 096 108

SFMON: Wrong module slot 10 096 109

SFMON: Wrong module slot 11 096 110

SFMON: Wrong module slot 12 096 111

SFMON: Wrong module slot 13 096 112

SFMON: Wrong module slot 14 096 113

SFMON: Wrong module slot 15 096 114

SFMON: Wrong module slot 16 096 115

SFMON: Wrong module slot 17 096 116

SFMON: Wrong module slot 18 096 117

SFMON: Wrong module slot 19 096 118

SFMON: Wrong module slot 20 096 119

SFMON: Wrong module slot 21 096 120

Module in wrong slot.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 097 000

SFMON: Defect.module slot 2 097 001

SFMON: Defect.module slot 3 097 002

SFMON: Defect.module slot 4 097 003

SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 097 004

SFMON: Defect.module slot 6 097 005

SFMON: Defect.module slot 7 097 006

SFMON: Defect.module slot 8 097 007

SFMON: Defect.module slot 9 097 008

SFMON: Defect.module slot 10 097 009

SFMON: Defect.module slot11 097 010

SFMON: Defect.module slot12 097 011

SFMON: Defect.module slot13 097 012

SFMON: Defect.module slot14 097 013

SFMON: Defect.module slot15 097 014

SFMON: Defect.module slot16 097 015

SFMON: Defect.module slot 17 097 016

SFMON: Defect.module slot 18 097 017

SFMON: Defect.module slot19 097 018

SFMON: Defect.module slot20 097 019

10-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Defect.module slot21 097 020

Defective module in slot x.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty 093 070

Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only

detected during device startup.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty 093 071

RAM fault on communication module A.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Module N +15V faulty 093 096

The +15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Module N -15V faulty 093 097

The -15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Module N DAC faulty 093 095

The digital-to-analog converter of the transient ground fault evaluation

module is defective.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Module N DPR faulty 093 090

The checksum feature of the transient ground fault evaluation module has
detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 10-5

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Module N RAM faulty 093 091

Fault in the program or data memory of the transient ground fault evaluation
module.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty 093 110

The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty 093 111

Fault in the program or data memory of the analog module.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Error K 601 097 070

SFMON: Error K 602 097 071

SFMON: Error K 603 097 072

SFMON: Error K 604 097 073

SFMON: Error K 605 097 074

SFMON: Error K 606 097 075

SFMON: Error K 701 097 078

SFMON: Error K 702 097 079

SFMON: Error K 703 097 080

SFMON: Error K 704 097 081

SFMON: Error K 705 097 082

SFMON: Error K 706 097 083

SFMON: Error K 801 097 086

SFMON: Error K 802 097 087

SFMON: Error K 901 097 094

SFMON: Error K 902 097 095

SFMON: Error K 903 097 096

SFMON: Error K 904 097 097

SFMON: Error K 905 097 098

SFMON: Error K 906 097 099

SFMON: Error K 907 097 100

SFMON: Error K 908 097 101

SFMON: Error K 1001 097 102

SFMON: Error K 1002 097 103

SFMON: Error K 1003 097 104

SFMON: Error K 1004 097 105

SFMON: Error K 1005 097 106

SFMON: Error K 1006 097 107

SFMON: Error K 1201 097 118

SFMON: Error K 1202 097 119

SFMON: Error K 1203 097 120

SFMON: Error K 1204 097 121

10-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Error K 1205 097 122

SFMON: Error K 1206 097 123

SFMON: Error K 1401 097 134

SFMON: Error K 1402 097 135

SFMON: Error K 1403 097 136

SFMON: Error K 1404 097 137

SFMON: Error K 1405 097 138

SFMON: Error K 1406 097 139

SFMON: Error K 1601 097 150

SFMON: Error K 1602 097 151

SFMON: Error K 1801 097 166

SFMON: Error K 1802 097 167

SFMON: Error K 1803 097 168

SFMON: Error K 1804 097 169

SFMON: Error K 1805 097 170

SFMON: Error K 1806 097 171

SFMON: Error K 2001 097 182

SFMON: Error K 2002 097 183

SFMON: Error K 2003 097 184

SFMON: Error K 2004 097 185

SFMON: Error K 2005 097 186

SFMON: Error K 2006 097 187

SFMON: Error K 2007 097 188

SFMON: Error K 2008 097 189

Output relay K xxx defective.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010

Undefined operation code.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011

Invalid arithmetic operation.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012

Undefined interrupt.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 10-7

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013

Interrupt of the operating system.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Protection failure 090 021

Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has

detected an error.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003

A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has

been detected.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041

In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between

the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026

Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module
(digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is
detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are
deleted.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012

Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015

Software overloaded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

10-8 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075

Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. N 093 093

Incorrect or invalid software for transient ground fault evaluation module has
been downloaded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y 093 113

Incorrect or invalid software for analog module has been downloaded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Inom not adjustable 093 118

Transformer module T is not suitable for setting Inom.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000

The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of distance
protection,
direction measurement of
inverse-time overcurrent
protection and time-voltage
protection, and switching to
backup overcurrent-time
protection, if applicable

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 098 001

Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the phase sequence of

the phase-to-ground voltages.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Vneg> triggered 098 014

The negative-sequence monitoring function of measuring-circuit monitoring

has been triggered.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 10-9

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Undervoltage 098 009

The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref 098 011

The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of automatic

synchronism check (ASC)
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: FF,V triggered 098 021

The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltage-
measuring circuit.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 098 022

The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the reference
voltage-measuring circuit.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: – / –

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 098 023

Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or

the reference voltage faulty.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 098 017

Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: BUOC not active 098 002

Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been

blocked, but the unit has not switched to backup overcurrent-time
protection.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

10-10 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC 098 003

Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been

blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection.
ARC is not activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: BUOC active with ARC 098 004

Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been

blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection.
ARC is activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 098 005

The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the

current-measuring circuits.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Zero-sequ. starting 098 015

The zero-sequence starting of distance protection has been triggered

without phase starting.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 098 016

Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits

faulty.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: CTA error 098 034

Measurement of the coolant temperature via the analog module is faulty.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault

detected.
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Telecom. faulty/PSIG 098 006

The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of protective signaling

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 10-11

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GFSIG 098 012

The transmission channel for ground fault protective signaling is faulty.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of ground fault

protective signaling
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Setting error THERM 098 035

Invalid parameters in the setting for the thermal replica.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of thermal overload

protection.
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered 093 094

The monitoring function for transient ground fault direction determination

has operated.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz 093 098

A protective function has been activated that is not permitted for operation
at a system frequency of 60 Hz.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Peripheral fault 098 018

Multiple signal:

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Setting error CBM 098 020

An invalid characteristic has been set for circuit breaker monitoring.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: CB No. CB op. > 098 066

The maximum number of CB operations performed has been exceeded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

10-12 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: CB rem. No. CB op. < 098 067

The minimum number of CB operations performed at nominal current has

fallen below the threshold.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: CB ΣItrip > 098 068

The maximum sum of disconnection current values has been exceeded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: CB ΣItrip**2 > 098 069

The maximum sum of the disconnection current values to the second power
has been exceeded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: CB tmax> A 098 070

SFMON: CB tmax> B 098 071

SFMON: CB tmax> C 098 077

The maximum duration for the opening of a CB pole has been exceeded.
Disconnection is not determined for this CB pole.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: CB pos.sig. unplaus. 098 124

The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit
breaker's (CB) status signals.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: – / –

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 093 114

SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 093 115

An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels
of analog I/O module Y.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC 093 116

An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog
I/O module Y.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 10-13

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD 093 124

An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog
I/O module Y.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Faulty DSP 093 127

The DSP Coprocessor has detected an error.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. DSP 093 128

Incorrect or invalid software has been downloaded for the DSP co-
processor.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 093 140

The device has detected a hardware fault in the InterMiCOM interface

(Communication Interface 3).

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 093 141

The threshold set for timer stage C O M M 3 : L i m i t t e l e g r . e r r o r s was

exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default
values.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 093 142

Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k f a i l . has elapsed indicating a

persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to
their user-defined default values.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143

The has detected a hardware error in the effective connection InterMiCOM

(Communication Interface 3).

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

10-14 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

SFMON: Invalid SW vers DHMI 093 145

Incorrect or invalid software was loaded to operate the detachable display

(DHMI).

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: PT100 open circuit 098 024

The P439 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Overload 20mA input 098 025

The 20 mA input of analog module Y is overloaded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. 098 026

The P439 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Setting error f<> 098 028

The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for

'overfrequency' monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and
nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t
operating mode.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under

frequency protection
function
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Output 30 098 053

SFMON: Output 30 (t) 098 054

SFMON: Output 31 098 055

SFMON: Output 31 (t) 098 056

SFMON: Output 32 098 057

SFMON: Output 32 (t) 098 058

These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by

selection at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g . The warning signals
are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: – / –

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 10-15

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

10-16 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

11 Maintenance

11 Maintenance

The P439 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.

Maintenance procedures in
the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55°C or 131°F), the useful life of these components
is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the
electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. When the
operating temperatures are approx. +45°C inside the devices, the required maintenance
interval can be increased by about 1 year.

The P439 is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply.
Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per
year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually
constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual
capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only
a few µA during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during
device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore
recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval
cited above.

Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible

without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the
auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.

Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.

The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 11-1

11 Maintenance
(continued)

The relevant components are located on the following modules:

Electrolytic capacitor:
on power supply module V.
Lithium battery:
on power supply module V.

Note: Only AREVA-approved components may be used (see Chapter 13).

Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.

11-1 Component drawing for power supply module V.

11-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

11 Maintenance
(continued)

There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly
replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and
the battery is correct.

The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting
cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the connecting cable.

Note: The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be

disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.

After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 11-3

11 Maintenance
(continued)

Routine functional testing

The P439 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for
proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to
12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to
3 years – 4 years at the maximum.

The P439 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.

Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the self-
monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases.

In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.

Analog input circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-monitoring
function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the device’s general
functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is still necessary to test from
the device terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are
functioning correctly.

The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (such as the nominal current in
the current path) and a "large" measured value (such as the nominal voltage in the
voltage path) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This
makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range.

The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating

device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.

In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and the
phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This can best be
done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a two-phase
ungrounded fault. For this test, the short-circuit current should be dimensioned so that a
loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the device terminals with the set
impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing instrument that correctly replicates the two-
phase ungrounded fault should be used for this purpose.

This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few
less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that
only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.

11-4 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

11 Maintenance
(continued)

Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the starting
characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely
digital and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper
operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.

Binary opto inputs

The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.

Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even two-
phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for
the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by
way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes,
triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control
function (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).

!
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.

Serial Interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also
includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 11-5

11-6 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615
12 Storage

12 Storage

Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of

-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled 'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that
neither condensation nor ice formation will result.

If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P439 for approximately 10 minutes.

If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply module is
used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working memory of the
processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required and discharges
rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is recommended to remove the
power supply module from the mounting rack during long storage periods. The contents
of the event memory should be previously read out and stored separately.

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 12-1

12-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615
13 Accessories and Spare Parts

13 Accessories and Spare Parts

The P439 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators that
are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips supplied.
Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.

The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-resistant ink
(Type OH Pen 196 PS).

Description Order No.

Cable bushings 88512-4-0337414-301
Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V
Electrolytic capacitor 100 µF, 385 V DC
Only the following brands of capacitor are
permitted:
Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101
Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101
Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ
Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ
Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3,5-250V
Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 230 V AC: M2-250V
Resistor 200 Ω 255.002 696
Assembly material 88512-4-9650539-301
(for flush-mounted case to form a 19” rack)
Empty 40TE sub-rack 88512-4-9650535-301
40TE frame 88512-4-9650545-301
Operating program for Windows On request (MiCOM S1)

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 13-1

13-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615
14 Order Information

14 Order Information
MiCOM P439

Name Order number

PCS Cell No. 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12, 13 14 15 16 17 18

Distance Protection and Control Unit P439 N N N N N N N AA 0 A A A A

Distance Protection and Control Unit P439- 9 0 -304 -4xx -615 -46x -9x x -9x x -8xx

Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 -407
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -408
basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays
and 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays for the
control of 3 switchgear units

Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 5
Flush-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 6
Surface-mounted, with detachable HMI 7
Flush-mounted, with detachable HMI 9

Current transformer:
2) 9
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T1...T4) resp. 22.5mV at 50A for NCIT

Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (4-pole) 4
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (5-pole) for automatic synchronism control 5

CT/VT-Boards with NCIT:

Variant 1: 22.5 mV at 50 A, 3.25 V at Vnom 9

Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays) 5
for the control of up to 3 switchgear units

Power supply and additional outputs:

VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor 6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays 8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays 9

Further add. options:

Without 0
3) 1
With TGF (transient ground fault direction determination) module
With analog module 2
3) 3
With TGF and analog module
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4
3) 5
With TGF and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs)

Switching threshold on binary inputs:

18 V (standard module) Without order extension No.
8) -461
90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8) -462
155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
8) -463
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) -464
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)

With communication / information interface:

Without Without order extension no.
Only IRIG-B input For clock synchronization -90 0
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4

Protocol IEC61850 -94

For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 6
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 7
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)

With guidance / protection interface:

Without Without order extension no.
Protocol InterMiCOM -95

For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1

For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
For connection to wire, RS232, isolated 5

Language:
4) Without order extension no.
English (German)
4) On request -800
Px40 English (English)
4) -801
German (English)
4) On request -802
French (English)
4) On request -803
Spanish (English)
4) On request -804
Polish (English)
4) 7) On request -805
Russian (English)

P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615 14-1

14 Order Information
(continued)

2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!

3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM (-95x) is ordered
4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardware option, supports Cyrillic letters instead of special West. European characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application

Information about Ordering Options

Language version

In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension number
(-805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option supporting Cyrillic
characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference menu texts (English) will be
available for display. However, other Western European languages containing extra
characters will not be fully supported. Consequently, selecting the "Russian / English"
ordering option means that it will not be possible to download Western European data
models into the device.

Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold

The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most

applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also "Technical Data" chapter) are provided for
applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.

14-2 P439/EN M/Bd4 // AFSV.12.10190 D /// P439-304-407/408-615

Publication: P439/EN M/Bd4

AREVA T&D's Substation Automation Solutions Business www.areva-td.com

T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/